general instructions. - Limit Of Shunt

CONTENTS OF VOL.
Regulations for working—
SINGLE LINES by TRAIN STAFF AND TICKET • 3 - 8
SINGLE LINES by ONLY ONE ENGINE IN STEAM or two or
more engines coupled together • 9 - 1 0
SINGLE LINES by PILOTMAN • • • • 1 1
7SINGLE
LINES over which passenger trains DO NOT RUN, by
TRAIN STAFF or TRAIN STAFF AND ONE OR MORE
1 2TRAIN
STAFF TICKETS • • • 2 7 8 - 2 7 9
PAGE.
' SINGLE LINES over which passenger trains DO NOT RUN by
Electric Bells and Block Indicators without Staff • • • 292-293
OUT-OF-GAUGE LOADS requiring the use of both lines where
Block working is in operation 1 3
GOODS LINES where the Block Telegraph Regulations are NOT
in operation and where no special regulations are in force 1 4 - 1 6
Extracts from BLOCK TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS for guidance of
men not supplied with copies of the Block Telegraph Regulations 1 7 - 2 3
EXCEPTIONS to the R.C.H. Standard Rule Book • • • 24-26
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS including
Signals fixed near to one Box and worked from another 3 5 - 3 9
Level Grossing Gates : Exemption from Rule 118 •
Engine Headlights 9 0 - L
8
,
6 -
9
9
8
0
Speed Limitations 1 0 5 - 1 1 0
Restrictions of Engines over certain sections of line 1 1 1 - 1 1 2
Assistant Engine in rear of Train • • 1 1 3 - 1 1 7
Train drawn by Pilot Engines with Train Engine in rear 1 1 7 - 1 2 0
Where Freight Trains must not be coupled together • 1 2 0 - 1 2 2
Vehicles attached to rear of Passenger Trains 1 3 1
-Engines
Propelling Trains • 153-162
Station Limits 1 6 3 - 1 6 5
1Placing 4 Trains 4 or Vehicles outside Home Signals, when Gradient falls
to rear • • • • • 167-168
Sections over which Goods Trains may run without van in rear 174-177
List of CATCH POINTS on Passenger Lines • • • 1 8 0 - 1 8 3
Special instructions applicable at PARTICULAR PLACES (including
Viaducts and Tunnels) • • • • , • • • • • 188-225
Sections of Line worked by RECORDING INSTRUMENTS • • 2 2 6 - 2 3 3
TERMINAL STATIONS the Platform Lines of which are beyond the
Terminal Signal Boxes • • • • • • • • 234-236
Where the Block Telegraph Regulations are NOT in operation • • 2 3 6
Where the Block Telegraph Regulations ARE in operation but MODIFIED 237-240
List of BLOCK SECTIONS which are worked in accordance with B.T.R.
4 (a) & (c) although the distance between the respective Home
Signals is LESS THAN 400 yards. • • • • • • 2 4 1
List of BLOCK SECTIONS which are not worked in accordance with
B.T.R. 4 (a) & (c) although the distance between the respective Home
Signals is LESS THAN 400 yards 2 4 2
List of BLOCK SECTIONS worked in accordance with B.T.R. 4 (c)
although the distance between the respective Home Signals is
OVER 400 yards • • • • • • • • • 2 4 3
Sections where Passenger Trains ARE dealt with under B.T.R. 5 2 4 4 - 2 4 7
Sections where Trains must NOT be dealt with under B.T.R. 5 • 2 4 8 - 2 5 1
List of OUTER HOME Signals • • • 2 5 1 - 2 5 5
SINGLE LINES • 2 5 7 - 2 9 4

For the convenience of Reference the Contents of Vol. II. are shewn below :—
CONTENTS OF VOL.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS, including :—
Drivers and Firemen riding in Guards' Vans
PAGE.
Coal, Coke, Firewood,
3
, Charges to be made for Breakage of Carriage Windows, etc.
6-7
oto., f o u n d
Maximum Dimensions of Carriage and Wagon Loads
o n
11-18
Working L i of n N.E. e and N.E. Joint Stock over other Lines 19-22
Places o where r certain types of Wagons cannot be dealt with
22-25
N.E.R. C o Standard m p Load a Gauge 26
n y ' s
Use of Company's Stores
p r e m
27
Signalmen i s Changing e s Duty, Visiting of Signal Boxes, etc.
28
Cleaning, Trimming and Lighting of Lamps
3
28-31
Continuous Burning Signal Lamps 31-32
Charging and Lighting of Carriages fitted with Gas Apparatus
Lighting of Vehicles fitted with Incandescent Gas Lamps
32-33
34-35
Stations at which there are Ramps 35-42
Misuse of Passenger Train Tail and Side Lamps
Labelling of Excursion, Special and Empty Coaching Stock trains
42
42-47
Electric Bells and indicators at Stations for Starting of Trains 49-50
Shunting of Express Passenger Trains 50
Shunting of 25
50
-
Maximum Gross Weight of Wagon and Load allowed on Depots
ton
Securine of Loose Points
T, G o o d s
51-55
56
aLoading, n Conveyance, d
and Unloading of Horses 64-67
SReturn p of e Foreign c Conipanies' Empty Stock 69
i
Provision
a l
of Coaching Stock for traffic to Foreign Lines
W a
g
Passenger
o
Tail and Side Lamps—Allocation and Working
70
71-72
nPassenger s Roof Lamps—Working of 73-74
wHorse
Boxes and Carriage Trucks—Distribution of
i
76-79
List tof
BLOCK SECTIONS where BRANCH TRAINS SIGNALS authorised
h
List of BLOCK TELEGRAPH SIGNAL STATIONS AND BOXES,
s
SIGNALMEN'S HOURS OF DUTY, SIDINGS BETWEEN
c
STATIONS, INDEPENDENT RUNNING LINE: AND RELIEF
r
SIDINGS 8 1
e
-
w
1 8 4 '
b
r
a
k
58-60

Regulations for Working Single Lines of Railway
by Train Staff and Ticket.
1. A train staff or train staff ticket must be carried with each train, tilthe°r
and no train must be permitted to leave any staff station with a train carried. No
staff ticket, unless the staff for that portion of the line over which it t
is to travel is then at the station. a t the station.
u
). 2. All points on a single line that become facing points to trains Points to be
;1 running in either direction, if not interlocked, must either be padlocked :).edurioelkye
1or
securely held by hand for the safe passage of trains.
:ss 3. (a) The danger signal must always be kept exhibited at all the lyorking of
. t°
fstl
lines, except when it is necessary to lower or turn them off for a train
ie
to pass ; and, before any signal is lowered or turned off, care must be
taken to ascertain that the line on which the train is about to run is
xcri:
clear and properly protected.
e
d
(b) At places which are not staff stations, or block telegraph signal
s
boxes, the all right signal must, unless lestructions to the contrary are
issued, be kept exhibited at the fixed signals (where such signals are
iprovided)
except when required to be placed at danger for the pro-
gtection
of trains having to stop in the section, or any other obstruction
nthat
may exist on any running line which the signals are intended to
a
protect.
l (c) When trains which have to pass each other are approaching a
s staff station in opposite directions, the signals in both directions must be
a
kept at danger, and when the train which has to be first admitted into
the station has been brought to a stand, or where there are over-run
t
sidings nearly to a stand, the home signal applicable to such train may
sbe
lowered to allow it to ,draw forward to the station or to the starting
tsignal,
and, after it has again come to a stand and the signalman has
aseen
that the line on which the other train will arrive is quite clear, the
f
necessary signals for that train may also be lowered.
f 4. (a) Permission must not be ,given for a train to approach from the Train oachin
sopposite
end of the section when there is any obstruction upon the VO
tPsingle
line.. e n d of section.
ara
(b) The single line must not be fouled after permission has been
tr
given opposite for a train to approach from the opposite end of the section.
i
not to
(c) An engine-driver must not under any circumstances foul the D
osingle
line for shunting purposes unless he has received the authority C4h,tc
r
nof
the signalman to do so. s i g n a l m a n ' s
authority.
i
s
5. ver No train i must shunt for another train to pass unless at a train Tfain
astaff
t l
station, except that when under special circumstances a train carry- another%xcept
i
s
ning
a train staff ticket cannot arrive at the next staff station before the at n taff station.
d following train which carries the staff, then the drivers must exchange o
the staff and ticket, except in cases where both trains are travelling with t
btickets,
when the tickets must be exchanged, so that under all circum- t
lstances
the last train shall carry the staff. The stations at which this o
omay
be done are shown in the list of Single Lines as "
cSee
Preceding pages 257 to 275. P l a c e s . "
k
t
e
l
3
•

4 ' C u An Stag anci Ticket System—Continued.
Custody of
staff or ticket.
When staff is
to be given to
engine driver.
6. The person in charge of the staff working for the time being is
the sole person authorised, to receive and deliver the staff or ticket.
7.—When a train is ready to start from a station and no second
train is intended to follow before the staff will be required for a train
in the opposite direction, the person in charge of the staff working
must give the staff to the engine driver or fireman, and the driver will
then place, it in a safe position on the engine.
NOTE.---In the case of steam autocars the duties of receiving or
exchanging the stall, ticket, or tablet, as the case may be, must be performed
by the engine driver or fireman when the engine is leading, and
by the driver or guard when the car is leading. The fireman or guard
must immediately hand over the staff, ticket, or tablet to the driver. In
the case of electric autocars, guards are likewise authorised to perform this
duty, but must at once hand over the staff, ticket or tablet to the driver.
When tickets 8 . (a) If other trains are intended to follow in succession before
are t be given
to en
og i
ne
dr
iv
er
t
h
e
s
t
a
f
f
c
a
n
must be given by the person in charge of the staff working to the enginedriver
or fireman of the first train, the staff for the section being shown
to him, and so on with any other train except the last, the staff itself
being given to the engine driver or fireman of the last train, as directed
in the preceding rule. If the firewau receives the ticket, he must at once
hand it to the driver. The person who hands the ticket to the enginedriver
or fireman must satisfy himself that the train has gone with
such ticket before he allows another train to follow. After the staff
has been sent away no other train must, under any
, leave c ithe r c station u m s tto afolloW n c ein s the , same direction until the staff for that
section has been returned.
NoTE.—See special instructions following paragraph 7 in regard to
Autocars.
(b) Trains not carrying the staff must carry the 'usual train following
signal, except in the case of the last train at night. If the
extra tail lamp cannot be put on without the train being stopped, it
must be put on when the first stop is made. This rule does not apply
on the following sections of the line :—Kirkby Stephen and Appleby,
Barnard Castle and Middleton-in-Teesdale, York Foss Islands Branch.
b
Staff or ticket .(c) The station master or person in charge of the staff working must
e not to be given •
to driver going consider it his first duty' to. deal with the train staff or ticket on arrival
rin
until one train direction from of the train, and at passing places must satisfy himself that the train
eother
direction running in the one direction has arrived complete, -
has arrived
twith
complete. to hn e the last t avehicle, i l before l ahanding m the p staff or ticket to the engine
u
driver or fireman about to travel in the opposite direction.
rEngine
driver 9 . No train must be permitted to leave a station until the engine
not until he has driver has received the proper staff or ticket for that section of the line
n.
received the over which he is about to travel, and he must not take the staff or ticket
et
staff or ticket.
o
from any other than the person in charge of the staff working for the
d
s
time being, except in accordance with the note to Clause 7 above,
, t
whereby the fireman or guard as the case may be, will take the staff,
a aSignals.
ticket, or tablet, and hand it to the driver. After receiving the staff
r
t
or ticket he must not start until the proper signals have been exhibited,
t
and, when with a train, not until a signal has also been given by the
i
guard. On arriving at the station to which the staff or ticket extends
c
such staff or ticket must immediately be given up to the person in
kStaff
or ticket charge of the staff working. All tickets so given up must be returned
eto
be given up. by the first train carrying the staff to the issuing staff station, attached
to the staff.
t
i
n

Train Staff and Ticket System—Continued. 5
. 10.—(a) An engine driver will render himself liable to dismissal ifI t y or
L
he leave a staff station without the staff or ticket for the section over leaving without
e
which he is about to run ; or, if he leave with a ticket, without having staff g or tieket.
first seen the proper staff. s
n
i
(b) He must bp careful not to take the staff or ticket beyond the mot
astaff
to or take ticket
staff station at which it should be left. b e y o n d proper
nstaff
station.
(c) The person in charge of the staff working will render himself e
liable to severe punishment should he contribute to any irregularity dsg
i
ein
the staff working.
v
g (d) If the station master or person in charge of the staff working Staff e working
areceive
a wrong staff he must return it by the most expeditious means ; r
o
but a train or trolley must not be used for the purpose, unless the person
returning with the wrong staff is also in possession of the proper staff.
r
r 11.—Each staff and each tieket has engraved or marked on it the S
name
i n
of the staff station at each end of the section to which only it a
applies. The tickets are of petal, and are numbered in the order
krug in top which they must be issued.
m t
I2.---(a) The tickets must be •kept in the proper ticket box fastened gr
. by l
i
an inside spring, the key -
to attached e
t
o p eto n the staff, t hfor e the same section as the box, so that if the la the keY.
b
ticket t
n
o
box
x
is kept locked, for which the person in charge of the staff
working
b e will be held strictly responsible, access to the tickets cannot be
obtained s
e
unless
i n
the
g
proper staff for the section is then at the station.
t Ts.
a
h e
(b) Only one ticket must be taken from the staff box at the same
stime. tt
tThe abox fmust fbe
locked after each ticket is taken out, and not
, again o opened until it is necessary to obtain another ticket for the
ofollowing train
b
r unless as provided for in Rule 15.
Spare tickets
a
x13.—Not
applicable on N.E. line.
to be locked 11IL
k
e14.—(a)
The e staff, when at the station,'must not be kept in the staff Place for staff
when at station
y box, ot but must be hung on the hook provided for the purpose. O. 5168.
w (b) Should h a train i staff be lost, or so damaged that it will not open Stall lost or
the c box containing h the staff tickets, the station masters, or persons in damaged.
tcharge at both h ends of the section must communicate with each other
by
e
speaking telegraph, or telephone ivhere available, and make arrangements
to work the traffic over the section to which the staff belongs by
pilotman, s tin accordance a with the Regulations for Working Single Lines
of l Railway l by Pilotman (who must be appointed by an order in writing,
the form shown on page 7, being used for the purpose, the necessary
alterations being made with pen and ink), until the staff has been found
or repaired, or a relieving staff and boxes have been supplied, block
telegraph working, where in operation, being maintained.
In the case of a train staff being so damaged that it will not open
the staff ticket box, the pilotman must take possession of the damaged
staff and show it to the driver of every train passing on the single line
section during the time pilot working is in operation.
(c) If the missing staff be found, it must be handed to the station When missing
master at either end of the section to which it applies, who must make staff 18 found.
arrangements for the ordinary working to be resumed ; before the
regular staff is brought into use, the relieving staff and boxes must be
withdrawn and forwarded to the person who is responsible for their
safe custody.

6 T r a i n Stan and Ticket System—Continued.
Trains assisted
by second 1 5 . When any train is assisted by a second engine in the front, and
engine, s u c h train has to carry the staff, the first or leading engine must carry
a ticket, and the second engine the staff. In cases where the train is
to be followed by another train, the second as well as the leading engine
must carry a ticket. When the assistant engine is behind, pushing
the train, the train engine must carry a ticket, and the assistant engine
the staff, except in cases where the train and assistant engine are travelling
over the entire length of the section, and have to be followed by
another/train, when the train and assistant engine must each have a
ticket. When the assistant engine is allowed, by the authority of the
General Superintendent, to return to the station from which it started,
without running through the entire section, it must always carry the
staff •
Engine 1 6 . (a) In the event of an engine which carries the staff breaking
carrying staff down between two stations, the fireman must take the staff to the staff
disabled.
station in the direction whence assistance can be obtained or is expected
in order that the staff may be at the station on the arrival of the engine
and the station master at the station ta which the staff is taken will be
held responsible for carrying out all special arrangements necessary
during the continuance of the obstruction. Should the engine that fails
Engine b e in possession of a ticket instead of the staff, assistance should come
carrying
tickets f r o m the station at which the staff has been left, and the-station master
disabled
at that station will be held responsible for making any special arrangements
that may be necessary, the guard of the train being held responsible
for the proper protection of his train until the arrival of the stationmaster.
But if assistance can be more readily obtained at a station
other than that where the staff is, the instructions contained in General
Rule 221, clause g, must be carried out, to allow the assistant 'engine,
or breakdown van train to travel in the facing direction. The fireman
must accompany the assistant engine to the place where he has left
his own engine.
(b) When the engine which has failed is carrying a ticket, the fireman
must take his ticket with him when he goes for assistance, and the
driver of the engine which has failed must not allow it to be moved
until the assisting engine has arrived.
Portion train left of on 1 7 . (a) When a train or a portion of a train is left upon the single
single line, line from accident or inability oethe engine to take the whole forward,
the engine driver must not, if -he be in possession of a ticket, return for
it, except by written instructions from the guard, as prescribed in
General Rule 221, and the guard must protect his train in the rear, in
accordance with Gmeral Rule 217, and prevent a following train pushing
it ahead. If the 'engine driver be in possession of the staff, he
may return to the rear portion of his train without obtaining instructions
from the guard authorising him to do so.
When line
obstructed,
(b) After sunset or in foggy weather, or during falling snow, before
the front portion is drawn forward, a red light must be placed on the
front vehicle of the rear portion by the man who divides the train.
In the case of the train being accidentally divided the guard in
charge of the rear portion must place a red light on the leading vehicle
of the rear portion of the divided train.
18. • (a) Should an accident occur of such nature as to block the
and the traffic is likely to be stopped for any considerable time,
special arrangements must be made for working the trains to and from

Train Staff and Ticket System—Continued._ 7
the staff station on each side of the obstruction. The train staff must
be retained to work trains between the point of obstruction and the
staff station from which aSsistance is rendered, and, on the other side,
the traffic must be conducted by a pilotman, to be appointed by an
order in writing (see following form).
(b) Block telegraph working must be suspended, and the single line
on each side of the obstruction must be protected by hand signalmen
in the usual
. w a y .
NORTH EASTERN RAILWAY.
TRAIN STAFF AND TICKET SYSTEM.
Working of Single Line by Pilotman during obstruction.
This form must be filled up by the person arranging the introduction of Pilot Working,
and used whenever it is temporarily necessary, owing to obstruction on
a single line, to work the traffic by Pilotman.
...Station,
The Single Line between a n d .
being obstructed, all traffic between_ A n d the place of
obstruction, will be worked by pilotman in accordance with Rule 18 of the Regulations
for working single lines of railway by train staff and ticket.
will act as Pilotnaa,n, and no train is to be
allowed to pass on to the section, where the obstruction exists, unless he is present
and rides upon the engine.
This order to remain in force until withdrawn by the pilotman.
(Signed).
To__ T i m e .
Noted by__
Noted by.
Noted by a t _
Noted by _ a t _
Noted by.... _ a t place of obstruction.
Noted by _ P i l o t m a n .
The Pilotman must sign all the forms issued, and the form retained by him must bear the
signatures oftevery person to whom a copy of the form is distributed.
Twelve of these forms must be kept in a convenient place at each block station, so as to
be available at say moment, night or day.
A copy of this form must be delivered to the Station Master or person in charge, and
to the Signalman at the Staff Station where pilot working commences, one must be retained by
the Pilotman, and another must be conveyed by the Pilotman to the person in charge at the
place of obstruction. If there is an intermediate Signal Box, the Signalman or person in charge
must be supplied with a copy of the form by the Pilotman.
In the event of a station master himself acting as pilotman, he must address and give a copy
of the form to the person he leaves in charge of his station.
Station masters and other persons in charge receiving this form will be held responsible that
the Inspectors, Foremen, Signalmen and others concerned at their stations are immediately made
acquainted with theP circumstances, and are instructed in their necessary duties.
On the other side of the obstruction the line will be worked by train staff, no tickets being
used. O . 15104).
TE.—The time at which this form is cancelled must be written across it.
19. When the line is again clear, no train must be allowed to pass W
again clear.
the il!en point lwhere
the obstruction existed without the staff. The pilotman
must
i
accompany the first train carrying the staff to the staff station,
and, after the pilotman has withdrawn his arrangements for pilotworking,
ne
the traffic must be again conducted according to the train
staff regulations.
20. (a) When a ballast traln has to work on the line, the staff must Ballast train at
be given to the engine driver in Charge of it. This will close the line work on line.
whilst the ballast train is at work. The ballast train must proceed
afterwards to one of the staff stations to open the line before the ordinary
traffic can be resumed. But if a ballast train is required to run over a
section of sifigle line from one staff station to the other without stopping
to work on the way, it may' then travel with staff or ticket as required.
Under ho circumstances must the ballast train stop to do work on the
line unless in possession o the train staff.

8 T r a i n Stan and Ticket System.—Continued.
Siding points
coatrolied by
train staff.
Staff stations
shown in
working time
tables or
Appendices.
Form of train
staff ticket.
(b) The engine driver of a ballast train that has to do work on the
must be told, when receiving the staff, to which end of the section
it is to 1:‘e taken, and at what time it is to be there, in order to clear
the line for the next train.
(c) When a ballast train, working in the section, has to return to
the staff station in the rear, no shunting outside the home signal at
that end of the station must be allowed. •
(d) When a ballast train in possession of the staff is at work on the
line, it will not be necessary to send out flagmen to protect it.
21. (a) Points giving communication between the sidings and the
running line controlled by the train staff cannot be opened without
the train staff for that section of the line where the siding is situated,
and the train staff cannot be removed until the points have been placed
in the proper position for trains to pass upon the running line, and
securely locked so as to prevent vehicles passing from the sidings on
to the running line.
(b) On arriving at a siding, the points of which are controlled by
the train staff, the engine driver must hand the train staff to the guard
or man in charge of the siding, to enable him to unlock the points.
(c) When the necessary shunting has been completed, and the points
have been placed in the proper .position for trains to pass upon the
running line, the guard or man in charge of the siding must return
the train staff to the engine driver, and the latter must not proceed
on his journey until he has obtained possession of it.
22. The working time-tables or appendices, issued for the guidance
of the servants, will contain a list of the staff stations, and of the siding
points controlled by the train staff.
No..
FORM OF TRAIN STAFF TICKET.
On lines where such ticket is in use.
Train No.
To the engine driver.
(Not in use on N.E.R.)
TRAIN STAFF TICK:rn‘.
Line or Branch.
You are authorised, after seeing the train staff for the
section, to proceed from
to. , and the train staff will follow.
Signature of person in iharge
Date_
(Back of Ticket).
This ticket must be given up by the engine driver,
immediately on arrival, to the person in charge of the staff
working at the place to which he is authi -ised to proceed, to
be cancelled and dealt with as the latter ma: be instructed by
the Superintendent.

REGULATIONS FOR WORKING SINGLE LINES OF RAILWAY
BY
ONLY O E ENGINE IN STEAM,
OR TWO OR MORE ENGPIES COUPLED TOJ.E•THER.
• I.—Only one engine in steam, or two or more coupled. together engineonly o inae steam
which are then to be treated as one engine or train, must be allowed . -0 or two or more
1be
on the line at one and the same time. When a train is drawn by t
-e
two engines the staff must be shown to the driver of the leading engine, y
, Zete ln and handed to, and carried by the driver of the train engine.
dl
2.—The person in charge of the staff working for the time being is Custody of staff
r, ethe
sole person authorised to receive and deliver the train staff.
t o b e
ine 3.—The a t staff, s when a m at e the station, must be kept on the proper Place for staff.
brackets, and when on the engine it must be carried in the train staff
socket where provided.
4.—The staff must be given to the driver of the train engine by the Stall to begiven to driver
person in charge of the staff working immediately before commencing of train engine
each journey, and the engine driver must, at the end of the journey, commencing
give it up to the person in charge of the staff working. J o u r n e y .
Penalty for
5.—An engine driver will render himself liable to dismissal if he engine driver
leave a staff station without the train staff, and he must be careful not leaving without
to carry the staff beyond the station at which it should be left. staff.
Engine driver
6.—An engine driver must be careful, after receiving the staff, not nunotiltoprsotialert
to start until the proper signals have been exhibited, and, when with signals exhibited.
a train, not until a signal has been given by the guard.
Staff not to be
7.—The station master or person in charge of the staff working must Fa
when a train arrives, satisfy himself that it is complete, before he allows until i
train previous has
another train to enter the section. a r r i v e dn complete.
8.—(a) In the event of a train becoming disabled and requiring Disabled train.
assistance, or an accident occurring which renders it impossible for the
engine to proceed, the fireman must take the staff, and make the best of
his way to the station whence assistance can be obtained, and inform the
person in charge there of the circumstances, who must, on receipt of such
information, allow a second engine to be on the line. The relieving
engine must be accompanied by the fireman of the disabled engine or
train, NAM must hand the staff to the engine driver and explain to him
where, and under what circumstances, the disabled train is situated.
(b) The driver of the disabled engine must not allow it to be moved
until the assisting engine has arrived.
(c) When the disabled engine is being taken off the branch, the last
engine rf17,1sf ;,' - 1 cases carry the staff.
9.—The guard of the disabled train will be held responsible for the Guard
safe and proper working of the line Ptil
both engines have left it and at e
it is again clear, o f r li working
e
s
l
e
)
v
o
e
w
i
e
t
r
(
)
t
r
a
i
n
-
9

10 L i n e s Worked by One Engine in Steam—Continued.
When line
obstructed.
Obstruction
be protected. to 11.--Two competent men, provided with the necessary hand signals
and detonators, must be appointed to protect the obstruction, one on
each side.
Points
becoming
facing points.
10.—Should an accident occur of such nature as to obstruct the
line, and the traffic is likely to be stopped. for any considerable time,
special arrangements must be made for working the trains to and from
the staff station on each side of the obstruction until the line is again
clear. The staff must be used to work trains between the obstruction
and the staff station from whence assistance can be obtained, and on the
other side the traffic must be conducted by a pilotman, to be appointed
by an order in writing (see following form), who must accompany every
train between the obstruction and the staff station. The person in
charge at each station in the section must have a copy of the pilotman's
form. When the line is again clear no train must be allowed to pass the
point where the obstruction existed, without both the staff and the
pilotman. The pilotman must accompany the train to the staff station
from whence assistance was obtained, when the traffic must again be
conducted according to the regulations in this Appendix.
points on a single line that become facing points to trains
running in either direction, if not interlocked, must either be padlocked
or securely held by hand for the sAfe passage of trains.
FORM REFERRED TO IN RULE 10.
NORTH EASTERN RAILWAY.
WORKING OF SINGLE LINES OF RAILWAY BY ONLY ONE ENGINE IN
STEAM, OR TWO OR • MORE ENGINES COUPLED TOGETHER.
Working by Pilotman during - Obstruction.
This form must be filled up and used whenever it is temporarily necessary, owing
to obstruction, to work the traffic by Pilotman.
•
Station.
The single line between _ a n d
being obstructed, the traffic between. a n d the place of
obstruction will be worked by pilotman, in accordance with Rule •10 of the
Regulations for working single lines of railway by only one engine in steam or
two or more engines coupled together.
act as pilotnaan, and must accompany every train
to and from . . s t a t i o n and the point of obstruction.
This order is to remain in force until withdrawn by the pilotmaia.
(Signed).
To.. T i m e .
Noted by.. . . a t
Noted by _ a t
Noted by., „ a t
Noted by..
Noted by . a t place of obstruction.
Noted by.. P i l o t m a n .
The Pliotman must sign all the forms issued, and the form retained by him must bear the
signatures of every person to whom a copy of the form is distributed.
Twelve of these forms must be kept in a convenient place at each end of the line, so as to
be available at any moment, night or day.
A copy of this form must be delivered to the Station Master or person in charge of the staff
station where pilot working commences, one must be retained by the pilotman, and another must
be conveyed by the pilotman to the person in charge at the place of obstruction. If there is an
intermediate station, the person in charge must be supplied with a copy of the form by the pilotman
at the first opportunity. : ; -
In the event of a station master himself acting as pilptman,, he must, address and give a copy
of the form to the person he leaves in charge of his statitin.
Station masters and persons in charge receiving this form will be held responsible that the
Inspectors, Foremen, and others concerned at their stations are immediately made acquained with
the circumstances, and are instructed in their necessary duties.
NOTE.—The time at which this form is cancelled must be written across it.. •

Regulations for Working Single Lines of Railway
by Pilotman.
•
1.—The pilotman will be distinguished by a special badge ; and no special badge.
-
start a
tunless
it is either accompanied or personally started by the pilotman l
wearing such badge.
l t
r
t
a 2.—The pilotman will, when practicable, accompany every train ; ra pil
o
ibut,
o when it is necessary to start two or more trains from one end of ;;Pacable,
ins
the section under his control, before a train has to be started from the to accompany
n other t end, the pilotman must furnish the driver of each train not every train.
maccompanied
ma by himself, with one of the printed pilotman's tickets Exception.
uwhere
,, such are provided, properly filled up and signed, and personally
sstart
, such train ; and he must himself accompany the last train. The
tticket
granted in this ease will apply only to the single journey to the
other end of the section, where it must be immediately given up to the
,
person in charge of the station, to be cancelled and dealt with as the
u
latter may be instructed by the Superintendent. The engine driver Engine driver
nmust
not start his train without seeing the pilotman, and in case the w
d
dw
pilotman does not accompany the train, until he has received the pilot- ithout guar,
eman's
ticket, authorising him to proceed. An engine driver working
an
orking
engine unaccompanied by a guard, must observe the same regulations
r as herein laid down for a train.
a
•
n 3.—Before starting any train, the..pilotman must ascertain from the Starting of
y
guard of the train that all is right, and that he is ready to go forward. trains.
c 4.—(a)• In the event of a train accompanied by the pilotman be- Disabled train.
icoming
disabled, the pilotman must make the best arrangements the
circumstances of the case allow, for procuring assistance with the least
r
, delay.
c
u•
(b) If the engine. be left on the line, the pilotman must, before leaving,
m
give the driver a written order not to move his engine until he returns,
s (c) Should a train unaccompanied by a pilotman become disabled
tthe
, guard of the train must take the necessary steps for the protection
a
of his train, and communicate with the pilotman as soon as possible.
n 5.—All points on a single line that become facing points to trains Points to be
crunning
in either direction, if not interlocked, must either be padlocked La
ec
or securely held by hand for the safe passage of trains.
sd
6.--(a) When a train or a portion of a train is left upon the single Portion of train
, uline
from accident, or inability of the engine to take the whole forward, 1t
bl
ithe
engine driver must not, if he be in possession of a pilottnan's ticket,
or if unaccompanied by the pilotnian, return for it, except by written
e rt
instructions from the guard of the train, as prescribed in General Rule
a%c
e. 221, and the guard must protect his -train in the rear in accordance
l lon
with sGeneral i n g l Rule e 217, and prevent a following train pushing it ahead.
lkIf
the pilotman be with the train, and 'accompany the engine with the
oy
first portion, the engine driver may return to the rear portion of his
train without obtaining in,structions from the guard of the train author-
we'
ising him to do so,- but the pilotman must accompany the engine when
el
it returns for the rear portion of the train.
d l,Z
t.
o
r
u
1
1

12 W o r k i n g GIngle Lines by Pilotman.—Continued.
(b) After sunset, or in foggy weather or during falling snow, a red
light must be placed on the front vehicle of the rear portion by the man
grit() divides the train.
In the case of the train being accidentally divided the guard in charge
of the rear portion must place a red light on the leading vehicle of the
rear portion of the divided train.
stop signalman train to 7.—No train must be allowed to enter upon any single line section
unless running without the permission of the signalman, who must not allow it to pass
by authority of
pilotmam until he is perfectly satisfied that the pilotman is accompanying it or
has given authority for it to start.
Form of pilotman's
ticket. F O R M OF PILOTMAN'S TICKET.
Ticket referred to in Rule 2 of the Regulations for Working Single Line by Pilotman, see Appendix
to Rules and Regulations and Working Time Table, also Clauses 25 and 35 of the Regulations for
Train Signalling on Single Lines worked under Electric Train Staff or Electric Train Tablet system.
Ticket No. N O R T H EASTERN RAILWAY.
PILOTMAN'S TICKET.
To be used when it is necessary to work the traffic of a Single Line
by Pilotman, owing to the failure of the Electric Staff, Electric Tablet
apparatus, or when the Electric Staff, Electric Tablet or ordinary train
staff has been lost or is defective.
Train No
To the Engine-driver.
You ARE AUTHORISED , TO PROCEED FROM
t o
Pilotman following.
Signature of Pilotman
Date
(Back ot Ticket).
This Ticket is to be given up by the Engine-driver, immediately on
arrival, to the person in charge of the Staff or Tablet Station to which
he is authorised to proceed, to be cancelled and dealt with as the
latter may be instructed by the Superintendent.
See pages 278-9.
..r.23,1121ME LIMIP
Regulations or Working Single Lines of Railway over which
passenger trains DO NOT RUN, by Train Staff, Train Staff
and one Train Staff Ticket, er by Train Staff and Train Staff
Tickets.

Lines worked by Electric Bells and Block Indicators, without
any Staff, and on the principle that not more than one
engine is to be allowed in the Section at one time.
See pages 292-3.
Regulations for Working Out7of-Gauge Loads requiring the Use
of oth Lines where Block Working is in operation.
(See also B.T.R. 35).
Whenever an out-of-gauge load requiring the use cf both lines is to be
run, it will be clearly indicated in the programme or other advice of the
special train conveying the out-of-gauge load the points between which no
train must pass the special on the opposite line, and also, in cases where the
special is required to run on the wrong line, the points between which such
working is to operate.
In cases where the special is required to run on the wrong line, the engine
of the special train must run through the sections concerned on the proper
line, and in doing so the driver must -
stop signalman a to t prepare e a the c necessary h wrong line order form, which he will
obtain when returning on the opposite line. On arrival back at the box
s i g n a l
from which the out-of-gauge special will start, the driver must satisfy the
b
person
o
in charge
x
that
,
he has in his possession the necessary wrong line order
rforms, e and q the utrain e may s then t be allowed to run through the sections con-
tcerned in hthe wrong e direction.
In all cases where an out-of-gauge special has to run on the wrong line,
the following form written out specially by the signalman must
be made use of for the purpose :—
" To Driver of Engine No. w o r k i n g "- Out-of-Gauge " Load
"from t o
" I authorise you to return with your train on the wrong line to this
signal box."
Signature S i g n a l m a n
at S i g n a l box.
"Date T i m e issued
" Catch points exist at
In cases where out-of-gauge specials requiring the use of both lines are
run after daylight, a red headlight must be carried, the same as is done in
'the case of single line working owing to accident.
(0. 4380).
13

14
Regulations for working GOODS LINES where the Block Telegraph
Working of
signals.
Regulations are NOT in operation or where no Special Regulations
are in force.
1.--Unless instructions are given to the contrary, the danger signal
must be kept exhibited at all the fixed signals, except when it is necessary
to lower or turn them off for a train to pass.
When two 2.—If, when two or more trains approach a junction at the same time,
trains approach
a junction at or at nearly the same time, the signalman should have lowered or taken
same time
nearly sa
time, passage of another, he must not attempt to alter the order of the trains
me, or
o f f
t h
e
s i
g n
a l
s
f
o
r
a
t
r
a
i
n
w
h
i
c
h
s
h
o
u
l
d
h,
a.
v
e
b
e
e
n
k
e
by reversing the signals, but must place them all at danger and so keep
them until all the traits have been brought to a stand, when precedence
can be given to the proper train. •
Interval c l e a r weather and under ordinary circumstances the line may
between traillS,
be considered clear and the home signal lowered for a train provided thesignalman
has satisfied himself that the previous train has passed the
advance signal and is continuing its journey, or where there is no advance
signal has passed the home signal at least 400 yards and is continuing
on its journey. The distant signal (where provided) must not be
lowered unless 10 minutes have elapsed since the passing of the previous
train and it has proceeded on its journey.
If the line is not clear to the advance signal, or where there is no
advance signal, for a distance of 400 yards ahead of the home signal, the
distant signal (where provided) must be kept at danger. The train must
be brought nearly to a stand at the home signal and after the signalman
has satisfied himself that it may be allowed to proceed with safety,
the home signal may be lowered, a green flag or green light being
shewn from the signal-box.
In foggy weather or during falling snow if any train should arrive
less than ten minutes after the passing of the previous train or when
the signalman is aware that the line immediately in advance of the box
is occupied he must bring the train nearly to a stand at the home signal,
after which the signal may be lowered, a green flag or green light being
shewn from the signal-box and the driver verbally instructed to proceed
with caution.
Signalman to 4.—(a) The signalman must see that each train as it passes has a
see tail lamp on
each train. tail lamp attached to the last vehicle, so that he may be satisfied that
the whole of the train has passed, and that none of the vehicles have
become detached.
If a train pass
without tail
lamp, or signal
man see anything
unusual
(NOT APPLICABLE TO SINGLE LINES OF RAILWAY.)
(b) Should a train pass without a tail lamp on the last vehicle, or if
a signalman observe anything unusual in a train during its passage,
such as goods failing off, or a vehicle on fire, or should a train become
divided or vehicles be running away, he must, if necessary, place and
keep all his signals at danger, and take any other action that may be
most expedient under the circumstances. He must also, if necessary,
stop any following train, or any train going in the opposite direction,

Regulations for Working Goods Lines.---Continued. 1 5
,nd inform the engine driver of the circumstances, instructing him to
Toceed cautiously so as to avoid danger in the event of the line on
vhich he is running being obstructed. The engine driver of the train so
yarned must caution the engine driver of any train proceeding on the
other line, and on arrival at the signal box in advance, advise the signalcan
of the circumstances. The signalman must, as soon as practicable,
ommunicate with the station master or person in charge.
(c) Where bell or other telegraphic communication is in operation,
he prescribed signals must be given.
5.--(a) When two or more engines are employed to draw a train,When two or
more engines.
hey must not be uncoupled except where there are fixed signals and
, signalman on duty, nor then until the engines have been brought to
, stand. When two or more light engines have to pass through a section,
hey must be coupled together before entering such section, and must
Lot be uncoupled .except where there are fixed signals and a signalman
n duty.
(b) When one or more engines are employed to assist a train in the
ear, they must not leave the train except where there are fixed signals
nd a' signalman on duty.
6.--No engine or vehicle must be shunted or moved from one main g
ne p to the other, or from the main line into a siding, or from a siding be protected.
n to the main line, until the proper signals have been exhibited in one
h
r both directions, as may be required ; and care must be taken, when
he
e
main line is about to be obstructed, to allow sufficient time to elapse
)r uarty
approaching train, which may have been near to or within the
istant r signal, to pass, before the obstruction is allowed.
n
7.—For the protection of trains stopped by accident, failure or r
bstruction, a or other exceptional cause, see General Rules 217 to 226, by accident,
i.
, being t understood that if a second train arrive before the obstruction o
r
fas
been removed the guard of the second train must protect his train
t
a
t
s directed in those Rules. The guard of the first train, having
ssured l
te e himself that the guard of the second train has gone back with
h
he i
s necessary signals for the protection of the second train, may then
t,join
n his own train. If other trains arrive the same arrangements
tg
llust
o be carried out, the guard of the last train being the protection
)r pthe
whole.
,Lt,
n
e8.--(a)
When a train is unable to proceed at a greater speed thanF
-
pe
'etro )ur miles an hour, the guard, if there be only one, or the ftont guard, when p running
there l be more than one, must immediately go back, or send some other
r
rsi
ompetent ' person, three-quarters of a mile, or to the nearest signal box u
n. 'there
wl
be one within that distance, in which case the signalman must o
e advised of the circumstances. The person who goes back must followu
Y•
he train at not less than three-quarters of a trifle and use the necessary e
anger signals to stop any following train until assistance arrives, or d
le train which causes the obstruction is shunted.
c
t
(b) When an engine is employed to assist a train in the rear, and
t
Lich train is unable to proceed at a greater speed than four miles an
t
our, the duty of protecting the train will devolve upon the guard in the r
tme way as if no engine were assisting in the rear.
a
(c) On rising gradients, if there be only one guard in charge of the i
7ain, he must get out of his van, put down three detonators, and then n
nmediately return to the van.

.
1
6
R
e
g
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
t
o
r
W
o
r
k
i
n
g
G
i
G
Passenger
trains not to
run on goods
lines.
9.--Trainsconveying passengers must not be allowed to run on lines
used for goods and mineral traffic only, except when it is absolutely
necessary to divert them in case of accident or other emergency. In
such a case printed or written instructions must be issued to the
signalman and special arrangements made for the working of the trains
When necessary, the telegraph or telephone may be used for the
purpose of making arrangements for the working of Passenger trains
over the Goods lines in the right direction only, provided all instructions
are written and signed by the Stationmaster or person in charge
of the special working arrangements, such messages to be repeated
by receiver to sender to ensure accuracy. Absolute block regulations
must be worked to so far as this is practicable in the absence of block
instruments. ( O . 6068.)
WORKING OF STEAM AND ELECTRIC AUTOCARSO iEANGLE LINES
oF RAILWAYS. CUSTODY AND TRAKFIEREHCE OF
STAFF, TICKET OR TABLET-
In the case of steam autocars, the duties of receiving or exchanging the
staff, ticket or tablet, as the case may be, must be performed by the engine
driver or fireman when the engine is leading, and by the driver or guard
when the car is leading. The fireman or guard must immediately hand
over the staff, ticket, or tablet to the driver.
In the case of electric autocars, guards are likewise authorised to perform
this duty, but must at once hand over the staff, ticket, or tablet to the
driver. ( 0 . 6603).
BLOCK TELEGRAPH SYSTEM.
General Rules 28-89.
The ,object of the System of Block Telegraph Signalling is to prevent
omore
than one train being in the Section between two Block Signal boxes
t on the same line at the same time.
The Signalling of trains on the Block Telegraph System does not in any
I
way dispense with the use of Fixed, Hand, or Detonating Signals, or other
s authorised apparatus, whenever and wherever such Signals or apparatus
Lmay
be requisite to protect obstructions on the Line.
i The Signal boxes at which the Bleck Telegraph Wcrking is in operation
are ,furnished with Instruments to signal for each Line of rails, and the
nsystem
under which these instruments are to be worked, and the mode of
eindicating
the description of approaching trains, will be as 'given in the
sCode
of Regulations. •
All Fixed Signals must be kept at danger during the time the signal boxes
. are open, except when it is necessary to lower them for a train to pass ; and
— before any signal is lowered, care must be taken to ascertain that the Line
Cis
clear, and that the Block Telegraph and other Regulations havZ been
duly complied with. ( O . 5350).
o The Block Instruments must be used exclusively for the purposes shewn
nin
the Block Telegraph Regulations, and must not, except in case of accident,
t be used for conversing. They must only be used by the Signalman or other
i person specially appointed for the duty.
The Regulations for working trains under the Block Telegraph System
nare
issued separately to the staff concerned.
u
e
d
.

lExtracts from Block Telegraph Regulations for the guidance of
Engine Drivers and others not supplied with a copy of the
&Block Telegraph Regulations.
DOUBLE LINES.
Regulation 14.
0) -Should
a second train or light engine be required to enter the section
to
Section
assist a disabled train, the second train or engine may, after having been
brought to a stand and the driver informed of the circumstances, be allowed
to Oenter b sthe t section r u under the following arrangements :—
c t e d
b
(b) The guard
y
or fireman of the train requiring assistance must ride ort
the engine of the second train, or on the light engine, and point out to the
driver A the c position c of the disabled train. Reduced speed and great caution
must i be d observed e by all concerned.
n t
'(c) Except during foggy weather or in falling snow, it will not be necessary
for othe
signalman at the box in the rear of the obstruction to detain the assisting
r train or lignt engine until the arrival of the guard or fireman of the disabled
b train at his box if information has been received from the signalman.
at
y
the box in advance of the obstruction that the guard or fireman is coming
back. On receipt of this information, the signalman in the rear may allow
the Dassisting i train or engine to enter the blocked section after the engine-
„driver s has abeen
informed that the guard or fireman of the disabled train is
coming b back, l and has been instructed to keep a look-out for such guard or
'fireman. The guard or fireman of the disabled train when picked up must
-ride e on the d engine of the assisting train or on the light engine, and pilot it to
:the Trear of r the disabled train.
a i
(d) If there is a tunnel in the blocked section the driver of the assisting
rtrain n or light . engine must be instructed by the signalman not to enter such
'tunnel - unless the guard or fireman of the disabled train has come back and
,met the train or light engine, or it has been ascertained that the tunnel is
(e) The signalman at the box in advance must stop any train proceeding
the opposite direction and instruct the driver to travel through the tunnel
• at reduced speed.
Regulation 16.—Animals Straying on Line.
aware - that animals are straying on the line, he must at once inform the box
-in the rear and take all possible steps to have the line cleared. Until both
,
(a) I f a
s
,stand s iand g the n adriver l mverbadly a n informed of the circumstance and instructed
• to
i
bproceed e cautiously. c o m e s
g (b) Should there be a tunnel in the section a•ifected, the sigualman at-
-each n end of the section must verbally explain to the driver and the guard
'that there is an animal on the line and that although the train may
- Troceed a into the section it must not enter the tunnel until they have
,; lascertained
that the tunnel is clear.
m
e
n
a
17

IS Extracts from Block Telegraph Regulations for the guidance of Engin
-
Drivers and others not supplied with a copy of the
Block Telegraph Regulations.—Continued.
Double Li
nes.—
• Regulation 26.—Opening and Closing of Boxes.--(c) No engine, ,rain, or
vehicle is to be allowed to Conti pass from one running line to another, or to enterupon
the main lines at a nued. box which is switched out of circuit.
SINGLE LINES WORKED BY ELECTRIC TRAIN STAFF AND
ELECTRIC TRAIN TABLET.
Engine Drivers not to start without Tablet or Staff and proper Signals being
exhibited. (a) Except as provided in Regulations'14a, 14b, and 25, an engine
driver will render himself liable to dismissal if he leaves a tablet or staff
station without the tablet or staff for that section of the line over which he
is about to run, or unless it has been shown to him as required by the following
paragraph, and by Regulation 6.
(b) When a train has more than one engine in front, or when two trains or
two or more light engines are coupled together, the tablet or staff must be shewn
to each driver, and delivered to and carried by the driver of the last engine.
(c) After receiving the tablet or staff, the driver must not proceed until
all the necessary fixed or other signals have been exhibited. He must keep.
the tablet or staff under his own charge (except as explained in Regulations,.
14, 14a, and 34a), until he reaches the end of the section,, when he must give
it up to the signalman or other duly authorised person.
(c1) Drivers must be extremely careful not to take the tablet or staff beyond
the station at which it ought to be left.
(I) Each tablet or staff has engraved or marked on it the name of the tablet
or staff station at each end of the section to which it applies, and the tablets'.
and staffs of adjoining sections are slightlY different in shape.
Custody and Transference of Tablet or Staff.--(a) Except as provided iw
Regulation 36, the signalman or other person in charge of the tablet or staff'
.working for the time being is the sole person authorised to take a tablet or
staff from, or place it in, the instrument.
(b) Except where some other person is specially appointed to the duty,..
the signalman is the sole person authorised to receive a tablet or staff from,,
and deliver it to the driver, who, whilst it is in his charge, must carry it
the place provided for the purpose. Under no circumstances, except as.
provided in Rules 14, 14a, and 19, must a tablet or staff be transferred from:
one train to another without being passed through the instrument and dealti
with in accordance with these Regulations.
Regulation 9.
it is — necessary for a platelayers' trolley to go through any of the tunnels,
specially enumerated in the Appendix, as coming within the application of
Platelay
this Regulation, the ganger or leading man in charge of the trolley must be
in ers' possession of the staff or tablet ; the trolley must be signalled on the staff
or Ttablet r oinstruments l in accordance with the authorised code, and the signal-.
man at the staff or tablet station in advance must, if the line be clear, as laid
l e y s
down in Regulation 5, give permission for the trolley to approach under the,
section g clear o but station or junction blocked signal. Should the trolley after
passing i nthrough
the tunnel be removed from the rails before reaching the
next g staff or tablet station, the ganger must take the staff or tablet to the
signalman at the end of the section nearest to him, and he must inform the,
signalman t h that the trolley is clear of the line, and hand the staff or tablet to him_
r o
u
h
g
T u n

Extracts from Block Telegraph Regulations for the guidance of Engine 19
Drivers and others not supplied with a copy of the
Block Telegraph Regulations.—Continued.
Single Lines worked by Electric Train Staff and Electric Train Tablet.--Continued.
(b) If the ganger returns to the staff or tablet station in the rear, the signalman
there must, after restoring the staff or tablet to the instrument, send
the cancelling signal to the staff or tablet station in advance.
This regulation, also applies to trolleys not passing through a tunnel where
a tablet or stall is issued to platelayers. •
Regulation 14.—Section obstructed.—(a) In the event of an engine becoming
disabled between two staff or tablet stations, the fireman mast take the staff
or tablet to the staff or tablet station from which assistance is most likely
to be obtained, and, after informing the signalman and showing him the staff
or tablet, must personally hand it over to the driver of the engine appointed
to proceed to the assistance of the disabled engine, and accompany him to
the place where he left his own engine ;• the driver of the disabled engine
must not allow it to be removed until the assisting engine has arrived.
(b) The fireman of the disabled engine must not on any account allow the
staff or tablet to pass out of his possession until he hands it over to the driver
of the assisting engine, and the driver of the assisting engine must not allow
it to pass out of his possession until the disabled engine with the whole of
the train (if any) is removed clear of the section, except when the line is
obstructed and special arrangements are made for working in accordance
with Regulation 14A.
(c) Should a signalman receive information from the fireman of a disabled
train that a second train is required to enter the section to assist the disabled
train, Or should it be necessary for the break-down van train to enter a section
obstructed by accident or otherwise, the second train or break-down van
train, as the case may be; may, after having been brought to a stand and
the driver informed of the circumstances, be allowed to enter the section
provided the driver is in possession of the staff or tablet.
Note.—Should there not be telegraphic or telephonic communication available,
the signalman must hand the driver a written notice which, must be
handed to the signalman in advance giving the engine number and reason
why the second train was allowed to enter the section.
(e) The driver of the assisting engine must run at reduced speed, and great
caution must be observed by all concerned, and after ,removing the disabled
engine and the whole of the train (if the disabled engine was working a train)
to the most convenient end of the section, must then hand over the staff
or tablet to the signalman or other authorised person. -
(I) The first train to pass through the section after the line is again clear
must be stopped, and the driver instructed to proceed cautiously through
the section

20 Extracts from Block Telegraph Regulations for the guidance of Engine
Drivers and others not supplied with a copy of the
Block Telegraph Regulations.—Continued.
Single Lines worked by Electric Train Staff and Electric Train Tablet. —
Continued.
Regulation 14A.
traffic — is likely to be stopped for a considerable time, special arrangements
must be made for working the trains to and from the staff or tablet station
on (a) each side of the point of obstruction. The staff or tablet must be retained
to Swork h otrains u lbetween d the point of obstruction and the staff or tablet station
from a which n the staff or tablet was issued, and on the other side, the traffic
must be conducted by a pilotman, in accordance with the following
instructions a c c ;--- i
d e n t
o
(b) If the obstruction is caused by a derailed or disabled train, the
guard r must put the engine-driver in charge of the point of obstruction,
and, o after b giving s t him a written order instructing him not to move his
engine r uuntil che treturns
with the pilotinan, must go himself to the end of the
section to which the train was proceeding, and arrange for three or more,
as imay obe n necessary, of the printed forms provided for the purpose of establishing
o working c by pilotman during obstruction, to be filled up ; one of these
must c be delivered u to the signalman in charge of the staff or tablet station
where pilot working commences, the second must be retained by the pilotman
and r the third , must be conveyed by the pilotman with the relief train to the
engine-driver a
in charge of the point of obstruction. The pilotman must
wear n the distinctive badge provided for that purpose, which, until the regular
badge can be obtained, must be a red flag tied round the left arm. So soon
d
as he is satisfied that the arrangements are understood, trains may be allowed
to tgo
on to the single line under the control and by the permission of the
pilotruan. h The engine-driver, when put in charge at the point of obstruction,
e must hand the staff or tablet to the fireman, and instruct him to take
it back to the staff or tablet station from which it was issued, to work trains
between that station and the point of obstruction until the line is clear.
(c) The regulation badge is a red armlet, with the word " Pilotman " shown
thereon in white letters.
(d) The line on each side of the obstruction must be protected in accordance
with Rule 217 in the Book of Rules and Regulations, and the guard and
fireman will be held responsible for taking care that this is done until the
men are appointed specially to perform the duty.
(e) When the line is again clear, no train must be allowed to pass the point
where the obstruction existed without the staff or tablet ; the pilotman
must accompany the first train carrying the staff or tablet to the staff or
tablet station to which the train was proceeding at the time of the accident.
After the engine-drivpr has given up the staff Qr tablet to the signalman,
and the pilotman has withdrawn his arrangements for pilot-working, the traffic
must again be conducted in accordance with these regulations.
(I) In no case of obstruction away from a staff or tablet station must a
staff or tablet be restored to the instrument at either end of the section until
the section is clear, except as laid down in Regulation 19.

Extracts from Block Telegraph Regulations for the guidance of Engine 21
Drivers and others not supplied with a copy of the
Block Telegraph Regulations.—Continued.
Single Lines worked by Electric Train Staff and Electric Train Tablet. —Continued.
(g) In the event of the line becoming obstructed through the failure of
a bridge or embankment or other cause, when there is no train in the
section, arrangements must, when necessary, be made for a responsible man
to be placed in charge at the point of obstruction and for working by
pilot man to be put into operation between the point of obstruction and the
nearest staff station on either side ; no staff being withdrawn while the
working by pilotman remains in operation.
(h) The line on each side of the obstruction must be protected in accordance
with Rule 254 in the Book of Rules and Regulations by men specially
appointed to perform the duty.
(i) When the line is again clear both pilotmen must proceed together
to one end of the section, and after the pilot working form at that end has
been withdrawn they must accompany the first train through the section
which has been obstructed, collecting the remaining pilot working forms
en route, and on arrival at the opposite end of the section ordinary working
may be resumed. ( 0 . 6793).
Regulation 14B.—Train or portion of Train left on Single Line.—(a) When
a train or portion of a train is left upon the single line from accident, or
inability of the engine to take the whole forward, and it becomes necessary
for the engine to return to the train or rear portion of the train from the
tablet or staff station in advance, the engine-driver must retain possession
of the tablet or staff until the whole of the train is removed from the section.
After sunset, or in foggy weather, or during falling snow, a red light must be
placed on the front vehicle of the rear portion by the man who divides the
train. In the case of the train being accidentally divided, the guard in charge
of the rear portion must place a red light on the leading vehicle of the rear
portion of the divided train.
(b) Should a failure occur to an engine assisting a train in the rear, or
should it become necessary to divide a train assisted in the rear, the driver
of the train engine must send his fireman to the driver of the assisting
engine, and obtain from him an order, in writing, authorising the driver
of the train engine to return from the tablet or staff station in advance
for the remainder of the train.
The train engine must then proceed to the staff or tablet station in advance,
and after disposing of the front portion of the train, the engine-driver, after
informing the signalman what he is about to do, and showing him the written
order, must return and remove the rear portion of the train, and the disabled
engine from the section.
(.
, ver of the train engine not being aware of the failure of the assisting engine,
vne
3
fireman of the assisting engine must act as directed in Regulation 14, and
the disabled engine must not be moved until the relieving engine has arrived.
)
(d) If the train is assisted by an assistant engine in the rear, and the
S
train engine becomes disabled so that it cannot be moved forward, the
assistant h engine must draw the train back to the staff or tablet station, but
mnet o bring it to a stand at the Distant signal, and the Fireman must walk
in ufront
of it from there to the Home signal. The train staff or tablet must
not
l
be delivered up to the signalman, but must be retained by the driver
of the assistant engine, who will return to the assistance of the disabled
d
train engine, acting in accordante with the provisions of Regulation 14..
t
(O. 7022).
h
e
a
s

22 Extracts from Block Telegraph Regulations for the guidance of Engine
Drivers and others not supplied with a copy of the
Block Telegraph Regulations.—Continaed. I
Single Lines worked by Electric Train Staff and Electric Train Tablet
— Regulation 16.
Continued.
— Note.--An engine driver must not, under any circumstances, foul the single
Fouling
line for shunting purposes, unless he has received the authority of the signalman
to do so.
S i n g l
Regulation 34.A.
e (a) — Points giving communication between the sidings and the main line con-
Ltrolled i by nthe
tabla or staff cannot be opened without the tablet or staff for
Controlling
e that section of the line where the siding is situated, and the tablet or staff
cannot S i be d removed i n guntil
the points have been placed in proper position for
f o
trains s to pass upon the main line, and securely locked so as to prevent
r vehicles passing from the siding on to the main line.
b y
S (b) hOn arriving u at a siding, the points of which are controlled by tablet or
m e a
nstaff tthe engine-driver i
must hand the tablet or staff to the guard or man in
n s
ncharge g of the siding to enable the points to be unlocked. When the necessary
shunting o has been completed, and the points have been placed in the proper
pposition u r
f for trains to pass upon the main line, the guard or man in charge
of p the osiding s must return the tablet or staff to the engine driver, and the
t h
elatter s must . not proceed on his journey until he has obtained possession of it.
e
Regulation K.—Exchanging Staffs or Tablets.
staffs T a
- or train tablets by hand drivers must be careful not to exceed a
speed b l
When
of 10
e
miles
x c
per
h a
hour.
n g i n g
et r t a i n
o SINGLE LINES WORKED BY TRAIN STAFF AND TICKET.
r Regulation 34.—When exchanging Train Staffs by hand drivers must be
careful S not t to exceed a speed of 10 miles per hour.
a f
f . TRAIN SIGNALLING BY RECORDING TELEGRAPH
-
INSTRUMENTS.
Regulation 4.
section — clear but station or junction blocked signal has been received, or the
section
(I)
is
O
already
n
occupied and it is necessary for another train to be sent
forward, the home signal must be kept at danger until the approaching train
has
l
been
i n
brought
e s
to a stand, and the driver verbally instructed to proceed
with w caution. h e
r e
(g) On lines where passenger trains are dealt with, if when a train has been
brought
p a
to
s
a stand at the home signal it is too far away for the signalman to
verbally s e caution n the driver, a green flag or green light must be she wn by the
signalman, g e r which the driver must acknowledge by giving a short sharp whistle.
The t home r signal may then be lowered and the driver must proceed with
caution on the understanding that the advance section is occupied. In such
a i
cases no verbal caution will be given by the signalman.
n s
a(h)
On lines where passenger trains are NOT dealt with when the section
clear but station or junction blocked has been received or the section is already
r
occupied and it is necessary for another train to be sent forward, the home
signal
e
must be kept at danger until the approaching train has been brought
d
e
a
l
t

'Extracd from Block Telegraph Regulations for the guidance of Engine 23
Drivers and others not supplied with a copy of the
Block Telegraph Regulations.—Continued.
Train Signalling by Recording Telegraph Instruments.—Continued.
NEARLY to a stand, after which a green flag or green light must be shewn
by the signalman which the driver must acknowledge by giving a short sharp
whistle, after which the home signal may be lowered. The driver must then
proceed with caution and be prepared to stop short of any obstruction after
passing the home signal.
(i) Where calling-on signals are provided, a train must be brought NEARLY
to a stand at the home signal, after which the calling-on signal must be lowered,
which will be an indication to the driver that he can pass the home signal
-
athe
advance section is occupied. In such cases no verbal caution will be given.
t
d
a
METHOD OF EXCHANGING TABLETS.
n
g,ToThe
following illustration shews how the tablets should be held when
171eing exchanged :—
e
r
,
a
n
d
h
e
m
u
s
t
t
h
e
n
p
r
o
c
e
e
d
w
i
t
h
c
a

24 N.E. Company's Exceptions to the R.C.H. Standard
Rule Book.
The following are the North Eastern Company's exceptions to the Railway-
Clearing House Standard Book of Rules and Regulations, dated 1st January,
1916 :—
GRATUITIES.
General Rule 10.
No servant of the Company ha S any right to any gratuity from paSsengersor
other persons in respect of services performed by him. ( O . 3663)_
HOME SIGNALS.
General Rule 40 (b).
(b).—The engine driver of any train which has been thus stopped, or
brought nearly to a stand, must, after the Home signal has been lowered,
go slowly forward towards the Starting signal, but (except for station duties
or shunting purposes) must only proceed as far as is necessary to leave the
last vehicle well clear of junction points and junction crossings, and, as far
as practicable, within sight of the Signalman. The Starting signal must:
not be passed until it is lowered, except as provided in Rule 44. (O. 6897)
-
SECTION CLEAR TO HOME SIGNAL ONLY.
General Rule 40 (d) and (e).
Trains not eonveyinab passengers which are allowed to go forward under
the Section Clear to Home Signal only signal will be brought almost to a
stand for the purpose of carrying out the verbal warning referred to in
clauses (d) and (e) of General Rule 40, and not completely stopped as hitherto.
(O. 6361).
STARTING AND ADVANCED STARTING SIGNALS.
General Rule 45, Clauses (b) and (d).
(b).—The engine-driver of any train which has been stopped, or brought
nearly to a stand, at the Starting signal, must, after the Starting signal hasbeen
lowered, go slowly forward towards the Advanced Starting signal,
but (except for station duties or shunting purposes) must only proceed as
far as is necessary to leave the last vehicle well clear of junction points andjunction
crossings, and, as far as practicable, within sight of the signalman.
The Advanced Starting signal must not be passed until it is lowered except
as provided in Rule 44.
(d).--In foggy weather or during falling snow, no train must be drawn
past the , starting signal towards the Advanced Starting signal except for
station duties or shunting purposes, or where special instructions are issued
to the contrary. ( O . 6897).
EXHIBITION OF BOARDS OUTSIDE SIGNAL-BOXES INDICATING THE
STATE OF THE ELECTRIC AND OTHER APPARATUS.
General Rule 56.
The last paragraph of R.C.H. Rule 56, which reads as follows,, has been
deleted from the N.E. Rule Book :—
The Signalman is responsible for exhibiting outside Ms signal-box
the board prescribed to indicate the state of the electric and other.aparatus conected with his signal-box, and he must immediately:
report any defect to the Station Master. ( O . 4820.),

N.E. Company's Exceptions to the R.C.H. Standard Rule Book.—Continued.
SEMAPHORE SIGNALS NOT IN USE.
General Rule 72 (b).
Semaphore signals not in use are distinguished by two pieces of wood
nailed over each other in the form of a cross (see below) :—
•
25
(0 6750_
DEFECTIVE SIGNALS, SIGNALLING DURING FOGGY WEATHER,
SIGNALS DURING RELAYING, ETC.
General Rules 73, 80, 81, 82, 85, 251 and 254.
On the North Eastern Line one detonator only, giving one report, is used
In carrying out these rules. When this detonator explodes engine drivern
must act in the same way as when two detonators are exploded. (O. 6744).
FOG SIGNALS.
General Rule 77 (d).
The month and year of manufacture is shewn on the Detonators, and
they must not be kept for use in Departments other than the Engineer'e
after they are three years old, nor in the Engineer's Department after they
are seven years old, but must be withdrawn from stock and returned tethe
Stores Department. The whole stock of Detonators must be thoroughly
examined at the beginning of March and September, and Detonators bearing
any signs of rust or appearing defective in any way, must be at once
,returned to the Stores Department. ( O . 2188).
ENGINE RUNNING ROUND A GOODS TRAIN TO REMOVE IT
FROM A RUNNING LINE.
General Rule 208.
When it is necessary for any engine to run round a train, other
than a passenger train, between two signal boxes, for the purpose of removing
It from any running line, or when a train has to be removed by another engine
attached to the rear, the train engine going forward, the train must first
come to a stand at the signal box in the rear, when the guard or shunter
must inform the signalman what is about to be done. When the train in

26
N.E. Company's Exceptions to the R.C.H. Standard Rule Book.--Corainofti,
Engine Running Round a Goods Train to Remove it from a
Running Line.—Continued.
at a stand clear of the first crossover road, the engine must be uncoupled,
and a lamp shewing a white light by night, or in foggy wealther or during
falling snow, must be placed by the guard or shunter on the eading end of
the vehicle from which the engine has been detached. In the event of
vehicles being attached to the end of the train from which the engine has
been uncoupled, the lamp must be transferred to the front ofi the leading
vehicle. The lamp must remain on the vehicle until the tram has been
- removed, to furnish evidence to the signalman, when the train is drawn
,
b
a
WORKING c OF TRAFFIC OF A DOUBLE LINE OVER A SINGLE LINE
k
OF RAILS DURING REPAIRS OR OBSTRUCTION.
,
t
General Rule 227 (b).
h On the North Eastern three detonators are placed on the rails by the
hand-signalmen
a
outside the distant signal applicable to the line upon which
Single line working is in operation.
t
i
t
i MAN IN CHARGE OF P. WAY, ETC., TO BE PROVIDED WITH
s
REGULATIONS AND WORKING TIME TABLE.
c
General Rule 240.
o There must be a Foreman, Ganger, or Leading Man for each gang of
Platelayers m or men engaged on the Permanent Way or on other works
affecting p the Running Lines, and the District Inspector of Permanent Way
or
l
of Works must take care that every such Foreman, Ganger, or Leading
Man and Ballast Guard under his control, is provided with, and has with
'him e when on duty, a copy of the current Working Time-Table 1300k, or
3oetiOO t of the book the Appendix thereto, etc., etc. ( O . 7056.)
e
.
(
FOREMAN, GANGER, OR LEADING MAN, TO WALK OVER
0
HIS LENGTH OF LINE.
,
6
General Rule 260 (a).
6 (a).--A platelayer from each length gang must walk over his length
of
2
line every morning on weekdays, and t
once '
5
where on Sundays, p unless a s sotherwise e n g instructed e r in writing by the Engineer ;
he must tighten up all keys and other fastenings that may be loose, examine
the t
) line, r alevel, i and n gauge s of the road, and state of the joints, marking, and,
if a
. necessary, r repairing e such as are defective. ( O . 5896).
r u n ,

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.
MOVEMENT OF LUGGAGE BARROWS AT STATIONS.
General Rule 6.
Every care should be exercised by the staff when moving barrows along
the platforms, and under no circumstances must a barrow, loaded in such a
' manner as to obstruct the view of the man wheeling it, be propelled, but in
such cases the barrows must be drawn. ( O . 227/17/1909).
PERSONS OTHER THAN DRIVERS OR FIREMEN RIDING ON ENGINES.
General Rule 20 (a).
Engine-drivers must record upon their mileage tickets the name and
of any persons who may ride upon their engines in addition to
the fireman.
When engines are returning light, and there is no other train or van in
which the Guard can ride, he may be allowed to travel on the engine to his
•home station without a pass.
When engines are proceeding from a shed to a station, other than their
:home station, in order to commence the day's work the guard may, when
•necessary, be allowed to travel on the engine without a pass.
PASSENGERS BY GOODS, MINERAL, AND CATTLE TRAINS.
General Rule 20.
Guards must not allow persons to travel by goods, mineral, or cattle trains
except those who have a pass or ticket specially endorsed as available by
goods, mineral or cattle trains, or those who have other special authority
to so travel.
Guards of such trains must ascertain that all persons travelling by their
'trains have proper passes, tickets, or authority to so travel, and report
irregularities.
DEALERS, DROVERS, AND OTHERS IN CHARGE OF LIVE STOCK.
General Rule 20.
Guards must not allow any persons other than those named in the Live
Stock Waybills to travel in charge of Live Stock, and the latter only on
production of proper Passenger Tickets, except men in charge of Live Stock
to or from Shows, who are allowed to travel free in charge of the Stock on
production of a Pass made out on the Live Stock Waybill.
The collection of the Passenger Tickets must be duly attended to by the
Station Master or Goods Agent at the stations to which the Drovers or other
persons are booked, but at the stations where the trains conveying the Live
Stock end their journeys the guards must collect the Passenger Tickets and
hand them to the proper officer of the Company.
CARETAKERS TRAVELLING BY GOODS TRAIN IN CHARGE
OF HEAVY MACHINERY, FORGINGS, ETC.
General Rules 20 and 111.
In the case of a caretaker with a private Locomotive Engine running in
steam and terminating its journey at some point on the North Eastern line
away from a Station, the free pass to be collected from the caretaker by the
Pilot Driver provided by the Company, and given up at the nearest Station.
.27

28 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Caretakers travelling by Goods Train in charge of Heavy Machinery,
Forgings, etc.—Continued.
If the journey commences at a. N.E. station and terminates at a station
off the N.E.R., the Pilot Driver must satisfy himself that caretaker has
free pass for the journey.
In the case of a caretaker travelling with a private Locomotive Engine
forwarded " cold," or with Heavy Machinery, Forgings, etc., to a point on
the North Eastern line, the free pass in the one ,case, or permit and Third
Class ticket in the other, must be. collected by the Guard of the train by
which the engine or machinery, etc., is conveyed, and be handed in by him
to the Agent at the nearest Station.
If the journey commences at a N.E. station and terminates at a station
off the nE.R., the Guard to be satisfied that caretaker has free pass,
permit, or third class ticket for the journey. ( O . 6304).•
COUPLING OR UNCOUPLING AUTO
-
General Rule 23.
Men must not go between an Auto-Car Engine and a Vehicle until both
have
CAR
been
E
brought
N G
to
I N
rest.
E S
( O . 7165).
A N D
V EINSTRUCTIONS H I C FOR L WORKING E S THE BRITISH STANDARD
VESTIBULE CONNECTION.
.
General Rules 23, and 174.
1.--The British standard type of vestibule connection is now fitted on
certain North Eastern Stock, and guards, shunters, and others, must make
themselves familiar with the method of connecting the vestibules by means.
of a clip lever at each side, which is secured in position by means of a link •
engaging with a slot in the lever and a pin at the side of the vestibule faceplate.
2.—Some of the North Eastern vehicles have additional fittings to enablethe
British Standard type of vestibule to be coupled with the Pullman type
as used on the E.C. and G.N. & N.E. Joint Stock. In this case the clip.
lever, which is mounted on the left hand of each vestibule face plate, is
hinged to a vertical pivot so that it may be rotated to reverse the position
of the clip. It is important to notice that the clip lever can only be rotated
to bring the clip out of or into the acting position when the tail end of the
lever is kept hanging as nearly as possible vertical, and close up to the sideof
the flexible gangway.
In cases where British Standard and Pullman Vestibule vehicles have to
work together and there is no Pullman attachment on the British Standard
to enable the connections to be properly secured, the vestibule doors must
be kept locked, and passengers not allowed to pass across. In the case of
Dining Car trains the Attendants must explain the position to passengers.,
in the portion cut off from the Dining Car, with a view of getting thosepassengers
who wish to take refreshment into the Dining Car portion.
(B. 915).
3. When detaching two vehicles fitted with British Standard Vestibules,
or one with British Standard and the other with Pullman Vestibules, care
,must be taken to turn the levers out of action before slackening the screw
coupling, and the end of the lever must be placed within the finger piece
provided for the purpose. ( B . 479).

General Instructions.—Continued. 2 9
Instructions tor Working the British Standard Vestibule Connection.
—Continued.
4.—The attachment to the face plate of the Pullman vestibule is made by
means of a clip which is pivoted to a wing plate fixed to each side of the
British Standard face plate. The clips must be rotated backward to enable
their jaws to clear the edges of the Pullman face plate. The coupling must
be well screwed up and the flexible gangway drawn forward to meet the
Pullman face plate. The clips must then be rotated by means of the short
pivoted levers, until their jaws engage behind the Pullman face plate at each
side. The clips are to be locked in position by dropping the levers into the
jaws provided for them, and by inserting the French key at the back of each
lever.
5.—The screw couplings must be well tightened up before connecting the
vestibules ; this is specially necessary when connecting to the older type of
E.C.J.S. with long buffer projection. When connecting vestibuled stock the
vehicles must be brought together and they must be absolutely at rest before
attempting to couple. When attaching the water shield to the end vehicle,
it is to be folded double, the pin at the top is to be engaged with the notch
at the top of the vestibule face plate, the pin near the clip lever is to be
next entered into the slot of the water shield, and the latter is to be opened
out on the central hinges, and folded back until the pivoted handle passes
-
tthe
shield in position. ( B . )
h
rINSTRUCTIONS
FOR WORKING CARRIAGES FITTED WITH BUCK-EYE
o AUTOMATIC COUPLINGS AND PULLMAN VESTIBULES.
u
General Rules 23, 112, and 113.
g
h 1.—All East Coast and G.N. & N.E. Joint Stock is fitted with " Buckeye "
Automatic couplings and is also provided with vestibule and movable side
t
buffers ; the couplings, together with the vestibule, are made to act both
has
buffers and couplers.
e
s
2.—Before coupling together two of these carriages, the vestibule shields
must be removed, and the side buffers must be fixed in the short position. (Thi
l
soperation is converse to the operation described in paragraph 6.) The
o-coupler
head on both vehicles must be raised to the horizontal position and the
t ,jaws of one coupler opened by pulling the chain which leads from the side of
ithe
coupling ; this pushes the vertical lock upwards and allows the jaw of the
n
,coupler to open. When vehicles are coupled on a curve the jaws of both
couplers must be opened.
t
h 3.--To couple it is only necessary to push the vehicles gently together,
e
-
f
wsure
the couplings have engaged properly, they must always be examined
a
h
by either looking or feeling underneath to see that
c
e (a) The vertical lock on each coupler is projecting below the coupler
head.
e
n
p
t (b) The jaws of the couplers are clasping each other.
l
h
The brake pipes, heating pipes, etc., may then be connected.
a
e Automatic couplings will not engage on an S " curve.
t
c
e
o
,
u
w
p
h
l

, 30 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Instructions for Working Carriages fitted with Buck-Eye Automatic
Couplings and Pullman Vestibules.—Continued.
Certain G.N. vehicles not fitted with the vertical lock work on to the
N.E. system, and to make sure the couplings on these vehicles have engaged
properly, vehicles so fitted must be drawn backwards or forwards a yard
or two.
4.--To uncouple, disconnect the wind-guards and electric wires from inside
the vestibule, also the brake pipes, and heating pipes, at the end of the vehicle,,
The engine driver must be told to set back slightly and the chain of one of the
couplers pulled ; this pushes the vertical lock upwards and unlocks the jaw'
which then opens and allows the vehicles to be separated.
5.--In coupling ordinary vehicles or engines to vehicles fitted with the'
automatic couplings, it is necessary first to place the•
. fitted with automatic couplings in the long or extended position.
buffers 6.--The vehicles o f are tfitted h with e a buffer (known as the saddle back
buffer). v e hTo i clengthen l e these s buffers, pull out the buffers as' far as they will
come, and take the " saddle " which will be found on the headstock and
place it on the spindle of the buffer with the lugs towards the buffer sockets.
Care must be taken to see that the " saddle " is placed fiat on the spindle.
so that it enters the groove on the buffer head.
7.--To couple an ordinary vehicle or engine to a carriage fitted with the
" Buckeye " combination coupler, slightly lift the coupler head, withdraw thehorizontal
pin, lower the head, and then replace the pin in the head. It is
essential to see that the pin end falls down to prevent it from working:
back. Place the screw coupling shackle on the " Buckeye " hook, and
screw up in the usual way.
8.—When an ordinary vehicle or an engine is coupled to a vehicle fitted
with Buck-eye couplings, the vestibule door adjacent to the ordinary vehicle.
or engine must always be locked.
9.--To replace the head ready for automatic coupling, withdraw the pin
from the coupler head, and lift the latter as high as it will go ; then place
the pin through the coupler head and draw-hook. It is essential to see that
the pin end falls down to prevent it from working back.
10.—The greatest care must be exercised in shunting this stock.
11.—The carriages must not be fly shunted under any circumstances, nor
must they be " horsed " unless there are two horses to each vehicle.
12.---The carriages must not be worked into bay sidings or other sidings
where there are disc signals or other projections without it having been first
ascertained that the carriages will clear, and they must not be bumped
against one another or against buffer stops.
For the instruction of the staff model automatic couplings are kept at
Newcastle, Darlington and York Stations. Arrangements can also be made
for a model to be loaned to any other station. ( H . 2743).
(See also instructions headed "Automatic Couplings separating " on
page 128).

General Instructions.—Continued. 3 1
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING EMERGENCY SCREW AND
EMERGERNCY LINK COUPLINGS.
General Rules 23 and 174.
An Emergency SCREW coupling is carried in the Brake compartments
of vehicles fitted with automatic Buckeye Couplers, and an Emergency
LINK coupling with one fiat and two oval links is carried on the headstock&
of all vehicles fitted with Buckeye Couplers.
When, from any cause, the Buckeye Couplers cannot be used, the Emergency
SCREW coupling must be used whenever possible and screwed up•
tightly to keep the vestibules together for use.
In the event of two vehicles fitted with Buckeye Couplers becoming
uncoupled, on no account must
- with a nthe y Buckeye a t t Coupler. e m p t
When Emergency SCREW or Emergency LINK couplings are used, the
bstation, e where they are put on the carriage, must advise by wire, the des-
mtination a station d where e the defective vehicle will be taken out of the train,
tand the staff o at the latter point must replace the Emergency SCREW'
coupling
c o
in the
u
Brake
p
compartment
l
or in the case of the Emergency LINK
coupling on the headstock of the vehicle to which it belongs.
METHOD e OF USING—
u p
a EMERGENCY
NATI:IRE gOP aCOACHES iTO
BE CourEING
METHOD OF C OU PLIN G.
n MISHAP. ,
JOINED, TO BE USED.
(I) One or both Two Coaches fitted SCREW. Drop couplers, extend side Buffers on one
couplers amiss. with Buckeye vehicle only, place short link of screw
Couplers. Coupling on hook first, then long link
on opposite hook and screw up as
tightly as possible.
(2) One or both
couplers amiss
and draw-hook
broken,
Ditto. LINK. If sufficient hook is left on the vehicle
with the broken draw-hook to hold
coupler up, leave it up, extend side
buffers on both vehicles, place Emergency
link coupling on sound drawhook
and flat link in slot of knuckle
of Buckeye Coupler on opposite vehicle,
drop coupling pin through coupler and
fiat link. Lock the vestibule doors on
each vehicle. If there is not sufficient
hook left to support coupler head, it
must hang on link coupling.
(3) Draw-hook
broken on
Buckeye
vehicle.
One vehicle fitted
with Buckeye
Coupler and one
ordinary Screw
coupling.
LINK.
•
If sufficient hook is left on Buckeye
vehicle to support coupler-head, fix
latter in horizontal position. If there
is not sufficient hook loft to support
coupler-head, it must hang on link
coupling. Extend side buffers, place
Emergency link coupling on draw-hook
and fiat link in slot of knuckle of
Buckeye Coupler, drop coupling pin
through coupler and fiat link.
(4) Broken or One vehicle fitted SCREW. SHORTEN SIDE BUFFERS ON BUCK -
defective Screw Buckeye Coupler EYE VEHICLE, place short link of
Coupling on and one ordinary SCREW Coupling on first, then long
ordinary
vehicle.
Screw coupling, link on opposite hook, screw up as
tightly as possible.
- -
(H. 2657).

32 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
INSTRUCTIONS IN REGARD TO THE USE OF THE NEW
COUPLING ON COACHING STOCK.
General Rules 23 and 174.
New Coaching Stock is being fitted with buffers 1 ft. 10 ins, in length,
and couplings to correspond. When vehicles fitted with these buffers and
couplings require to be coupled to stock fitted with the old type of buffer
(1 ft. 11 ins.) and coupling, the new coupling must in all cases be used. The
latter can be distinguished by the difference in the attachment of the
coupling ball shank and by the coupling ball being pear-shaped instead of
round, thus :—
w C U t I- 4
- a L17=, 4 ! D 1.
3
"• L . I
P 4
WAGONS BUILT TO COACHING STOCK REQUIREMENTS WITH
BUFFERS OF 1 ft. /V, in. PROJECTION.
General Rules 23 and 174.
A number of wagons fitted for Express Freight train working are fitted
with buffers with 1 ft. 8i in. projection (instead of 1 ft. 11 in.) and couplings
'to suit.
For Passenger train working, when wagons or other vehicles with the
different length of buffers come together, the shorter coupling must be
used. ( T . 13194-10-08).
FOREIGN STOCK COUPLED TO N.E. STOCK.
General Rules 23 and 174.
The L. & N.W. Co.'s couplings must be used when attaching L. & N.W.
-vehicles to North Eastern trains, and when attaching North Eastern vehicles
to L. & N.W. trains.
When other Companies' Stock is coupled to N.E. Stock, the coupling on
zthe N.E. vehicle should be used, unless the latter coupling will not draw the
buffers together, in which case the foreign couplings may be used.

Geneva! Instructions.—Continued. 3 3
INSTRUCTIONS FOR WORKING COVVHEAD COUPLINGS FITTED
TO TYNENIOUTH ELECTRIC STOCK.
General Rules 23 and 174.
1.—The Tynemouth electric stock is fitted with a non-automatic centre
coupling of the " Cowhead " type.
2.—The coupling heads act both as a coupling and a buffer—there being
no side buffers on the vehicles.
3.—In coupling the shunter, or man engaged in the work, must not under
any circumstances stand between the coaches.
In coupling electric parcels motor vans to ordinary railway vehicles the
shunters must under no circumstances stand between the vehicles nor couple
them together until they come to rest.
, 4.--To CO uple.—A screw coupling must be in one only of the two heads
about to be joined together, and the pin must be out of the other head. The
shunter, taking up a position in the gangway of a carriage, must hold up the
end of the screw coupling until the vehicles are pushed together, the end
must then be dropped and the remaining pin pushed through the head and
the link, care being taken to see that both pins are far enough through to
ensure that the drop-end falls down to prevent pin from working out. •
The coupling must then be screwed up tightly, by means of the bar
provided for that purpose, and when tight, the screw must be in such a
position that the bar drops down through a hole in the centre of the plain
portion of the screw and through a hole in the coupling head, thus securing
the coupling from becoming slack.
The brake pipes may then be connected in the usual way, and the electrical
connections, as provided for in Rule Book for electric working.
Uricouple.—Disconnect brake pipes and electrical connections and
slacken the screw sufficiently to withdraw one pin. After taking out one
pin the coaches may be drawn apart.
6.—Spare screw couplings must be placed in the boxes in gangways
provided for that purpose and must not be left lying on the floor.
7.—Care must be exercised in shunting this stock fitted with " Cowhead "
couplings only. They must not be shunted against ordinary vehicles or
against buffer stops which are unprovided with a centre buffing block.
UPLING OF 'WAGONS TO TENDERS OR ENGINE'S.
General Rules 23 and 206 (a).
In coupling wagons to tenders, Or, where engines are running tender
-.
fi must be made use of, and not the wagon coupling, , except in cases where
rscrew
couplings are fitted on the tenders or engines.
s
t,
t
o
_

34 G e n e r a l nstructions.—Continued.
DOUBLE COUPLING OF WAGONS.
General Rule 23 (i).
Wagons loaded with traffic from Stations, Sidings or Works on the North
Eastern line must not be double coupled. In case of long loads, where
,necessary to shorter couple, the special short couplings must be used.
(T. 23552)..
COUPLING LARGE WAGONS TO SMALL WAGONS.
General Rule 23.
When large wagons are coupled to small wagons, the coupling belonging
the larger wagon should be used, except in cases where the only coupling.
on the large wagon is a screw coupling. ( T . 13101-5-0S.)
USE OF BRAKE STOCKS AND SHUNTING POLES.
General Rules 24 and 184.
Shunting poles must only be used for the purpose for which' they areprovided,
and must not be used instead of brake sticks except in cases-
,of emergency.
Riding on shunting poles is strictly prohibited. ( O . 1796.)
Guards, Shunters and others concerned should note that Traffic Department
poles must not be left upon shunting or train engines. (O. 3401).
A supply of brake sticks must be kept at all points where they are regularly.
required for use by the staff, to avoid the necessity of carrying brake stickgabout
the sidings as well as shunting poles.
SERVANTS NOT TO PLACE THEMSELVES IN POSITIONS OF DANGER„
General Rule 24.
The special attention of engine cleaners and others who are engaged in,
working amongst locomotives is drawn to the importance of being careful
not to place themselves in positions of danger, such as standing in front of
a buffer when at work. Drivers and firemen, when engaged moving engines
In the vicinity of sheds where other engines are likely to be standing, upon
which persons may be engaged at work, must bring their engines to a stand,
at least three feet clear of the buffers of other engines.

General Irstructions.—Continued. 3 5
•Signals fixed near to one signal box and worked from another.
General Rule 35.
List of places where, owing to the Distant signal being fixed at less
than the usual distance from the Home Signal, the Distant Signal worked
-
the Distant Signal worked
ffrom
the Advance Signal Box lam been lowered •
r The arrangement only applies during the time the rear box named in the
third column is open.
(O. 7379 & S174.)
o
m Box from which Distant signal is
Box at which Distant signal must
worked which is fixed at less Up or Down be kept at Danger until the Up or Down
t than the usual distance from Distant Distant signal from the Advance Distant
the Home signal.
signal.
signal-box has been lowered.
signal.
h
Norm anion Lind Newcastle.
Normanton, e Altof ts Junction • Up tWest Riding Colliery
Up
Castleford r Station •
Down *Castleford Gates •
Down
-Castleford Gates
Up *Castleford Station
Up
Milford e Junction • Down Goods Milford Junction South • Down Goods
•Milford a Junction East • Down Goods Milford Junction • Down Goods
•• S o u t h • • Up Goods Milford Junction • Up Goods
r P „ North • • Down Milford Junction • Down
Duplicate Duplicate
Milford b Junction • Up Passenger Milford Junction East Up
Milford o Junction South Up tiMilford Junction Up
from Selby
Milford x Junction South Up Wilford Junction • Up Duplica4e
Church i Fenton, South Up *Church Fenton, North • Up
Church Fenton, North Up *Church Fenton, West • Up
.Church s Fenton, North Down *Church Fenton, South • Down
York, South Points Down Leeds tYork, Dringhomfm Down Leeds
York t South Points Down tYork Dringhoubes Down
o
Doncaster. Doncaster.
-
Up York, Clifton Up
YThirsk,
b Middle Up *Thirsk, North Up
o
Thirsk, e South • Up *Thirsk, Middle Up
Thirsk, Green Lane Up *Thirsk, South • Up
rThirsk,
k South • Down *Thirsk, Green Lane Down
k Thirsk, Middle Dpwn *Thirsk, South • Down
Thirsk, e North • • Down *Think, Middle • • Down
WNorthallerton,
p
South • • Down *Northallerton, Longlands • Down
aNorthallerten,
High Junction • Down tNorthallerton, South Junction. Down
tNorthallerton,
t
South Junction • Up *Northallerton, High Junction • Up
Northallerton,
e a
Longlands • Up *Northallerton, South Up
Darlington, Parkgate Junction • Up *Springfield • • Up
r t •• N o r t h Junction Up *Parkgate Junction Up
w
PP S o u t h Junction Up *North Junction Up
d •• C r o f t Junction Up *South Junction Up
o
a 79 S o u t h junction Down *Croft Junction Down
r •77 N o r t h Junction • Down *South Junction • Down
k n IP Parkgate Junction • Down *North Junction • Down
Ferryhill, No. 2 • • Up Team tFerryhlil, No. 1 • Up Team
s g
Valley Valley
• Ferryhill, e No. 1 Down Team tiFerryhill, No. 2 • Down Team
Valley Valley
Forryhill, r No. 3 Up Wainsforth Colliery Up
Durham, u North Down tDurham, South • Down
Durham, North Up i'Durham, Crook Hall Up
Durham, n South Up tDurham, North • Up
Durham, Crook Hall Down tnurham, North Down
•irtley, t North • Outer and tBirtley Junction Down
-
i
I
l
* This arrangement only applies
n
to through trains not booked to stop at the
n respective stations.
t The Distant cannot lie lowered e until released by the Signalman in advance.
r
D
o
w

36 G e n e r a l hstructions.—Continued.
Signals fixed near to one box and worked from another.—Continued.
Box from which Distant signal is
worked which is fixed at less
than the usual distance from
the Home signal.
Up or Down
Distant
signal.
Box at which Distant signal must
be kept at Danger until the
Distant signal from the Advance
signal-box has been lowered.
Normanton a :id Newcast le.—Continued.
Birtley, Junction • • • Outer and tBirtley, North . .
Inner Up
King Edward Bridge Junction • Up Team tGateshead Junction
Valley
King Edward Bridge Junction • U p tGreensfield Junction
King Edward Bridge Junction . Up from tGrothisfield Junction
High Street
Ferryhill and Newcastle, via Leamside.
Manors Junction U p Tynemouth tArgyle Street.
Argyle Street • D o w n Main tManors Junction
Argyle Street • D o w n tManors Junction
Main to •
Tynemouth
Argyle Street • D o w n tManors Junction
Tynemouth
to Down
Main.
Argyle Street • T y n e m o u t h
Down
tManors Junction •
Morpeth Station • U p tMorpeth Level Crossing
Morpeth, Level Crossing
Alnmouth, South •
D
U
o w
p
n *Morpeth Station .
tAlnmouth, North
Alnmouth, North • • D o w n tAlrunouth, South •
Tweedmouth, North • D o w n tTweedmouth, South
Tweedmouth, South • U p tTweedmouth, North
Tweedmouth, South . U p from tTweedmouth, North
'Kelso
Alamo uth and Al nwick-
Alnwick Station U p tAlnwick, North . •
Alnwick Station . . . Down tShilbottle Colliery Junction
New castle and Tynemou th, via Backworth.
Manors, North •
Down tManors Junction •
Tynemouth
to B. & T.
.
Branch
Up or Down
Distant
signal.
Up planors North •
to B. & T.,
Branch.
Tynemouth Up
* This arrangement only applies to through trains not booked to stop at the.
respective stations.
t The Distant cannot be lowered until released by the Signalman in advance.
t Only applies to Express Passenger and Fish trains.
Up'
Up Team
Valley
Up
Up from
High Street
Leamside Station . • • Down Main *Auckland . Junction. D o w n Main
. Ponshaw Junction . • Down tPenshaw Station • D o w n
Passenger assenger
Ponshaw Junction D o w n tPonshaw Station •
Goods G o o
D
d
o w
s
n
Penshaw Station • Up from tPenshaw Junction •
Newcastle N e w c a
U
s
p
t l
from
e
Penshaw Station • Up Goods tPenshaw Junction •
line. l i n
U p
e
Goods
Pelaw Junction U p tPelaw Station
Leamside L e a m
U
s i
p
d e
Pelaw Station F r o m tPelaw Junction
Leamside L e a m
F
s i
r
d
o
e
m
- Do wn D o w n
High Street Junction U p tGateshead Junction
Leamside L e a m
New castle and Berwick.
s
U
i
p
d e
Newcastle No. I
Manors Junction •
U
U
p Main and Manors Junction
Up Tynem'th -
p Main tArgyle Street.
North
Up Main and
tJp Tynem'th
Up Main
North
Up
Tynemouth
Down Main
Down
Main to
Tynemmith
Down
Tynemouth.
to Down
Main.
Tynemoutb,
Down
Up
Down
Up
Down
Down,
Up
Up from
• Kelso
Up
• Down

Signals fired near to one lacx id worked from another.—Continued.
Box from which Distant signal is
worked which is fixed at less
than the usual distance from
the Home signal.
Newcastle and Tynem
Manors, North
Manors' JesmondNorth
Prudhoe Station'
Corby Gates
Pelaw Station
Pelaw Junction
Pelaw Station
Pelaw Junction
South Shields, East
Sunderla
Ryhope Colliery Junction
Ryhope Station
Sunderland
Diamond Hall Junction
Millfield
Penshaw Station
Durham, Belly Mill Junction
Hunwick Colliery Junction.
Bishop Auckland North
Bishop Auckland North
General instructions.—Continued.
ewca
Pelaw
,•
Up or Down
Distant
signal.
outh, E
Down
Main to
B. & T.
Branch
Up
Down
stle and Ca
Up
Up •
and South
From
Shields
Down
Up to
Stmderland
From
Sunderland
Down
Down to
Shields
Down
nd and We
Down
Up
and Bishop
Up
Down
Up from
Sunderland
Down
Down
Down Pass.
DownMineral
Box at which Distant signal must
be kept at Danger until the
Distant signal from the Advance
signal-box has been lowered.
ackworth.—Continued,
tManors Junction
tJesmond
Planors North
rlisle.
tPrudhoe Colliery
tWetheral Station
Shields.
tPelaw Junction
Pelaw Station
tPelaw Junction
tPe
-
tSouth Shields, West
la
Held. w
SByhope
Station
*Byhope Colliery *
t
Junction
aAuckland.
ttMillfield i
o
tDiamond Hall Junction
tPenshaw Junction
n
tDearness Valley Junction
tHunwick Station
tBishop Auckland East
tBishop Auckland East
Durham and Water houses.
Durham, Belly Mill Junction Down I
Down
Seaham Colliery, Seaham
Seaham, Dawdon Crsg.
-
Sea ham and H artlepeol.
D
Down eSeaham,
Dawdon Crsg.
p aSeaham
Colliery, Seaham Jet.
Down
Up
Barnard Castle, East.
r
Darli ngton and T ebay. n
- etEarnard
Castle, West
Passenger U s
Tip
Bishop Auckland, West
Darling' ton and p El
Down
s
V
tBishop Auckland, East
a
l
Down
l
* This arrangement only applies to through e trains not booked to stop at the
respective stations.
y
t The Distant cannot be lowered until released by the Signalman in advance.
J
u
n
c
t
i
o
37
Up or Down
Distant
signal.
Down
Main to
B. & T.
Branch
Up
Down
Up
Up
From
Shields
Down
Up
From
Sunderland
Down
Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up from
Sunderland
Down
Down
Down
Down

38 G e n e r a l nstructions.—Continued.
Signals fixed near to one box and worked from another.—Continued.
Box from which Distant signal is
worked which is fixed at less
than the usual distance from
the Home signal.
Leeds
Holbeck, Castleton Bridge
Holbeck, Armley Junction
Arthington, South Junction
tArthington South *Junction
•Arthington, North Junction
Starbeck, South
Starbeck, South
Stonef all
Northallerton Low Gates
North Shore Jet., Stockton.
Norton South Junction
West Hartlepool, Newburn Jan..
West Hartlepool, Newburn jotn..
West Hartlepool, Stranton Jan.
West Hartlepool, Church Street
Tip or Down
Distant
signal. •
and Hartle
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Down from
Borobridge
Road
Up Main
Up Main
Down Main
Up Main
Down
Down Main
Staddlelhorpe and
Boothferry Road Junction
Goole Station
. ! Tp
Down
Box at which Distant signal must
be kept at Danger until the
Distant signal from the Advance
signal-box has been lowered.
pool.
Holbeck, Armley Junction
Castleton Bridge
Arthington, North Junction
Arthington Long Siding
Arthington, Long Siding
*Starbeck, North
Stonef all
Starbeck, South
$Northallerton Low Jan.
Stockton Bank
Norton East Junction
Cliff House Crossing
Stranton Junction
Newburn Junction
Stranton Junction
Thorne.
*Goole Station
*Boothferry Road Junction
•
Up orMown
Distant
signal.
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Down from
Borobridge
Road
Up Main
Up Main
Down Main
Up Main
Down
Down Main
Up
Down
Leeds and H ulL
Cross Gates, East Up *Cross Gates North Up
Cross Gates, West Up *Cross Gates, East Up
Cross Gates, Killingbeck Up *Cross Gates, West Up
Micklefield, Junction Down *Peckfield Colliery Down
Staddlethorpc, East • Down *Staddlethorpe Junction Down
Staddlethorpe, Junction Up *Staddlethorpe, East Up
Brough, East • Down *Brough, West Down
Brough, West Up *Brough, East. Up
Hessle, Haven Junction Down *Hessle Station Down
Hessle Station Up *Hessle Haven Junction Up
York and Harrogate.
Knaresborough Goods Junction U p *Knaresborough Station Up
York and Scarborough
York, Bootham Junction Down Y o r k , Burton Lane Down
York, Burton Lane Up Y o r k , Bootham Junction Up
Melton Station Down *Malton, West Down
Melton, East Down *Malton Station Down
Melton Station Up *Mahon, East Up
Malton, West Up *Mahon, Station Up
Drifh eld and Mal t011• •
Driffield Junction Down from
Mallon
Driffield West Down from
Malton
riffield and Selby.
Driffield Junction Down from Driffield West Down from
Selby Selby
Ye rk and Beverley.
Market Weighton, West Up *Market Weighton, East Up
Beverley, Cherry Tree Up *Beverley Junction Down
* This arrangement only applies to through trains not booked to stop at the
respective stations.
For Express trains only. t When Artaington North is closed.

Signals fixed near to one box and worked from anothor.—Continued.
Box from which Distant signal is
worked which is fixed at less
than the usual distance from
the Home signal.
Naburn, South •
Naburn, North
Selby, North •
Selby, Barlby Junction
Selby, Barlby •
Selby, BarP3y
Selby, Barlby •
Arksey, Shaftholme Junction
Hu
Beverley, Cherry Tree Crossing
Beverley Station
Beverley, Fleming Gates
Beverley Station
Beverley, Cherry Tree Crossing
Beverley Junction
Driffield, Wansford Crossing
Driffield, North
Driffield, Wansford Crossing
Driffield Junction
Hunrnanby Depot Crossing
(Gate Box)
Dansom Lane
Wilmington Junction
Southcoates Junction
Wilmington, East
Grosmont Station
General instructions.—Continued.
Yo
Hu
Hu II and Hor nsea.
RiHing
Swinton and
Frickley Colliery
Moorthorpe, South
Hickleton, North
Hickleton, South •
Pontefract, South •
Pontefract Junction
Moorthorpe, South
Moorthorpe Station Junction
South Kirkby, W.R. & G.
Up or Down
Distant
signal.
rk and on
Up
Down
Down
through
Down
main and
duplicate
Down
Up York
line
Up Hull
line
Up
and Sea
Up
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
and With
Up
Down
Down
Up Stoneferry Junction
ton and W hitby.
Down Deviation Junction
Knottingley
Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Down
Down
Box at which Distant signal must
be kept at Danger until the
Distant signal from the Advance
signal-box has been lowered.
caster.
*Najourn, North
*Naburn, South
*Selby, South
*Selby, Barlby
*Selby, North
Selby, Barlby Junction •
Selby, Barlby Junction
Mess, Joan Croft Junction
'(Up Home and Distant signals
to be kept at danger until
speed of approaching train
reduced to 4 mile an hour).
(O. 8174).
mar.
*Beverley Junction
*Beverley, Cherry Tree Crossing.
*Beverley Station
*Beverley, Fleming Gates
*Beverley Station
*Beverley, Cherry Tree Crossing
*Driffield Junction
*Driffield, Wansford Crossing
*Driffield, North
*Driffiold, Wansford Crossing
Hunmanby Station
ernsca.
southcoates Junction
Sculcoates
Dansom Lane
Joint Line.
tMoorthorpe, South
tFrickley Colliery
-
M-
iMtPontefract
Junction
*Pontefract, South
ci
tMoorthorpo Station Junction
kc
tMoorthorpe, South •
lk
tSouth Kirkby Colliery, S. & K.
el
te
ot
no
, n
S,
oN
uo
39
Up or Down
Distant
signal.
Up
Down
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
(O. 3147).
Up
Down
Down
Up
Down
Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Down
Down
* This arrangement only applies to through trains not booked to stop at the
respective stations. -
The Distant cannot be lowered until released by the Signalman in advance.

40 G e n e r a / instruct/ans.—Continued.
;k1OMENCLATURE OF SIGNALS.
General Rules 39 to 42.
Signalmen and others in charge of signal boxes are hereby instructed that
in. carrying out Rules 39 to 42, both inclusive, the " Home " signal means
the first " stop " signal within the distant.
These signals are sometimes called " Outer Home," " Intermediate," or
" Intermediate Home."
(This does not apply to "Outer Home" signals fixed at a distance of not less
than 400 yards from the " Inner Home" signal, where special Instructions in
regard to the acceptance of trains are in force.) ( O . 2390).
RACKING SIGNALS.
General Rules 47 and 146.
When a driver moves in obedience to the lowering of a Backing signal
he must not assume that the line is clear as far as the next stop signal. The
lowering of a backing signal only means that the points are in the proper
position and the driver must be prepared to stop short of any obstruction
he may meet with before he reaches the next stop signal in the same way
as when he enters a station platform in obedienee to the lowering of a Callingon
arm. ( O . 3671).
STANDARD CODE OF OELL, GONG, OR HORN SIGNALS
DURING SHUNTING OPERATIONS.
General Rules 50 (a) and 52 (a).
The following code must be strictly carried out during shunting operations
in foggy weather :—
Shunting Movements. N o . of Blasts.
Go forward 1
Set back 2
Stop 3
Ease coupling 4
(O. 6746.)
DETENTION AT HOME AND sTARTING SIGNALS.
General Rule 55.
1.--The Rule must be strictly carried out at all places, and the following'
additional general instructions observed, except in the cases referred to
in paragraph 6.
When, however, a train calling at a station or siding occupies a running
line solely for the purpose of performing station duties or to attach or detach
traffic, the train is not considered to be detained by signals, and Rule 55
does not come into operation until the train is ready to depart, and then
not until it has been detained three minutes where that margin is given
by the rule.
2.—The Guard, Shunter;or Fireman., must intimate clearly to the Signalman
when he goes to the box, the class of train which requires protection, and
the signal at which it is standing at the time.

General Instructions.—Continued. 4
Detention Et Homo and Etarting Signals.--Continued.
3.—It will not be necessary for the Guard, Shunter, or Fireman, when he
goes to the signal-box to actually enter the box if the attention of the Signalman
can be obtained without doing so, and he can be verbally advised of the
position of the train.
4.—Each signal-box has been supplied with lever clips in order to act as a.
reminder, and in accordance with clause (f) of Rule 55, it will not be necessary
for the Guard, Shunter, or Fireman, to remain at the signal-box, but he must
return to the train as soon as possible after having received a verbal assurance
from the Signalman that the lever clip has been placed on the lever operating
the signal protecting the train or at which the train is standing.
Signalmen must under such circumstances give the necessary assurance to
the Guard, Shunter, or Fireman, as soon as possible, in order that he may
return to his train and thereby afterwards avoid unnecessary delay.
The signalmen at each box will be advised of the number of lever clips
which should be provided at their box, and will be held responsible for
advising the Station Master when the number of clips actually in the box
is not in accordance with the number shewn to be supplied, or when they
beeome damaged or lost. The Station Master must at once advise the
District Superintendent.
5.—The Guard in charge of the train must in all cases satisfy himself that
the man whose duty it is to go to the box has done so, and if there is any
doubt owing to the position of the train as to which of the men is nearest to
the signal-box, the Guard in -uch circumstances must proceed to the box
if he is unable to satisfy himself that the Fireman has already done so.
In the case of a Light Engine on which are travelling the driver, fireman
and guard or shunter, the guard or shunter must carry out the duty of
going to the signal box.
6.—Exceptions
(a) At signals worked from boxes on passenger lines where the Block
Telegraph Regulations are nct in operation. (see page 236).
(b) At signals worked from boxes where the Block Telegraph Regulations
are in operation, but where in order to meet working requirements
certain modifications of the usual Block Regulations are allowed.
(see pages 237-240).
(c) At signals worked from boxes on lines over which passenger trains
do not run and where the Absolute Block Regulations are not in
force.
N.B.—Clauses (b) and (c) apply so far only as the signals applicable to the
portions of line exempted from Block working are concerned, but at signals
giving admission to the exempted area Rule 55 must be carried out for the
protection of the train which is at the time standing in a section worked in
accordance with the absolute block regulations.

42
(f)
General Instructions.—Continued.
Detention at Home and Starting Signals.---(Continued).
(d) At signals worked from boxes on the Electrified area.
(e) At signals where Track Circuits are provided a rid which
are not otherwise exempted under clauses (a), (b), (c),
or (d.) (See list on pages 43 to 52).
At signals where other appliances of a special character
are provided to indicate to the Signalman that a train is
standing at a signal. (See list on pages 53 and 54).
7.—An indicator plate as shewn in the diagram is fixed on
the posts of the signals referred to in clause (e) above at
which it will not be necessary for the Guard, Shunter, or
Fireman to go to the signal-box to remind the Signalman of
the position of the train or engine.
8.--At the signals referred to in clause (f) above, electrical communication
between the signals and the signal boxes is provided. A
list of the signals where this apparatus is fixed is shewn on pages 53 and 54,
and the following instructions must be strictly carried out when trains are
detained at any of these signals.
9.—Immediately upon coming to a stand, the Guard, Shunter, or Fireman
must at once press the ringing key. This will cause a bell to ring in the
signal box, and will also operate an indicator in the box shewing " Train
waiting at signal." On receipt of the bell signal- at the signal box, the
Signalman will acknowledge this by repeating, and if such acknowledgment
is not received immediately, it must be concluded that the apparatus
has failed, and the man whose duty it is to io to the box must at once
proceed there in accordance with Rule 55.
10.--The indicator in the signal box can only be restored to the normal
position by the lowering of the signal giving permission for the train to
proceed.
certain signals a similar arrangement to that indicated in
paragraph 8, is provided, but in addition, a trembling bell controlled by
the block instrument is• fixed in the signal, box, and if at any of these
places a signalman finds it necessary to allow a train to draw forward to
the signal indicated in order to clear the junction and the
" Train out of Section" signal is given to the rear box, the
trembling bell will continue to ring until either the block
instrument is again restored to the " Train on Line " position
or the signal is lowered to allow the train to proceed.
12.—An indicator plate as shewn in the diagram will be
fixed on the posts of the signals referred to in clause 8, at
which it will not be necessary for the Guard, Shunter, or Fireman
to go to the signal-box to remind the Signalman of the position
of the train or engine, unless the apparatus is out of order.
A white enamelled plate bearing the following instructions
will also be f, xed either on the signal post or on a special
post provided for the purpose :—
Train indicator in signal box.
Press key and wait reply.
(O. 1'6
7
6).

General instructions.—Continued. 4 3
Detention at llonle and Starting Cignals.—Continued.
List of Signals reierred to in Clause (e) on page 42, where Track Circuits
are provided and on which an indicator plate is fixed.
STATION.
Normanton
Castleford
Burton Salmon
5,
Church Fenton
Bolton Percy
11 1 3
11 •
Copmanthorpe
York
Northallert on
Otterington
Danby Wiske
Cowton
Croft Spa
31
11
11
13
11
Darlington
13
Ferry
"
hill
Box.
Normanton
West Riding •
f • Colliery 1
Whitwood Junct.
--
Junction.
•
North
Station
Station
Clifton
Poppleton Junct.
Castle Hills
South Jet. 1
Station
Wiske Moor
Eryholme Junct.
Station
Station
"
Black Banks
. Jet.
11
South Junction
1,
•
North Junction
Parkgate Junct.
11
Springfield
1
No. 31
No. 1
, •
Coxhoe Junction
Tursdale Junction.
SIGNAL.
and Newcastle.
Down Starting Main.
Down Advanced Starting Main.
Down Outer Home.
Up Starting to Normanton.
Down Advanced Starting Main.
Up Advanced Starting Main.
Down Outer Home.
Up Advanced Starting Branch.
Up Outer Home—Leeds line.
Up Outer Home—Normanton line.
Down Outer Home—Normanton line.
Up Advanced Starting—Leeds
Up Advanced Starting—Normanton line
Down Outer Home—Leeds line.
Down Outer Home—Normanton line.
Up Outer Home.
Up Advanced Starting Main.
Down Main Advanced Starting.
Down Slow Advanced Starting.
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Main Starting.
Up Slow Starting.
Up Main Advanced Starting.
Up Slow Advanced Starting.
Down Main Advanced Starting.
Down Slow Advanced Starting.
Up Home.
Up Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Starting.
Down Advanced Starting.
Down Home Main to Independent.
Down Home Main.
Down Branch Advanced Starting.
Down Main Outer Home.
Up Main Outer Home.
Up Main Outer. Home.
Down Main Outer Home.
Up Main Outer Home.
Down Main Starting.
Up Home.
Down Starting.
Up Main Advanced Starting.
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Home.
Down Advanced Starting.
Main Up Starting.

,
4
4
Croxdale
Durham
,1
!
,
3
77
,)
2,
STATION.
Plawsworth
Chester-le-Street •
Birtley • •
•
Lamesley
Gateshead
13
Ferryhill
,, •
Pelaw • •
Gateshead
Annitsford
Cramlington
Stannington
Gummi instrantions.—Continued.
Betenticil at Hems and Starting Signals.—Continued.
List of Track pircuits.—Continued.
Box.
Normanton
Browney Colliery
Bridge House Jct.
South
North
Crook Hall
Newton Hall jct.
2,
Kimbles worth
Colliery Jct.
Station
Ouston Junction
Junction
))
North
Station
King Edward Bge.
Junction
Ferryhill and
No. 2 •
No. 1
Tursdale Junction.
Junction
Park Lane junct.
St. James Bridge
Newcastle
Dudley Colliery •
Dam Dykes •
Station
Station
Clifton Crossing
,1
•
SIGNAL.
and Newcastie.—Continued.
Up Advanced Starting.
•Down Starting.
Up Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
Fast line Up Outer Home,
Slow line Up Outer Home.
Fast line—Up Home.
Slow line—Up Home.
Up Fast Line Starting.
Up Slow Line Starting.
Team Valley Up Outer Home.
Team Valley Down Advanced Starting.
Up Starting.
Down Advanced Starting.
Slow Line to Main Up Home.
Down Slow line Starting.
Up Fast Intermediate Home.
Up Fast Home.
Up Fast line Advanced Starting.
Down Fast line Advanced Starting.
Down Slow Advanced Starting.
Down Starting.
Down Home.
Slow Line Up Home.
Up Starting.
From Gateshead West Home.
Gateshead West to Newcastle Home.
Main Down Home.
Newcastle (via Leairside).
Up Leamside Starting.
Up Home.
Up Leamside Advanced Starting.
Leamside Up Advanced Starting.
Down Home from Leamside.
Up Advanced Starting.
Up Starting.
Down Starting.
and Berwick.
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Starting.
Down Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Starting.

Morpeth
,1
12
STATION.
Pegswood
Chevington
Acklington
Warkworth
Alnmouth
Little Mill
52
,1
Beal •
Tweedmouth
Broomhill
•Almvick
'Coldstream
Newcastle
General Enstructions.—Continued.
Detention st Home arid starting Signals.—Continued.
List of Track Circuits.—Continued.
22 • , 1
South
•
Station
,7 •
Station
Station
,, •
Amble Junction
Station
Southside
South
Wooden Gate
Crossing
Station
• )2
• Station
South
P,
Box.
Newcastle
Stamford Crossing.
Broomhill and
Station
Alnmouth
Station Junction
Tweed ri30 utti
Station
No. 3
)1
Newcastle
,2 •
•
Forth junction
7a
2) ) )
73
Works
Station
Junction
,)
)2
SIGNAL.
and Berwick.--continued.
Up Starting.
Do %s
, South n Box Up Home (Controlled).
Down Home.
H
Up Advanced Starting.
oDown
Main Advanced Starting.
mDown
Slow Advanced Starting.
eUp
Main Advanced Starting.
Up Slow Advanced Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Starting.
Up Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
Up Independent Advanced Starting.
Up Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Main Advanced Starting.
Down Starting.
Main Up Starting.
Down Advanced Starting.
Down Outer Home.
Down Home.
Amble.
Up Outer Home.
and Ainwick-
Ainmouth Up Advanced Starting.
and Kelso.
Up Outer Home.
•
45
and Carlisle.
West Up Passenger to Platforms Home.
West Up to Down Passenger Home.
West Up Passenger to Up Goods Home.
Up Home.
Up Passenger to Up Goods ,Home.
Up Starting.
Up Passenger to Up Goods Starting.
Down Home.
Down Starting.
Down Advanced Starting.
Down Advanced Startinft
Down Home.
Main Down Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.

46
7)
Newi;urn
STATION.
Blaydon
Stocksfield
Riding Mill
Corbridge
Haydon Bridge
,2 , 2
Haltwhistle
Brampton Junction
Carlisle -
Scotswood
Lemington
North Wylam
Swalwell
Rowlands Gill
,)
,P
High Westwood
,) 3 3
Blachill
,2
•
Witt on Gilbert
Aldin Grange.
Durham
Ashingt on
Gateshead
-
•
•
General instructions.—Continued.
Detention at Nome and Starting Signals.—Continued.
List of Track Circuits.—Continued.
Newcastle and
Scotswood Bge. Jc.
Station
Station
Widehangh East
Widehaugh West
East
West
Haydon Bridge
Colliery
Station
Brampton Fell
Hell Beck
London Road Jct.
Seotswood and
Junction
Walbottle
Station
3,
Station
51
3
Westwood ) Col. Jc.
South
P)
PI
Box.
• Seotswood and
Station
Station
•
Station
Baxter Wood No. 1
Belly Mill Junct.
Bedlington
Hirst Junction
King Edward Bridge
King Edward Bge.
Junction
SIGNAL.
carli
sUp
Starting.
i Down Advanced Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
en Up Starting.
_co Down Starting.
ntin Up Advanced Starting.
ued
Up Advanced Starting.
Up Starting.
.
Down Advanced Starting._
Up Starting.
Down Starting.
Down Starting.
North Wy
m. Up Home from Newburn.
Up Advanced Starting.
Intermediate Down Home...
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Outer Horne
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Home.
Down Outer Home.
Blackhilt and Durham.
Up Advanced Starting.
Up
• . Up Starting.
Down Home.
AIntermediate
Down Home..
dDown
Advanced Starting.
vUp
Home. •
• aUp
Advanced Starting.
Down Home.
• nDown
to Passenger Dock.
cDown
to Goods Siding.
eDown
Advanced Starting.
Up Home.
d Up Outer Home from Consettl_
S
and t Newhiggin.
aDown
Advanced Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
r
Junction t and Dunston.
iDunston
Down Advanced Starting.
From n Dunston Home.
g
.

3/
,Pelton •
,, •
Telaw
2)
STATION.
,Dunston-on-Tyne
. , •
1 Pelaw •
• Hebburn
Jarrow • •
Tyne Dock •
liNfonlzseaton •
, East Boldon • •
721/lonkwearmouth •
•
Ryhope
Easington
'Hart •
1:IMillfield
.1
3.
al :
:Durham
li H
•
oy
Brandon Colliery
n l
•t
Ryhope
o:Haswell
n
•
General Instructions.—Continued.
Detention at Home and Starting Signals.—Continued.
List of Track Circuits.—Continued.
)1
Box.
King Edward Bridge
Norwood Junct. •
12
Station •
Birtley and Annfield
• Ouston Junction •
• Station • •
• South Pelaw Jot. •
Pelaw and
Junction
Station •
Station •
Harton Junction •
Hartley and
West • •
Pelaw and
Junction
12
Tile Shed Crossing
Station •
nyhope and
Colliery Junction •
Station
Station • •
Cemetery North •
))
Sunderland and
Diamond Hall Jct.
Station • •
Ford Works •
•
Newton Hall Jet. •
Junction
Sunderland and
Ryhope Grange Jet.
Station •
Station Junction, •
•
•
SIGNAL.
Junction and Dunston.—continued.
To Gateshead Starting.
Down Outer Home from King Edward
Bridge Junction.
Up Starting.
Plain and BlackhilL
Slow Line to Branch Home.
Down Home.
Up Advanced Starting.
South •
Shie Up Home from Shields.
Down Starting.
lds. Down Advanced Starting.
Down Starting.
Monkseaton.
Up Outer Home.
47
Sunderland.
Up Advanced Starting to Sunderland.
Down Intermediate Home from Sunder-
[land.
Down Outer Home from Sunderland.
Down Starting.
Up Starting.
West Hartlepool.
Seaham Up Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
From Seaham Up Intermediate Home.
To West Hartlepool Starting.
From Castle Eden Outer Home.
From Seahain Outer Home.
Bishop Auckland.
Down Home.
Up Advanced Starting.
Up Starting.
Down Advanced Starting. •
Up Outer Home from Leamside.
Leamside Down Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
Castle Eden.
To Sunderland Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
Up Advanced Starting to Hartlepool..
•

4,
S
• Ferryhill .
Castle Eden
Spennymoor
Bishop Auckland
WeHeld
Holbeck
Horsforth
Pannal
Harrogate
2,
11
Ripon
,/
3,
Melmerby
3
,
3
$7
Sinderby
Thirsk
Picton
Yarm
Stockton
22
12
STATION.
Norton-on-Tees
Billingham
West Hartlepool
General nstructions.—Continued.
Detention at Home and Starting Signals.—Continued.
List of Track Circuits.—Continued.
Box.
Ferryhill and
No. 1
Station
21
/Y
West
East
Station
Ferryhill and
Thornaby
Leeds and
Wortley Junction.
21 •
Hawksworth
Quarries
Station
Junction
South
Station
22
11
71
Station
32
72
27
South Junction
15
Junction
Station
Hartburn Junction
Bishopton Lane •
•
21 5 2 •
Stockton Bank
Station
Station
27 •
Newburn Junction
Stranton Junction.
*
•
•
SIGNAL,
Hartlepool.
Up Home.
Up Advanced Starting.
Up Inner Home.
Up Outer Home.
Bishop Auckland.
Down Advanced Starting.
Outer Home from Spennymoor.
and Wellfield.
Outer Home from Stockton.
Hartlepool.
Up Homes.
Down Home.
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Home.
Down Home.
Up Outer Home.
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Outer Home.
Down Inner Home Main.
Down Home.
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Outer Home.
Up Advanced Starting.
Up Outer Home from Thirsk.
Up Outer Home—Main.
Up Inner Home—Main.
Down Starting Main.
Down Advanced Starting—Main.
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Outer Home.
Up Advanced Starting.
Up Advanced Starting—Main.
Up Outer and Up Intermediate Homes,
Down Main Starting.
Down Outer Home—Main.
Up Main Advanced Starting.
Down Outer Home.
Down Inner Home.
Down Advanced Starting
Down Advanced Starting
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Advanced Starting
Up Outer Home from Hartlepool.
Down Home.
Up Outer Home.

Rillington
York
Barton Hill
Ganton -
Seamer
3,
Bedale
•
Redmire
York
Selby
Dacre
STATION.
/, • •
Scarborough
Billingham
Haverton Hill
Leeds New Station.
Castleford
,3
Gascoigne Wood
Micklefield
Tadcaster
Newton Kyme
,2 ) )
Harrogate
Detention at Home and Starting Signals.—Continued.
List of Track Circuits.—Continued.
•
Genera/ instructions.—Continued.
Rinington
Junction
York and
Waterworks
Station
Station
Station
Wa's'hbeck
Port Clarence and
Station
Station
)3
)3
))
Leeds and
Canal
Northallerton
Station
52 •
53
Station
Box.'
York and
Chaloner Whin. Jc.
Barlby Junction
Methley and
Whitwood Junct.
Church Fenton
Junction
Church Fenton
Station
Station
•
Crimple Junction
Ripley Valley Junc
Station
and Whitby.
Up Outer Home.
SIGNAL.
Scarborough.
Up Outer Home.
Up Home.
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Outer Home:
Down Main Inner Home.
Down Main Starting.
Down Starting Slow Line
Up Outer Home.
Billingham Junction.
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Outer Home.
Up Advanced Starting—Main.
Down Advanced Starting1Main.
L. & N.W. Line.
Up Advanced Starting.
and Hawes.
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Home.
Down 'Outer Home.
Up Outer Home.
Doncaster.
Down Outer Home.
Up Advanced Starting—Doncaster line_
Up Outer Home.
Whitwood.
Down Outer Home.
Gascoigne Wood and Sherburn-in-Elmet.
Junction • Down Outer Home.
• Up Advanced Starting.
and Micklefield.
Up Outer Home.
and Harrogate.
Down Advanced Starting.
Down Home.
Down Advanced Starting.
Down Outer Home.
,tion and Pateley Bridge.
Down Outer Home.
49

50
Wetherby
Pontefract
Ackworth
iStaddlethorpe
Saltmarshe
Marsh Lane •
)3
STATION.
3)
/1
,
C
Garforth
,
r
G
o
a
sHessle
s
•Ferriby
s
c
G
o
a
i
t
g
eSouthcoates
n
s
e
WMarket
Weighton
o
oDriffield
TFiley d •
Slingsby
Market Weighton
Driffield
,
C
l
i
f
f
General Instructions.
-
Detention at Continued.
Home and Starting Signals.—Continued.
List of Track Circuits.—Continued.
Box.
Wetherby and
South
Burton Salmon
South
Station
Staddiethorpo
Junction
Station
Leeds and
Neville Hill Jct.
East
)2
Waterloo Junction
31 / )
)) ) )
East
Barnbow
Hagg Lane
Hull and St
Junction
Station
Melton Lane
West
East
)2
Junction
Junction
,tation
York and
Hill and
Driflield and
Station
West
West
Station
Hull and
Selby and
•
•
•
SIGNAL.
Cross Gates.
Up Advanced Starting to Leeds.
and Dearne. Junction.
Down Outer Home.
Up Outer Home.
and Thorne.
Down Outer Home.
Up Starting.
Down Advanced Starting.
Selby.
Up Main Advanced Starting.
Down Main Advanced Starting.
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Outer Home.
Down Inner Home.
Down Main Outer Home.
Down Independent Outer Home.
Down Advanced Starting—Main.
Up Starting Slow.
Up Advanced Starting.
Up Outer Home.
addlethorpe.
Down Outer Home—Main.
Down Outer Home—Slow.
Down Outer Home—Slow.
Up Advanced Starting—Main.
Up Advanced Starting—Slow.
Withernsea.
Up Outer Home.
Beverley.
Down Home.
Up Outer Home.
Seamen
Down Outer Home.
Down Home.
Piimocr.
Up Outer Home.
Driffield.
Down Intermediate Home.
Down Outer Home.
Down Advanced Starting.

Barlow
Airmyn & Rawcliffe
Goole
&saner
)
1
Scarborough
31
Staintondale
Hinderwell •
Brotton
)2
North Skelton
Nunthorpe
Middlesbrough
Pictori •
Stokesley
73
STATION.
•
Redcar
Grangetown
South Bank
Cargo Fleet 0
Middlesbrough
Thornaby
2,
P) •
99
P)
Dinsdale
Darlington
General instructions.—Continued.
Detention at Home and Starting Signals.—Continued.
List of Track Circuits.—Continued.
Station
5)
Box.
Selby and
Brayton East Jet.
Station
• Boothferry Road •
Junction
Pickering
Junction •
Scarborough
Falsgrave•
Gallows Close
•
,)
Station
•
Brotton Junction an
Junction
Pennymans
Picton and
Junction
Saltburn and
East
Station
Station
Junction
Whitehouse Crosg.
Guisborough Jct.
Old Town Junct.
East •
3)
Tees Bridge
Oak Tree Junct.
Geneva
SIGNAL.
51
Goole.
Down Outer Home from Thorpe Gates.
Down Starting.
Down Outer Home from Selby.
and Seamen
Down Outer Home from Pickering,_
Down Inner Home
and Whitby.
Up Outer Home.
Up Outer Home..
Up Inner Home.
Down Outer Home.
Down Inner Home.
Whitby and Saltburn Junction.
Station
Down Advanced Starting.
• Down Outer Home.
Lumpsey Mines • Up Starting.
))
Up Advanced Starting.
Junction • Up Starting to Saltburn.
d Middlesbrough (via Guisborough)„
Up Main Outer Home.
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Advanced Starting.
Grosmont.
Up Branch Outer Home.
Up Branch Inner Home.
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Home.
Darlington.
Down Main Advanced Starting,
Up Main Advanced Starting.
Up Main Starting.
Down Main Starting.
Up Outer Home.
Up Outer Home Main.
Down Main Starting.
Down Main Home.
Down Main Starting.
Down Main Advanced Starting.
Up Main Starting.
Up Main Home.
Down Outer Home—Main.
Up Outer Home.

52
•
T
h
o
Darlington North
r
Road
n
a
b
y
Crook
STATION.
Bishop Auckland •
West Auckland •
,
•Cockfield
Kirkby Stephen
Cowton
General instructions.—Continued.
Detention at Home and Starting Signals.•—Continued,
List of Track Circuits.,---Continued.
Box.
Bowesfield Junction
Bowesfield Junct.
•
Darlington and
Albert Hill Junct.
Hope Town Jct.
Darlington
Junction •
Tunnel South
West Durham Jct.
Bishop Auckland
East • •
Station •
3)
Station
Kirkby Stephen
West • •
Richmond
Eryholme junct.
At signals where track circuits are provided, plates marked as shewn
below are fixed alongside the rails at each end of the piece of line track
circuited, and in all such cases drivers must see that the engine or train is
standing on the track circuit :—
TRACK CIRCUIT.
and Hartburn Junction.
Advanced Starting to Stockton.
Down Home from Stockton.
Barnard Castle.
Up Main Advanced Starting,
Up Main Outer Home.
Down Main Outer Home.
Down Advanced Starting to Barnard
Castle.
and Consett
Up Advanced Starting.
Down Starting.
Down Outer Home.
and Barnard Castle.
Outer Home from Barnard Castle.
Up Home.
Down Advanced Starting.
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Home.
and Penrith.
Penrith Up Home.
Branch.
Up Outer Home.
SIGNAL.

Detenton at Home and Starting Signals.—Continued.
List et Signals re?erred to in clause (f), on page 42, where Push Buttons
are provided, with Indicators in the Signal boxes.
STATION.
Burton Salmon •
Monk Fryston •
Thirsk • •
Northallerton
Darlington
)5
_Northallerton
Tyne Dock •
,Eaglescliffe •
-
W
eLeeds
New Station
s
t Norton-on-Tees
H
aSouth
Bank •
Middlesbrough •
r
t
l
e-
Eaglescliffe
pDarlington
o
o
Brotton
l
•Stockton
&Pero! Instructions.—Continued. 5 3
Box.
Normanten and
Junction • •
Milford Junction
South
Milford Junction •
South
South Junction •
High Junction •
South Junction •
North Junction •
5
)
Piorthallerton and
High Junction •
Pei al/f and
Harton Junction •
Leeds and
South • • •
North • • •
,3 • •
Newburn Junction
Canal •
Leeds and
Stockton and
South Junction •
Saltburn and
Station • •
Guisborough Jet •
Old Town Junet. •
11
South •
• •
• South Junction
SIGNAL.
Newcastle.
Up Outer Home—Maim
.Up Home—Main.
Up Homo Platform line.
Down Home—Main.
Up Home—Main.
Down Home from York.
Down Home—Main.
Up Advanced Starting—Main.
Hawes.
Up Outer Home from Hawes.
South Shields.
Up Advanced Starting to Jarrow.
Hartlepool.
Down Outer Home—Leeds line.
Up Main Home—Middlesbrough line.
Up Main Home—Stockton line.
Up Home.
L. & N.W. Line.
Down Home.
Ferryhill•
*Up Advanced Starting to Ferryhill.
Darlington.
• Down Main Home.
Down Main Home or Down Main to
Branch.
Up Main Home.
Up Main Advanced Starting.
Down Outer Home—Darlington line.
Up Advanced Starting—Darlington line.
Up Home.
Bretton and Middlesbrough-
Junction • -
U
Bovvesfield Junction and Hartburn Junction.
Hartburn Juliet. • *Up p Advanced Starting—Branch.
A
* See paragraph 11,
d
page 42•
v
a
n
c
e

54
Leeds New Station
Garforth
Cross Gates
Selby
Brough
Hessle
Hull
STATION.
Church Fenton
Sherburn-in-Elmet
Gascoigne Wood
Selby
Beverley
Beverley
Stepney.
Detention at Home and Starting Signals.—Continued.
List of Push Buttons.—Continued.
East
East
East
))
11
General Instructions.—Continued.
Box.
Leeds and
,, •
Killingbeck
South
West
Station
Hessle Road Jct.
Church Fenton
South
Gascoigne Wood
Junction
Milford Junction a
Junction
South
York arid
York and
Junction
Junction
Station
Hull and
* See paragraph 11, page 42.
SIGNAL.
Hull.
Down Advanced Starting.
Up Home—Main.
Up Home—Branch.
Down Home—Slow.
Down Home—Main.
Down Starting—Branch.
Down Starting
— Up Starting—Main.
*Up Starting Main.
Slow Down Home—Leeds t o line.
MDown a Outer i n Home—Slow.
.
Down Outer Home—Slow.
Up Outer Home—Cottingham Branch.
and Micklefield.
tDown Outer Home—From Leeds.
Down Inner Home—From Leeds.
and Church Fenton.
Up Outer Home—From Gascoigne
Wood..
nd Gascoigne Wood Junction.
Down Outer Home—From Milford
Junction..
Doncaster.
Down Home—Main.
Beverley.
Outer Home—From York.
and Seamen
Outer Home—From Scarborough.
Wither nsea.
Park Road Crossing Down Home.
t In this case the push button is fixed on a special post
fixed near to the signal.
SIGNAL BOXES WHERE SIGNAL LADS ARE EMPLOYED,
General Rules 68, and 65 (a).
If the signalman has, for any purpose, to leave the signal box temporarily,
- being left with no one in charge.
h e
m u
s t
a

General Instructions.—Continued. 5 5
FOG SIGNALS.
General Rules 75 and 77.
1.—The attention of the servants of the Company having fog signals under
their charge is called to the necessity of exercising care in handling these
signals so as to avoid risk of accident from explosion.
2.—As fog signals explode from concussion, it is important that the cases
containing them should not be thrown to the ground, or otherwise brought
•
i 3.—When required to be moved, the cases must be lifted and put down
ngently,
and deposited in situations where nothing will be likely to interfere
twith
them ; and care must be taken not to place them in too close proximity
o
to lights or fires.
v 4.--When there is only a small number of signals in the leather pouch,
it is desirable to fill it up with sawdust, or some soft substance, so as to keep
i
the signals at rest.
o
5.--Fog signals must not be used for purposes other than those set forth
l
in the regulations ; and when used in the neighbourhood of stations, they
emust
be placed on the rails at such a distance from the stations as will
nprevent
any risk of accident to persons on or near the platforms.
t 6.—When the signals are not required in the leather cases, they should be
crestored
to the tin box provided for them ; and care should be taken that
othe
box is kept in a locked drawer, so that no person may have access to
-
n
t
7.—Fog signals cannot be obtained from the stores by passenger trains,
hor
in the vans of goods or mineral trains, and are only forwarded from Gates-
a
e
head in the usual stores vans. In cases where the requirement is urgent, a
cspecial
messenger must be sent to the store S to receive and convey the fog
s
t ,
i
ws
veying them safely. Nothing must be placed upon the parcel containing
g
i
the signals, otherwise they are liable to explode.
n
tg•
8.--Fogsignals fitted with tin • clips for use in Wake's Emergency
a
h nDetonator
Placing Machines must be kept in the small tin cases specially
l
a aprovided.
Each case holds one dozen. ( 0 . 2188).
s
nl
w
ys
h
DATING OF FOG SIGNALS.
t;
o
General Rule 77 (d).
ha
i
n The following method of dating fog signals is adopted by the makers,
s
nd
fog siggials made from 1st July, 1921, to 30th June, 1922, will
ube
marked 21/22, and all fog signals made between 1st July, 1922, and 30th
gh
nJune
1923, will be marked 22/23.
. e
a In arriving at the age of these fog signals the three years should be
mcounted
c
u
q-
1,v.g., fog signals stamped 21/22 should be considered three years old on the
s
uf
1st
r o
July, 1925.
t
am
When a packet of fog signals is received, it should be opened and exam-
bined
to see whether the fog signals, contained therein are properly dated
i3as
cases 0 have arisen where the date on the packet differs from the date on
e
ntthe
h fog signals. ( O . 2188).
a
t
pJ
e
eu
d
rn
w
se
i

56 Generai Instrdctions.—Continued.
EXTENSION OF FOG SIGNALS' Tonm PERIOD OF USE.
General Rule 77 (d).
Platelayers and other men in the Engineer's Department when using
three fog signals at a time, may use fog signals up to 7 years old ; in other
cases fog signals not over three years old should be used. ( O . 2188).
FOG SIGNALS usu
.
General Rule 77 (a).
) I N
MFog Asignals G Afor Zuse
in Clayton's machines must be supplied to fogmen
in refill cases as received from Stores. These cases must be returned as soon
I N E S
as possible when empty to the place from which they were supplied.
F O
R The fog signals may remain with the Magazines in fog huts during the fog
season, C i.e., L from A the beginning of September to the end of March. At the
end of March all unused fog signals from the magazines to be returned to
the Yplace T from O which they were received.
N ' S
MAll fog Asignals
supplied in refill cases at the beginning or during the fog
season must be such that they will not be out of date by the end of March,
C H I
and if not should be returned to the Stores Superintendent.
N E
S The fog . huts when not in use must be locked. ( O . 2188).
SNOW STORMS.
General Rules 78, 86, and 130 (b).
1.—When there is a risk of any portion of the line being blocked by snow
Station Masters must adopt every means at their disposal by enquiry or by
personal observation to ascertain the state of the line on each side of the
station, and advise the District Superintendent and Permanent Way Inspector
as may be necessary.
2.—The Permanent Way Inspector will be responsible for making arrangements
for keeping the line open, and will order any engines which may be
necessary for the purpose.
3.—If a snow-block is likely to arise during the time the line is closed for
traffic the Station Master must make -such arrangements for attendance at
the telegraph instrument S as may be required, and during the continuance
of a snow-storm attendance must be given where required to the telegraph
instruments on Sundays.
4.--During snow-storms all concerned must be prepared for the running
of engines or special trains at any time during the day or night.

General Instructions.--Continued. 5 7
EMPrf TRAINS DRAWN FROM STATION PLATFORM LINES.
General Rule 89.
In all cases where a train arriving at a terminal station is drawn out by
another engine the train engine must not follow the empty train until after
the signal which has been lowered for the empty train has been put to
danger and is again lowered for the light engine.
When an engine has been attaching or detaching vehicles from the rear
of a train, and it is necessary for such engine to pass out of the section at
the opposite end to that at which it entered, it must not follow the train
until after the signal, which has been lowered for the train, has been put
to danger, and is again lowered for the pilot engine, except in cases where
it is necessary for an engine to assist a train in starting.
ADVICES Of SPECIAL TRAINS, DUPLICATES, AND FAIRS, SHOWS, ETC.
General Rules 90 and 130.
Station Masters must arrange, when necessary for the signal boxes usually
-opening late or closing early to be open as the special trains may require,
-and the block instruments and signals attended to, so as to avoid delays
to the trains. When special trains are run on Sundays over lines partially
-or wholly closed on that day, Station Masters must arrange for the attendance
of signalmen as required..
It may be necessary to run some trains in duplicate, and a careful
look out must therefore be kept for the extra tail lamp. When trains are
run in duplicate, the _first portion may run five or ten minutes be
advertised - time, if other arrangements will permit.
fore Station t Masters h e must be careful to advise the District Passenger Manager
of Fairs, Hirings, Races, Agricultural Shows, Flower Shows, Large Sales,
Band Contests, _ Galas, etc., as soon as the dates are fixed, in order that
proper arrangements may be made for the extra traffic.
sHony WESTINGHOUSE BRAKE PIPES.
General Rule 90 (a).
1.—When a short Westinghouse brake pipe is used, -the Station Master at
the station to which the pipe belongs must at the time wire the destination
.station (YE. or Foreign) to the effect that a short Westinghouse pipe has
been used and the telegram must be repeated until a reply has been obtained
stating by Wald train it as ban veturned. In the event of the vehicle on which
the pipe is used requiring to be transferred at a Junction station, the owning
•station must advise the junction about the pipe on a separate message from
that sent in regard to the trL.
, if it be found necessary to send the pipe forward, wire the destination station
,nsfer
,(1\I.E. or Foreign)
o f
in
t
the
h
same
e
way, and see that a satisfactory reply is promptly
-obtained, afterwards advising the owning station. The code word " SWIPE "
vmust e be h iused c lin e all , cases when wiring to N.E. stations.
a n d
t h e
J u n c t i
o n
s t a t

58 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Short Westinghouse Brake Pipes.—Continued.
2.—When a pipe is put into use by Brake Examiners, or they find it necessary
to allow it to. work beyond their station, which may in the first instance
have been intended as its destination, particulars of the number of the pipe,
vehicles between which it has been placed, and station to which it is intended
to be worked, should be given to the Station Master, so that he may wire.
forward in accordance with the above instructions.
3.—All N.E. stations receiving these pipes must return them to the
"Home " station under "Company's ;Use Traffic" free label, and the Brake'
Examiners after removing a pipe on the completion of a journey must
hand it to the Station Master for this purpose. •
4.short
: pipes go astray, the circumstances must be reported at once to the
District Superintendent.
---
If
SIGNAL BOXIZS SWITCHED OUT OF GIRCUIT.--LIGI4TING OF
s
SIGNAL LAFtliPS.
a
General Rules 97 and 67.
tAt i junctions where the boxes are closed during the night after the branch'
traffic s has ceased, the home and distant signal lights must be left burning,
a green light being shewn for the line open upon which the trains are run after
that f time, and a red light for the line which is closed.
a
At boxes where the signals are lighted by the new long burning lamp&
General c Rule 67 (e) will not apply, and it will not be necessary for the signal
lights t to be extinguished during the time the box is closed, except during
the
o
summer months, when no lights are required in the signals at any time
during the Working hours of the box. ( O . 7532).
r
See also paragraph on page 18 headed "Opening and closing of Signal Boxes.
and y Stations where there are telegraphic switches).
r
e
SECURING OF BARROWS WHEN NOT IN USE.
p
General Rule 100.
l
Station Masters and others concerned must be particular to see that alb
barrows i when not in use are placed in such a position that there is no risk
of etheir
falling on to the line during the prevalence of high winds, or from
any s other cause. At exposed stations where there is not a suitable place.
to leave the barrows without being specially secured, the barrows must be.
chained c to some fixture. Station Masters will be held responsible for ordering
the a necessary chains through the District Superintendent.
n
n
WINDOWS OF GUARDS COMPARTMENTS.
o
General Rule 102 (b).
t
The instruction in General Rule 102 (b), that windows of empty compartments
b are to be kept closed also applies to Guards Compartments anc.
vans e in which no guard is riding.
pThe
windows in the Attendants' Compartment of Horse Boxes, and also.
the r sliding doors opposite the headstalls must be kept closed in vehicles
,standing at stations or in sidings.
o
m
p
t
l

General Instructions.—Continued. 5 9
CLOSING OF CARRIAGE DOORS.
General Rules 104 and 166.
Owing to the large number of cases occurring where passengers' fingers
are trapped when carriage doors are being closed, the attention of the staff
concerned is called to the necessity for the greatest possible care being
taken to see that the doors are not closed until the staff have satisfied
themselves that passengers have their fingers clear. ( O . 2866).
NON-ATTEHTION OF SIGNALMEN TO BLOCK INSTRUMENTS.
General Rules 105, 65 (a), 68 and 173
, a n d B . T . R .
When an advance section has been signalled clear, and the rear box
2 7 .
signalman cannot get attention from the advance box signalman preparatory
to the admission of a train, the rear signalman ulust after the
expiration of five minutes or where 'a tunnel intervenes in a block section
ten minutes from the time of giving the first " call attention " signal allow
the train to Proceed, after having told the driver the circumstances and
desired him to approach the advance box very cautiously. •
If on Arrival at the advance box, the driver finds that the nonattention
has arisen from some circumstance unfitting the signalman for
duty, he may at once proceed cautiously, stopping at the next advance
box and informing the signalman there. In such cases the driver must
stop intermediately where necessary, if by doing so he can expedite the
sending of proper assistance or relief to the box requiring it.
When the non-attention occurs during the night, if the box next in
advance is only in use by day, and the non-attention takes place in connection
with the first train after the closing of the box, it may be assumed
that the signalman there has omitted to turn on the switch, and the rear
box signalman must at once send for his day signalman, and request him
to go to the advance box, and if the signalman lives near to obtain the key
and 'turn on the switch ; but if the signalman is not at hand, the day signalman
must force an entrance to the box. If the clay signalman is not at
hand, then the Station Master must be required either to go himself or send
a messenger to do what is necessary. In regard to this service, any train
may be stopped to take the signalman to or from the defaulting box, so as
to expedite the return to proper working ; and until this is accomplished
all subsequent trains must be stopped and cautioned in accordance with
Block Telegraph Regulation 27, clauses (b) and (c). In the event of the
•failure of the block, telegraph, or of signals or interlocking, or in the case
of electric tablet or staff working, when it is necessary to change the tablet
or staffs, Station Masters are authorised to stop any train, at any place,
to put down or take up the men who may be proceeding to repair the fault.
NOTE.—On single lines where the electric train staff or electric train tablet
'block system is in, operation, Rule 25 ot the Regulations applicable thereto
will apply.

60 G e n e r a l instructions.—Continued.
SPEClAL STOP MADE BY PASSENGER TRAMS TO TAKE UP
C G E T zo'xi7
, General Rules 105 and 106.
4 P A C S
When a special stop is authorised in accordance with Rule 105,• for the
E
purpose of taking up or setting down passengers, the necessary fixed signals
must be exhibited against E the train, and the instructions contained in Rule.
106 carried out. R 3 .
A special stop order form must be used in all cases where passenger
trains make conditional stops to set down in accordance with the instructions
shewn in the Time Tables. Such orders to be handed to the drivers as well
as the guards in charge of the trains.
EXAMINATION OF TRAINS.
General Rule •I 07 (a).
On the arrival of through trains at intermediate stations at which carriage
and wagon examiners are appointed, and where the trains have to be examined,
the examiners must be in attendance and complete their work as early as
possible, and when the work is completed the Chief Carriage or Wagon
Examiner must immediately advise the person responsible for starting the
train that the examination is finished. When brake examination is also
undertaken, the brake examiners must inform the Chief Carriage or Wagon,
Examiner when the brake examination is' completed, and until he receives
this assurance the latter must not give the " All-right " signal to the person
responsible for starting the train.
At the following places the regulation will not apply 'under the circumstances
set out below :—
Middesbrcugl j
,, and Harrogate f time. (O. 7329).
WHaydon h e Bridge n
and Ain/1100h
t h e r
So far as passenger trains are concerned, when the Examiner
is engaged with Goods and Mineral trains.
Ferryhill e
i s
To any trains except through Goods trains and Special
Salt trains from Haverton Hill. ( O . 3077).
m o
r e
t h
DAMAGE TO ROLLMG STOCK.
a n General Rules 107, 108, 115, 192, 196, 206, 209, and 211.
o 1.—Guards in charge of trains must, in addition to making the usual entry
nin
their hand-books, report verbally or otherwise at the first opportunity to,
e the Carriage and Wagon Examiners when vehicles forming part of their trains
thave been r derailed, stopped for hot journals, or damaged in any way, giving
name of the owner and number of the damaged vehicle or vehicles, and such
a i
other information as the Carriage and Wagon Examiner 'requires.
n
2.—Guards in charge ,
i
occurs of Gin othe o couplings d s of any wagon, secure the defective parts, and hand
n them
a
over
n d
to the nearest Wagon Inspector, or take such steps as will secure
this t being done. A remark of the occurrence must be made on the Guard's
journal,
M i n e r a
h and the owner and number of the wagon must also be shewn
l
e
t r a i
s t
n s
a t
m u s
i o
t ,
n

General Instructions.—Continued. 6 1
Damage to Roiling Stock.—Continued.
3.—Where trains become divided owing to wagons uncoupling from no
apparent cause the attention of the Examiner at the next examining point
must be called to the wagons' and a note to this effect made by the Guard
on his journal, the numbers and owners
- o f t h e w a g o n s
b 4.—In e cases i nof the g kind set fOrth above arising in the hands of Shunters,
gfull particulars i v emust n be given . to their Foreman or Superior Officer who will
advise the Carriage and Wagon Examiner accordingly.
5.--In the event of any wagon being derailed, the attention of a Wagon
Examiner must be called to it before it is allowed to proceed on its journey.
6.--In the absence of Carriage and Wagon Examiners at the places named
in the following list, or in the event of a vehicle or vehicles being detached
at a place where Carriage and Wagon Examiners are not located, the guard
must give full particulars to the Station Master, Foreman, or person in
charge, who will advise the Foreman Carriage and Wagon Inspector for that
particular district.
7.—Tickets bearing upon them the words " For repairs," or " Not to
go," must not be placed on vehicles by men other than those employed by
the Carriage and Wagon Department and West Hartlepool Sidings Inspectors,
and in cases where vehicles are considered unfit to travel, they must be
placed on one side and the attention of the Carriage and Wagon Examiner.
drawn to the defect as before stated. • At places at which Carriage and Wagon
Examiners are not stationed, the Foreman Carriage and Wagon Inspector'
for that particular district must be advised.
8.—In cases where vehicles, although damaged, are fit to travel, the guard
must
- Wagon Examiner, as laid down in the first paragraph hereof, and if the
re
Examiner considers it necessary for the vehicle or vehicles to go into the
Shops, he will attach a "For repairs" or "Not to go" label, according to
po
rt
t
h
e
c
i r
c
u
m
s
t
a
n
c
e
s
a
t
t
h
-
the condition of the vehicle.
To minimise risk of accidents, a label has been adopted for distinguishing
vehicles with defective brakes. For this purpose the back of the existing
" For Repairs " card is used, printed on a white background, with the words
"Defective Brake" in red diagonally thereon. In the case of wagons, horse
boxes, carriage trucks, and special cattle boxes, the labels should be placed
on both sides of the vehicle in the holders or slots, and not affixed above
the handles of the defective brakes.
As an additional safeguard, the Brake Levers should be fastened up.
As regards Carriage Stock, the labels should be secured to the foot boards,,
as is the practice with the present " Repairs " labels.
When circumstances permit the defects should be repaired by the examiner,
and the labels should be used only in cases where it is impossible for
the examiner to effect the necessary repair. ( O . 6707).

62 G e n e r a ; instructions.--Continued.
STATION
ALNMOUTIE
/1..marima) PLAIN
ARRINGTON
BARNARD CASTLE
BENTON BANK
Bultwicic • •
BISHOP AUURLAND
Br.a
yDoGoods.
N— Mineral
BLYTH—
Cowpen Staith
North Blyth
Old Blyth
Baiumot; COLLIERY
'BRIDLINGTON •
CARGO FLEET. —
Damage to ReHing Stock.—Coniintied.
Carriage and Wagon Examiners.
HOURS or DITTY.
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
• Weekdays, 7-30 a.m. to 4-30 p.m.
• Weekdays, 8-0 a.m. to 4-0 p.m.
• Midnight Sunday to Midnight Saturday.
• Continuous.
• Continuous.
• 7-30 a.m. to 4-30 p.m., Monday to Saturday,.
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.rn• Sunday.
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to midnight, Saturdays.
Weekdays, 8-0 a.m. to 4-0 p.m.
6-0 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to Midnight Saturday.
7-30 a.m. to 4-30 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
6-0 a.m. to- 7-30 p.m., Weekdays.
8-0 a•m• to 11-0 a.m. Sundays.
Whitehouse Sidings
Iron Works • •
'Ca AMBLE. —
• 6-0 a.m. to 10-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
• 7-0 a.m. to 4-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
Citadel. • • 5-30 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday
London Road
COOKERMOUTH .
COMMIT JUNCTION
Coxnaz BRID GE—
Sundays, 6-0 a.m. to midnight.
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 8-0 a.m. Sunday.
• Examination by the L. & N.W. Staff.
• Weekdays, 6-0 a.m. to 8-0 p.m.
Kelloo Bank Foot
• 7-0 a.m. to 5-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday,
CROON . . • 7-30 a•rn• to 4-30 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
D ARLINGT
Albert Hill Hil . • 6-0 a.m. to 6-0 p.m., Monday to Friday.
Bank Top Passenger
6-0 a.m. to 3-0 p.m., Saturday.
• Continuous. .
Bank Top Goods
Croft Junction
• 10-0 p.m. Sundays to 2-0 p.m. Sundays.
• Continuous.
Haughton Bridge
Hopotown •
Goods Sidings
Up Sidings •
DONCASTER—
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
• 4-0 a•m• Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
. 6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
Hexthorpo •
Marshgate •
6
A
- 0
s
a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.rn• Sunday.
required.
DuNSTON STAIIIIS 6 - 0 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday.
DUNS TON WEST 6 - 0 a.m. Monday to Midnight Saturday.
DURHAM •
FERRYIEILD---
7 - 0 a.m. Monday to 5-0 p.m. Saturday.
Goods •
Mineral
• 2-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
• 5-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
IraoarnalatY .
• 7-30 a•m• to 4-30 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
GABC OIGNE WOOD
GATESHEAD--
• 4-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
Park Lane 6 0 a.m. Monday to 2-0 p.m. Sunday, and
10-0 p.m. Sunday to 6-0 a.m. Monday.
Teams
• 8-0 a•m• to 4-0 p.m. Weekdays.
• Goolx • • 7-0 a.m. to 5-0 p.m. Weekdays.
• GUISSOROUGII—
Slapewath 7 - 0 a.m. to 4-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
HARROGATE 5 - 0 a.m. to 10-0 p.m. Weekdays.
7-0 a.m. to 11-0 a.m. Sundays.
A HARTLEP 0 OL—
Passenger Station 7 - 0 a.m. to 9-30 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
7-0 a.m. to 12-0 noon Sunday.
Coal Staith • 6 - 0 a.na• Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
North Sidings 7 - 3 0 a.m. to 4-30 p.m., Monday to Saturday.

STATION.
HAVERTON HILL
HAYD ON BRIDGE
HINATON JUNCTION
HIGH SHIELDS
EIORDEN •
HULL-
- Paragon •
Goods Station •
Marshalling Yard •
Carriage
L. & Y. Sidings •
Old Mineral Sidings
Dairycoates—Inward
Outward
Riverside Quay •
Drypool •
Sculcoates •
Wilmington •
Neptune Street
New Priory—Loaded
Empty
JARROW • • •
KIRKE Y STEPHEN
New Station •
Wellington Street
Hunslet .
Marsh Lane
Neville Hill •
Arniley Bridge
Low FELL • •
MAUR ORS NORTE( •
MIDDLESBROUGH
-- Dock and Dock Hill
Goods
Marsh Branch •
Passenger Station
MMEOED JUNCTION
MORP ETH • •
NNWBURN •
RAWCASTLE--
Central
Forth Goods
Trafalgar • •
New Bridge St. Goods Yard
NISWPOBT—
Up Goods •
Down Goods
Iron Works
Erimus Up •
Erimus Down
NORMANTON •
NGSITHALLERTON
PEBO 2' MAIN--
Albert Edward Dock
Howdon Dock
Whitehill Point
General instructors.—Continued. 6 3
and Wagon Examiners.—Continued.
Holm or DUTY.
8-0 a.m. to 5-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
5-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
4-0 a•rn. 'Monday to 12-0 noon Sunday.
Weekdays, 8-0 a.m. to 4-0 p.m.
7-30 ,a.m. to ,5-0 p.m. Monday to Friday: 7-30 aama•
to 12 noon Saturdays.
, Continuous.
• 12-1 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday.
• 12-1 a.m. to 8-0 a.m. Mondays.
4-30 a.m. to 12-30 p.m., Tuesday to Saturday.
• No Staff located.
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 3-0 a.m. Sunday.
• 12-1 a.m. Monday to 12-0 noon Sunday.
• 12-1 a.m. Monday to Midnight Saturday.
• 7-0 a.m. to 4-0 p.m., Monday to Friday.
6-0 a.m. to 2-0 p.m. Saturday.
12-1 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday.
6-0 a.m. to 4-0 p.m. Weekdays.
8-0 a.m. to 6-0 p.m., Weekdays.
As required.
6-0 a.m. Monday to 3-30 a.m. Sunday.
12-1 a.m. Monday to 10-0 p.m. Saturday.
Weekdays 6-0 a.m. to 2-0 p.m.
12-0 midnight Sunday to midnight Saturday.
• Continuous.
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
• 7-0 a.m. to 6-0 p.m., Weekdays.
6-0 a.m. Mondays to 8-0 p.m. Saturdays.
• 6-0 a.m. Mondays to 6-0 a•m• Sundays.
5-0 a.m. to 2-0 p.m. Sunday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m., Sunday.
Sundays 8-30 a.m. to 2-30 p.m.
7-0 a.m. to 4-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
7-0 a.m. to 10-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
7-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday. •
5-30 a.m. to 6-0 p.m. Weekdays.
6-0 a.m. to 11-0 a.m. Sunday.
4-0 a•m• Monday to 6-0 a•m• Sunday.
• 7-0 a.m. to 6-0 p.m. Weekdays.
• Weekdays, 7-30 a.m. to 5-0 p.m.
Continuous.
Electrical Examiners at Central, Weekdays 6-30 a.m.to
10-50 p.m. ; Sundays, 2-30 p.m. to 9-50 p.m.
6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to MO p.m. Saturday.
Weekdays, 6-0 a.m. Monday to 10-0 p.m. Saturday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to 4-0 p.m. Sunday.
7-0 a.m. to 4-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
8-0 a•m• to 12-0 midnight, Monday to Saturday.
Continuous.
7-0 a.m. to 5-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
• Weekdays, 6-0 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday
• Weekdays, 6-0 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday
• Weekdays, 6-0 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday

64 G e n e r a l instructions,--Continued.
Goods Yard
Gallows Close
Coal Depot •
Seamer Lane
SELBY
-SHILn
Lade n Sidings
Empty Sidings
SKINNUsT GROVE
SOUTH BANK
SPENNYMOOR.
Coal Sidings •
Dean and Chapter and
Binehester • •
Mainsforth
STANHOPE
Ashes Quarry
ETA BLECK
STELLA GLLL
STILLINGT ON
STOCKTON. —
Station
Goods Yard
North Shore.
South Stockton Goods
SUNDERLAND—
Monkwearmouth
South Dock
TEBAY
THIRSK—
Station
CarNage and Viagon Examiners.--Confinued.
STATION.
PORT CLA BENCE—
HOURS OF DUTY.
Station
12-0 midnight Sunday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
Goods and Coal Sidings
PRUDHOE, Mrext.mr, AND
12-0 midnight Sunday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
RED CAR—
WEST WYLAM
Weekdays, 8-p a.m. to 4-0 p.m.
Lackenby
Tod Point
SALTBURN
CARBOROUGH—
•
•
6-0 a.m. to 5-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
6-0 a.m. to 5-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
5-30 a.m. to 4-30 p.m., Weekdays
6-0 a.m. to 12-0 noon Sundays,
Station
8-0 a.m. to 9-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday,
8-0 a.m. to 11-0 a.m., Sunday.
: j-As required.
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 6.0 a.m. Sunday.
• 9-0 a.m. to 1-0 a.m., Monday to Friday.
8-0 a.m. to 12-0 midnight Saturday.
• 12-0 midnight Sunday to 12-0 midnight Saturday.
• 6-0 a.m. to 9-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
• 6-0 a.m. to 10-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
7-0 a.m. to 5-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
8-0 a.m. to 5-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
Examiner temporarily withdrawn. Brake Adjuster,
7-0 a.m. to 4-30 p.m. Monday to Friday ; 7-0 a.m.
to 12-30 p.m. Saturday.
7-30 a.m. to 4-30 p.m., Monday to Saturday.'
No Examiner. 'Traffic seen at Washerley.
• Weekdays 7-30 to 4-30 p.m.
• Weekdays, 6-0 a.m. to 12-0 midnight.
• 7-0 a.m. to 5-0 p.m., Monday to Saturday.
• 5-0 a.m. Monday to 12-0 noon Sunday.
5-0 a.m. Monday to 12-0 noon Sunday.
• 6-30 a.m. to 5-30 p.m., Weekdays.
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to 9-0 p.m. Saturday.
• Weekdays, 6-0 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday.
Sundays, 6-0 a.m. to 6-0 p.m.
▪ Weekdays, 7-30 a.m. to 4-30 p.m.
• Weekdays, 5-0 a.m. to 10-0 p.m.
45-30 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday.
7-30 a.m. to 5-0 p.m., Monday to Friday ; 7-30 a.m.
to 1-0 p.m. Saturday.
North Side •
4-0 a.m. Monday to 9-0 a.m., Sunday.
THORNA BY—
Ironworks
• Temporarily closed.
Tow LAW
• Temporarily closed.
'TRIMD ON
▪ -
12-0 noon Saturday.
TWEEDMOUTH
7-
8-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
TYKE DOCK—
3
West Side • • •0 6-0 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday.
Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4
• 6-0 a.m. Monday to midnight Saturday.
TYNE mouTn . • •a Weekdays, 8-0 a.m. to 4-0 p.m.
WALKER .
B a n
Weekdays, 7-0 a.m. to 4-30 p.m.
WALKER GATE •
m Weekdays, 6-0 a.m. to 10-0 p.m
k s
Sundays, 7-0 a.m. to 12-40 p.m.
. Electrical Examiners at Electric Car Sheds—CAmtinuous.
t
o
-
5
-

STATION.
WASE INGTON
Y RE— tatio n •
Clifton Sidings
North junction
Branches Yard
No. 1 Up Yard
No. 2 Up Yard
Warehouse Yard
Genera; instructions.—Continued.
Uarrgage•and Wagon Examiners.—Continued.
HOURS OF DUTY.
6-0 a.m. Mondays to 10-0 p.m. Saturdays; Sundaye,
6-0 a.m. to 4-30 p.m. ( O . 7331).
WEST AUCKLAND-
- Empty Sidings •
Laden Sidings •
• 12-0 midnight Sunday to 12-0 midnight Saturday.
• 12-0 midnight Sunday to 12-0 midnight Saturday.
WEST HA RTLEF 0 OEtation
• 5 - 3 0 a.m. to 12-0
5-30 a.m. to 11-0
midnight, Monday to Saturdays,
a.m. Sundays
Coal Hill •
Cliff House
Greenland
• Middleton •
Main Goods
•
•
•
•
•
6-0 a.m. Monday to - 6,0 am. Sunday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to . 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
7-0 a.m. to 5-0 p. tm Monday to Saturday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to 0-0 a.m. Sunday.
WHITBY--
8 tatio n
Weekdays, 6-30 a.m.
to 8-45 p.m.
Sundays, 8-0 a.m. to 11-0 a.m.
Continuous.
Weekdays, 7-0 a.m. to 5-0 p.m.
12-30 a.m. Monday to 2-0 p.m. Sundays.
6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
6-0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 a.m. Sunday.
12-30 a.m. Monday to 2-0 p.m. Sunday.
6.0 a.m. Monday to 6-0 am. Sunday.
Etectric Train Examiners.
General Rules 107 and 196.
STATION. H O U R S OF DUTY.
INTEWCASTLE CENTEAL.—Weekdays 5 - 1 0 a.m. to 11-50 p.m.
Sundays 1 - 4 0 p.m. to 10-20 p.m.
WALKER GATE ELECTRIC CAR SREDS.---COlitilltIOUS.
iitsminmoNs TO BE 063ERVED FOR: TiE PROTECTBON OF
CARRIAGE GLEANERS, GAViEN, 1 1 1 4 0 1 OTHERS
WORktn COAC1MG3 ST0611.
(General Rules i8 (a), 24, 107, and 112 (a).
(A)--Where an -
L. Before Engine any of the above-named men commence work—
(a) i Upon s the outside of vehicles on any line or siding on which it
n o is t possible for other vehicles to be shunted against them
(b) a Which t t anecessitates c the use of steps or ladders inside the
h e d vehicles, or involves the men placing themselves in such
t a position that they might lose their balance if the vehicles
are moved,
o
RED FLAG t by hday,
or a lamp shelving a RED LIGHT by night and is
:foggy weather
e
or falling snow, must be placed on the end of the last vehicle
.
non
which the V men e ate h at work. If it is possible for vehicles to be shunted
eakAinst
both i ends c of l the vehicles on which the men are at work, the above
a
precautions, e must s be . taken at both ends.
2.—If the vehicles are standing on a Line adjoining a Running Line, the
rRED
FLAG or Lamp shewing a RED LIGHT must be placed on the side
efurthest
away from the Running Line. When the vehicles are standing
- sat
a platfOrm, the Flag or Lamp must be on the platform side.
t
t
h
e
d
65

66 G e n e r a l instructions.—Continued.
instructions for Protection of Carriage GleniWS, etc.—Continued.
3.—Each Carriage Cleaner, Gasman, or Lampman, is responsible for seeing
that he is protected by a RED FLAG or a Lamp shewing a RED LIGHT
before commencing work, in accordance with the foregoing clauses, but
should more than one man or set of men be separately at work on the same
vehicles, or on the same line or siding, each man or set of men must be
separately protected. Each man working alone, or where more than one
man is engaged, the man in charge will be held responsible for carrying
out these instructions.
4.—The man in charge of the work, or a man working singly, must before'
work is commenced also satisfy himself that no shunting operations are in
progress affecting the vehicles on which work is to be done.
5.—When vehicles in a Siding adjoining a Running Line, or on a Running
Line adjoining another Running Line, are being cleaned, or gassed, a good
look-out must be kept, and care must be taken to see that doors are not
left open on the Running Line side. Planks or steps must not be used
on the side of vehicles next to a Running Line except where authorised
by the Carriage and Wagon Superintendent and General Superintendent.
(or District Superintendent).
(8)—Where aLl Engine is attached to the Vehicles.
• 6.—Before supplying gas to a train or vehicles, the man concerned must
place a RED FLAG by day, and a Lamp shewing a RED LIGHT by
night and in foggy weather or during falling snow, on the side of one of the
vehicles for the guidance of the Traffic Department Staff and Enginemen.
In the case of a train standing at a platform, the Flag or Lamp must be
placed on the platform side.
7.—Passenger Trains or vehicles must not be moved whilst Lampmen
or others are at work on the top of the vehicles.
(C)--General instructions.
8.—Whilst the Reg Flag or Red Light is exhibited, the vehicles so protected
must not be moved, nor must others be shunted against them, until'
the Flag or Lamp has been removed. Persons responsible for starting
Passenger trains must be careful to see that no Red Flag or Red Light is
exhibited before giving the signal for the train to start.
9.—Enginemen and Shunters are particularly warned to satisfy themselves
when approaching, and before coming into contact with, vehicles
,standing on platform and other lines or sidings, and before backing on to
or attaching or detaching vehicles to or from trains at platforms, that no.
Red Flag or Red Light is exhibited.
10.—Shunters and others must keep a good look-out when shunting on
Lines adjacent to those occupied by vehicles on which men are at work.
11.--The Lamp or Flag exhibited for the protection of the men must be
removed only after the work has been completed or has been suspended
to admit of the vehicles being moved, and the man before removing it
must sgisfy himself that the men concerned ,are clear.

General Instructions.—Continued. 6 7
Instructions for Protection of Carriage Cleaners, etc.—Continued.
12.—Carriage Cleaners and others must not pass under, over, or between
the buffers of vehicles, nor between the stop blocks and the nearest vehicle,
when less than a carriage length apart. When necessary, men may pass
through a van or THIRD class compartment, but must take care to close
and fasten the doors after them.
13.—Carriage Cleaners and others are strictly forbidden to STAND on
the lines between vehicles or between a vehicle and the stop block unless
they are properly protected in accordance with the above instructions.
14.—The attention of the staff concerned is specially directed to Rule 21
in the Book of Rules and Regulations.
1.5.—Where women are employed, the same instructions will apply to
them as to men.
NOTE.—The Instructions in regard to placing a red flag at the end of
each train do not apply in the case of through trains, but if it is necessary
for any of the men concerned to carry out work on these trains, they must
inform the Station Master or other person responsible for despatching the
train, who must see that great care is taken in attaching any vehicles to
the train, and must not start it until he is satisfied. that the men have
ceased from working on the train, as set out in General Rule 107.
(O. 9986).
INSTRUCTIONS TO BE OBSERVED FOR THE PROTECTION OF BRAKE
FITTERS, LIFTERS, REPAIRERS AND OTHERS WORKING
ON CARRIAGE OR WAGON STOCK.
General Rules 108 (a), 21, 107, and 112 (a).
These instructions must be observed by the Employees of Private
Wagon Repairing Firms as well as by the Railway Staff.
(A)—In Repairing Shop Sidings, and Sidings specially set apart for the
purpose of Repairing Carriage or Wagon Stock, where protection
is afforded against shunting by means of padlock and key.
1.
-padlocked 7 in such a manner as to protect the men working in the Sidings.
2.--Bef ore any work is commenced on such a Siding, it is the duty of
—
the workman, or where more than one man is engaged, of the man in charge,
to Texamine
the points giving access to the Siding, and satisfy himself that
they h are securely padlocked in such a manner that a shunt cannot be made
Into e the Siding on which they intend to work.
p3.—Should
the points be found not properly, padlocked so as to afford
the o necessary protection, the Inspector, Foreman, or other person in charge
,of i the Shunting, must be applied to, and the points padlocked before the
-work n of repairing is commenced.
t1.—Before
the points of such Sidings are unlocked for shunting purposes,
or s to enable vehicles to be placed in or removed from the Sidings, it must
be l ascertained whether any men are engaged on vehicles placed therein.
and
e
the padlock must not be taken off until such men have been warned
to place themselves in a position of safety, nor must work be resumed by
-
a
t
d
h
i
e
n
m
g
u
t

1
68 G e n e r a l instructions.—Continued.
hstrudions tor Protection oV Brake Fitters, etc.—Continued.
(B)—in Sidings and on Lines other than those referred to above.
5.—Before any work is commenced it is the duty of the workman, orwhere
more than one man is engaged of the man in charge, to go to the
Station Master, Inspector, Foreman, or other person in charge of the Line
or Sidings and advise him of what work is about to be done and obtain his
permission for the work to be
-
6.—A RED FLAG by day, or a Lamp shewing a RED LIGHT by night.
carried
and in foggy weather
o u t
or
.
during falling snow, must be placed at the end of
the last vehicle nearest the direction from which vehicles might be shunted
against those on which the men are at work. If it is possible for vehicles
to be shunted against both ends of the vehicles on which the men are at.
work, the same precautions must be taken at both ends.
7.—If the vehicles are standing on a Line adjoining a Running Line the.
RED FLAG or Lamp shewing a RED LIGHT must be placed on the side
furthest away from the Running Line. When the vehicles are standing at
a platform the Flag or Lamp must be on the platform side.
8.—Each man employed on the repairs is responsible, for seeing that he is.
so protected by a RED FLAG or a Lamp shewing a RED LIGHT before
commencirv
, separately E,,t work on the same line or siding, each man, or set of men, must
w
be
o
.
r k ,
b
se
9—The u wheels of the vehicle to be repaired must be carefully spragged
t
pa or securely scotched, and if other vehicles are standing on the same Line-
s
rat or Siding, h one or two brakes must be applied on the vehicles both in front
o
ely and in rear of the one to be repaired, or the wheels
u l
,
of such vehicles must
d
p
be spragged or scotched.
m
r W.—Before commencing work UNDERNEATH a vehicle attached to an
o
oengine,
the Engine-driver and Guard, as well as the Station Master, Inspector,
-or
r
t person in charge, must be advised, and instead of the Flag or Lamp being
e
placed as prescribed in clause 6, a man with a Red Hand Signal must stand,
in the best possible position and Iteep a good look-out for the protection of
t
cthe
workmen.
•
h
t
a
e
When carriages or wagons are being repaired or examined underneath,
and there is not an engine attached, the instructions in clauses 5, 6, 7, 8„
9, n
d 11, 12 and 13 must be observed.
o
.
11.—The Flag or Lamp exhibited for the protection of workmen must
nbe
removed only by the
e - pleted m aor n has been suspended to admit of the vehicle or vehicles being•
mwmoved.
h o The person in charge of the traffic operations must be duly advised,
a
Care must be taken to see that all concerned are clear, and all scotches and.
f i x e d
sprags have been taken away before the Flag or Lamp is removed.
ni
t ,
, a 12.—Each f t man e working alone, or where more than one man is engaged
the
o
man in charge will be held responsible for Carrying out
r
b
r
t h e s e i n s t r u c t i o n s .
t 13.—Whilst h the Red Flag or Red Lighf is exhibited, the vehicle or vehicles
so se
protected must not be moved, nor must others be shunted against it or
them.
ew
o r
t k
oh
a
f s
mb
e

General Instructions.—Continued. 6 9
Instructions for Protection of Brake Fitters, etc. Continued.
(C)—General Instructions.
14.—Where there are Repairing Shop Sidings, or where Sidings are set
apart for the purpose, wagons and other vehicles must (as far as practicable)
be repaired or lifted in such Sidings.
15,—Shunters and others must keep a good look-out when shunting on
Lines and Sidings adjacent to those occupied by vehicles on which men are
at work, and must, before commencing such shunting, warn the men
engaged on the vehicles, what they are about to do.
I6.—Each Department concerned and each Private Wagon Repairing
Firm will supply the Red Flags and Lamps of a pattern approved by the
Railway Company concerned for their own staff.
17.—The attention of the Company's staff concerned • is specially directed
to Rule 24 in the Book of Rules and Regulations. -
NOTE.—The Instructions in regard to placing a red flag at the end of
each train do not apply in the case of through trains, but if it is necessary
for any of the men concerned to carry out work on these trains, they must
inform the Station Master or other person responsible for despatching the
train, who must see that great care is taken in attaching any vehicles to
the train, and must not start it until he is satisfied that the men have
ceased from working on the train, as set out in General Rule 107.• -
(O. 9986)
WORKING OF CRANES.
General Rule 109.
Accidents have frequently occurred in the working of cranes owing to the
men making use of the cogs of the wheel for the purpose of steadying the
load, winding up and letting out slack chain, etc.
The practice is a very dangerous one, and the working of cranes by means
of any part of the machinery except the proper gear is strictly forbidden.
(O. 7564). •
PRIVATE OWNERS' ENGINES REQUIRING TO WORK ON N.E.. LAE.
General Rule 111.
The practice to be Observed under Rule 111, dealing with the above, is as
follows :—
In all cases in Which application is made for engines belonging to Contractors
or other Private Owners to work upon this Company's line, the
application must, in the first instance, be referred to the General Superintendent,
and when the engine and men have been certified by the Chief
Mechanical Engineer as fit to run upon the railway, the application must
be submitted to the General Manager in order that the requisite authority.
under the Rule may be given
The rule is not intended to apply to the ease of Private engines required
to be forwarded in steam for ordinary transit over the line.

70 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
CONVEYANCE OF PRIVATE OWNERS' ENGINES.
General Rule 111 (b).
The following is in addition to the Instructions contained in the General
Superintendent's Permanent Circular Book (Circular No. 8), and must be
observed in dealing with the conveyance of Private Owners' engines :—
I.—All Private Owners' engines, whether to be run " dead " or in steam,
must first be examined by the Locomotive Department as to their fitness
to run. The Owners must be given to understand that this examination
does not include the fire-box and boiler of the engine, and when engines are
to run in steam, a Certificate must be obtained from the Owners stating that
the engine (including the fire-box and boiler) is in good condition and fit
to be worked in steam, and indemnifying the Company against any accident
or injury which may occur by the giving way of the fire-box or boiler. This
will be arranged by the Divisional (or District) Goods Manager, who will
pass the Certificate on to the District Superintendent. The latter will also
obtain the Chief Mechanical Engineer's Department Certificate as to fitness
to run. Notice as to time of running must be given to the District Superintendent,
who will issue the necessary advice to the Station Masters,
Signalmen, and all concerned in the working of the traffic.
2.—Under no circumstances are Private Owners' engines on their own
wheels to be allowed to run on Freight trains exceeding a speed of 25 miles
per hour.
3.—The wheel base of such engines run on these trains must not be less
than five feet.
4.—Private Owners' engines having a wheel base of less than 5 feet may
be
(a) Run light, in steam, provided the wheel base be not less than
4 feet 9 inches.
(b) Hauled by special engine in steam, or
(c) Loaded up.
5.—The wheels forming the rigid wheel base of the engine must not be
less than 2 feet 9 inches in diameter.
In cases where the engine has a two-wheeled or four-wheeled bogie in
addition to at least four driving wheels, then the smallest diameter allowed
for bogie wheels shall be 2 feet.
6.—The height of centre of buffers above rail must be not less than 3 feet
4 inches, or the Locomotive Examiner may use his discretion if the size of
the buffer head is sufficiently large to prevent locking.
7.—The minimum clearance of any part of such engines above rails must
be 7 inches, as a general rule.
8.---If run on Freight trains, engines must be marshalled next within the
rear brake van.

General Instructions.—Continued. 7 1
Conveyance of Private Owners' Engines.—Continued.
Engines forwarded " dead " must be accompanied by a competent man
in charge, and in case such a man is not provided by the Owner, a Fireman,
or other competent person, belonging to the Locomotive Department must
travel with them.
The man accompanying the " dead " engine may be allowed to travel
in the Guard's van.
9.--If forwarded in steam, a Railway Company's Drive: and Fireman
must accompany the engine and take charge to destination, or, if for a
Foreign Company's line, to the junction at which it will be transferred.
10.—No parts of engine must project beyond the maximum load limits
of all Companies over whose lines the engine has to pass.
11.--It is understood that in cases where these engines are to pass over
the lines of other Companies, the Company on whose line the journey is
commenced is to make the arrangements throughout with the Companies
concerned for its acceptance, before being despatched from the starting point.
(O. 7048).
MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES IN YARDS AND SIDENPS.
INSTRINTIONS TO SHEM:Eig:-;.
General Rule 112 (a).
When Sheeters are about to collect sheets from wagons they must advise
the shunters and others concerned, so that the latter may .give the necessary
warning in accordance with Rule 112 (a). ( O . 6286),
OVEMENT OF VEHICLES BY TOWROPE AND CHAIN AT STATIONS
WHERE TOWROPING AND CHAINING ARE AUTHORISED.
General Rule 113 (d).
The tow rope or chain must be attached to the horse hook loop, when
provided, at the side of the vehicle, and not to the draw bar hook or hornstay
of the vehicle..
NOTE.—These instructions do not apply to North and South Blyth.
(O. 6369).
STANDARD SHUNTING ROPES.
Ge'neral Rule 113 (d).
The following shows the maximum* weights to be applied to the above,
and the instructions must be strictly observed :—
Loads must be started very gradually, and if possible without any jerk.
The hooks must be properly bottomed so as to exert the pull in line with
the rope.
On the level the gross load must not exceed 100 tons.

72 G e n e r a l Instruetions,--Cowinued.
Gradients :—
Stan'eard Shunting Repos. —Continued.
1 in 220 the gross load must not exceed 70 tons.
1 in 150
I in 100
60
50
1 in 50 40
RE-RAILING OF BOGIE
. V E H I C L E S .
General Rules 115 and 225.
When bogie vehicles leave the rails, they must not be re-railed with ramps
as this is likely to , destroy the attachments between the bogie and carriage
frame and damage the bolsters, etc. The vehicles must be re-railed by
means of jacks.
Break-down Vans.
General Rule 115.
'Break-down Vans in charge of the Shed Superintendent, Shed Master, or
Shed Foreman, are stationed at each of the following places :—
CARLISLE. M A L T O N . S T O C K T O N - O N - T E E S .
DARLINGTON BA
-
GATESHEAD. SCARBORO UGH. TYNE DOCK.
'HULL.
S E L B Y . W A S K E R L E Y .
2
LEEDS, NEVILLE HILL. STARBECK.
,
IK
M I D D L
E S B R O
U G H .
W H I T B Y .
YORK.
S U N
D E R
L A N
D .
• TOP. P E R C Y MAIN. T W E E D M O U T H .
KIRKBY STEPHEN. SHILDON. W E S T HARTLEPOOL.
In order that the Shed Superintendent, Shed Master, or Shed Foreman
may decide what appliances it is necessary to take out with the tool van,
Station Masten and others, when telegraphing for it, must give briefly
particulars of the accident, saying whether the engine or tender, wagons or
other vehicles, are off the rails, and in the case of either engine or tender,
whether an3r of the axles are broken ; if of the engine, say whether leading,
driving, or trailing, and of the tender, whether leading,, middle or trailing
or whether one or both main lines are blocked. When an accident occurs
on a single line, the Station Master in sending for the tool van must say
where it must enter the single line, and make staff arrangements accordingly.
A St. John Ambulance Association Hamper is placed in each of the vans.
(O. 7574).
The iollowing List thews to whom application should be made
in the, event of the Tool Vans and Breakdown
Appliances being required.
STATION.
Carlisle to Bardon Mill, inclusive, and Alston
'Branch.
APPLY TO.
Shod Master, Carlisle.
(HAND CRANE).
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED MASTER AT CARLISLE
TO APPLY TO GATESHEAD.

General 1 nstructions.—Continued.
Break-down Vans, etc:
-
STATION. APPLY O.
----Continued.
Newcastle to Haydon Bridge, inclusive.
Lemington to North Wylam, inclusive.
Hexham and Allendale Branch.
Newcastle to Backworth (via Manors
- Manors North). to Ain
Consett Branch.
-
Gateshead to Usworth, inclusive.
wick Low Fell to Durham, inclusive,
aByker, n d St. Peters, St. Anthony's, Walker to Point
Pleasant and Walker Gate.
LSouth o nGosforth g h and Ponlancl.
oBirtley u g to h Blackhill, t via Annfield Plain.
o
South
n .
Pelaw and Stella Gill.
Amble Branch.
.
Blyth and Tyne Section, except between Backworth
and Manors North.
Monksenton to Wallsend, inclusive, and Willington
Quay.
Tweedmouth to Little Mill, inclusive.
Kelso Branch.
Alnwick and Coldstream Branch.
• •
Brockley Whins, Hebburn, High Shields, Jarrow,
South Shields, Tyne • Hock, and Washington.
,
Sunderland to Haswell, inclusive.
Millfield to Shincliffe, inclusive.
Hetton to Durham (Elvet) inclusive.
Monkwearmouth to East Boldon.
Ryhope East to Easington, inclusive.
Coxhoe and Ferryhill.
Byers Green, Coundon, Spennymoor, Bishop Auckland,
to Dearness Junction and Dearness
Branch.
Shildon to Tow Law and Blackfield, inclusive.
Wear Valley Branch, West Auckland, Evenwood,
Cockfield, Brandon, and Hagger!easei Branch.
Shildon and Stillington (Elstob La • ii ).
,
—
Shed Superintendent, Greensfield,
Gateshead.
(STEAM CRANE).
NOTE.--Waskerley Tool Vans s hould
be sent for to attend at Consett
when the Signal Boxes on the
Branch are open. •
.
Shed Master, Percy ,Main.
(HAND CRANE).
.
When the Electric Trains are interrupted,
Oreensfield, Gateshead Tool
Vans should be sent for instead of
Percy Main. .
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED MASTER AT PERCY
MAIN TO APPLY TO GATESHEAD.
—
Shed Master, Tweedmouth.
(STEAM CRANE.)
•
-----
Shed Superintendent, Tyne Dock.
(HAND CRANE).
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED SUPERINTENDENT AT
TUNE DOCK TO APPLY TO GATES-
HEAD OR ,SUNDERLAND AS IS MOST
CONVENIENT:
Shed Superintendent, Sunderland.
(STEAM CRANE).
Shed Foreman, Ferryhill.
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED FOREMAN AT FERRYHILL
TO APPLY TO DARLINGTON.
Shed Superintendent, Shildon.
(HAND CRANE).
On Sundays to Darlington.
,
73
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED SUPERINTENDENT AT
SHILDON TO APPLY TO DA RLINTIMOT,
—

74
Greatham to West Cornforth, inclusive.
Hartlepool to Shotton Bridge, inclusive.
Hartlepool and Horden, inclusive.
STATION. APPLY TO.
Burnhill, Stanhope Limekilns, and Carrhouse
Junction, inclusive.
•
Littlebm'n Colliery to Thirsk, inclusive.
Richmond Branch, Northallerton to Askrigg, Newby
Wiske and Sinderby.
North Road to Dinsdale (Goosepool), inclusive.
Piercebridge to Bowes, inclusive.
North Road to Heighington.
Merrybent Branch.
North Road to Fighting Cocks Goods, inclusive.
Barnard Castle to Middleton-in-Teesdale, inclusive..
Barras, Summit, and Eden Valley Branch.
Kirkby Stephen to Tebay No. 3 Box Up
Advanced Starting Signal.
General Instrocticns.—Continued.
Break-down Vans, etc.—Continued.
Tebay and up to No. 3 Box Up Advanced '
Starting Signal
'
,
Carlton, Stillington, Sedgefield, Hurworth Burn,
Thorpe Thewles, Wynyard, Norton-on-Tees,
Billingham and Port Clarence, and Chilton
Branch.
Thornaby to Grinkle and Boulby Mines, inclusive,
both via Saltburn and Guisbro'.
Ayton Branch.
Eston Branch. .
Eaglescliffe (Urlay Nook and Pennypot) to Castleton
(via Battersby Junction), inclusive. .
Picton to Brompton.
Stockton (Hartburn Junction) and Stockton Bank,
including all lines and yards connected there.
with in that area. •
Staithes, West Cliff, and Ravenscar, inclusive.
Whitby and *Pickering, inclusive.
Egton to • Danby, inclusive.
Pickering to Kirbymoorside, inclusive.
* For slfght accidents at Pickering, application
should be made to the Shed Foreman at
Ma1ton for the necessary assistance to
J
Shed Superintendent, West Hartlepool.
(HAND CRANE).
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED SUPERINTENDENT AT
WEST HARTLEPOOL TO APPLY TO
MIDDLESDR0', SUNDERLAND, OR
DARLINGTON, AS IS MOST CON-
VENIENT.
Shed Foreman, Waskerley.
(HAND CRANE).
WHEN STEAM CRATE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED FOREMAN AT WASKERLEY
TO APPLY TO GATESHEAD.
Shed Superintendent, Darlington.
(STEAM CRANE).
Shed Foreman, Kirkby Stephen.
(HAND CRANE).
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED FOREMAN AT KIRKBY
STEPHEN TO APPLY TO DARLINGTON.
Shed Foreman, L. & N.W. lily.,
Tebay. ( O . 7488).
Shed Superintendent, Middlesbrough.
(STEAM CRANE).
Shod Master, Stockton.
(HAND CRANE).
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED MASTER AT STOCKTON
TO APPLY TO MIDDLESBROUGH.
Shed Foreman, Whitby.
(HAND CRANE).
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED FOREMAN AT WHITBY
TO APPLY TO YORK OR MIDDLES-
BliOUGH AS IS MOST CONVENIENT.
.

STATION.
Malton to Marishes Road, inclusive.
Malton to Gilling, inclusive.
Gilling to Nawton, inclusive. •
Settrington to Garton, inclusive.
,
General 1 nstructions.—Continued.
York to Sessay, inclusive.
York to Shaftholme Junction.
Copmanthorpe to Normanton.
*Ferrybridge Junction to Wath Road Junction.
Poppleton to Goldsbrough, inclusive.
York to Huttons Ambo, inclusive.
Pilmoor to Copgrove.
Pilmoor to Ampleforth, inclusive.
Earswick to Londesbro', inclusive. .
Gascoigne Wood to Hambleton.
* See also, Instructions to Engine Drivers and
Guards when working over other Companies'
lines.
Nidd Bridge to Thirsk Town Junction.
Leeds to Pannal.
Ilkley Branch. ,
Masham Branch. •
Pateley Bridge Branch.
Leeds and Wetherby Branch.,
Church Fenton to Spofforth.
Marsh Lane to South Milford, inclusive.
Garforth to Ledston.
Harrogate to Knaresborough, inclusive.
Scarborough to Flamborough, inclusive.
Ganton to Knapton.
Forge Valley to Thornton Dale, inclusive.
Scalby to Staintondale, inclusive.
Hull to Hemingbrough, inclusive.
Saltmarshe to Thorne, inclusive.
Hull and Hornsea Branch.
Hull and Withernsea Branch.
Cottingham and Bridlington, inclusive.
Cherry Burton to Kipling Cotes.
Cliff Common and Market Weighton, inclusive.
Market Weighton to Southburn, inclusive.
Thorpe Gates to Airmyn and Rawcliffe.
Wistow and Cawood Branch.
Selby Yards.
Break-down Vans, etc.—Continued.
rwswar.nams,
--
=vmsnommom
zelm...m.
APPLY TO.
Shed Foreman, Mahon.
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED FOREMAN AT MALTON
TO APPLY TO Y ORK OR HULL AS
IS MOST SUITABLE.
Shed. Superintendent, York.
.,
(STEAM CRANE).
Shed Superintendent,
Leeds Neville Hill.
(HAND CRANE).
Shed Foreman, Starbeck.
/
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
THE SHED FOREMAN AT STARBECK
TO APPLY TO YORK OR LEEDS AS
IS MOST SUITABLE.
Shed Foreman, Scarborough.
WREN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED,
SHED FOREMAN AT SCARBOROUGH
TO APPLY TO Y ORK OR HULL AS IS
MOST SUITABLE.
Shed Superintendent, Hull.
(STEAM CRANE).
75
Shed Master, Selby.
(HAND CRANE).
WHEN STEAM CRANE IS REQUIRED
SHED MASTER AT SELBY TO APPIA
TO YORK.
(O. 4377).

.
7
6
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
I
n
s
t
r
a
c
t
i
o
n
s
.
—
C
o
n
t
i
n
a
e
d
.
DIVERSION OF MAIN LINE TRAINS IN CASE OF ACC DENT.
VEMMLES IN REAR OF PASSENGER TRAja
General Rules 115, 165 and 194.
In case of mishap or other exceptional circumstances arising on the Main
line between Berwick and Moss necessitating Passenger trains being diverted
from this to any other route, authority is hereby given for trains when •
travelling over the alternative route to convey up to six fully braked vehicles
behind the rear van. In regard, to piped vehicles the regulations in force
for the particular sections of line over which the diverted
" be trains strictly adhered r to, u excepi n that m n4 upiped s coaching t stock vehicle must be
attached as the last vehicle of the train. For other Regulations see pages
131-144 re " Particulars of Carriages and other .Coaching Stock Vehicles
which may be attached to rear of Passenger Trains, etc."
In cases of mishap or other exceptional circumstances arising on the
Leeds and Hartlepool Section between Eaglescliffe and Hartburn Junction,
necessitating passenger trains having to be diverted via Thornaby and
Hartburn Curve, authority is hereby given for such trains to convey up to
six fully braked vehicles behind the rear van from Thornaby (the point at
which the trains would reverse) to destination, i.e., Leeds, Hartlepool or
Newcastle.
In regard to piped vehicles, the regulations in force must be strictly
adhered to, except that no piped coaching stock vehicle must be attached
as the last vehicle of the train.----See pages 131-144 re " Particulars of
carriages and other coaching -stock vehicles which may be attached to
the rear of passenger trains." ( 0 . 7002).
TRAINS DIVERTED VIA HIGH LEVEL BUDGE, GATESHEAD
EAST STATION, AND LEANISIDE.
When owing to accidents or other exceptional causes, Up or Down Main
Line express passenger trains not booked to stop at Durham have to be run
via the High Level Bridge, Gateshead East Station and Leamside,. seven
minutes extra will be allowed for the journey. Trains running via King Edward
Bridge, East Loop, Greensfield and Leamside will be allowed ten minutes
extra for the journey. ( O . .7002).
FAILURE OF ENGINES ON EAST COAST TRAINS.
General Rule 115.
In the event of an engine failing while hauling an East Coast train, steps
must immediately be taken to find an engine to take the train forward. If
the engine which is used for this purpose is likely to lose time, a wire must
be sent immediately to the first station in advance where a suitable engine
is likely to be available. This engine must proceed to meet the disabled
train and be signalled E.P.
Signalmen at intermediate boxes must make every effort to ascertain the
position of the train and also the light engine, so that the latter may be
stopped at some convenient point at which it may be attached to the train
for working forward.

General Enstructions.—Continued. 7 7
LINES BLOCKED BETWEEN EDINBURGH AND NEWCASTLE.—
DIVERSION OF EAST COAST TRAINS.
General Rule 115.
See separate pamphlet entitled :—" Lines Blocked between Edinburgh and
Newcastle : Instructions in regard to the Diversion of East Coast Trains,"
dated 4th July, 1921. ( H . 4967).
'Trains diverted via Carlisle.
Up trains must stop at Riding Mill Station Box, and Down trains at
Prudhoe Station Box, when the Guard must inform the Signalman of the
identity of the train, so that arrangements may be made for it not to pass
-any other train on the opposite line at Stocksfield Station.
If there are Mail Vans on any of the Down East Coast trains, the trains
must be brought to a stand outside Corbridge Tunnel, and then proceed
-slowly through the Tunnel. Arrangements must be made to ensure the •
Traductors and Nets of Mail Vans being on the side opposite to the " 6-ft."
way.
Trains diverted--
(1) To the Myth and Tyne, via Manors North ;
(2) To the Blyth and Tyne, via Benton South East Curve ; or
(3) Via Tynemokith and Hartley by way of Wailsend or Riverside Branch.
Two East Coast trains must not be allowed to pass each other between
'Hartley (Junction with Avenue Branch) and Seaton Delaval.
RESTRICTIONS REGARD TO WORKING OF G.N. AND N.E. JOINT
AND NORTH EASTERN CORRIDOR VESTIBULE STOCK.
General Rules 115, 90, 165. -
G.N. and N.E. Joint and North Eastern Corridor Vestibule -
must vehicles not be allowed to work between Newcastle and Carlisle, or between
Hartley (Junction with Avenue Branch) and Backworth, except in East
Coast trains which are diverted to either of those routes, or in complete
trains for which the same arrangements must be made as for East Coast
trains ( B . • 424).
See pamphlet dated 4th 'July, 1921, entitled "Lines blocked between Edinburgh
and Newcastle" ; Instructions in regard to Diversion of East Coast trains.
SECTIONS OF LIME OVER WHICH EAST COAST, G.N. & N.E. MINT
AND NORTH EASTERN VESTIBULE STOCK, ALSO ORDINARY
STOCK EXCEEDING 54 FEET IN LENGTH OVER HEAD-
STOCKS IS NOT PERMITTED TO WORK.
General Rules 115, 90 and 165.
East Coast, G.N..& N.E. Joint, and North Eastern vestibule stock must.
not be allowed to work over the following lines':—
Hartley (Junction with Avenue Branch) and Backworth,
except as provided for above.
Newsham and Blyth.
Bedlington and Newbiggin.
Gateshead (Greensfield Junction) and Dunston, except on empty
.Coaching stock trains.

78 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Sections of Line ever Ikhich East Coast, G.N. & N.E. Joint & N.E. Vestibule
Stock, also Ordinary Stock exceeding 54 ft in length etc.—Continued.
*Newcastle and Carlisle, except as provided for on page 77,
and on Empty Coaching Stock trains between Newcastle
Central and Scotswood Bridge Sidings.
Murton and Durham Eivet.
*Darlington and Bishop Auckland.
Bishop Auckland and Tow Law.
Percy Main Loop (between North and Junction Boxes).
Earsdon Junction and Albert Edward Dock, unless specially
authorised by the Divisional Superintendent.
Ordinary Stock, North Eastern and Foreign, exceeding 54 feet in length
over headstocks must also not be permitted to work over any of the
above lines.
* With the exception of Trolley Wagons loaded as set out in the table of
maximum dimensions of carriage and wagon loads, Freight or Coaching
stock exceeding 52 feet in length over headstocks is not allowed to work
over these lines. ( B . 424). (O. 6304/2).
L. & Y. BOGIE STOCK WORKING TO N.E. SYSTEM.
Stonk not exceeding 52 feet over headstocks may work without restriction.
Stock 54 feet over headstocks may work generally except as between
Darlington and Bishop Auckland and Newcastle and Carlisle.
Stock 56 feet over headstocks may work generally except between Newcastle
and Carlisle, Murton and Durham (Elvet), Darlington, Bishop Auckland
and Blackhill, Norton-on-Tees and West Hartlepool, Ferryhill and
Hartlepool, and all lines North of Newcastle (except Main Line Newcastle
and Tweedmouth).
These instructions apply to L. & Y. stock not exceeding 9 feet in width
over all projections. ( B . 859a).
L. & Y. PASSENGER STOCK OUT OF GAUGE.
General Rule 115.
1.—The Newcastle and Liverpool (L. & ) Dining Car Service is composed
daily of L. & Y. carriages 9 ft. 3.1-- ins, in width over handles (31 ins.
beyond the N.E. standard gauge).
2.—In the event of an accident arising, as a result of which the direct route
via the main line between Normanton and Newcastle is not available, the
trains may be worked via the following alternative routes :—
DIRECT ROUTE. A L T E R N A T I V E ROUTES.
Jr OBSTRUCTION BETWEEN.
Normanton and York
York and Thirsk
Thirsk and Northallerton
Northallerton and Darlington
Darlington and Ferryhill
Ferryhill and Durham
Durham and Newcastle
Methley Junction (Mid. & ME.).
Methley Jot. (L. & Y. & Mid.) and Cutsyke Jct. (L. & Y.).
Cutsyke and Pontefract.
Garforth and Church Fenton.
Milford Junction and Selby.
Poppleton, Starbeck and Ripon.
Pilmoor, Starbeck and Ripon.
•Starbeck and Sinderby.
Welbury, Eaglescliffe and Dinsdale.
Dinsdale, Stockton, and Sedgefield.
Shincliffe, Learnside, Washington, High Street, Greensfield
Junction, East Loop and King Edward Bridge,
or Gateshead and High Level Bridge.
Leamside, Washington, High Street, Greensfield Junction,
East Loop and King Edward Bridge, or
Gateshead and High Level Bridge. (B. 1832).
The stock may also work between Newcastle and Heaton Sheds on the
North Main Line or the Tynemouth Lines.

General nstructions.—Continued. 7 9
L. St. Y. Passenger Stock out of Gauge.—Continued.
3.—Under no circumstances must these trains, if composed of this wide
L. & Y. Stock, be run by the following routes, as there is not at oresent
sufficient clearance to enable this to be done with safety :—
Stockton and Newcastle, via Thornley.
Stockton and Newcastle, via Norton-on-Tees, West Hartlepool and
Horden.
Leamside and Newcastle, via Sunderland.
Darlington and Durham, via Bishop Auckland.
Low Fell and Newcastle, via Dunston and Scotswood.
Ferryhill and Hartlepool.
4.--The stock in question can be accepted on any of the L. & Y. Company's
trains to and from Hull (Paragon and Riverside Quay Stations), and in the
event of the line being blocked via Goole, it may be run by any of the alternative
routes so far as the N.E. system is concerned.
5.--Should odd vehicles of this type work to Hull or Newcastle with special
parties, care must be taken to ensure that they do not get on to any of the
prohibited sections of the line set out above. ( O . 2838).
N.S. PASSENGER STOM OUT-OF-GAUGE.
General Rule 115.
N.B. Out-of-Gauge Carriages, 57 ft. in. in length over headstocks and
'9 ft. 03
, service. in. In the eVent of the Main line being blocked, such vehicles may
be worked over the alternative routes authorised for Out-of-Gauge L. & Y.
i
stock
n
(pages 78-79), or for East Coast trains (Pamphlet H. 4967, dated
w4th iJuly,
1921). ( B . 56).
d t
h
o GREAT WESTERN PASSENGER STOCK OUT-OF-GAUGE.
v
General Rule 115.
e
1.--G.W. carriages, brakes, and vans exceed the dimensions of the North
r Eastern load gauge, and cannot be accepted, except as shewn in paragraph
p3, for r working over the N.E. system.
o 2.--Through j
traffic from the G.W. to the N.E. line will, as a general rule,
ebe loaded c in vacuum fitted stock to the handing over junction, where it
tmust i be transhipped into N.E. stock, and be sent forward to its destination
o
by the
n
first available train.
s 3.--It , has been agreed that G.W. stock, not 'exceeding 56 feet in length
over headstocks, and 9 feet '31 inches in width over all projections, may
a
work by all r altes into York and in the South Wales-Newcastle -
r
Enough
Service. (In the event of the .Main Line being blocked, the Barry-Newcastle
e set may be worked by one of the alternative routes authorised for out-of-
wgauge
L. & Y. ,stock.—See paps 78-79).
o
r
k
i
n

80 G e n e r a l Irtstnictiorts.—C ontinved
Great Western Passenger Stock Out-of-Gauge.—Continued.
In the event of G.W. stock not exceeding the above dimensions, and
suitably fitted as regards the brake for working forward, coming to hand
for a station on the Main Line between York and Berwick, via Team
Valley, or via Leamside, it may be sent forward if this would be more
convenient to the station working than transhipping the contents into.
N.E. stock, such vehicles, however, must be specially wired forward to
the Junction and Terminal Stations concerned.
•
Some specially altered G.W. stock measuring 56 ft. over headstockS and
'9 ft. 0.1 in. over handles, is working in the Aberdeen—Penzance service. In
the event of the Main line being blocked, such stock may be worked over
the alternative routes authorised for Out-of-Gauge L. & Y. stock (see pages
78-79), or for East Coast trains (Pamphlet H. 4967, dated 4th July, 1921).
4.—G.W. stock exceeding the dimensions set out in paragraph 3 must
not be allowed to work on any section of the N.E. system and should
such stock be inadvertently sent, it must be stopped at the handing-over
junction.
.
G.W. stock shews on the sole-bar the width over body and the length
over buffers. In the case of brakes, the width shewn is the width over
guards' duckets, which, of course, covers the width over the handles ; in
the case of carriages, the width of the handles will require to be added.
to the body width shewn on the sole bar. ( B . 5(i).
1
L. 84 S.W. PASSENGER STOCK OUT OF GAUGE.
(General Rule, 115.)
L. & S.W. Carriage Stock (56 ft. in length over headstocks and 9 ft. 2 in
in width over handles) is working daily in the Newcastle—Bournemouth
service.
In the event of the Main line being blocked, the trains on which the
L. & S.W. stock works should be diverted to one of the alternative routes
authorised for L. & Y. Passenger Stock out of gauge (see pages 78-79).
(B. 56).
WORKING OF EMPTY COACHING STOCK TRAINS BETWEEN GATES
HEAD (GREENSFIELD JUNCTION) AND DUNSTON, AND BETWEEN
NEWCASTLE CENTRAL AND SCOTSWOOD BRIDGE SIDINGS.
General Rule 115.
When N.E. Empty Coaching Stock trains are worked between Scotswood
Bridge Sidings and Newcastle Central, via Elswick, they must always travel
on the Passenger lines between No. 3 Box (from the points of the through
roads leading from Goods to Passenger lines and vice versa, west of the
box) and Forth Junction.
Two Empty Coaching Stock trains must not be allowed to pass each other
on the through roads at King Edward Bridge Junction between the Main.
(Team Valley) lines to and from Gateshead and the Dunston lines.
(B. 424)...

Genera! Nstrintins.---Continued. 8 1
RESTRICTIONS IN REGARD TO WORKING COACHING STOCK ON
GOODS LINES, SOUTH SIDE, NEWCASTLE CENTRAL STATION.
General Rule 115.
Stock larger than standard N.E. 52 ft. stock must not travel on the two
Inner Goods Lines behind the Central Station. but must be worked either
on the North or South Wall Goods lines. This restriction also applies to
bogie mail vans of any length. ( B . 424).
WORKING OF NORTH EASTERN AND FOREIGN COYIPANIES'
MAIL VANS OVER TH NORTH EASTERN LINE.
General Rule 115.
Mail Vans must only be allowed to work over the following sections of
line
(1) FOREIGN COMPANIES' MAIL VANS WITH TRADUCTORS AND NETS
ON ONE OR BOTH SIDES.
From the South, as Tar as York only, by any route, subject to the condition
that two mail vans with traductors on the six-foot side are not allowed.
to pass each other in Brotherton Tunnel (see paragraph 6). •
(2) MIDLAND AND N.E. JOINT, AND N.E. MAIL VANS.
From the South to York by any route (subject to restriction in paragraph 6)..
York and Berwick. In the event of the Main Line being blocked the vans.
may work over the alternative routes authorised for L. & Y. wide stock.
Newcastle and Scotswood Bridge Sidings, on empty Coaching Stock trains.
only.
Gateshead (Greensfield Junction) and Scotswood Bridge Sidings, via Dunston...
Newcastle and Low Fell, via King Edward Bridge or High Level Bridge.
Newcastle to Heaton Carriage Sidings, on Down Main or Down Tynemouth,
lines, providing the traductor is on the left-hand side when facing in,
the direction in which the train is travelling.
(When Mail Vans are working to Heaton Carriage Sidings on
Down Tynemouth line, out-of-gauge Stock must not be allowed
in Independent No. 164.)
Heaton Carriage Sidings to Newcastle. via S.W. Curve and Manors North,.
or on Up Tynemouth line. •
Newcastle and Pelaw.
Leeds and Hull. (In the event of the Main Line being blocked, the vans.
may work by any alternative route between these points).
Hull and Bridlington.
York and Scarborough.
(3) G.N. BOGIE MAIL VANS (TRADUOTORS
. From O N the South B Oto TYork, H by any route (subject to restriction in paragraph 6).
SYork I and D Berwick. E S ) In . the event of the Main Line being blocked, the vans
may work by any of the alternative routes authorised for L. & Y. wide
stock).

82 G e n e r a ! instractions.---Continued.
Working of N.E. and Foreign Co.'s Mail Vans over N.E. Line.--Continued.
Leeds and Hull (In the event of the Main line being blocked, the vans
may work by any alternative route between these points).
(4) N.E. OR FOREIGN MAIL VANS ON EAST COAST TRAINS
DIVERTED VIA CARLISLE.
Newcastle and Carlisle, under conditions set out in pamphlet, dated 4th July,
1921, entitled " Lines blocked between Edinburgh and Newcastle. Instructions
in regard to diversion of East Coast Trains." ( B . 2130).
(5) ON THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS OF LINE MAIL VANS OF THE TYPES
AUTHORISED TO WORK OVER SUCH SECTIONS MAY BE RUN WITH
THE NETS AND TRADUOTORS AT EITHER SIDE :-
All routes from the South into York (subject to restriction in paragraph 6).
Between Newcastle and Low Fell, via King Edward Bridge or High Level
Bridge
Between NewcasUe and Pelaw.
etween Hull and Leeds.
•tik•Ctill Hug and Brngton.
Alternative Routes to Main Line authorised for L. & Y. wide stock, for GMvans
orfly (traductors on both sides).
On all other sections of line over which they are authorised to travel, mail
vans must always be run with the nets and traductors on the side opposite
to the six-foot way.
.(
6
)
(
7
)
(
8(9)
)
When Mail Vans fitted with nets and traductors on the six-foot side
are run on trains through Brotherton Tunnel, Burton Salmon, the
following arrangements must be carried out :—
Up trains must stop at Brotherton Quarry (or Burton Salmon Junction
Box if Brotherton Quarry is closed), and Down trains at Ferrybridge,
when the Guard must inform the Signalman of the identity of the train
so that arrangements may be made for Up and Down trains conveyina
Mail Vans not to pass through the Tunnel at the same time. If the
Up train is allowed through the tunnel first, the Down train must not
be allowed to leave Ferrybridge until the Up train has passed Ferrybridge.
If the Down train is allowed through the Tunnel first, the Up
train must not be allowed to leave Brotherton Quarry or Burton Salmon
Junction Box until the Down train has passed Brotherton Quarry or
Burton Salmon Junction Box.
Bogie Mail Vans must not travel on the two inner Goods lines behind
Newcastle Central Station, but must be worked either on the North
or South Wall Goods lines.
Mail Vans must not be conveyed on Goods trains.
These instructions cancel all previous instructions in regard to the
sections of line over which mail vans are permitted to work.
(B. 1314.11).

General Instructions.—Continued. 8 3
WORKING OF ELECTRIC STOCK BETWEEN WALKER GATE
AND YORK CARRIAGE SHOPS.
General Rule 115.
When electric vehicles have to run between Walker Gate and York Carriage
Shops, or vice versa, they must, if fitted with motors, travel via the Learnside
route.
Electric vehicles not fitted with motors may travel by either the Leamside
or Team Valley routes. ( B . 2105). (O. 6257).
G.O. BOGIE STOCK WORKING TO N.E. SYSTEM.
General Rule 116.
Stock not exceeding 52 feet over headstocks may work without restriction.
Stock exceeding 52 feet and not exceeding 60 feet over headstocks may
work generally, with the exception of the following lines :—
Newcastle and Carlisle.
Gateshead and Dunston.
Murton and Durham (Elvet).
Darlington, Bishop Auckland and Blackhill.
Norton-on-Tees and West Hartlepool.
Ferryhill and Hartlepool.
All lines north of Newcastle (except Main Line
Newcastle and Tweedmouth).
These instructions apply to G.C. Stock not exceeding 9 feet in width over
all projections. ( B . 55.)
MIDLAND BOGIE STOCK WORKING TO NORTH EASTERN SYSTEM.
General Rules 115 and 90.
Midland bogie stock 48-ft. or 50-ft. in length over headstocks and with
fixed side lamps on the brakes may be run over the North Eastern
System generally.
Midland 54 feet bogie stock may also be accepted generally with the
exception of the line between Darlington and Bishop Auckland, and Newcastle
and Carlisle, which sections are prohibited for stock over 52 feet in
length.
Midland dining cars 59-ft., 60-ft., or 65-ft. in length over headstocks can
be accepted generally, with the exception of the following lines :—
All lines North of Newcastle (except on the Main Line,
Newcastle to Tweedmouth).
Newcastle and Carlisle.
Gateshead and Dunston.
Murton and Durham (Elvet).
Darlington, Bishop Auckland, and Blackhill.
Norton-on-Tees and West Hartlepool.
Ferryhi11 and Hartlepool. ( B . 56).

1
84 C e n c - r a l instructions.—Continued.
REPORTING OF ACCIDENTS.
General Rules 115, 258, and 192.
1.--In every case of accident occurring, it must be reported immediately,
with full particulars, to the Head of the Department.
2.--In cases of accident attended with personal injury, the names and
addresses of the person or persons injured must be given, and where possible,
some information as to the cause of the accident should be obtained from
the injured person.
3.--It is most important to obtain, when an accident occurs or is first known
about, the names and addresses of independent persons not connected with
the Company, who may be expected to be able to give information that will
assist in dealing with a claim arising out of such accident.
4.--In the case of accidents to passengers every effort should be made to
obtain the names and addresses of the passengers in the same compartment
as the person who makes the complaint, or of those who witnessed the
accident, although not travelling in the same compartment. If this Cannot
be done at the time, it could, in many cases, be done by telegraphing on to
the next station at which the train stops.
5.--In the case of accidents to people not travelling by train, such as those
occurring at level crossings, important evidence can often be given by
persons in the vicinity at the time, and their names and Addresses should
be obtained if possible.
6.—It should be borne in mind that it is quite as important to obtain the
names of persons who will give evidence against the Company as in favour
of the Company, in order that it may be ascertained what is the nature of
the case a claimant intends to make in support of his claim.
7.—Names embodied in accordance with the foregoing instructions should
be embodied in the report made to the District Superintendent. If they
have not been obtained by the time that report is made they should be sent
in as soon as possible thereafter.
8.--If anyone is seen to fall when alighting from a train in motion the
driver and fireman or motorman must at once be informed of the fact, and
told to make a report to their Shed Superintendent, Shed Master, or Shed
Foreman, stating whether or not a proper stop was made. The guard or
guards must also be informed so that they may make a note on their
journals.
9.—Station Masters must send an advice at once to the District Superintendent's
Office, by telegraph, of any fatal accident which occurs in the
neighbourhood of their station, either to the Company's servants or others,
stating the time that it occurred, more detailed particulars being afterwards
furnished on the printed forms supplied for that purpose. Station Masters
must also in reporting cases of accidents to Company's servants, carry out
the instructions contained in the General Manager's circular, dated 20th
June, 1907.

General Instructions. Continued. 8 5
Reporting of Accidents—Continued.
10.—Accidents which result in the obstruction of any line whereby trains
are likely to be delayed must be immediately reported by telegram as set out
in General Rule 115, care being exercised in seeing that all places concerned
in the starting of trains over the portion of the line affected are advised so
that the despatch of engines from sheds and the train arrangements generally
may be regulated.
11.—As soon as the person responsible for the removal of the obstruction
can approximately estimate the time at which ordinary working may be
resumed, an intimation must be sent to the starting point to this effect,
and a further advice when the obstruction has entirely been removed.
(O. 1794).
12.—When an accident is reported by telegram it should be clearly stated
in all cases whether a passenger train is affected, whether there is any personal
injury, what lines are blocked, how many vehicles are off the rails, and any
other information which the special circumstances of the case make it desirable
that Heads of the Departments should know. ( O . 2270).
EXTRACTS RE ACCIDENTS, NARROW ESCAPES, EXCEPTIONAL
DELAYS, IRREGULARITIES, ETC.
General Rule 115.
Extracts referring to accidents, narrow escapes from accidents, exceptional
delays to passenger trains, irregularities or failures in block working,
failure of signal lamps, trains without proper signals, irregular working of
signals, signalmen late on duty, or anything observed unusual or exceptional
about a train when passing a box, or in regard to an intermediate box being
closed or opened at any other time than that shewn in the Appendix, must
be passed at once to the Station Master, and by him forwarded to the District
Superintendent, with such additional information as he may be able to
obtain.
LAMPS ON LEVEL CROSSING GATES BURNING DURING
CESSATION OF TRAFFIC.
General Rule 116.
At level crossings where the gates stand across the railway at nights, and
there is no attendance owing to there being no railway traffic, the lamps
must burn during the night. Lamps with larger vessels are provided at
such places and they must be extinguished and lighted daily, except at the
week-ends when they must be allowed to burn from Saturday night until
Monday morning except as under :—
During certain seasons of the year at stations where attendance' is given
on Sunday mornings and eyenings, and the lamps can be extinguished and
lighted without the staff having to come specially on duty, this course must
be followed.
Ordinary paraffin oil to be used. ( 9 . 2587).

86 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
CYCLISTS PASSING OVER LEVEL CROSSINGS.
General Rule 117.
At places where the small gates are suitable for cyclists to pass through,
but a request is made to have the use of the large gates instead they may be
opened when the railway traffic will permit of this being done, but unless
such a request is made the large gates must not be opened.
When the small gates at level crossings cannot be used for cycle traffic,
the large gates must be opened with as little delay as possible.
• Care must be taken by signalmen when cyclists are passing over level
crossings not to suddenly raise the stops, as in this case cyclists have no
opportunity of avoiding the obstruction and some accidents have occurred
in consequence. ( O . 2883).
Level Crossing Gates.
List of places where exemption has been granted from Rule 118:—
The Level Crossing Gates at the following places may be allowed to stand
across the highway or across the railway until required to be altered for
rail or road traffic as the case may be. ( O . 6093).
STATION. CROSSING. STATION. CROSSING.
Ainderby • Station Boldon • Hedworth Lane
Allerton • Station • Station
Arram Station • Downhill Lane
• Washington Lane
Backworth • Blue Bell • Three Horse Shoes
Bainton • Station Boosbeck • • Station
Gates
Boroughbridge Myton
Bald ersby • Station • Humberton
Leeming Lane Botanic Garden s Station
Balne • Station •Bran
cepeth. Station
Barlow • Station Bridlington. Quay Crossing.
Barnard Castle
Sewerby
Barton Hill Station Brompton • Station
Howsham Brough • East
Barton-le-Street Station • Welton Crossing.
Bebside
Station
Bubwith • Station
Bedale
Station
Burton Agnes Station
Aiskew
Bedlington South
Carham tStation
Bempton Station
Carlisle
Dalston Road
Beverley
Park
Carnaby • Station
Fleming Gates Castleford Gates
1!
Junction
f)
Station Cattal • • Station
,2
Cherry Tree Crossg. Catterick Bridg e Station
3) •
Billingham Station
•Cawood
• • *Broad Lane
Blaydon
Station
Cayton • Station
Blyth. • Crossing.
Choppington • Station
NOTE.-At places marked * the exemption only applies
in clear weather
as no Distant signals are provided.
t This arrangement only to apply until 12-0 noon
daily.

•
General I nstructions•—Continued.
Level Grossing Gates.—Continued.
STATION. CROSSING. STATION. CROSSING.
Cliff Common Station
• Duffield Gates
Lund Lane
Y2 •
Lane 3) •
Cloughton . • Station
Cottingham • North
1Y • • Thwaite Gates
Coxhoe W.H. • Station
Coxwold • Station
Crakehall • Station
Crook • West
25 • East
Between Darley
and Birs twith • *Ross
Driffield • West
• Kellythorpe
• Station
.15
Forge Valley
Gainford
Ganton
Garton
Gateshead
5)
Golds borough
Goole
Greatham
Gristhorpe
Grosmont
Hammerton
Station
Derwent
Station
Station
Garton Slack
Tanfield Lea
Lobley Hill
Teams
Causey
Sunniside
Street Gates
Station
Boothferry Road
Junction
Station
Station
Station
• Station
Eaglescliffe
Earswick
East Boldon
Eastrington
Ebberston
Eston
Everingham
P3
Fangfoss
Fencehouses
Ferry
"
Fighting Cocks
hill Filey
2) •
Urlay Nook
Haxby Road
• Station
• Station
• Station
*Wilton Carr
• *Ebberston Lane
Station
• Flatts Lane
Station
• Shipton Lane
• Station
• Station
• Newbottle Lane
• Thinford Lane
Cornforth Lane
• Station
• Station
Royal Oak
Hartlepool • Harbour Street
Hartley • Avenue
Haswell • Station
Haxby • Haxby Road
Station
Hedgeley • Station
Hedon • Station
• Preston
•
21
Magdalen
Heighington Station
Hemingborough Station
Heslerton Station
Hessay • • Station
High Field Station
Hinderwell Station
Hornsea Station
Hovingham Spa Station
Howden Station
Howdon-on-Tyne
Hull • Station
21 •
Finghall Lane
Flamborough
Flaxton
Foggathorpe
Forest Hall
• Muston
• Station
• Station
Station
Station
Lincoln Flatts
• Station
Anlaby Road Jet.
Hessle Road Jet.
• Newington
• Walton Street
•
IP
St. George's Road
• •
,2
Chalk Lane.
Hunmanby • Station
Hunwick • Station
NOTE.-At places marked * the exemption only applies in clear weather
as no Distant signals are provided.
87

88
General Instructions.—C
ontinued.
Level Crossing Gates—Continued.
STATION. CROSSING. STATION. CROSSING,
Hutton Cranswick
Hylton
Station
Station
Northallerton Romanby
• Low Gates
• Borobridge Gates
Ingleby Station North Myth
North Road •
Cambois Colliery
Whessoe Lane
Kettleness • Station North Seaton Station
Keyinghana Station Norton-on-Tees Station
Killingworth • Station Nunburnholme Station
Kirkham Abbey Station Nunthorpe Station
Knapton • Station
Leadgate .
Leasingthorne
South Medomsley
Colliery
Chilton Crossing
Ottringham Station
Baulk.
Leeming Bar
Leckington
Londesborough
Lo\s-thorpe
Gipsy Lane.
Station
Station
Station
Station
Pateley Bridge
Patrington
Pelaw
Pickering
*Glasshouses
Winestead
Follingsby
Black Bull
Mill Lane
Malton
Martieet
Marishes Road
East
Station
Station
I)
3) *Hugden Lane
Goslip Bridge
Hungate. .
Market Weigh ton
,Y
5,
Bridge Street
,High Mill
Station Marston Moor
Masham
Mehnerby
• •
Menthorpe Gate
Middlesbrough
7)
M o s s •
Murton
Station'
*Aldburgh
Middleton
Station
*Wath
*Nosterfield
Station
Cargo Fleet itoad
North Ormesby
Sussex Street
Station
Per. Way Crossing
Picton
Piercebridge
Pittington
Pocklington
Poppleton
Potto
" ,, •
Prudhoe
New Bridge Quarry
Eastgate
Station
Station
• Station West End
• Barmby Road
Station
West Green
Station
• Poppleton Lane
• Station
• Black Horse Gates
• Station
Nafferton • Station
Nawton Station Redcar Church Lane
Newby Wiske • Station ,3 • West Dyke
• Maunby
Ripon • Littlethorpe
Newsham • Plessey Road Ruswarp • Station
Newton Kyme • Station Ryehill • Station
Nidd Bridge • Station Burstwick ck
NOTE. —At places marked * the exemption only applies in clear weather
as no Distant signals are provided.

Genera! instructions.
7
-Contin Leni Grussing ? tGates—Continued. a t .
8 9
STATION. CROSSING. STATION. CROSSING.
Salt mars he Station Strens all • Station
Saw dun Station Sunilaws • Station
*Brompton Hall Sutton • Gates
Scruton Station Swine Station
Seaham Dmvdon
Seaham Colliery • Hall Dens Station Tad caster Station
Seaham Junction Stutton Station
&miler Spittal Stutton Road
,7 S t a t i o n Tanfield Thornborough
*Ratton Row Station
*Pasture Lane Thorne Moor Ends
Seaton • Station Thornley Wheatley Hill
Selby • Wistow Junction Thorparch • Station
• • *Leeds Road
Thornton Dale Station
• •
13
Thorpe Gates
*Westfield Lane
Henwick Hall
*Broadmires Lane
53 •
Sexhow • Station Topcliffe Station
Sherburn- in-El met, Station Tow Law High Street
Shildon • Mason's Arms Tow Law Ironworks Junct.
Sigglesthorne Station Blackfield
,Sinderby Pickhill Trenholine Bar Station
'Sinnington Station Trimdon • Trimdon Grange
Skirlaugh • Station Tyne Dock. Dean Road
Sledinere&Fimber Station Laygate Lane
Sleights • • Station Harton Colliery
Slings by • Station
•nainton • Station Usworth • Station
• *Ings Lane
• *Fouldsbridge
*Barker Lane Wart bill Station
•Southljurn • • Station • Mahon Road
3, • •
Southcoates • Junction Washington • Bithliek Lane
,Speeton • Station Wassand • • High Gates
Spennymoor • Merrington Lane Low Gates
• East Howie Waterhouses • Goods
Spofforth • South Weaverthorpe • Station
Staddlethorpe • Broomfieet Weeton Rigton
Stamford Bridge Station Welbury • Station
Starbeck • South • West Rounton
• Belmont 3, Wensley • • Station
• • Bilton Road West Auckland • Station
Stepney • • Station
West Cornforth • Station
• Park Road West Hartlepool Middleton Road
Stillington • • Traveller's Rest No. 2 Sheer Legs
Stokesley • Station • Cattle Pens,
Stockton • St. John's • Middleton
.1 Portrack Lane Cleveland Road
NOTE.—At places marked * the exemption only applies in clear weather
as no Distant signals are provided.

96 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Level Crossing Gates—Continued.
STATION. CROSSING. STATION. CROSSING.
West Hartlepool Princess Street Wistow *Station
• Queen Street *Flaxley
2,
• Mainsforth
• *Selby Common
2;
Steel Works Witton-le-Wear • Station
Whitedale • Station Wormald Green • Station
Wilmington • Dansom Lane Wressle • Station
• Sculcoates
Winston • Station , York Burton Lane
Bootham Junction
NOT
-
E.-
At
p l
a c
e s
m
a
r
k
e
d
*
t
h
e
e
x
e
m
p
t
i
o
n
o
n
l
y
a
p
p
l
i
e
s
i
n
c
3• •
as no Distant signals are provided.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR WORKING LEVEL CROSSING GATES BY GROUND
FRAMES WHERE GONGS ARE PROVIDED.
General Rule 119.
The normal position of the gates is across the highway. When the
Crossing Keeper requires to open the gates for road traffic, he must give one
beat bolt lock on the and '' (Yong, the gateman, and if the after line pulling is clear the the necessary signalman levers, will withdraw can open the
gates.
After closing the gates across the highway, the Crossing Keeper must put
the levers back and give two beats on the gong, when the signalman will
replace the bolt lock.
TRACTION ENGINES CROSSING THE LINE.
General Rule 120, and B.T.R. 33.
When traction engines have to cross the line, the driver must be warned
beforehand to keep his engine clear of the gate stops.
Head Lamps on Trains assisted by Second Engine in front
or in the case of two Trains coupled.
General Rules 125, 127 and 142.
When a train is worked by two engines attached to the front of the
train, or when two trains are coupled together, the second engine must not
carry head lamps. If any departure from this practice is observed, the
matter should be at once reported in accordance with the instructions on
page 85. This applies also to Foreign Companies' engines running over the
N.E. line. ( O . 6479).
Exception.—In the case of coupled trains running on the Up line between
Shildon Tunnel North and Tunnel South boxes and on the Up Main line
or Up Independent between Tunnel South and Shildon Junction, each
train may carry ordinary headlights. ( 0 . • 6651).

Genera i instructions.—Continued. 9 1
Engine Headlights.
General Rules 125 and 142.
The following is the standard code of Engine headlights. These headlights
must be carried by engines when working over the North Eastern Railway
or over the lines of other Companies. The engines of the Great Northern
(with the exception of express fish trains between York and Doncaster),
Great Central, Great Eastern, Glasgow and South Western, London and
North Western, Midland, Maryport and Carlisle and North British
Companies, will also carry these lights when working over the North
Eastern Railway.
The lamps must be carried in the same position during the daytime as at
night.
I.—Express Passenger train,
Break-down Van train
going to clear the line,
or Light engine going to
assist disabled train.
2.—Ordinary Passenger train or
Break-down Van train
not going to clear the
line.
3.—Fish, Meat, Fruit, Horse,
Cattle or Perishable]
train composed o f
Coaching Stock.
-4.--Empty Coaching Stock.
5.—Fish, Meat, or Fruit train
composed of Freight Stock,
Express Cattle, or Express
Freight train. Class A.
* Speed per hour, 30 miles.
0 Denotes white light.
6.—Express Cattle or Express
Freight train. Class B.
* Speed per hour, 25 miles.
7.—Through Freight or
Ballast train. Class C.
* Speed per hour, 20 miles.
8.—Ordinary Freight train
stopping at intermediate
stations. Class D.
* Speed per hour, 20 miles.
9.--Light engine or Engine with
additional tender attached,
Light engines coupled
together, o r Engine
and not more than
two brakes.
t For speed of Braked Freight trains, see pages 172 and 173.

92
1.--Newcastle and
South Shields.
2.--Newcastle and Sunderland.
3.--Durham and
Bishop Auckland.
4.--Nowcastle and Durham,
via Blackhill and
Annfield Plain.
fi.--Central, Tynemouth and
Manors North,
via Riverside.
1.--Tyne Dock and South Pelaw
or Stella Gill, 50 wagons
or upwards.
2.—Tyne Dock and South Pelaw
or Stella Gill.
Up to 50 wagons.
3.--Fish and Meat train between
, Berwick, York and Leeds.
4.--North Blyth and
Cambois Colliery.
5.
-
N
o
rt
h
B
West Sleekburn.
General Instructions.—Continued.
Special and Exceptional Headlights.
Passenger Trains.
Freight Trains.
C.—Central, Tynemouth, and
Manors North,
via Heaton.
7.--Sunderland and Durham.
8.—Sunderland and
Durham Elvet.
9.—Sunderland and Seaham.
Sunderland and
South Shields.
10.--Newcastle, Newburn
and North Wylam.
(S.—Trains with through loads
from North to South, or vice
versa, requiring to run
through York Passenger
Station. ( O . 6634).
7.—Freight Trains from North
Road for Croft Junction—
By day—A green disc in
centre of buffer beam.
By night :—
S.—Rosedale Branch.
9.--Calcdonian engines when
running over North Eastern
line.
10.—G.N. Express Fish trains
between York and
Doncaster.
(O. 5826).
0 Denotes White Light. • Denotes Green Light.
One white
light on right
hand side of
weatherboard.

Headlights of AutoLar Trains.
General Rules 125 and '142.
A white light must be carried in the centre of the buffer beam when the
engine is running first, and on the lamp iron immediately above the centre
coupling when the car is running first. The lamps must be carried in the,
same position during the day as at night.
DISTINCTIVE HEADLIGHTS FOR LIGHT ENGINES FROM
SHEDS TO SIDINGS, NEWCASTLE.
General Rules 125 and 142.
Light engines from the various sheds to the Carriage Sidings
in the neighbourhood of Newcastle which require to be got
to the sidings without delay, will in future carry two green
headlights, one on the left •and the other on the right hand
buffer beam, thus :—
Such engines must be treated in order of precedence the same as an
ordinary Passenger train, and everything possible must be done to give.
them a good run. ( O . 6122).
DISTINCTIVE HEADLIGHTS FOk CRAMLINGTON AND SEATON
DELAVAL COLLIERY COMPANIES' ENGINES, PERCY MAIN.
General Rules .125 and 142.
The following special headlights have been introduced for the use of the.
Crandingrton ail Seaton Delaval Colliery Companies engines when working,
between Percy Main and the Tyne Commissioners' line :—
(1) Trains
General Instructions.—Continued. 9 3
(2) Light Engines or
Engine and Brake
(O. 7331).
DISTINCTIVE HEADLIGHTS FOR FREIGHT TRAINS IN CONNECTION,
WITH THE TYNESIDE CONTROL AREA.
General Rules 125 and 142.
All Freight trains and engines and vans going to the places enumerated
below must carry headlights, applicable to the destination of the train; as
set out. These headlights must be carried from the last stopping place.
before reaching the control area.
Light engines must carry standard headlights.
Signalmen at the starting point of a train must be informed as to its
classification and also at any other place where the classification is changed
except when the standard headlights are being carried.

94 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Distinctive Headlights for Freight Trains in connection with the Tyneside
Coatrol Area.—Continued.
No. 2.
Places beyond Heaton and
short of Tweedmouth
(other than trains for
via Benton East
Curve).
No. 3.
Places beyond Heaton, via
Benton East Curve.
11 0; 80
Forth Yards.
No. 9.
Scotswood Station Sidings.
Ao„
.Blaydon Yards.
No 11,,
Newburn Branch.
North el Newcastle.
Berwick and Tweedmouth. N o. 4.
Heaton Yards.
No, 7. Riverside Branch.
NO. 5.
New Bridge Street and
Trafalgar Yards.
No. 6.
Tynemouth Branch.
Wost of Newcastle. •
No. 12.
Blackhill Branch.
o. 13,
Places on Carlisle Line short
of Carlisle.

Genera! instructions.—Continved
Distinctive Headlights for Freight Trains in Connection with the Tyneside
Control Area.—Continued.
South-West of Newcastle.
10. 15.
Low Fell Yard.
10. 16.
Dunston Area.
(Low Fell Sidings Box
to
Blaydon, East Box).
lo. 18.
Park Lane Yards.
East •ef Gltesheat/.
No. 17.
Redheugh Area.
(Dunston East Box
to
Bedheugh Goods Yard).
(Note ..--Freigla trains for places South of,
Low Fell must carry standard headlights).
No. 19.
t Trains from places West of
Park Lane going to
places East thereof.
t (Note :—Special headlights to be changed to
eandard headlights at the first stopping
place alter passing Park Lane).
61$ Denotes a Green light. 0 Denotes a White light.
(O. 66611q
Distinctive Headlights for Middlesbrough District Freight Trains,
General Rule 125 and 142.
1.—A special series of headlights have been introduced in order that all
concerned may know when they see a train approaching what the destination is.
2.—The standard headlights must continue to be carried by
(a) All outward trains from the Middlesbrough District the next
destination of which is West of Thornaby Passenger Station.
(b) All Down trains from South or West of Eaglescliffe for destinations
East of Thornaby Passenger Station.
(c) All Up or Down trains for Thornaby Ironworks or Newport Down
Goods Yard.
3.—The special headlights must be carried by engines stationed at Byers
Green, Stockton, Port Clarence, West Hartlepool, Shildon, Newport, Middlesbrough
and Carlin How, running to or in the Middlesbrough District
East of Thornaby Passenger Station, except as set out in paragraph 2.
4.—Light engines, and engines and vans must also carry the special head
lights except where otherwise provided.
5.—The special headlight applicable to the next calling point must be
carried from the commencement of the journey, except in the case of North
Colliery engines as shewn in the next paragraph.
6.—Drivers of Through North Quarry or Colliery trains, via Ferryhill
for the Middlesbrough District, must change the headlight at Ferryhill if
stopped there, or at the first stop after passing Ferryhill, or make a special
stop at Bowesfield West, if necessary, in order to do so.
7,--The following is the special series of headlights referred to,
95

96 G e n e r r i f instructions.—Continued.
Distinctive Headlights or Middlesbrough District Freight Trains.—Contbzued.
Trains whose next destination is :—
-1—East of Tod Point.
Empty Ironstone trains
from Port Clarence and
Stockton to carry Class
" B " headlights.
All other trains to carry
headlights according to
their respective classifications.
Trains having to
stop on route to carry the
distinctive headlights to
that point.
2.--Tod Point.
•3.---Lazenby Tip and
Slag Crusher.
(O. 7'059).
4,--Lackenby Works.
5.—Clay Lane Works.
ClevelancliWorks.
SouthiBank Works and
SouthlBantrIGoods Yard.
5.—Cargo Fleet Junction and
Whitcl.ouse Crossing.
(O. 7059).
7.—Eston Brant h.
S.---Normanby Works.
(O. 3074).
9.—Tees Works,
Orrnesby Works and
Dock Hill Reception Lines.
10.—Guisborough Branch.
Middlesbrough Dock
(Low Levei).
12.--Newport Up Goods.
13.--- Erimus Laden and
Erimus Empty Sidings.
14.—Newport Ironworks.
(O. 7059).
15.--Marsh Branch.
16.—Acklam Branch.

7.—Middlesbrough
Goods Yard.
1.—Ore traffic for the Seaton
Carew Ironwork.
2.—Traffic for Burn Road.
3.-----Traffic for Cliff House,
North Yard.
General Instructions.—Continued.
Distinctive Headlights for Middlesbrough District Freight Trains.—Continued.
18.—Light engines from the
east for Middlesbrough
engine shed.
N.B.— • denotes a green light. 0 denotes a white light.
During daylight the green lights are to be represented by a circular green
disc with a white cross, and the white lights by white discs in the positions
shewn. ( O . 3074).
DISTINCTIVE HEADLUGHTS FOR FREIGHT TRAMS WORKING
AT THE HARTLEPOOLS AND TO SEATON CAREW IRONWORKS.
General Rules 125 and 142.
The standard headlights will cease to be carried by certain trains and
engines enumerated below working at the Hartlepools and to the Seaton
Carew Ironworks, and a special series of headlights will be introduced in
order that all concerned may know when they see a train approaching what
the destination is.
The following is the special series of headlights referred to :—
4.—Traffic for Cliff House,
A. and B. Yards.
5.--Traffic for Cliff House Storage
Grounds, other than
North Yard.
In addition, a green light in the centre of the buffer beam with any of the
above codes will indicate :—
1. In the case of a train travelling from the Dock area, that it must
pass over the new weigh.
2. In the case of a train travelling from the Main Goods Yard, that
it must pass over No 1 weigh in the North Yard.
N.B.— 0 denotes a green light. 0 denotes a white light. (O. 5459).
97

98 G e n e r a l Instructions.— Continued.
DISTINCTIVE HEADLIGHT FOR ENGINES BETWEEN
SHILDON ENGINE SHED AND COAL STAGE.
General Rules 125 and 142.
Engines, Shildon Engine Shed to 1 One green light on left hand side
Coal Stage and back f o f buffer beam. (O. 6890).
WORKING OF FREIGHT TRAINS BETWEEN THE YARDS
AT DARLINGTON.
General Rules 125 and 142.
The following arrangements for the purpose of distinguishing local train&
for the various yards are in operation :—
From North Road.
For Up Sidings to run as Class D.
l'or - Bank Top to run as Class C.—Standard Headlight.
Croft Junction to run as Class C. and carry following special headlight
Standard One green headlight during night-time and a green disc during daytime-
H eon aright d lhand i g of h buffer t . beam.
From 'croft Juncfion and Bank Top to North Road.
To run as Class C and carry one green headlight during night-time and a green,
disc during daylight on right hand of buffer beam.
From Croft Junction and Bank Top to Down or West Sidings.
To run as Class D. with a green headlight at night-time and green disc during
daytime on left hand of buffer beam.
From Croft Junction to Bank Top.
To run as Class D.—Standard Headlight. ( O . 6171).
TRAIN SIGNALS. ELECTRIC TRAINS, TYNEWIOUTH BRANCH.
Day Signals :—
Head
Tail
General Rules 125, 126, and 142.
Night Signals :
- and lights as follows, to be exhibited at
level of roof :—
Head Central, Tynernouth and Manors North,
D e s tvia i Riverside n
a t
Central,
i o n
Tynemouth, Monkseaton and
Manors North, via Heaton
I nCentral, d iTynernouth,
and Monkseaton,
c a tvia oBenton
South East Curve
r
Central, and Manors North, via Benton
South West Curve • •
Central, Manors North, South Gosforth
and Monkseaton • • •
Empty Stock train on any portion of the
line •
Tail •
• Destination Indicator.
• No signal.
One green light on right hand side, and
one green light on left hand side.
One white light on right hand side, and
one green light on left hand side.
Three lights—two white and one green,.
the green light being in the centre.
One green light on right hand side,.
one green light on left hand side,.
and
One 6 white light on left hand side, an&
one white light on right hand side.
o
Three n green lights.
One
e
red light at the level of the roof...
w
h
i
t
e
l
i
The Parcels trains must carry a tail lamp both by day and by night.

General Instructions.—Continued. 9 9
TAIL LAMPS.
General Rules 126, 127, 128, and 129.
1.—The tail lamp or tail light prescribed by these rules must always shew
a red light when burning.
,
but 2 two side lamps will be carried during the day, which must be lighted
after sunset or during foggy weather or falling snow. ( O . 6593).
.
-
-
T
TRAMS RUNG OR STANDING ON INDEPENDENT RUNNING
LINES AFTER DARK.
General Rule 127 (b).
rWhen
trains have been turned or shunted into independent running lines
- a
anearest
i to the running main line must be turned when the train is clear of the
main line, so as to shew a white light by which means two red lights and a
f
white n light will be shown against any train approaching on the same independ-
tent
s line ; the drivers approaching on the main line will understand that such
elights
o indicate that the train in front is on an independent line and not upon
r
the main line. Guards and drivers must be careful to see that lights are again
'changed
n
before leaving such lines.
d t
The instructions apply to all trains running over the following passenger
alines
h which are parallel to the Main lines :—
r e Up and Down Slow between Chevington and Amble Junction.
k R 1
, o -,
tOnly applies to trains brought to a stand on the slow line). ( O . 2420).
Up and Down Slow between Durham South and Newton Hall Junction.
t s DUp
and Down Slow between Eryholme Junction and Cowton.
h e oUp
and Down Slow between Castle Hills South Junction (Northallerton)
e
and 'Wiske Moor.
d w
T..
t a n 7Up
Slow, Tollerton to Newton Siding.
a l S9
Up York and Up Hull lines, Barlby Junction to Selby North.
i e l Down A.h.in and Down Duplicate, Selby North to Barlby J•unction.
S
l B o
Up and Down Slow between Staddlethorpe and Hessle.
lDown
Slow, &earner Junction to Station. ( O . 2426).
a r wo
n a'TAIL
, w AND SIDE LAMPS ON G.C. AND G.E. PASSENGER TRAINS.
d n G,
General Rules 126, 127 (a), 130 (a), and B.T.R. 19.
s cGreat
aA
Central Company's passenger trains running over the North Eastern
line between
i h t l Thorne and Hull ; over the S. & K. Joint line and the North
Eastern line between Ferrybridge and York ; and Great Eastern Company's
d n
passenger w e trains running over the N.E. line between Doncaster and York
e
e do i not s carry side lamps, but carry two tail lamps in place of one
t
l l A hthird
tail lamp denotes that a special train of which no previous notice
o
a
has been given is following..
l If eTa
G.Q. or G.E. train passes a box with only one tail lamp burning,
mthe
n atrain
o must not be stopped specially to have the second lamp lighted,
pbut
o d a l message must be sent to the Station Master at the first stopping
s station,
t J
informing him of the - circumstances.
l
a c
The
u
" Train passed without Tail Lamp " signal must not be sent in,
.such ecases.
( O . 5545).
r a nr
e r ct
n r t o
o y i n

100 G e r i a r a i nstructions.—Continued.
Engines ni!Iran round train on Running Una where t o
Signal oxes are involved Train and Block ell Signals.
General Rule 128 and B.T.R.
cases where there is an Advance signal at the box at which the
engine leaves its train and the train is left standing within the Advance
signal, the Signalman should cancel the bell signal for the train, if it has
been sent to the Advance box and offer a light engine. The light engine
should carry a tail lamp when running to the Advance Box.
2.—In cases where there is no Advance signal at the box at which the
engine leaves its train, or if it is necessary for the front of the train to be
left standing beyond the Advance signal, the train should be signalled to
the Advance box. The light engine should run to the Advance box
without a tail lamp. The Driver should explain the circumstances to the
Signalman in advance, who must not clear back to the box in the rear.
When the engine has returned to the rear box and the line has been
cleared, the Signalman should cancel the train to the Advance Box in
accordance with the Regulations. ( O . 6722).
TRAIN FOLLOW: G SEGINIAL.
Gearal Rule 130.
A supply of tail lamps is kept at each station where they are likely to
be required at any time for the purpose of carrying out this rule.-
Instructions to Staff in connection with the working el Foreign
Companies Slip Carriages.
General Rule 131 and B.T.R. 19 (g) and (h).
1.—The slip portion must be composed of not more than three vehicles,
all of which must be fitted with the Westinghouse or Vacuum brake. The
first vehicle need only be a slip vehicle.
2.--Slip carriages must be coupled to the train by the ordinary screw
coupling and side chains until the train arrives at the last station at which
it stops prior to passing the station where the slip portion has to be detached,
from which point the slip coupling alone must be used.
3.—Unless instructions to the contrary are issued by the General Superintendent
when a train which conveys slip carriages has to be run in two
portions, the first portion must not carry the usual slip carriage signals, but
must carry an additional tail lamp, or a red board, or a red flag by day, and
an additional red tail light by night, to indicate that the train is running in
two portions. The second train must convey the slip portion, and carry
the prescribed slip carriage signals.

Generni instructions.—Continued. 1 0 1
Wurki;lg of Fareign CsAxivanies' Si fl CarElages. --Continued.
4—The guard in charge of each slip portion will be held responsible for
seeing, by examination and testing before the train starts, that the brake,
slipping, and other apparatus are in good working order, that at the last
stopping station the slip connection is properly made and secure, and that
the prescribed slip carriage signals are attached.
Should the slip coupling or other apparatus be defective, the slip portion
must be attached by the ordinary coupling, and the train must stop at the
slipping station.
5.—The trains on which slip carriages are run, and the stations at which
they are to be slipped, are shew-n in the Working Time Tables, and no other
train Must be allowed to slip carriages without the sanction of the General
Superintendent.
6.--If permanent way operations should be in progress of a character to
render it undesirable to slip carriages, or if, owing to fog, falling snow, or
other cause, the station master at a place where a carriage is usually slipped
considers it desirable that the train should stop instead of the carriage being
slipped, he must take care that the fixed signals are kept at danger, and the
train stopped at the station for the slip portion to be detached.
Where practicable, the station at which the train last stops must be advised
by telegraph or telephone of the circumstances. The Station Master receiving
this message must specially instruct the engine driver, the slip guard, and
the other guards of the train that the train must Stop at the slipping station
instead of Slipping the carriages, and he must see that the ordinary screw
-coupling
is used instead of the slip coupling.,
.
When no slip carriage is available, and no notice has been issued that the
slip carriage will not be run, or if from any cause arising at the last stopping
station, a train is required to Stop at a station where it ordinarily slips, the
station master at such last stopping station must instruct the engine driver
and guards that the train must stop at the slipping station, and he must
see that the ordinary screw coupling is used instead of the slip coupling. He
must also advise by telegraph the ,slipping station.
When the slip portion consists of more than three vehicles, the ordinary
screw coupling must be used, and the train must be stopped at the station at
which the slip portion is usually detached, that station being also advised by
telegraph or telephone that the train will stop, unless it is decided to run the
train in two parts, for instructions as to which see ,Clause 3.
7.--In•the event of a slip carriage becoming accidentally disconnected on
the journey, the guard in charge of it must immediately apply his brake to
keep it clear of the train ; and unless he be within such a distance of the
station in advance that the slip carriage will run into it, he must stop as soon
as possible, secure his brake, and go bad( immediately to the station in the
rear for assistance; taking his detonators and hand signals with him ; but
in the event of there being a station ahead within such distance that the
slip carriage will run to it, it must be allowed to do so. The driver, if he
find the slip carriage has become detached, must not stop his:train.

102 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Working of Foreign Companies' Siip Carriages.—Continued.
8.--Slip carriages, furnished with the prescribed slip carriage signals, whether
the train is ordered to stop at the slipping station or not, must always be sent
by the trains on which they are arranged to run, except where a written or
printed notice has been issued to all concerned that the slip portion will not
be run by the usual train, in which case that train will not carry the usual
slip carriage tail signals.
9.—When from any cause the train is required to call at the slipping station,
and no previous written or printed notice has been issued to that effect, the
usual slip carriage tail signals must be placed on the rear vehicle of the train.
The slip carriage tail signals must be removed at the usual slipping station
and the ordinary tail lamp put on. ( 0 . 5343).
WORKING OF AUTO-CARS.
General Rule 127.
It is not necessary for side lamps to be carried on auto-cars.
• General Rules 134 and 135.
General Rules 134 and 135 do not apply in connection with the working
of auto-car.
KEYS, FUR LE-MONS, ETC., FALLING FROM LOCOMOMES.
General Rule 137.
Keys, fire-irons, or any other article belonging to a locomotive which are
found upon the permanent way must be sent to the nearest Shed Superintendent,
Shed Master, or Shed Foreman, without delay, together with a
memorandum giving the date and time and place of finding. •
DUTIES OF ENGINE PILOTN1Efol.
General Rule 138.
When North Eastern pilotmen are provided they should simply give the
foreign Companies' driVers the necessary instructions in regard to the signals,
curves, gradients, etc., on the parts of the line over which they are running,
and leave the actual driving entirely in the hands of the foreign Companies'
men. The following are the Companies referred to, viz. :—Caledonian, Great
Central, Glasgow and South Western, Great Eastern, Great Northern,
London and North Western, Maryport and Carlisle, Midland, and North
British,
The above instructions also apply to North Eastern Pilotmen piloting
North Eastern Drivers.
INCTRUCTMS AS TO WORKING GROUND SIGNAL HiANiES
AT RELIEF AND OTHER SIDINGS WHERE GONGS
ARE PROVIDED.
General Rule 141.
When shunting has to be done the guard must give one beat on the gong,
when the signalman will withdraw the bolt lock, and the points can then be
worked.

General Instructions.—Continued. 1 0 3
Instructions as to Working Ground Signal Frames, etc.—Continued.
When the train passes clear into the siding, and the shunting can be done
within the catch points, two beats of the gong must be given, and the points
so set that the bolt lock may at once be replaced.
When the train is ready to return to the Main line, three beats of the gong
must be given, upon which the signalman, if the Main line is clear, will withdraw
the bolt lock, and when the train has been drawn out clear of the siding
points, four beats must be given by the guard as a signal that the train is
ready to proceed on its journey, and the signalman must then replace the
bolt lock.
During foggy weather or snowstorms, or at any time when the signalman
is unable to see a train shunting at the ground frame, the guard or other
person in charge of the latter must, after the line or lines have been cleared,
in addition to giving the "line clear" signal on the gong to the signalman,
verbally inform the latter of the circumstances, and the signalman must not
accept any train until he has been informed. ( O . 108).
SPECIAL TRAMS RANGED BY THE ENGiNEER FOR THE
CONVEYANCE OF COMPANY'S WORKMEN.
General Rule 142. and B.T.R.
When special trains are run for tile. conveyance of Company's workmen
direct from one place to another, and the distance is not less than 15 miles,
the train must be signalled as a Class B Freight train, viz., 5 (1-4), provided
the vehicles are suitable and the conditions of the load and other circumstances
admit of this being done. When such trains are not run under the
B classification, the guard must state the reason on his journal.
When workmen are conveyed for a shorter distance, either in vehicles
specially provided for the purpose, or in vehicles attached to Ballast trains,
they must be signalled strictly in accordance with the Block Telegraph
Regulations, either as a through Ballast train or as a train requiring to stop
in the section, as the case may be. ( O . 1889).
Speed of Light Engines or Engine and Van.
General Rule 145.
Passenger engines, 45 or up to 55 miles per hour, when necessary.
Freight engines with wheels of over 4 ft. 6 ins, in diameter—
Not to exceed an average speed of 35 miles per hour.
Freight or Shunting engines with wheels of 4 ft. 6 ins, in diameter and under--
Not to exceed an average speed of 25 miles per hour.
(p. 1346. a. 22284).
STANDARD CDDE OF SIGNAL W i T S .
General Rule's 147 (Fa), 171 and 183.
When the signal to start a train has been given by the guard to the engine
driver the latter need not acknowledge this signal, unless from some cause
he is prevented from getting away at once, when a short whistle must be
given.

104 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Standard Code of Signal Whisties.—Continued.
After being stopped by signals at any box, it is not necessary for the driver
to whistle when the signal is lowered, before he puts the engine in motion.
In reference to all junctions, whether of main, branch, or independent
lines, and to all cross-over roads and sidings, not otherwise specially provided
for in the Signal Whistles Book, the following general whistles must
be observed :—
Approaching Junctions.
Whistles.
For a train approaching a junction on a main or continuous
running line and intended to proceed beyond the junction
• towards the left hand . . . . . . 1 long.
For a train approaching a junction on a main or continuous
running line and intended to proceed beyond the junction
towards the right hand . 2
For a train approaching a junction having three diverging
running lines and intended to proceed beyond the junction
Towards the left hand line . . 1
centre line . . 2
right hand line .. ' . 3
P, ) )
Approaching Stations.
As an indication that a Freight train which is timed to
stop, has no wagon or goods to leave, and will not stop
unless required by station (Rule 173) 2 crows.
Cress
-
For permission to use a cross-over road, and after using
ova
the cross-over road, as an indication that the engine or
train is clear of the Rpoints o
1 crow
a d
s . Sidings.
For permission to enter a siding and as an indication that the
train is clear of the points and ready to enter . . 2 long.
As an indication that the whole of the train has entered the
siding and is clear of the safety points . . . 1 )2
For permission to return from a siding to the main line and
as an indication that the engine or first vehicle is within 1
the safety points and ready to leave . . . . 2 'I
As an indication that the whole of the train has left the siding
and is clear of the points . . . 1 ,,

List of Places where a Special Limitation in regard to the Speed
of Trains must be observed, as provided for in General
Rule 148 (b). General Rules 148, 145, and B.T.R.
NOTE.—The attention of Drivers is called to General Rules 145 (a) and
• 148 (a), and B.T.R. 34 and 37, which read as follows :—
145 (a).-----" The engine-driver must regulate the running of his engine as
accurately as practicable, according to the Working Time
Table, so as to avoid extreme speed or loss of time."
148 (a).--" Engine-drivers of trains, when running through Junctions to
or from lines diverging from the straight road, must. so
reduce their speed as to ensure a steady passage for the
whole train through the Junction points and crossings."
B.T.R. 34 (Single lines worked by Train Staff and Ticket).—
B.T.R. 37 (Single lines worked by Electric Train Staff and Electric Train
Tablet).—
" When exchanging train staffs or train tablets by hand, drivers
must be careful not to exceed a speed of 10 miles per hour."
All trains are so timed that they can, without losing time, reduce speed as
prescribed in the above rules.
Except where otherwise shewn, trains passing through junctions between
parallel lines, or when entering or leaving Loop or Slow lines, Platform or
Bay lines, Goods lines or Cross-over roads—
NAME OF BRANCH AND
LOCALITY.
Normanton and Newcastle.
West Riding Junction.
Castleford Station
Milford Junction.
York Station
Darlington Station between South
and North Junction Boxes
Ferryhill No. 3 Junction
Ferryhill No. 3 Junction
Browney Colliery Curve
Durham Viaduct
Gateshead, King Edward
Junction •
Gateshead West Station and
Junction
Newcastle Central Station
General Instructions.—Continued. 1 0 5
Speed per hour not to exceed 15 miles.
•
Bridge
Bate of speed
not to exceed
miles per hour.
25
35
30
15
15
30'
15
50
30
20
10
15
REMARKS.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Over Up Platform line from
North Box to Footbridge.
All lines between Locomotive
Yard, Waterworks and Leeman
Road Signal Boxes.
Down trains passing through
Station.
Trains to and from Darlington
via Ferryhill Station.
Trains to and from Stockton.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Curve at South end of King
Edward Bridge. (Boardof
Trade Restriction).
Trains passing through station
and trains entering Down
Slow line.
Trains entering at East and
West Ends.

106 G e n e r a l Enstructions.—Continued.
Limitation of Speed to be otserved.— Continued.
NAME OF BRANCH AND
LOCALITY.
Ferryhill and Newcastle, via Leamside.
Curve South of Victoria Viaduct,
Pensha
Gateshead, Between High Street
Junction and. Park Lane Signal
Box
Gateshead East Station and
Gateshead Junction
Newcastle and Berwick.
Manors East Station
Heaton South Junction between
Heaton and Forest Hall near
two mile post
Morpeth Curve
Almnouth Curve
Heaton and Tynemouth.
Tynemouth Junction between
North Shields and Tynemouth
near 61 mile post
Newcastle and Tyriemouth, via
Backworth.
Gosforth and West Moor Colliery
Crossing between South Gosforth
and Gosforth East Junction
near 2i mile post
Backworth Junction
Newcastle and Tynemouth, via Benton
Benton East Junction
Ben ton Quarry Junction
Ponteland and South Gosforth.
South Gosforth Junction
Morpeth and Backworth.
Hartley Station
Newcastle and Carlisle.
Blaydon Curves
Wylam Curve
Stocksfield Curve
Wctheral Curve
Canal Branch, Carlisle.
Rome Street Junction
Scotsviced, Newburn and Wylam.
Newburn Curves
Redheugh Branch.
Between Redheugh Bank Foot
and Dunston West
Between Derwenthaugh Junction
and Blaydon Main
Rate of speed
not to exceed
miles per hour.
25
25
1
0
25
45
30
50
20
30
30
Quarry
251
301
15
15
30
35
35
35
15
30
10
20
REMARKS.
,
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Trains passing through station
and trains entering Down
Slow line.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
All routes. U p and Down
lines.
Trains entering and leaving
South East Curve.
Up line. Trains from Ponteland
direction.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Passenger trains running on
Goods lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.

NAME OF BRANCH AND
LOCALITY.
Scotswood and Blackhill.
Scotswoocl Bridge Junction
Blackhill and Durham.
Curves at site of Knitsley Viaduct
Birtley and Blackhill, via
Anntield Plain.
East Castles Curve
From Consett East to Consett
North Junction
Pelaw and South Shields.
Pelaw Junction
High Shields
Brockiey Whins to Tyne Dock.
Nun
-
Ryhope Weiand
West Hartlepool.
Between Ryhope East and
-
Seaham Colliery Station
tak
Sunderland ers and Castle Eden.
' Ryhope .Grange Junction
O
Thornley Junction Curve
f f
Ferryhili and Stockton.
iCarlton
Station Junction
Bishop c Auckland.
eNorth
and West Junctions
,
TEast
and North Junctions
y
n
e East and West Junctions
D
Tow Law and Crook.
o
c
Between Tow Law and Crook
North k Road and Darlington.
. Albert Hill to Parkgate Junction.
Darlington and Tebay.
Hopetown Junction
Kirkby Stephen
General Instructions.—Continued.
Limitation of Speed to be observed.—Continued.
Rate of speed
not to exceed
miles per hour
20
35
30
10
20
20
4
35
25
25
15
10
10
1
0
30
15
20
20
5
Up direction.
REMARKS.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
107
Curve leaving Newcastle and
Carlisle Branch Up and
Down lines.
Trains passing to and from
South Shields Branch.
Trains passing round " S
Curves.
Over " S " curves, North of
Seaham Hall Private Station.
Trains between Sunderland
' and Wellfield
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down Passenger lines.
Passenger trains passing North
and West Junctions for
No. 4 Platform.
All trains running on the Up
and Down Platform lines
and on the Mineral lines.
All trains running on the
Platform single line.
Passenger trains.
All other trains.
Up Independent.
Up and Down lines to and
from Barnard Castle.
Trains passing from Loop to
Down Main at East end of
Platform.

108
NAME OF BRANCH - AND
• LOCALITY.
Darlington and Sanborn.,
Geneva Junction
Oak Tree Junction
Eaglescliffe South Junction
Thornaby Station to 200 yards
West of Station
Thornaby East, 12 Mile Post to
Thornaby Station
South Bank Station
Redcar West, 22i Mile Post to
Redcar West Signal Box
Redcar East, Station to 23 Mile
Post.
Eston Branch. •
Hartborn East Carve.
Hartburn Junction
Bowesfield Junction
Limitation of Speed tri observed.—Continued.
Leeds and Hartlepool.
Bramhope Tunnel
Northallerton Low Junction between
43 and 42t Mile Post
Eaglescliffe North Junction
North Shore Junction,. Primrose
Hill S B to North Shore Junct.
West Hartlepool, between Clarence
Road Junction and
Stranton Junction
West Hartlepool between Church
Street & Beach Road Crossing
Pannal Loop.
Crimple Junction, Harrogate
Ftiorthallerton Loop.
Northallerton Low Junction
Northallerton High Junction
Cordio Loop.
Northallerton South
1Vielmerby and Thirsk Soinh 41unction.
Mel merby junction
Thirsk South Junction
General Instructions.—Continued•
Rate of speed
not to exceed
miles per hour
35
30
20
j
.
30
30
2
0 35
30
20
25
25
20
30
35
20
30
15
1
0
25
35
25
30
30
REMARKS.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Down line from Darlington.
Down line.
Up line.
Up and Down lines.
Up line.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Board of Trade Restriction.
Up and Down lines. Trains
between Thornaby and
Stockton.
Up and Down lines. Trains
between Thornaby and
Stockton.
Down trains on leaving tunnel.
Up line to Sinderby.
Down line to Stockton.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down trains whether
on Passenger or Goods
lines.
Mineral trains working between
Clarence Road and
Coal Hill
Trains to and from Parma].
To and from Leeds Northern
Main line.
Down trains from Northallerton
to Stockton.
30 T o and from York and Newcastle
Main line.
Up • and Down lines to and
from Baldersby.
Up and Down lines to and
from Topcliffe.

Lirnit2tion of Speed to be observed .—Continued.
NAME OF BRANCH AND
LOCALITY.
Saltburn and Whitby.
Boulby Mines, 381 to 39 miles
Sandsend from South end of
Tunnel to Sandsend Viaduct
East • Row Viaduct
Newholm Beck Viaduct
Upganc
Scarborough , and Whitby.
First Curve North of Sealby at
V i
2
a
miles 50 chains.
dCurve u c between Hayburn Wyke
t and. Stainton Dale at 7i miles
Curve between Stainton Dale and
Ravenscar (
-8
miles 50 chains,
Ravenscar to Mill Beck, 10 miles
Midge
to 13i miles. •
Mill
H
Beck
o l
at
e
13/ miles
Summit ) to Robin Hoods' Bay,
abetween
15 miles and 16/
tmiles
Broomfield to Prospect Hill Junction,
193: miles to 20 miles
50 chains
York and Scarborough.
Between York Station and Scarborough
Bridge,
Between Howsham Gates Box
and Huttons Ambo Station
Malton Station
Between Seamier Station and
Weaponness Signal Dox
Rillington and Whitby.
Between Pickering Mill Lane
Junction and High Mill
Between Grosmont and Sleights
24i miles to 26i miles
GrOSMOnt, Beckhole Branch.
Between Deviation Junction Signal
Box and Beck Hole Terminus
Driffield Station and Junction
Market Weighton Station
Church Fenton and Harrogate.
Tadcaster Station
Arthington Loop.
Arthington North to Arthington
West
Genera! instructions.—Continued. 1 0 9
Rate of speed
not to exceed
miles per hour.
25
20
20
20
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
15
45
45
45
25
25
25
25
20
45
25
REMARKS.
Both directions.
Both directions.
Both directions.
Both directions.
Both directions.
Up direction.
Up direction.
Up direction.
Down direction.
Both directions
Up direction.
Down direction.
All lines..
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Both directions. (Board of
Trade Restriction)
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
•
Up line.
Up and Down lines.

110 G e n e r a ! tnstructions•—,Continued.
Limitation of Speed to be obscrved.—Continued.
NAME OF BRANCH AND
LOCALITY.
Arthington and Ilkiey.
Arthington South to Arthington
West
York and Doncaster.
Selby •
Selby and Leeds.
Between Selby Station and
Wistow Junction
Reception line between Selby Canal
and Wistow Junction signal
boxes
Neville Hill to Marsh Lane East •
Marsh Lane East to Station •
Leeds New Statical
Leeds and Wetberby.
Between 4 miles and 6i miles
(Bardsey Station)
Wortley .iiAnct. to " B " Box &met. •
Hui!. Between Park Street and
Paragon Station
Rate of speed
not to exceed
miles per hour.
s 25
30
30
1
0
45
30
10
25
15
1
0
REMARKS.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down. (O. 7097)'
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
All trains between Leeds Canal
and East Boxes
Board of Trade Restriction,
Up and Down lines.
Up and Down lines.
All trains running into Paragon,
Station.
Speed of Trains on Dock Lines at Ha.
General Rules 148 (b), 134 and 170 (a).
Engines and trains running over the Dock lines at Hull and along
Wellington Street must always be preceded by the Fireman, Guard, or a
Shunter, as the case may be, and must not travel at a greater speed
than 4 miles an hour.
EXCEPT :
- Trains running over the passenger line and adjoining Up and Down,
Freight running lines between Albert Dock West box and Riverside Quay
Station box, the speed of which must be limited as follows :—
Passenger Line.
(a) Between Albert Dock West and Billingsgate box to 10 miles
per hour.
Passenger Line.
(b) Between Billingsgate box and Riverside Quay Station box to
20 miles per hour.
Up and Down Freight Lines.
(c) Between Albert Dock West and Riverside Quay, trains and engines
may run up to a speed of 10 miles per hour, or at such greater
speed as circumstances justify.
NOTE—These speeds do not apply to Freight trains running over the
lines between Hedon Road Bridge and entrance to No. 2 Timber Pond,
Victoria Dock. ( 0 . 1 3 . T . 376).

Restriction c4 Eng]nes over ceKain $ections oi the Line.
General Rule 148 (b) and 149.
SECTIONS OF LINE.
Blyth Staiths, North,
South, and New
Colliery Sidings at Walbottle,
West Mickley,
Netherton, Bedlington A.,
and Doctor Pits, and at
Whitehill Point
Between Argyle Street
and Manors North
'Tynemouth Depots Branch
Allhusen's Branch, Redheugh
and Teams Traders' Sidings,
Jetties South Dock,
,(Sunderland), Ryhope
Grange and South Dock
(Fawcett Street and Hendon
Branch), Washington
and Biddick Collieries
Durham Main Colliery
Page Bank Branch
Castle Eden Goods Yard
Billingham and.
Port Clarence.
Mineral Lines between Old
Town Jct. and Lazenby
South Gare Breakwater
Branch from Tod Point,
Redcar.
Wear Valley Junction
and Wearhead.
Merrybent Branch
Barnard Castle and
Kirkby Stephen.
Barnard Castle and
Middleton-in-Teesdale.
,
C
a
s
t
l
e
t
o
n
General instrucUons.--Continued.
CLASSES OF ENGINES PROHIBITED.
, S, Si, S2, S3, T, Ti, T2, T3, W, X, Y.
D, T, Ti, T2, W, X, Y.
111
All except Classes E, El, H, Hi. H2 and 290.
B, C, D, G, L, N, P, Pl, P2, P3, S, Si, S2, S3,
T, Ti, T2, T3, U, V, X, Y, Z 4cc, 59, 290
398, 901, 1463.
D, S, Si, 52, S3, T, Ti, T2, T3, and Y.
D, T, Ti, T2, W, X, Y.
D, 1, J, R, 111, S, Si, S2, S3, T, Ti, T2, T3,
V, IV, X, Y, Z, 4cc.
Si, T, Ti, T2, X.
D, T2, W, X, Y. (From passing over the underbridge
at Bell's Bank Foot).
D, T2, W, X, Y.
•
B, D, F, I, J, L, M, P2, P3, Q, Q1, R, RI, S.
Si, 52, S3, T, Ti, T2, T3, V, W, X, Y, Z,
1619, 4cc.
D, F, 1, J, L, M, P2, P3, Q, Ql, R, R1, S, Si,
S2, S3, T, Ti, 12, T3, V, W, X, Y, Z, 3cc,
4ce.
All except Classes 290, E. and El.
B, D, F, 1, J, L, M, *N, P2, P3, Q, Ql, R, R1,
S, SI, 52, S3, T, Ti, T2, T3, U, V, IV, X,
Y, Z, 3cc, 4cc, 1463.
* Class " N " engines may be used for banking
purposes between Barnard Castle and Summit on
condition that such engines are employed only to
assist trains in the rear. ( G . 24321).
D, T2, T3, W, X, Y.
B, C, D, F, G, 1, J, L, M, N, P, P2, P3,
Q, Ql, R, RI, S, Si, 52, S3, T, Ti, T2, T3,
1J, V, W, X, Y, Z, 3cc, 4cc, 1463. Engines
coupled together are not allowed to run over
this Section.

112 G e n e r a l Instructions•-Continued.
Restriction of Engines over certain Sections of the Line.-Continued.
SECTIONS OF LINE.
Whitby and Pickering
Beckhole
.
B r a n
c h
Scarborough to Gallows Close.
Gallows Close & West Cliff
Otley and Ilkley
Leeds New Station Canal
Signal Box Back Siding
adjacent to Turntable Rd.
Masham (Corporation Siding)
Whitwood Branch
Castleford East Branch
Selby and Cawood
Axholme Joint Railway
CLASSES OF ENGINES PROHIBITED.
B, C, E, El, L, N, P, PI, P2, P3, S, Si, S2,
53, T, Ti, T2, 13, U, V, X, Y, Z, 3cc, 4cc,
290, 398, 901, 1463.
Any engine allowed to work on the Pickering and
Whitby Branch may travel over Beckhole
Branch as far as Dowson Garth Siding, but
beyond this point only Classes A, 0, BTP and
38 are allowed. ( 0 . 6525).
Class S, and T. engines may put trains into
Gallows 'Close Yard, but must not shunt there
on account of sharp curves.
B, C, N, Pl, P2, P3, T, Ti, T2, T3, U, 398,
and 1463.
D. I, J, L, M, P2, P3, Q, Q1, R, RI, S, Si, S2,
S3, T, Ti, T2, T3, V, W, X, Y, Z, 3cc, 4cc.
B, M, N, 290, W, X, Y, 3cc.
All classes except A. O. and B.T.P. (G. 32356)
A, B, D, F, G, I, J, L, M, N, P. P2,
P3, Q, Q1, .R, RI, S, Si, S2, S3, T, Ti,
T2, T3, V, W, X, Y, Z, 3cc, 4ce, Only
Class E. and El, to enter sidings Nos. 9 and
14, and sidings to Messrs. Hunt's Works.
All Classes except E, and El.
All classes except E. El, H, H2, K, BTP and
Electric Autocars. ( O . 5900).
D, I, J, L, M, P2, P3, Q, Q1, R, RI, S, Si,
S2, S3, T2, T3, V, W, X, Y, Z, 3cc, 4cc.
f
r
o
Depots on which Engines are allowed to mtravel.
o
General Rule 148 (b).
s
K
Engines must not be allowed to run or shunt on Coal Depots, except
I
where a notice board authorising this is exhibited.
4
M
a
t
m
g
m
v
i
s
e
a
c
e
s
i
w
.
.
.
.
.
.
a
,
1
1
3

- General Instructions.—Continued. 1 1 3
ASSISTANT ENGINE IN REAR OF TRAIN.
General Rules 149
9 2 1 7 ,
The following instructions a n d as to an assistant engine in rear apply also
to rear. a train engine of B a train . T drawn . R by pilot engine with a train engine in the
.
6 .
Attacking and Detaching of Assistant Engine.
In all cases the train must be brought to a stand before the assisting
engine is attached to or detached from the rear, except in detaching by
means of slip couplings where such are provided.
Where an engine assists a passenger train in the rear, it must in all cases,
be coupled to the train either by screw coupling or slip coupling, even although
the engine is only assisting the train to start.
Where an engine assists in the rear any train other than a passenger train
through a section from one signal box to another, it must be coupled to the
train. Where slip couplings are provided, or where screw couplings are
available on the engine, they must be used.
NOTE.—This instruction does not apply to the following sections of line :—
York No. 2 Up Goods to North Junction Box.
York No. 1 Up Goods to No. 2 Up Goods.
When slip couplings are in use on the assistant engine, the driver of the
assistant engine must stop as soon as the coupling is slipped.
Signalling of Assistant Engine in Rear.
Wherever authority is given for an assistant engine in rear of a train,
the assistant engine must be signalled in accordance with B.T.R. 6.
Where, however, trains are not signalled by bell over the section of line
in question, but are advised by telephone, B.T.R. 6 is to be applied so far
as it is applicable in the absence of bells and block instruments, i.e., the
signalmen in rear must advise the signalmen in advance of the presence
of the assistant engine in rear, and this information must be telephoned
forward as necessary from box to box until the train reaches a box at which
the assistant engine in rear or pilot engine can be signalled forward by bell.
Signalmen forwarding and receiving information as to an assistant engine
in rear must record this information in the Train Register Book at the time.
Under no circumstances must a train assisted by an engine in the ,rear
be diverted to run over a section of line from one signal box to another if
such line is not worked by bell code or telephone.
It may be necessary in case of accident for an assistant engine to be sent
in the rear of a train over sections where authority is not given, and under
these circumstances the assistant engine and train must be signalled in
accordance with Block Telegraph Regulation No. 6

114 G e n e r a l Instructiens.---Continued.
Assistant Engine in rear of Train.---Continued. •
Assistant Engine in rear after being detached to have signals
specially lowered for it.
When it is necessary for an assistant engine in rear, after being detached from
-
tof
using the cross-over road ahead of the point where it has been detached
hor
for some other purpose, it must not follow the train until the signal -
is
e which lowered for the train to proceed has been placed to danger and again lowered.
rEngine
in rear assisting Train to start.
e In all cases where an assistant engine in the rear is made use of for the
a'purpose
of :—
r
(a) Assisting a passenger train to start.
o
(b) Assisting a freight train to start,
f
the assistant, engine must not go beyond the last stop signal worked froth
a 'the box at which the assistant engine is attached, unless authority is given
tin
the following list for the assistant engine to go through the advance
r•section.
a
Assistant Engine to stop at Box where possible.
i
n
After assisting through a section and reaching the box at which the assistance
is to cease, the assistant engine must stop opposite the box where possible
,
t,Assistant
Engine not to foul Passenger line.
o Whenever an assistant engine is made use of to assist a train to start from
c•a
Goods Yard or non-passenger line, and authority is not given in the follow-
oing
list for the assistant engine to go through the Advance section, the
n
assistant engine must on no account foul the passenger line, and must not
pass the signal protecting the connection with the passenger line.
t
-i
Tn
If under any circumstances it is found necessary to shunt a train with an
ru
'assistant engine in the rear from one running line to another, or into a relief
ae
siding or other line, for the purpose of clearing the line for more important
•trains
o
to pass, or any other cause, the signalman must make a note in the
iTrain
Register Book that the train shunted has an assistant engine in the
n
nrear.
t
s
hSignalman
to be advised when Assistant Engine in rear of Train.
ae
Wherever an assistant engine in rear is attached at Sidings, Reception
s
Lines, or on Running Lines, the man responsible for arranging such working
sa
must advise the signalman that an assistant engine is in the rear.
im
se
tl
The following is a list of the sections of line upon which the assistant
ei
engine may assist in rear of trains between the undermentioned or any
intermediate signal boxes.
d n
This permission applies only to trains not conveying passengers unless
be
otherwise stated. ( 0 . 6548).
a
y
s
E
t
n
h
ge
i
,

From.
Alnmouth North • •
Whittingham Station •
Heaton North Junction.
Carlisle, Durran Hill
(From Petteril Bridge
Jet. when Durran
Hill is closed).
Haltwhistle Station •
Forth Junction • •
Scotswood Junction
St. Peters • •
Percy Main North jct. •
Willington Quay Station
Tyne Commissioners,
No. 1
Blyth Station •
Low Fell Station
Norwood Junction
Dunston East •
Durham South
Belly Mill Junction
Ouston Junction
Hownes Gill Junction
Beamish Junction
Louisa Colliery •
Jarrow Station
Beamish Juno.
Baxter Wood No. 2
Tyne Dock Bottom
Tyne Dock Bottom
Browney Colliery.•
Ferryhill No. 1 •
Sherburn Colly. Junct.
Coxhoe Bridge Station •
Dearness Valley Junct.
Assistant Engine in rear of Train—Continued,
NAMES Or BOXES.
Generai Instructions.—Continued.
To.
Alnwick Station Jot.
Ahrwick North
Killingworth Station •
Low Row Station
Coanwood Station
No. 3 Box, Newcastle.
Consett South Junct.
Riverside Junction •
Blue Bell Crossing •
Percy Main North Jet.
Percy Main North Jet.
Newsharn South •
Greensfield Junction •
King Edward Bdge. Jo.
Norwood Junction
Relly Mill Junction
Consett South Junct.
Carr House West
Carr House East
Harraton Colliery
Annfield Plain Jet.
Pelaw Junction
South Pelaw June.
Goods Crossin
,, Water%ouses
St. Bede's Junction
Green Lane Junction.
Ferryhill No. 1
Sherburn Coll. Junct.
Ferryhill No. 1 •
Kelloe Bank Head •
(Trimdon Grange
when Kelloe Bank
Head is closed).
Brancepeth Station
Lines.
Down
Up
Down
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
Down
' Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
•
For.
115
Freight Trains.
Cattle Trains.
Freight Trains. Slip couplings
at Heaton New Yard.
Freight Trains.
Slip couplings at Carlisle.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains. Slip couplings.
at Forth Junction.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains. Slip Coupling&
at Norwood Jet.
Freight Trains.
Passenger and Freight Trains.
Slip couplings at Durham for
Up Express Passenger Trainsout
of Durham Station.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Mineral Trains for Consett direction.
Mineral trains.
Mineral trains. (O. 2104).
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains. The engine.
must not go beyond the trap
points on Up Freight line.
near the Junction with the
Passenger line, and must
return to Dock Bottom via
the Independent. Slip Couplings
at Tyne Dock Bottom
Signal Box.
Freight Trains. Slip Couplings
at Tyne Dock Bottom Signal
Box.
Mineral Trains.
Mineral Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Slip couplings Dearness Valley
Junction, Baxter Wood No.
2 and Brandon Junction.
(See note page 195).

116 G e n e r a l tifstructions.Continued.
From.
Hendon Junction
Ryhope Station
Ryhope Station
Fawcett Street Junction.
$Sunderland North
South Dock
Durham Elvet
Bishop Auckland North
or West
St. Helen's Cony. Jot.
Barnard Castle East
Winston Station
Kirkby Stephen West
Kirkby Stephen West
Wear Valley Junction
Tow Law Junction
Darlington Platform
•West Box
Consett South
Shildon Tunnel North
Guisborough Junction
Carlin How Junction
Hartlepool Station
Church Street
Cemetery North
Cemetery North
Greenland Crossing
Chilton Junction
Assistant Engine in Rear of Train.—Continued.
NAMESAOF BOXES.
* To.
Ryhope Station
Haswell
Murton Junction
PaIlion Station
Fawcett Street Junct.
Fawcett Street Junct.
Murton Junction
Coundon Station
Barnard Castle East
Summit
Barnard Castle East
Sandy Bank
Summit
Tow Law Junction
Blackfield
Up to, but not beyond
North Janet. Box
Down Starting signal
No. 12 at the
North end of No. 4
Platform.
Burnhill junction
Tunnel South •
Nunthorpe Station
Cliff°
Cemetery Jct. South
Cemetery North
*Hesleden Bank Head
Horden Station
Clarence Road Jmmt.
Gipsy Lane
Lines.
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Up
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
For.
Freight Trains.
Excursion Trains when load is
40 tons in excess of load for
one engine.
Passenger and Freight Trains.
Slip couplings at Ryhope.
Freight Trains.
Passenger, Empty Coaching
Stock and Freight Trains.
Slip couplings at Sunderland.
Freight Trains.
Slip Couplings at South Dock
Goods Yard and Hendon Jct.
Shunters' Cabins.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Slip couplings at St. Helen's
Colliery Junction and West
Auckland Station.
passenger and Freight Trains.
Slip couplings at Barnard
• Castle.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Slip couplings at Kirkby
Stephen.
Passenger and Freight Trains.
Slip couplings at Kirkby.
Stephen.
Freight Trains.
Blaekfield Mineral Trains.
Passenger Trains.
Slip couplings at Darlington
Station. ( O . 3671).
Freight Trains.
Mineral Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains. .
Freight Trains. Slip couplings
at West Hartlepool,
1 - Empty Hartlepool Coaching and Hart. Stock and
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Mineral Trains.
t In the case of empty coaching stock trains from Sande' land Station to Tatham Street •
Sidings both engines must remain attached to the train THROUGHOUT the journey.
(O. 6548).
§ EN GIN ES ASSISTIN G, BAR N AR D . C ASTLE AN D KIR KBY STEPH EN To SU MMIT.- - W hen it is
necessary to attach an assistant engine to the rear of a passenger train from Barnard
Castle or Kirkby Stephen to the Summit, during snow storms or in stormy weather,
the assistant engine must be coupled with the screw instead of the slip coupling, and
the Westinghouse brake pipes connected.
* When the Hesleden Bank Head Box is closed, the assistant engine must run forward
still coupled to the train, to the first signal box that is open.

From.
Loftus Station •
Port Clarence Junction
Portrack Lane
Whitby, Bog ,Hall Jct.
Assistant ii.F.ngine in Rear af Train.—Continued.
NAMES or BORES.
•
1
General Instructions.—Continued.
To.
Crinkle Station
Bell's Bank Foot
Loco. Box -
West Cliff 'Station
Lines.
Down
Down
Up
Up
For.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Grosmont Station
tGoathland Station
Pickering, Bridge Stre et.
Northallerton Low Jot.
*Geldard Junction
*Geldard Junction
Arnaley Junction
Arthington Platforms
Goathland Station
Summit
Goathland, Summit
High Junction
" B " Box (G.N.)
" B " Box
(G.N.)
Moseley (Horsforth)
Arthington South
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Slip couplings at Grosmont
I Station and Loco. Shed,
Whitby.
P Freight Trains.
a Freight Trains.
G.N. and G.C. Goods and
s Mineral Trains.
s N.E. Goods and Mineral trains
e (applicable during fog or
snow-storm only).
n Freight Trains.
g Passenger Trains.
Ripon Station
Wormald Green Stn. Up
e Slip couplings at Arthington
Station.
r Freight Trains.
Gascoigne Wood Junct.
Southcoates Junction
Hornsea Station
Hornsea Bridge Goods
Junction
Garforth West
(Garforth East when
West is closed). -
Sculcoates.
Hornsea Bridge
Goods junction
Hornsea, Station
Up
Up
Up
Down
a Slip couplings at Ripon Stn.
Freight Trains.
n
Slip couplings at Gascoigne
d Wood.
F Freight Trains.
r
}Freight e Trains
Goole Station
York No. 2 Up Goods
Goole Bridge South
North Junction
Down
Up
i
Freight Trains.
g Slip couplings at Goole.
h Freight Trains.
No. 1 Up Goods
York, Severus Junction. No. 2 Up Goods
North Junction
York, No. 1 Up Goods No. 2 Up Goods
Up
Up
Up
Up
t The engine must not go
beyond North Junction box.
T Freight Trains.
r Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
aFreight
Trains.
t When it is necessary for an engine in the rear to give
i
a train a start from Goathland
n
Starting
towards
signal.
the Summit, the assisting engine must not go beyond the Up Advanced
s
4 The rear engine must not assist until the whole of
.
the train has passed clear
over the Crossings •
at G e l d a r d
'TRAINS J u nDRAWNbb'Y c t i PILOT ENGINES WITH THE TRAIN ENGINE
IN THE REAR,
o n
General Rule 149 and B.T.R. 6.
s i g n a l
In - all b cases o x where . it Is necessary to attach a pilot engine for the purpose
of drawing
(
a train from point to point so that the train engine attached in
the
O
rear may be in the proper position for going forward, the train engine
must be Considered as a vehicle, and must not assist in any way, the
pilot . being considered the train engine.
Whenever 6 5there,
is a train engine in the rear of a train although not
,assisting, 4 it 9should
be signalled as " assistant engine in rear of train " in
.accordance
) .
with B.T.R. 6.
The following is a list of places where the train engine being attached in
the rear of a train, the train may be drawn by a pilot engine (to save the
-train engine having to run round at the junction), in accOrdance with the
_instructions shewn above.
See instructions re " Assistant Engine in rear of train," which also apply
tc) trains drawn by pilot engine with a train engine in rear.
117

1 Is
Trains drawn by Pilot Engines with Train Engine in Rear.—Continued.
-
FROM.
Heaton, North Junction
Heaton, East Junction
Heaton, South Junction.
Petteril Bridge Junction
London Road Junction
Blaydon East
tt Fawcett Street Jet.
tt Fawcett Street Jet. •
It Tatham Street Sidings
Londonderry Junction
Deptford Junction
*South Pelaw Junction
Bishop Auckland North
Bishop Auckland West
Portrack Lane • •
t Hutton Junction • .
IGuisborough Station •
ISaltburn Station . •
$Saltburn Junction .
York, Clifton . - .
Waterworks •
t, York, Severus Junction.
Castle Hills South
Junction
Northallerton, High
Junction
General instructions.—Continued.
NAMES OF BOXES.
TO.
South Junction •
South Junction • •
Newcastle No. 1
London Road Junction.
Citadel No. 5 • •
Newcastle No. 3 •
North Shore Junction •
Guisborough Station
Hutton Junction
Junction •
Station
Waterworks
Platform • • •
Poppleton Junction •
Northallerton, High
Junction
Castle Hills South
Junction
Lines.
Up
Up
- Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Down
FOR.
Empty coaching
stock and freight
trains.
1
. J stock trains.
E
Sunderland North Down m
p Stock trains to
' and from Tat-
Tatham Street Sidings Down t
E ham Street Sid-
Fawcett Street Jet. • Up y
Hendon Junction Down
m_
ings. (O. 6548).
c Freight trains.
p
(O. 6549).
o
Pallion Station • Up t Mineral trains.
a
y going East from
c Pallion Station,:
C
Ouston Junction • Down
h
(O. 6548).
o Mineral trains.
Bishop Auckland West Up i
a Freight trains.
Bishop Auckland North Down n
c Freight trains
g
(O. 7131).
h
,
Freight trains.
i
(O. 6549).
n1
g Passenger trains.
Empty Coaching
Stock trains.
(O. 6548).
Passenger a n d
freight trains.
IT Under this arrangement both engines must remain attached to the
train THROUGHOUT from Sunderland Station to Tatham Street Sidings
or vice versa. ( O . 6548).
* When this working is resorted to, the engine in the rear must assist in
braking the train from South Pelaw junction to Ouston Junction.
Also applies to steam autocars (single or twin) hauled by a pilot engine ;
in such cases the autocar must be signalled as an assistant engine in rear.
(O. 6808).

Trains drawn by Pilot Engines with Train Engine in Rear.—Continued.
FROM.
Bog Hall Junction
Hornsea Bridge Goods
Junction
Scarborough Road Jot.
tMalton East
Mahon East
Malton Station
Malton Station
Malton West
Milford Junction North
Milford Junction North
Milford Junction
Milford Junction East
Milford Junction South
Scarbro', Falsgrave
General Instructions.—Continued.
NAMES OF BOXES.
•
TO.
West Cliff Station
Hornsea Station
Malton East
Scarborough Road Jet.
Malton Station •
Malton East
Malton West •
Malton Station
Milford Junction South.
Milford Junction.
Milford Junction South
Milford Junction.
Monk Fryston Station
Washbeck
Lines.
Up
Down
Up
Down
Up
Down
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
FOR
Passenger trains.
Empty Coaching
stock trains.
Passenger a n d
freight trains.
Freight trains.
Freight trains.
(0. 6548).
Passenger trains
on the Middle
and No. 1 Excursion
lines.
(O. 6548 (a) ).
Scarborough Station Falsgrave . . .
Scarbro', Falsgrave Station . . .
Hull, Park Street Hessle Road Junction .
Hessle Road Junction • Park Street
Marsh Lane, Waterloo Leeds East.
Junction
Geldard Junction • Armley Junction
Armley Junction • • Geldard Junction
Up
Down
Up
Down
Up
Down
Up
1
- Empty Excursion
P
f trains.
a Empty coaching
stock trains.
s
(O. 2104).
s Freight trains.
ef
(Applicable dur-
n ing fog or snow-
g
storm only).
Holbeck " B " Box
(G.N.)
Geldard Junction Down
(0. 4079).
e
Freight trains.
r Applicable dur
t ing fog or snow
r storm only.
a
i
n
s
(Regulations
dated 3rd January,
1912).
(0. 4070).
1
.
Scarborough - Road Junction towards Gilling, it must not go beyond the bridge
crossing the York and Scarborough line, and the signalman at Scarborough Road
Junction W must not give the "Train out of section" signal to Malton East box or
foul h the loop line until the engine returns and is shunted clear. ( O . 2319).
eSlip
couplings at Mallon Loco. Shed for Passenger trains given a start from
Scarborough n Road Junction.
i
t
i
s
( O . 6548 c.).

120 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Trains drawn by Pilot Engines with Train Engine in Rear.—Continued.
In cases where trains after arrival at a Junction have to be drawn to a
Station (or vice versa) with the engine at the opposite end to that on which
it arrived at the Junction or Station, the side lamps need not be removed
from one van to the other unless there are more than four vehicles, vans
included.
Similarly in the case of fixed side lights, the lights need not be changed
from one van to another unless there are more than four vehicles, van
included.
In cases where there are more than four vehicles, special exemption must
be obtained if required.
Special exemptions have been given as under :—
SECTION.
Hutton Junction and Guisborough Station
Saltburn Junction and Saltburn Station
Side lamps need not be removed
from one van to the other
unless the number of
vehicles exceed
Parts of the Line where Trains MUST NOT be coupled together..
General Rule -
MA,
The coupling of trains is authorised at all places except as shewn below,
but in no case must atwo n trains d be coupled together if the total number
of wagons on the combined B . T trains . exceed 110 wagons. ( O . 3766).
R .
For the purpose of
7
General
.
Rule 149A, clause (k), the terms "foggy
weather" or "falling snow" must be taken to mean such a state of
the atmosphere that the driver of the first train could not see as far aa
the rear van of the second train. ( O . 7104).
Two light engines, or two engines and not more than two brake vans may be
run coupled at any time, i.e. during the day or night, and on any lines except
where prohibited on pages 111 and 112, in any orthe following positions
1st 2 n d . 3 r d . 4 t h .
Engine V a n Engine Van.
Engine V a n V a n Engine
Engine Engine V a n V a n
Engine Engine V a n —
Engine V a n V a n
Engine V a n Engine ( O . 6217).
Between Whittingham and Alnwick.
PY Manors North and South Gosforth East Junction.
Y1 South Gosforth East Junction and West Gosforth West Junction
(Loop). (One engine and van may be coupled to a goods or
mineral train).
6
6

Where Trains MUST NOT be coupled tegether.—Continued.
Between South Gosforth Station and West Gosforth West Junction (Loop).
(One engine and van may be coupled to a goods or mineral
train).
Coxiodge and Ponteland. (One
. Eto na gGoods i n e or Mineral train).
P; Riverside Junction and Percy Main, via Riverside Branch. (One
a Engine n d and Van may be coupled to a Goods or Mineral train).
From Brampton V a Junction n to Carlisle. (Except when double load will not
m exceed a 45 Wagons, y in which case the lighter load should be
b placed e in front. A light engine or engine and brake may be
attached to a train.
Between Haltwhistie c o uand Alston. p l
Scotswood and Newburn.
3/
From
e d
Tynemouth and North Shields (Tunnel)
Consett to Swalwell. (An engine and van may be attached in front
of a Goods or .Mineral Train).
Ouston Junction to Annfiehl Plain. (An engine and van may be
coupled to the rear of a Goods or Mineral train.) (O. 6217).
Annfield Plain to Ouston Junction. (An engine and brake may be
coupled in front of a Goods or Mineral train). ( G . 22523).
Waterhouses Goods Crossing to }lass Junction.
Between Diamond Hall Junction (Millfield) and Southwick Junction
(Usworth), via Queen Alexandra Bridge. ( G . 31565).
From Sunderland to Villette Road.
PI
2,
P2
PP
Ryhope Grange junction to Sunderland.
Murton Junction to Hetton.
Wingate South Junction to Carlton East Junction.
Seaton Bank Head to Ryhope.
Hesleden Bank Head to Hart.
Kelloe Bank Head to Coxhoe Bridge.
Carlton North junction to Carlton South
Junction.
Carlton Station to Carlton South Junction.
Carlton South Junction to • Bowesfield
Junction.
Between Burnhouse Junction and Bishop Auckland.
From Spennymoor Merrington Lane to Ferryhill.
Barnard Castle to Darlington.
Barnard Castle to West Auckland.
2) Woodland Junction to Barnard Castle.
Between Barnard Castle and Middleton-in-Teesdale.
Tebay and Barnard Castle.
Between
From
2,
General instructions.—Continued. 1 2 1
Penrith and Warcop.
Burnhill Junction to Consett South Junct.
Burnhill Junction to Wear Valley Junct.
Wearhead to Wear Valley Junction.
Slapewath to Middlesbrough.
(Under exceptional circumstandes
and to
facilitate the working,
one engine and
van may be coupled
to a Goods or Mineral
train).
t When it is necessary to couple an engine and van to Goods
or Mineral trains from Nunthorpe to Pennymans, they must
be attached in front of the train.

122 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Where Trains MUST NOT be couple together.—Continued.
From Cliff e to Redcar U n d e r exceptional circumstances, and
Cliffe to Carlin How Jct.. t o facilitate the working, one engine
9) Priestcroft Junction to I and van may be coupled in front of
North Skelton Jct. a freight train.
Between West Cliff and Carlin How Junction. ( O . 1075).
West Cliff and Bog Hall Junction.
Gallows Close and Prospect Hill Junction.
Whitby and Grosmont.
Grosmont and Pickering New Bridge. (An engine and van may
be coupled to a Goods or Mineral train, 'see special regulations
page 212). ( O . 1075).
From Stokesley to Battersby. (One engine and van may be coupled to.
a Goods or Mineral train). ( 0 . 1075).
From Castleton to Grosmont.
Garforth East to Castleford Inner Junction.
Between Knaresborough and Boroughbridge.
From Starbeck to Knaresborough.
Harrogate to Starbeck.
Between Harrogate and Wetherby.
Wetherby and Crossgates.
From Horsforth to Armley. Junction.
Between Moseley and Arthington.
From Wormald Green to Ripon.
Between Melmerby and Masham.
COUPLING OF ENGINES OR F T TRAINS.
General Rule 149A.
For the purpose of General Ruce 149A, clause (k), the 'terms " foggy
weather" or "falling snow must be taken to mean such a state of the
atmosphere that the driver of the first train could not see as far as the
rear van of the second train.
1.--In no case must two trains be coupled together if the total number
of wagons on the combined trains exceed 110.
2.—A double headed train, i.e„ a train drawn by two engines, may be
to another train worked by a single engine, provided the • double
headed train is in the rear, and the coupling of two trains is not prohibited.
3.—When freight trains require to be coupled together, the fireman
of the rear train must couple the trains at the starting point, and
the guard of the front train must uncouple at the point at which the trains
have to separate. The guard of the front train will be held responsible for
informing the driver of his train where the trains will be uncoupled. He
must obtain this information from the driver of the rear train. The
driver of the first train must inform the signalman at the point where the
trains are uncoupled in what direction the uncoupled trains are required
to proceed.
el.—Except in special and exceptional circumstances the coupling of
two trains must be confined to daylight.

General Instrisctions.—Continued. 1 2 3
Engines or Freight Trains Coupled.—Continued.
5.—All instances in which trains have been coupled during the night
must be recorded by the signalmen in the occurrence books, and an extract
sent to the Station Master for transmission to the District Superintendent.
6.--A light engine may be attached in front of a train worked by one
engine, and when it is already assisted by an engine in the rear, except where
prohibited on pages 111-112. The load in this case should not exceed the
maximum for the section.
7.—Two light engines, or two engines and not more than two brake vans
may be run coupled at any time, i.e., during the day or night, and on any
line except where prohibited on pages 111 and 112, in any of the following
positions :—
1st.- 2 n d . 3 r d . 4 t h .
Engine, Van, Engine, Van.
Engine, Van, V a n , Engine.
Engine, Engine, Van, V a n .
Engine, Engine, Van, —
Engine, Van. V a n ,
Engine, Van, Engine,
8.—A Freight train having empty coaching stock vehicles attached
may couple to the rear of a goods or mineral train, but no train must be
coupled to the rear of a freight train having coaching stock vehicles
attached.
9.—On purely mineral lines two trains may be coupled to another train,
provided the total number of wagons does not exceed 110.
rioteS.—See pages 120-122 for parts of the line where trains must not be
toupied together.
See below re Coupling of Vacuum fitted trains and loosely Coupled trains
See page 212 re Coupling of trains between Pickering and Grosmont.
See pages 202-3, re Coupling of trains through Shildon Tunnel.
See pages 111-112 re sections of line where engines mustn ot be coupled
together.
See page 217 re coupling of six engines between Waterloo junction and
Leeds East boxes.
See page 215 re Coupling of three engines between Wistow Junction,
Selby and Hagg Lane, Gascoigne Wood.
See page 198 re Coupling of engines Hesleden and Kelloe Banks.
See page 195 re Coupling of Mineral trains on Brandon Bank.
(O. 6217).
COUPLING OF VACUUM FITTED TRAINS AND LOOSELY
COUPLED TRAINS.
General Rule 149a.
A train of wagons fitted with the Vacuum brake must not be coupled to
any other train fitted with loose couplings. ( O . 3038).
STOPPING OF TRAINS AT STATIONS WHERE THERE ARE
LEVEL CROSSINGS.
General Rule 152 (a).
When stopping at stations where there are level crossings, drivers of
passenger trains must see that the engine is brought to a stand clear of the
crossing whenever this can be done without the train having to be drawn
up twice. ( O . 5/1-1913).

• 24
ed.
G e n e r a l InStrUCtiong.—Continu
HOT CLINKERS, ETC., NOT TO BE 'iligiOWN ON ititOODWO
,
OF BRIDGES, ETC.
RK
General Rule 154.
Enginemen must not throw lighted waste or hot cinders or clinkers upon
bridges with planked floors, wood covering point rod connections, or upon
wooden frames for gas tripods placed between Station lines.
COUPLING AND UNCOUPLING ENGINES AT ST TIONS.
General Rule 160.
.Firemen must couple their engines to trains at the starting point, and
uncouple them at the terminal point.
APPLIANCES CARRIED ON TRAINS FOR Wa. hl CASE OF ACCIDENT
OR OTHER EMERGENCY AND DIRECTIONS FOR THEIR USE.
General Rules 165, 170, 192, 217, 218, 219, 225 and 226,
1.—The following tools and appliances have been provided in the Guards'
Vans and Guards' Compartments of Brake Carriages on all ordinary N.E.
train sets and trains composed of E.C. and G.N. and N.E. Joint Stock, for
use in case of accident :—
2 Pinch Bars of different lengths, 2 Safety Oil Lamps trimmed for use.
2 Saws, 1 Ladder.
1 Axe, 2 Fire Extinguishers.
2 Quarter Hammers. 3 Fire Buckets,
3 Steel Wedges, 1 Case of " First Aid requisites.
2 Bafflers.
Fire extinguishers are also provided in all dining and sleeping cars.
The above articles, with the exception of the ladder, fire extinguishers,
fire buckets and " First Aid 7 requisites, are kept in a cupboard in the van
or carriage brake, the door of the cupboard being sealed.
2.—The Guard in charge of a train furnished with the appliances must,
before starting, examine the seals to see that they are intact and that
the extinguishers, buckets, ladder and " _first kid" requisites are in their
appointed places.
under the notice of the Stationmaster or person in charge. Where this
; S h o u l d
cannot be done, telegraphic advice must be sent to the Stationmaster at
t h i s
the first stopping station at which spare emergency appliances are kept,
nso that o the t staff there may be prepared to supply what is wanted on arrival.
bThe Guard e taking charge of the train at any intermediate station must see
tthat the hseals
are intact and that the ladder, the extinguishers, fire buckets
e and " First Aid ". requisites are in order.
c 3.—Should a the necessity 'for using any of the articles mentioned, in
Clause 1 arise, the Guard must afterwards arrange to have any which may
s e
be missing replaced, and the circumstances specially reported in addition
h
to an entry being made on his train journal.
e
The stations at which spare articles are kept are as under :—
m
York. Newcastle. Edinburgh.
u
4--In the event of an accident occurring to a train conveying passengers
sthe
instructions contained in General -
t Rules carried out.
2 1 7 ,
b2
1 8 , a n d
r2 1i 9
nm
u s t
g b e
t

Cermrai Enstrintions.—Continued. 1 2 5
Appiiances carrie on trains tor uso ss. cf acciddnt or the emergency
Oirections for their use.—Continued.
It is necessary that the following points be borne in mind
(a) Examine train to see if there are any signs of fire.
(b) Ascertain where the greatest damage has occurred.
(e) Use cushions from the carriages for injured.
(d) Enquire if any can render " First Aid."
(e) Communicate promptly by telegraph, telephone, or. other means,
with the nearest place where doctors, nurses, ambulances and
refreshments are to be. found.
(f) Enlist the services of anyone willing to convey messages or assist
generally under the. direction of the railway staff or- doctors.
(g) Advise the nearest Stationmaster, other officials and permanent
way stall at earliest possible moment.
Extinguishing Fire.
5.—(a) In the event of an Accident happening to a train, any of whose
vehicles are equipped with gas, or
causes, - w h eit rwould e . be t hthe eduty r e of the conductor or guard to endeavour to
obtain
i s
the services of one or more men (passengers if no others are available)
to Act as watchmen and provide them with fire extinguishers.
d a n g e r
o (b) To extinguish f the fire by means of the Liquid Fire Extinguisher,
strike f the i knob r at the e top of the Extinguisher sharply downwards, so as to
break f the r glass oinside. The m Extinguisher will then operate, and it should
be
o
kept in
t
an upright
h
or
e
sloping position when in action.
r
(c) The Tin Bafflers are provided for the purpose of extinguishing gas
flame from a broken pipe. One should be placed smartly between the end
of the.pipe and the yellow flame and then brought quickly
the . opipe v e so r that , t the h pipe e is einside n the d tin, and held there for a short time,
the
o
object
f
of the Baffler is to cut .off the •flame from the point where the gas
is escaping when the pressure is too great to allow of a rug or cushion
being used. If the flame is not extinguished at the first attempt the Baffler
must be again applied. •
(d) The Safety Hand-Lamps are provided for use in the vicinity of
escaping gas. When required for use, press back the catch above the back
handle, turn back the top, and light in the usual way.
(e) Should any gas escaping from gas cylinders or pipes be found to be
alight, the light can generally be extinguished, IF THE PRESSURE OF
THE GAS IS NOT TOO GREAT, by placing a handful of cotton waste,
a carriage rug, cushion or coat between the point of escape and the yellow
flame and pressing it over the hole for a minute to cut off the flame from
the point where the gas is escaping. If the burning gas is escaping at high
pressure from a broken pipe use a Baffler as above directed, or spray the
liquid from a Fire Extinguisher direct into the hole of the pipe, if possible.
If a gas flame is playing on to any woodwork, the woodwork should be kept
wet by -means of a Fire Extinguisher while the Baffler is being used to cut
off the flame. Earth or ballast may be useful for extinguishing burning
woodwork on the ground.

126 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Apfilanets carried on trains for use in CRE8 Ot aCCielatt or other emergency
and directions for their use.—Continued.
(l) Should a vehicle, or vehicles, be on fire and the fire cannot be promptly
extinguished, the vehicles on each side of those burning must, if possible,
be separated from the burning vehicles. If the train engine can draw the
vehicles forward, the vehicles in the rear of those on fire must be detached
the burning vehicles must then be drawn forward for a distance of at least
50 yards and then uncoupled and left properly secured • (see Rule 226).
Should the train engine from any cause be unable to move the vehicles,
another engine must be brought to the train as promptly as possible to deal
with the burning vehicles as above described. ( O . 4724).
Brakes used by Principal Companies.
General Rules 166 and 206.
The following is a list of the principal Companies using the Westinghouse
and Vacuum automatic brakes respectively :—
WESTINGHOUSE.
Caledonian. L o n d o n , Tilbury, and Southend.
Great Eastern. M e t r o p o l i t a n District.
Great North of Scotland. N o r t h British (see below).
London, Brighton and South Coast. North Eastern.
.Rymney.
VACUUM.
Barry. L o n d o n and North Western.
Cheshire Lines Committee. L o n d o n and South Western.
Cambrian. M a r y p o r t and Carlisle.
Furness. M e t r o p o l i t a n .
Glasgow and South Western.. M i d l a n d .
Great Central N o r t h British (see above):
'Great Northern. N o r t h London.
Great Western. N o r t h Staffordshire.
Highland. S o u t h Eastern and Chatham.
Hull and Barnsley. T a f f Vale.
NB.—For instructions relative to working of continuous brakes (Westinghouse
and Vacuum), see separate book. ( O . 7644).
Distinctlen between Vehicles fated with Brake complete
and Pipe only.
General Rule 165.
In order to distinguish vehicles with the Westinghouse pipe only from
those fitted with the Westinghouse brake it must be borne in mind that on
all Companies' stock the pipes which operate brake blocks are painted black,
and the pipes which do not operate brake blocks are painted bright red.
In N.E. stock there is an additional indication, viz., the letter " W " or " V "
on the sole bar opposite the release wires in the case of vehicles fitted respectively
with the Westinghouse or Vacuum brake complete, whereas there
are no letters on the sole bar of vehicles fitted with the through pipe only.
(B.)
7

General Onstructions.—Continued. 1 2 7
General Instructions in regard to Continuous Brakes.
General Rules 165 and 206.
the passenger trains of this Company, must be fitted with the
Westinghouse Continuous Brake, subject only to the following modifications
and exceptions :—
In the case of a train running a distance of not more than 10 miles without
stopping, unbraked vehicles in the proportion of one in four, and in
the case of a train running a distance exceeding 10 miles without
stopping, unbraked vehicles in the proportion of 1 in 6, may be
attached, but all such vehicles must be fitted with the through pipe
of the pattern in use on the train.
For the purpose of calculating the number of vehicles of which a train is
composed, the following table must be observed :—
Engine, including tankengine
(if wheels fitted
with continuous brake) as 2 vehicles.
Tender a s 1 vehicle.
Eight (or more) wheeled
Carriage a s 2 vehicles.
Six-wheeled vehicle a s 1 vehicle.
Four-wheeled vehicle
(conveying passengers) as 1 vehicle..
Horse Box
Carriage Truck
Fish Truck, Van, or other
four-wheeled vehicle,
not conveying passengers
as -/ vehicle..
2.—All vehicles for the North Eastern line received from Companies using
brakes other than the Westinghouse should be fitted with the Westinghouse.
brake or through pipe as set forth in paragraph 1.
The exceptions to this rule are :—
(a) In the case of special trains which are worked throughout by the.
Owning Company.
(b) When arrangements have previously been -
made
N.E.
f o
engine.
r s
fitted
u p
with
p l
the
y i
Vacuum
n g
brake.
In the a event , of Foreign Companies sending vehicles to the N.E. line not
fitted with the Westinghouse Continuous Brake or through pipe as provided,
for in these Regulations, the traffic must be transhipped into properly fitted,
vehicles, and the circumstances reported to the District Superintendent by
the Station Master at the Junction Station.
For list of the principal Companies using the Westinghouse and Vacuum,
Automatic Brakes, see page 126.
3.—When the van is the rear vehicle the Guard must test the brake in theordinary
way as prescribed in clause 12 of Book of Regulations for working
the Westinghouse Automatic Brake.
4.—When the Van is in any other position than at the rear end of the.
train, the guard must test the brake by opening the tap outside the rearmost
end of the last vehicle on the train. Before opening this tap he must
inform the Driver, in the case of trains fitted with the Westinghouse Brake,
that he is going to test the .brake, and then carefully observe the pressure
registered on the gauge in the rear van. After satisfying himself that the
indicator shews that a reduction of not less than 10 lbs. has taken place,
the Driver must be informed and the pressure restored in the usual way.
5.—In the case of a train on which the Vacuum brake is being worked, when
the van is in any other position than at the rear of the train, the guard must,
before making the test in accordance with clause 13 of the Instructions for
working the Vacuum brake, satisfy himself that the brake pipes are properly'
coupled up between the whole of the vehicles, and that the flexible connection
at the rear of the last vehicle is properly secured on the dummy plug.

128 G e n e r a l Instructions.--Continued.
Failure of Continuous brakes on Passenger Trains.
General Rule 165.
In the event of a failure of the Automatic brake on a passenger train,
rendering it necessary to control the train by means of the hand brake, the
defective vehicle must be detached at the first point the train reaches where
there is siding accommodation, so that the automatic brake on the train
may be again brought into use. If this is impracticable, a brake van must
be the last vehicle for the rest of the journey.
If the defect is on the engine the last vehicle in this case must also be the
brake van.
When owing to the Automatic Brake being defective, it is necessary to
control the train by means of the hand brake and only one guard is with
the train, an additional man must be provided at the first available point,
who must travel in the front van to assist in braking the train. ( O . 2758).
AUTOMATIC COUPLINGS SEPARATING.
General Rule 165.
When the automatic couplings become divided they must be kept as far as
possible in the condition in which they are found, so as to assist in discovering
what is wrong when the responsible officials make their examination.
TYING OF SHEET STRINGS ON OPEN CARRIAGE TRUCKS
WORKING ON PA,SSENGER TRAINS.
General Rules 135 and 90.
Sheet strings on Open Carriage Trucks must be kept well clear of all
Westinghouse Brake Taps, so that .there is no possibility of their closing the
tap when the vehicle is running. Examiners and others should watch this
at Exchange Points with other Companies. ( O . 6305).
SIGNALLING OF STOCK SPECIALS TO AND FROM SHOWS AND
MILITARY SPECIALS 'WITH CATTLE WAGONS ATTACHED •
FOR THE UJNVEYANCE OF HORSES.
General Rule 165, 206 and B.T.R.
Specials' • as above, when Conveying passengers must be signalled
" E.
-at
the starting point unless specified in the Programme shewing the timing. •
P."
When traffic is loaded in Cattle Wagons for conveyance by these Specials,
all concerned must see that fully braked vehicles are provided as far as possible
o
and when piped vehicles have to be attached to an extent which destroys the
r requisite " brake power, fully braked empty. vehicles must be attached to bring
0the
braked vehicles up to the number laid down on page 127. (P. 780).
.
P
.
,
"

From a horizontal
position,
thus
Horizontal position,
before application :—
General Instructions,.—ContinuaL 1 2 9
CATTLE WAGONS CONVEYING FISH ON MAIN LINE TR INS—
BERWICK AND MOSS.
General Rules 165 and 194.
Cattle Wagons built to Coaching Stock requirements (see footnote page
147), conveying Fish traffic may be attached to Main line trains on which
four-wheeled vehicles are permitted to work. They must be marshalled
in precisely the same way as four-wheeled vehicles on these trains are now
dealt with. ( O . 6924 T. 27500---9-17)
Instructions for Working Communication between passengers,
Guard, and Driver, by means of the Automatic brake.
General Rules 165, 177 (a), 192, 194 (b), 206, 225, and B.T.R. 17.
1.—(a) Carriage stock, passenger vans, horse boxes and special cattle
boxes have been fitted with a system of communication between Passenger,
Guard, and Driver, by means of the Automatic. Brake.
(b) Inside the compartment a chain runs immediately over the quarter
lights and doors on both sides of the carriage ; this chain is connected to a
rod fixed outside across one end of the carriage, and at each end of the rod
is a red disc. Before the train starts the guard must satisfy himself that
the discs are in their normal position, i.e.,horizontal.
2.--(a) A passenger requiring to communicate with the guard and driver,
will pull down the chain provided for the purpose. This will cause the
partial application of the brake, which will be in*ated by the gauges on
the engine and in the guard's van. A whistle attached to the valve also
sounds until the apparatus is re-set.
(b) A small disc will be exhibited on each side of that carriage from which
the communication has been made, the discs being turned :—
To a vertical
position,
thus :—
(c) The guard can ascertain from which compartment ,of the carriage the
alarm was given by the slackness of the communication chain.
(d) In certain Corridor and Open Carriages the position of the chain inside
varies, and the rod and discs are fixed thus :—
Vertical position,
after application :—
A small wood box which opens with a carriage key is fixed in the vestibule ;
and inside the box is a lever, and sometimes a chain attachment, by means
of which the apparatus may be re-set.

130 G e n e r a l Instruction&—Continued.
Working communication by means of Automatic Grake.—Continued.
3.--(a) Should the driver, when working the Westinghouse brake, feel
that the brake is being applied during the journey, he must put his handle
over to " release " position and look back along the train, and if he finds
that any of the discs on the carriages are in a vertical position, or hears a
whistle sounding, or finds that the placing of his handle in " release" is
controlling the application, this would indicate that the communication
apparatus has been operated by a passenger. The driver must then bring
his train to a stand as quickly as possible, having due regard to Rule 225
in the Company's Book of Rules and Regulations.
As the driver can control the application made by a passenger, except
as mentioned in paragraph 9, trains should not be brought to a stand on
an overbridge, or a viaduct, in a tunnel, on catch points, or any other place
of a similar character, unless, in the opinion of the driver, there is urgent
need for this to be done. ( B . 1575).
(b) When the guard observes that the communication has been applied, he
must act as circumstances require, and if he should have reason to believe
that the communication chain has been pulled' but has not been noticed by
the driver, he should take steps to stop the train by the application of the
brake from his van, bearing in mind the instruction in paragraph 3 (a).
The application by the guard must also be made in accordance with Westinghouse
Rule 14, or Vacuum Rule 6, as the case may be.
4.—When the train has been brought to a stand it must be protected as
prescribed in the Regulations, and when it is not under the protection of
fixed signals, and there is only one guard, the fireman must go back and
protect the train whilst the guard attends to the requirements of the passenger
who used the communication.
5.—The guard must take steps to ascertain why, and by whom, the communication
has been applied, and should the alarm have been mischievously
given, or for an insufficient cause, the names and addresses of all passengers
in the compartment must be taken, in order that the offending passenger
may be properly dealt with.
6.—The guard must, in addition to the notes on his journal, specially
report any use that may have been made of the communication on the
journey, or any failure in its action.
7.—After the chain has been pulled, the guard must take care that the red'
discs at the end of the carriage are replaced in their normal position.
8.—Signalmen on hearing the communication whistle (Clause (a) paragraph
2), the sound of which can easily be distinguished from the engine whistle,
must act in accordance with Rule 17 of the Block Telegraph Regulations.
9.—A communication by a passenger operates the brake in use, and
should this be the Vacuum, the driver may find that, if his train consists
of Foreign Companies' stock, or his engine is fitted with one of the smaller
ejectors, he may not in all cases be able to control the application made by
the passenger. He should, however, if necessary, place his ejector handle

General Instructions.—Continued. 1 3 1
Working communication by means of Automatic Brake.—Continued.
in the " brake off" position, so as to bring his large ejector into use and
control the application so far as he can in accordance with paragraph 3 (a).
There is •no sounding instrument in connection with the vacuum brake.
(B. 1575). (O. 1185).
10.--Nearly all Foreign Companies have also had their passenger
vehicles fitted with the apparatus. We may, however, receive odd vehicles
not so fitted, and in these cases care must be taken to see that the vehicles
are not sent forward on N.E. trains which travel more than 20 miles without
stopping. All such cases must be reported to the District Superintendent.
WORKING OF AUTOCARS DURING SNOW3TORMS.
General Rule 165.
During snowstorms when there is a likelihood of the snow falling or drifting
to such a depth as to cover the rails, the operating gear between the engine
and the car must be disconnected, and only the ordinary screw coupling
made use of. The engine under such circumstances must always be attached
in the front of the car. Station Masters at intermediate stations must at
once wire the terminal stations from which the autocar runs in the event
of it being considered necessary to adopt this arrangement.
Particulars of Carriages and other Coaching Stock Vehicles which
may be attached to rear of Passenger Trains ; also particulars
of Cattle Wagons which may be conveyed by Passenger
Trains. G e n e r a l Rules 165 and 194.
1.—The number of carriages or other coaching stock vehicles which may
be attached to a train behind the rear van on the various sections of the
line are as shown on pages 133 to 144.
The term " one carriage or other coaching stock vehicle" means one vehicle
of any description whether bogie, six-wheeled or four-wheeled. (O. 3580).
2.—Where only one vehicle is attached to a train behind the rear 'van it
must be fitted complete with the brake in use on the train, except on parts
of the line where one vehicle fitted only with pipe may be run as the last vehicle
3.—Where more than one vehicle is attached to a train behind the rear van,
the last vehicle must, in all cases, be fitted with the brake in use on the train
complete (except on the portions of the line where a, vehicle fitted with the
pipe only may be run as the last vehicle), and the whole of the other vehicles
must be fitted complete with the brake in use on the train or through pipe
in the proportion laid down in paragraph 1, page 127.
el.—Except on the sections of the line marked with an asterisk (*), one carriage
or other coaching stock vehicle not fitted with the brake complete but fitted
'with the Westinghouse pipe may be attached as the last vehicle of a passenger
-
t,aecordance
with paragraph 1, page 127, and that the number of vehicles,
rincluding
the one fitted only with the pipe, does not exceed the number
allowed behind the rear van under these regulations.
a
i
n
,
p

132 G e n e r a l instructions.--Continued.
Coaching Stock Vehicles in rear of Pas!anger Trains, etc.—Continued.
5.—Catt1e wagons fully braked or piped when fitted with screw couplings,
may be attached to passenger trains as shewn, provided the permission of
the District Superintendent has been obtained.
Fully braked cattle wagons when attached to passenger trains may be
counted in the same way as horse boxes, fish trucks, or other four-wheeled
fully braked vehicles for the purpose of carrying out the instructions in para. 1,
page 127.
Fully braked cattle wagons may also if necessary, be placed behind the
rear van of a passenger train on sections of line where cattle wagons are
authorised to run on passenger trains, to the extent shewn in the column
headed "No. of braked coaching stock vehicles which may be conveyed
behind rear van," provided this does not exceed the limit set out in the list
referred to in clause 6.
When piped cattle wagons are attached to passenger trains the proportions
laid down in para. 1, page 127, must be - strictly observed.
6.—The limit as to the number of cattle wagons on each train to be as
shewn in the following list, and piped wagons must, as far as possible, be
attached in the position indicated, but under no circumstances- must more
than one piped wagon be attached behind the rear van and then only on
sections where authority is given for a piped vehicle to be run behind the
rear van.
7.—Wagons with cast-iron wheels or dead buffers must not be attached
to any train conveying passengers.
The instructions only apply when the automatic brake in use on the train
is in proper working order. ( O . 7102.)
On the undermentioned parts of the line i10 VeiliCie of any kind
must be attached behind the rear hr ke van
From Hexham to Allendale. From Piercebridge to Kirkby Stephen..
Allendale to Hexham.
• )
1
, Haltwhistle to Alston.
1
Staintondale to Ra,venscar.
Alnwick
Coldstream
to
to
Coldstream.
Robin Hood's Bay to Hawsker.
Alnwick.
1Whitby
Town to Loftus.
\
Ferryhill to Trip:don.
. Loftus to West Cliff.
Hart to Hesieden.
,
1West
Cliff to Ravenscar.
1 Wear Valley Junction to
Grosmont to Summit Box.
Tow Law. •
( Levisham to Summit Box.
Blackhill to Burnhill.
i
r
Unless there is an assisting engine in the
k
rear from Kirkby Stephen.
NOTE.- Where autocars are run over any of the b sections shewn above, one vehicle
provided it is proper19 braked, may be attached y in the rear as a trailer.
S
t
e
p

SECTION,
General instructions.—Continued.
Vehicles aitached to rear of Passenger Trains.—Continued.
t''g
0 >,
-0 r
1 E,
-
, F:
?
•
',•) ,-,-, '4 •;:, 6 •0,,
-1-3,Y)E-1
• '4'
a1
'
.
••E R:4 d, 0 3-6
_
',
0 2
•.,,, 92,
n
4a
„ - •,‘440,5•,) 4
s
V-
re
tx . 8
'
_ E6
ct .z 2,
q-•
. 2 z -0
'-,
, 1 ,
'
4•
'1
' 8
Ain mouth and Coldstream.
From Alnmouth to Alnwick .
Alnwick to Coldstream .
Coldstream to Alnwick .
2*
—*
—*
% 2
) 3t
3f
Next engine.
Do.
Do.
Y, Alnwick to Alnnaouth . 4* - -
•
,
?
,
8
UL
Alston and Haltwhistle.
From Alston to Haltwhistle
Y3 Haltwhistle to Alston.
. 3
—*
3
3-1-
Do.
Do.
Arthington and III,:ley.
Between Arthington and Ilkley . 4 4 Do.
Barnard Castle and Middleton -in.
Between Bd. Castle and Middleton , 3*
ale.
2 Do.
Battersby and Middlesbrough. Te
From Battersby to Nunthorpe . es
3
3) Nunthorpe to Middlesbro' . 6
Middlesbro' to Nuntborpe. d 1*
Nunthorpe to Battersby . 2*
2
2
.
94
.
Do.
Do.
Do.
" Do.
Bedlington to Newbiggin.
Between Bedlington & Newbiggin.
Berwick and Kelso.
1
3* 2 For Ashington
next
engine.
From Berwick to Sprouston
I) Sprouston to Kelso .
„ Kelso to Berwick .
.
.
.
4*
2*
4 -
2
2
2
Next engine.
Do.
Do.
Berwick and Moss.
Between Berwick and Moss , . 6 — —
Bishop Auckland and Barnar d Castle.
Between Bishop Auckland and
Barnard Castle . . 1* — —
Bishop Auckland and Ferryh ill, via S pennymo or.
From Bishop Auckland to Byers
Green . . . I* — —
Byers Green to Spennymoor 1 — -
27 Spennymoor to Ferryhill . 4 — ---
,t Ferryhill to Spennymoor . 2* 2 Next engine.
/P Spennymoor to Byers Green 1 — -
Byers Green to Bishop
Auckland. I* — —
- Blyth and Newsliam.
Between Blyth and Newsham . 3* — —
REMARKS.
Extept on tke portions of the line marked thus * one piped coaching stock vehicle may be attached
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.
t On sections marked thus f NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passenger train.
.
133
—
•

134 G e n e r a l instructions.—Continued.
Vehicles attached to rear of Passenger Trains.—Continued.
SECTION.
9
,
-7e
c
, l, .
, z15
4.
g'88
4o
,. '-' 12
.
_o
'qt
:
9tgkii
'CS ..9, 0 E
;
'44
g
28I
ogor,
g'Q44
„12
:R
"W2
6d.
,
i.V
p,s c,
c)
Chevington and Amble.
Between Chevington and Amble
Cross Cates and Wetherhy.
From Cross Gates to Thorner
•PY Thorner to Wetherby
2P Wetherby to Scholes
Scholes to Cross Gates
'
, d
1
5
3,
4 1*
4
V1*
1*
Do.
2 Next engine.
, Darlington and Tebay.
From Darlington to Piercebridge • 3*
,1 Piercebridge to Kirkby
Stephen
Kirkby Stephen to Tebay.
—*
2*
)
)
Tebay to Kirkby Stephen. 9*
3*
— - 4
K
i
Bowes to Darlington 3*
r Darlington and Saltburn.
Between k Darlington and Redcar.
From Redcar to Saltburn
b Saltburn to Redcar
y
4
2*
4
S Darlington and Richmond.
From Darlington to Catterick
t
Bridge.
e Catterick Bridge to Richp
Richmond
h
Richmond to Darlington
4
4*
4
4 Next engine.
Do.
Do.
e Darlington and Blackhill.
From n Darlington to North Road
t North Road to Heighington
Heighington to Wear Valley
o Junction •
3
3*
3
B Wear Valley Junction to
o
Tow Law. •
PI Tow Law to Blackhill •
wJ,
Blackhill to Burnhill •
e11
Burnlaill to Darlington •
s
2*
3
REMARKS.
Unless there is an assist"
, ing engine in the rear
Irons Ky. Stephen to
Summit no vehicle of
any kind must be placed
outside the rear van,
* Except on the portions of the line marked thus * one piped coaching stock vehicle may be attached
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.
t On sections marked thus f NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passenger train.

Vehicles attached to rear of Passenger Trains.—Continued.
SECTION.
•'',,
c1
C
'
i d
4 '
c.
5-
. •
1-
Durham and Waterhouses. ) F
•
-i,
q
From Durham to Waterhouses 2 _ * '8
Waterhouses to Durham 4,
.
' '
4
q
Durham and Sunderland. 8
•
From Durham to Sunderland 45
Sunderland to Durham 3 8 *
i
Durham Eivet and Murton.
l
From Durham Elvet to Hetton • 4 *
Hetton to Murton 1 *
Murton to Durham Elvet• 4
Durham and Bishop Aucklan d.
Between Durham and Bishop
Auckland 3*
Egon Branch.
From Middlesbrough to Eston • 1 *
Eston to Middlesbrough • 2 *
Garforth and Castleford.
From Garforth to Ledston 4
Ledston to Castleford 4 *
Castleford to Garforth 4 *
General Instructions.—Contivued.
Gascoigne Wood Junction an d Monk
Between Gascoigne Wood Junct.
and Monk Fryston 6
Gros moot and Picton.
From Grosmont to Kildale
Kildale to Picton
• Picton to Kilda,le
• Kildale to Castleton.
Castleton to Grosmont
t'eg e t , >•• et • , •=1
•Cti5 2.74 1 &,t') . . . g '
:
,.173
et
O'
7 4 4 et.71 . 1
.-:
A
:,f)E
4°
• A, T : 0 I t -
g
-1t
. , a • 9• °;:t1
1 t
. O t
1*
3 1*
1*
3
• g,13 " e , ot,3 o 0
2
2
2
2t
2t
Fryst on.
2t
2
3t
2t
2
Next engine.
Do.
Next engine.
Next engine.
Do.
Next engine.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
REMARKS.
* Except on the portions of the line marked thus * one piped coaching stock vehicle may be attachd
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.
t On sections marked thus t NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passenger train.
135

4
1
t
b
.
•
136 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Vehicles attached to rear et Passenger Trains.—Continued.
7.
.0
,0•,00
!'..' 0 , 0 -9
fs S.,t.,..
Q . .
44
-
p,
11:r13E,
0
c s ,. "?,:g :4 .
S" cot
SECTION.
'
.
F
'''. =4
c
R
'..5.?0,
•
0 '84
3
s
.
9o'
t>
d L
o"
z
'
'0'S .
ts 0 a
2rl'ii2.
'- 8,
6
„. d ac.,
, -(
1-.
r
0'
3
-
e
7
•
c
.
,
0
Harrogate and Pateley Bridge .
t
°
$
0
,
From Harrogate to Ripley Valley 4 • 4 Next engine.
,
;
„ Ripley Valley to Pateley
.
Bridge . . . 4* 4 IA „Jo.,
.
„ Pateley Bridge to Ripley
Valley . . . 4 4 Do.
„ Ripley Valley to Harrogate I* 4 Do.
Harrogate and 'Church Fenton.
From Harrogate to Spofforth . 4 4 Next engine.
„ Spotlorth to Wetherby . 4* 4 Do.
„ Wetherby to Thorparch . 4* --
•Thorparch to Church Fenton 4 • _
„ Church Fenton to Thorparch 4 4 Next engine.
„ Thorparch to Wetherby . 4* 4 Do.
„ Wetherby to Harrogate. 2* --
Hexham and Allendale.
From Hexhain to Allendale .
„ Allendale to Hexham . ,
* _J-
1
—*
2t
—
Next engine.
Hull and Hornsea.
From Hull to Hornsea . . 4 4 Next engine.
„. Hornsea to Hornsea Bridge 4* 4 Do.
P2 Hornsea Bridge to Hull . 4 4 Do.
Hull and Withernsea.
From Hull to Ottringham . 4 4 Next engine.
Ottringham to Patrington. 4* 4 Do.
„ Patrington to Withernsea . 4 4 Do.
„ Withernsea to Hull . . 4 4 Do.
Kirkby Stephen and Penrith.
From Kirkby Stephen to Appleby 2'' 3 Next engine.
„ Appleby to Penrith . . 1* 3 Do.
„ Penrith to Kirkby Stephen. 2* 2 Do.
Knaresborough and York.
From Knaresbro' to York . 4 —
„ . York to Goldsborough . 4 --
„ Goldsborough to Knaresborough
. . . 4* — —
REMARKS.
* Except on the portions of the line marked thus * one piped coaching stock vehicle may be attached
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.
t On sections marked thus t NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passenger train.

Vehicles attached to rear el Passenger Trains.—Continued.
SECTION.
Leeds and York.
',d-g
,
c
i-tbc.4.FD
4
'5.2:5'18
E
d .3' 7
:
T4
-,2
',
0
4
From Leeds to Church Fenton 4
P Church Fenton to York 6
PY York to Church Fenton 6
Church Fenton to Garforth 4*
Garforth to Leeds 4
Leeds and Hartlepool.
P.
ca =4 ,.
'
../c i
,4
-8,1il
,
FL1.1.==
9,0 ''•' a
i
'8 F') g 8 ,g1
i'•=
7, 0
74 S •
I
-l
. 1 6
. : 3
• 43.
2
,
35
3
F)j-g-1',73
From Leeds to Harrogate, via
Arthington and Crimple
Junction. 2*
Harrogate to Ripon
4
Ripon to Melmerby 4 4 Next engine.
Melmerby to Thirsk
Thirsk to Northallerton 6
Northallerton to Stockton 4
Stockton to Billingham 4*
Billingham to Hartlepool 4
P Picton to Stockton
Stockton to Picton
Hartlepool to West Hart-
lepool
4
4*
2
3
45
0
.
Next engine.
Do.
P2 West Hartlepool to Northallerton
Northallerton to Thirsk 6
P) Thirsk to Melmerby
4
Melmerby to Ripon 4 4 Do.
Ripon to Harrogate
2*
3) Harrogate to Weeton 4
Weeton to Arthington 4*
Arthington to Horsforth
Horsforth to Leeds 4
Pannal to Starbeck
From Starbeck to Harrogate
4
Harrogate to Pannal, via
Starbeck 4
Between Starbeck & Nidd Bridge 4
General Instructions.—Continued. 1 3 7
2*
REMARKS.
This arrangement only
applies to N.Y. and c.
J Branch trains.
(0.8058).
* Except on the portions of the line marl ed thus * one piped coaching stock veh cle may be attached
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.

138 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
liMME GIE n...pamm.aroomasomia..ohmorant
IfehMes attached to rear of Passenger Trains..—Continued.
SECTION.
Leeds and Hull.
v)11,'
rp•rt
,
,
,
71
From Leeds to Gaseoigne Wood
Junction
4
Between Gascoigne Wood Junet.
and Hull
6
From Gascoigne Wood Junction
to Garforth 4*
Garforth to Leeds
4
Mallon and Driffield.
8
"
p,ta
Aa;..J
too 'olo'
From Mahon to Burdale 2* Next engine.
23 Burdale to Driffield 4 4 Do.
Driffield to Sledmere and
Ember 4 4 Do.
Sledmere and Ember to
Burdale 2* 4t Do.
Burdale to Wharram 1* Do.
23 Wharram to Mahon. 4 4 Do.
Mallon and Pilmoor.
REMARKS.
From Mahon to Amotherby 2* 4t Do. Applies to and from
Amotherby to Pi'moor
Pilmoor to Mahon
4*
4
Manors North and Tynemout h.
From Manors No. to Backworth. 2*
Baekworth to Tynemouth. 4*
Tynemouth to Backworth.
Baekworth to Manors No. 2*
4
4
Do.
Do.
Melmerby and Masham.
rom Melmerby to Masham
Masham to Melmerby
2''
4*
4
t
4• DO.
Next engine.
Tisirsk and to Branch
trains •nly.
* Except on the portions of the line marled thus * one piped coaching 'stock vel icle may be attached
as the last vehicle of a ,passenger train.
t On sections marked thus t NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passenger train

Vehicles attached to rear of Passenger Trains.—Continued.
SECTION.
Melmerby arid Northallerton.
Between Melmerby and
Nortballerton
Middlesbrough, Guisborough
From Middlesbro' to Nunthorpe.
Nunthorpe to Guisborough
Guisborough to Hutton Jct.
Hutton Jct. to Saltburn Jct.
via Brotton or Priestcroft
Branch
Saltburn Jct. to Salt
▪ Station b u m
SI Saltburn Statio
▪ n t
burn
o
Junction
S
• Saltburn
a l t -
Jct. to Hutton Jct.
via Brotton or Priestcroft
Branch
)1 Guisborough to Nunth
▪ • Nunthorpe o r p e to Middlesbro'
Morpeth and Backworth.
From Morpeth to Newsham
IJ Newsham to Backworth
• Backworth to Morpeth
Newcastle and Carlisle.
From Newcastle to Carlisle
Carlisle to Newcastle
Newcastle and North Wylam.
Between Newcastle & No. Wylam.
Newcastle and Durham, via
From Newcastle to Blackhill, via
Scotswood
Blackhill to Lanchester
Lanchester to Durham
Durham to Lanchester
Lanchester to Blackhill
Blackhill to Newcastle •
General nstructions.—Continued.
4 2 $
and Salt burn.
1*
1* l t
3*
1*
2
4
1*
3*
6
3
3*
3
4*
3*
2*
1*
1*
2*
2*
1*
3*
2
4
2
2
2
Do.
Next engine.
Do.
Do.
Next engine.
Lintz Ore en and L anchester •
Next engine.
Do.
Do.
REMARKS.
139
t Authority is given for 4
piped Cattle Wagons to
be conveyed next the
engine of 6-18 p.m.
passenger train from
Northallerton to Itelmerby.
( O . 6024).
• Except on the portions of the line marked thus • one piped coaching stock vehicle may be attached
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.
t On sections mar&ed thus f NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passenger train.

140 G e n e r a l Pnstrudions.—Contintted•
Vehicles at t o
- w e a r
c
P a l s s
SECTION.
e n g e r
T r a i r i
›,0
crrd
s
o c!,-n c
p
gssr-'5'
lii
d
,•0 ,
d
Z1
s . —
8
,
q
C o n t i
2
n u e d _
Newcastle Central and Tyne month, v la Heat() a
Between Newcastle & Tynemouth 4*
.
Newcastle Central and Tyne mouth, v ia Rivers ide.
Between Newcastle & Tynemouth 2*
Newcastle and Blackball, via Annfield Plain.
From Newcastle to Blackhill 1*
Blackhill to Annfield Plain 1*
Annfield Plain to Newcastle 4
Newcastle and South Shields.
Between Newcastle and S. Shields
Newcastle and Dunston.
Between Newcastle and Dunston
4*
1*
•,t.'E •
Northallerton and Hawes.
From Northallerton to Bedale 4 4 Next, engine
Bedale to Leyburn 1* 4t Do.
Leyburn to Hawes 2* 4t Do.
Hawes to Wensley 2* 4t Do.
Wensley to Leyburn 4* 4t Do.
7) • Leyburn to Northallcrton 4 4 Do.
Pickering and Wiling.
Between Pickering and Gilling 2* 2
f
ton
C.
,
Do.
Pickering and Seamer.
From Seamer to Forge Valley 4 4t Next engine
Forge Valley to Pickering 3* 4t Do.
51 Pickering to WykebanaI
Wykeham to Seamer
4*
4
4t
4t
Do.
Do.
REMARKS.
tWhen 4 coaching vehicks
are taken last two to
be fully braked.
Ponteland Branch.
Between South Gosforth and
Ponteland 1
*
Port Clarence Branch.
Between Port Clarence and
Billingham. 3* (O. 102q).
* Except on the portions of the line marked thus * one piped coaching stock vehicle may be attached
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.
t On sections marked thus t NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passenger train.

General instructions.—Continued. 1 4 1
Vehicles attached to rear of Passenger Trains.---Continued.
- - - - - - - - - - - _ - - - - - - - _ - - - -
t'
,cp,1„EiTs
,
e l E•-+'1 :2
5
REMARKS.
SECTION.
" b r tSi 1
g ;'''' .6 : ' ' 78 1 ,
4 . . 1•
. 2 P 8
0,
0-
L
C;
ia
•
Scarborough and Saltburn.
From Scarborough to Cloughton.
Cloughton to Staintondale
Staintondale to Ravenscar.
Ravenscar to Robin Hood's
Bay . . .
12 Robin Hood's Bay to
Hawsker .
?
,
.
4
.
4
•
,
,
,
r
'
,
'
2*
c 1
'*
,
4*
'
,
,, Hawsker to West Cliff .
West Cliff to Loftus .
Loftus to Saltburn Junction
Saltburn Junction to Saltburn
Station . .
S
P
-
„ 1*
•
1
-*
; 2
Saltburn Station to Saltburn
Junction . .
Saltburn Junction to Loftus
Loftus to West Cliff
„ West Cliff to Whitby
„ Whitby to West Cliff
" West Cliff to Ravenscar .
Ravenscar to Scarborough.
,
4
i1*
'
A4
_*
_*
2*
b 0 .-
' ' , F 4 r " 6 1
0
4
1 ' - ' , S ) c i d • o'p - ,
'
' ,
2
,
Scarborough, Bridlington and
From Scarborough to Seamer
- „ Seamer to Filey .
Filey.to Bempton .
Bempton to Bridlington .
Between Hull and Bridlington .
From Bridlington to Speeton .
SP Speeton to Filey .
Filey to Seamer .
-,1 Seamer to Scarborough
Selby and Driffield.
From Selby to Market Weighton.
Mkt. Weighton to Driffield.
Driffield to Mkt. Weighton.
Market Weighton to Selby.
6
4
4*
4
6
2*
4*
4
6
4
3*
3*
4
'-''
C
',
G
i ' Z
a
z-:1- c?18
4
4
4
4
4
4
3t
3•
4
Next engine.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do,
Next engine.
Do.
Do.
Do.
When 4 coaching vehicles
are taken last two to
be fully braked.
* Except on the portions of the line marked thus * one piped coach•ng stock vehicle may be attached
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.
t On sections marked thus * NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passenger train.

142 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Vehicles attached to rear of Passenger Trains.—Continued.
SECTION.
Selby and Cawood.
Between Selby and Cawood
Selby and Goole.
Between Selby and Goole
Staddlethorpe and Thorne.
Between Staddlethorpe & Thorne
Starbeck and Pilmoor.
From Starbeck to Knaresborough
„ Knaresborough to Boroughbridge
. . . .
Between Boroughbridge and
Pilmoor . . .
From Boroughbridge to Knaresborough
. . .
I, Knaresborough to Starbeck
Stockton and Middlesbrough.
Between Stockton and Middlesbro'
Stockton and Welltield.
From Stockton to Hurworth Burn
Hurworth Burn to Wellfield
Wellfield to StOckton
Stockton and Ferrybill, via
Prom Ferryhill to Stockton
Stockton to Carlton
Carlton to Ferryhill
Sunderland and Newcastle.
Between Sunderland & Newcastle.
Wear Valley Junction and
Wearhead.
From Wear Valley Junction to
Stanhope
Stanhope to Wearhead
Wearhead to Wear Valley
Junction
L--'6 0 .—d,_ • . 0
:gi4, Eg 1 E,E,-JE1 - •
..
g.3:32.1 ,g• .3 5,
o ct
,
. ..
. 8
..
: 'S .
,
9.
3.
g"i'' 8 • 4z1 1
z r , * . , 0,-t . o 0
',A), , g ' ' " P-I dQ
r
•
P
0
1,
,
-.
r,
. ' 4 2 Do.
.
. ,
•
g,
•
Te
4
•
e,
;
. ,
6
- z
.
_,
4
2
1
1
.
, 4 Next engine.
4,
f . 2* 4 Do.
i3
i,
4 4 Do.
, _
•.
, 1
E-
. '
10
3f
i.
i-
t
2*
4*
4
4
Do.
Do.
.
Carlton. 3
4
4*
4
2 Next engine.
4
3*
1*
3
3
2t
4
Next engine.
Do.
REMARKS.
From Wearhead, if onlli
one, on rear. If more
than one, next engine.
Other stations, next
engine.
* Except on the portions of the line marked thus * one piped coaching stock vehicle may be attached
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.
On sections marked thus f NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passenger train.

Vices attached to rear of Passenger Trains.—Continued.
SECTION.
West Hartlepool and Sunder
From West Hartlepool to Hart
tl Hart to Hesleden
Hesleden to Sunderland
)5 Sunderland to Haswell
Y) Haswell to Castle Eden
Castle Eden to W. H'pool.
.--',
14- r
6' ;,;'4,,
6 I', z
8'-'
n
8
land, via
—*
—*
4
1*
4
4
West Hartlepool and Sunder land, via
From West Hartlepool to Seaham 4*
It Seaham to Sunderland 4
99 Sunderland to Seaham 4
Seaham to West Hartlepool 4*
Horden.
West Hartlepool and Ferryhill.
From West Hartle000l to Hart
2
Hart to Hes
jHesleden
to Ferryhill
leden Ferryhill to Coxhoe Bridge.
Coxhoe Bridge to Trimdon.
Trimdon to West H'pool.
4
— *
4
2
4
2t
2
Whitby and MaIton.
From Whitby to Grosmont 4* 2
Grosmont to Summit Box.
35 Summit Box to Pickering.
Pickering to Rillington 4 4
Rillington to Malton 6 4
Malton to Rillington 6 4
Rillington to Pickering 4 4
Pickering to Levisham
Levisham to Summit Box.
Summit Box to Grosmont 4
Grosmont to Whitby 4 2•
York and Hull.
?Between York and Hull 6 4
York and Sheffield.
:Between York and Sheffield
General Instructions.—Continued.
4
3
4
A' . •-t
..4 .•, 1E1,
=
6› ' 3 6
,.- -9
•ePv.')
- F.Qc.
- -
- 3
•
„
Wellfield. '
2
,
2t
g 2
2
2
,,
•E, tali 1 REMARKS.
g
,
'
1
'
'
'
'
Next ' engine.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
4
Next engine
Do.
Next engine
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
—
—
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Next engine.
143
When 6 are taken, 1ELEt
2 to be fully braked.
* Except on the portions of the line marked thus * one piped coaching stock vehicle way be attached
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.
t On sections marked thus t ,NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passenger train.

144 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Vehicles attached ta rear of Passenger Traias.—Continued.
SECTION.
York and Selby.
Between York and Selby
S73
„
o
z
• -•23
York and Doncaster, via Sou' h El!mall
Between York and Doncaster 2
York and Doncaster, via Kno ttingley.
Between York and Doncaster 4
York and Normanton.
Between York and Normanton
6
sE..8
>,;.,
g'
• 'AD po4
.."a
•
Ekg
REMARKS.
2 Next engine. Local trains only.
York and Scarborough.
Between York and MaIton 6 2 Next engine.
MaIton and Scarborough 6 4 Do.
* Except on the portions of the line marked thus * one piped coaching stock vehicle may be attached
as the last vehicle of a passenger train.
t On sections marked thus t NO cattle wagon must be attached behind the rear van of a passeger train.
Special Trains for Showman's Vans, Farmers' Stock, Emigrants'
Luggage, etc.
General Rules 165, 145, and 206.
Trains for the conveyance of showman's vans and farmers' stock, emigrants'
luggage, etc., also horse, cattle, or other stock trains where vehicles are added
for the conveyance of passengers, may be run subject to the following conditions,
but in no case must more than ten wagons be attached to any one
train :—
(a) That the engine, tender, and passenger vehicles of such trains shall be
provided with continuous brakes worked from the engine.
(b) That the wagons shall be conveyed behind the passenger vehicles with
brake van or brake vans in the proportion of one brake van for
10 wagons or fractional part of 10 wagons.
(c) That the total number of vehicles of all descriptions on any such train
shall not exceed 20.
(d) That the maximum average speed of any such train throughout the
journey between stations shall not exceed 25 miles per hour ; and
(e) That all such trains shall stop at all stations, or at intervals not exceeding
10 miles, or in the case of stations more than 10 miles apart,
at each of such stations.
The above regulations do not apply in the case of trains where a carriage
is attached for the accommodation of drovers or other persons travelling
in charge of live stock

— .
MAXIMUM AVERAGE SPEED EN' M.P.H.
t :
1 o
bo
4 1o
I,a!
7:1 E 2),
t0
04
When tight
coupled.
When built
to Coaching Stock
requirements.
E
o •
o El
TYPE.
-d
o
,
0 c3
4
-,D p:„
04
q
'go
d
,..
•
o o
t
,
et "ci
E ,
--j
0 .
_, -
0
r.
5 %,,
1 • Open Goods Low-7
and 8 tons
2• Open Goods Low-10
tons capacity and over
3. Open Goods-6 wheels.
30
30
25
30
30
30
E
R gz
8
d .,
40
40
—
0
"d
g pc.
E A
.ri ce
d
i
i
—
.
d
k
-
• •
• •
• •
,c1
cs
o
-6
E 0CD
E A
'
rel'''
s
• •
• •
• .
to=
0 .2.
:4 •-„'
al a)
•5 e
bD
l
4 e 8
i
•
-
c . •
a
I• ) .
4. „ — 6 wheels •
with half load
5• „ 2 feet sides.
6. „ 3 feet sides.
30
30
30
30
30
30
—
40
40
7. Sleeper-10i and 12 30 30 40
tons
e .. ..
8. Plate-8, 10 and 12 tons 30
• • i
30 40 V' • • . • • •
9. Billet • • • • 30 30 • • .. • • • • • .
10. Open Steel Bogie-30
tons
30 30 40 • • • • • •
LI. Combine-14 ton.
12. Salt • • •
•
•
30
25
30
25
—
—
—
_
• •
• .
• •
• .
• •
Red
"Salt" in
3. Bolster—Single • • 30 30 — • • . •
white
.4. „ Double • • 30 30 40 i • • . • • •
5. „ Twin . • 30 30 — — * • • • • • •
6. „ Treble • • 30 30 40 1 . • • .
7. „ Four • • 30 30 40 — - .. .. . •
8• „ Five • • 30 30 40 * • . • . • •
—
i
i
REMARKS.
9. Bell Wagon-7 tons • 30 30 • • • • • • . • • •
2O•
Twin Bolster • • 30 30 — — • . • . ..
21.
Excrement • . • 20 20 — — • • .. (2-5) —
spelefroandotuceveexn-
J cued 25 M.P.H.
2. Boiler-35 ton • • 30 30 • • — • •
* Without overhang. .
General 2nstructions.—Continued. 1 4 5
Speed of Freight Rolling Stock.
General Rules 165, 188 (b), and 206.
The following table gives the maximum average speed per hour at which
N.E. stock may run under varying conditions :—
• •
— .
• •
••
• •
. •
..
. •
• •
'
When loads
on these wagons
with an underrunner
overhang
carrying
rYtn eete gmore,
speed not to exceed
r average of
Si, M.P.H.
wa
o:
•
When load ts
on 'sore than
ti,ree wagons,
speed not to ex
-ceed an average
of 25 M.P.H.
1
trains booked at over 45 M.P.H.
-
TNOTE
:—Wagons with less wheel base than 7 feet 6 inches, must not exceed an average
speed of 25 M.P.H.
h
e
s
e
v

146 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Ccmtinued.
23. Pulley
24. Pulley with uneven load
25. w i t h uneven load
not exceeding 25%
carrying capacity
26. Trolley—Fully loaded
and evenly distributed
27. w i t h uneven load
28. w i t h uneven load
not exceeding 25%
carrying capacity
29. Plate-15-30 tons
30. Glass
31. Cattle-10 tons
32. 8 tt
33.
34. Covered-8 tons
35. PP
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
Pt
Pt
PP
St
TYPE.
—10 tons
—12 tons
—15 tons
41. —Bogie, 20 tons
42. —Bogie, 25 tons
Speed of Freight Reliing Stock.—Continued.
MAXIMUM AVERAGE SPEED IN M.P.H.
30 30
20
25
30 30
20
25
30 30
30 30
30 30
30 30
3
.
0 30 30
3
0
30 30
30 30
When tight
coupled.
40
40
40
40
10 tons
8
8 tons
• • k
10 tons
12 tons
t When built
to Coaching Stock
requirements.
• •
over 40 to SS
45
over45 to SS
45
over 45 to SS
45
over 45 to SS
1
7 tons
8 tons
711 tons
8 tons
7i tons
45 20 tons
over 45 to SS 161 tons
45 25 tons
over 45 to 55 20 tons
Red
1 Red
1 Red
12 tons to tonsR1e
d
• •
Red
Red
REMARKS.
t These vehicles may be attached to passenger trains only when loaded as specified for
trains booked at 45 M.P.H.
NOTE :,—Wagons with less wheel base than 7 feet 6 inches must not exceed an average
speed of 25 M.P.H.
CRANE TAIL WAGONS.
The permanent tail wagons allocated to travelling cranes and specially
lettered as runners thereto, although bearing cypher number plates to distinguish
them from traffic wagons, are qualified to run at any speed that
the cranes they serve may travel at, and when necessary these wagons may
be treated as an exception to the instructions re Speed of Freight Rolling
Stock." ( T . 3949-10-08).

General Instructions.—Continued.
Speed of Freight Roiling Stock.—Continued.
MAXIMUM AVERAGE SPEED IN M.P.H.
TYPE.
7:i
48
i-4
Da.
5
PA
When tight
coupled.
tc?,3 ,
4 ,d ce
0 0 '
!:i 73 pa
-2. '-' -...•
0 -o 5
5 , cn 0 – M d
k PL.
m ‘,.I
,
e
,
I t When built
to Coaching Stock
requirements.
a
100
.s
t
;.• . rtt
cd -C , 0.)
5
' . S?.
.
cc 5
F,
4-
-
4
'a
I
.. o,., g .•
4.
g
WO=
,: .
o 0.1 0
,0
a -to
6-
a'
,
A
-
o
‘
REMARKS._
r4 os , a 43. Gunpowder.
44. Meat • •
45. Perishable •
46. Insulated •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
30
..
..
..
30
..
..
..
– –
40 9 tons
40 9 tons
40 81 tons
• • • .
45 71 tons
over 45 to 55 61 tons
45 7 tons
over 45 to 55 6 tons
45 7 tons
over 45 to 55 6 tons
.
c
:
;
• •
8
Red
Red
Red
the
not comply with
ACoaching
stock ye-
47. Refrigerator . • ..
48. Fish—Open . . ..
49. Covered Fish Van— ..
4 wheels
SO. Fish—Covered • • • .
51. All Mineral Wagons on 25
four wheels with spring
buffing gear
52. Do. do. but 2 5
with unbolted springs
53 Bogie Mineral Wagons • 30
..
..
..
• .
30
25
30
40
45 6 tons White
7 over 45 to 55 5 tons l p–ed
.. . .. 55 5 tons'
..
1
• • 55 5 tons Lake
t
40 o
n9i
tons { over 4 87 tons tons 1 Red
– • • 4 • • • • • •
s
5
.. .. 5 .. .. ..
.. –
to
• • • • • •
5 5
s Ti
shoe attachment
e nor
grease boxes.
i g
These will continue
to run at
Tgf
speeds exceeding
40 M.P.H.
al
mt
g i
be
o e
nTt
o s
54. Ballast Wagons • • 25
55. Tanks • . • 25
56. Cypher Stock and Yard 20
Stock
57. Dock Stock. . . 20
58. Stores Vans—Bogie and ..
6 wheels
25
30
20
20
..
..
–
–
–
..
–
–
• •
–
..
• •
• •
• •
• .
55
• .
. •
..
..
. •
Red
• •
(Dark
1 Blue
Red
Red
rh
Lettered E in
s
white.
a
cv
li
Lettered
) n D. in
. g white.
o
59. Special Cattle Boxes • .. .. .. .. 55 . • Lake f
60. Horse Boxes . . .. ' .. .. .. 55 • • Lake
61. Carriage Trucks . • .. „ „ .. 55 . • Lake
t These vehicles may be attached to passenger trains only when loaded as specified for
trains booked at over 45 M.P.H.
Coaching Stock requirements include
boxes.
2.—Springs hung on brackets with links and bolts, or on hangers with auxiliary springs.
1—Automatic Brake or Through Pipe.
4.—Screw couplings and long buffers.
5. —9•ft. minimum wheel base.
NOTE :—Wagons with less wheel base than 7 feet 6 inches, must not exceed an average
speed of 25 M.P.H.
147

148
Foreign Raiiway emparr:es and Private Owners'
Rolling St ck.
TYPE.
1. Goods Wagons when fitted with
spring buffing gear and bolted
or unbolted springs. (This includes
springs bolted to axlebox
or to the shoes)
2. Open Goods, six wheels •
3. Open Goods, six wheels with half
load
4. Mineral Wagons when fitted with
spring buffing gear and bolted
springs. (This includes springs
bolted to axle-box or to the
shoes)
5. Do., but with unbolted springs.
6. Tanks built since 1899 •
7. Tanks, built in or before 1899
8. Fast Freight stock, including
Horse Boxes, Special Cattle
Boxes, Carriage Trucks, Fish,
Meat, Milk and Fruit Vehicles
qenera OnstnActions.—Continued.
MAXIMUM AVERAGE SPEED IN M.P.H.
.4:3
D
30
25
30
25
25
25
25
30
30
30
30
25
30
25
t When built
When tight to Coaching Stock
coupled. • requirements.
When loads on these
wagons with an
under-runner overhang
carrying
wagon 4 feet or
more, speed not to
exceed average of
25 miles per hour.
Goods wagons with
unbolted springs are
allowed to travel
on Class A goods
trains, the average
speed of which is
not more than 30
miles per hour,
provided the trucks
are in other respects
suitable for travelling
on such trains.
4
•
REMARKS.
Private Owners'
Mineval Wagons.
—
Private owners' mineral
wagons with
bolted or unbolted
springs, may, when
loaded with goods
traffic, travel at an
average speed of 30
miles per hour, provided
that the
trucks are in other
respects suitable
and that the load is
well distributed.
iWhen, however, such
I wagons (in conjunction
with an underrunner)
convey
loads which overhang
the carrying
wagon by 4 feet or
more, they must not
exceed an average
speed of 25 miles
per hour.
(G. 28537).
Foreign Railway Companies' or Private Owners' stock, when
attached to trains booked to average speeds of over 30
M.P.H., must conform to Coaching Stock requirements
(page 147), except that wagons otherwise in order may
have grease axle-boxes.
t These vehicles may be attached to passenger trains only when loaded as specified for
trains booked at over 45 M.P.H.
•

General Instructions.—Continued. 1 4 9
Working of Four and Six-wheeled Vehicles on G.C. Passenger Trains.
General Rule 165.
Six-wheeled vehicles (other than six-wheeled first class saloons) and fourwheeled
Passenger Coaches must not be run on any of the express trains
in the London and Manchester or Bradford through services.
The six-wheeled first class saloons must not be run in these services unless
the sanction of their District Traffic Manager or District Superintendent
has first been obtained.
Six-wheeled passenger coaches and four-wheeled horse boxes and carriage
trucks may be attached to the G.C. Co.'s trains working to and from this
Company's system, but such vehicles must be marshalled together, either
in front or rear, and not intermixed with bogie stock ; this must also
apply to N.E. trains working between Hull and Sheffield G.C.
Attaching of Four and Six-wheeled Vehicles to GM. Empty
Coaching Stock Trains.
General Rule 165.
When bogie stock is run on Empty G.N. Coaching stock trains it must
be in front of vehicles with six or four wheels respectively.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENTS NEXT ENGINE.
General Rule 165.
When a passenger carriage is the next vehicle to the engine on express
trains, the compartment nearest the engine must as far as practicable be
locked, and passengers prevented from travelling in it. This rule does not
apply if there is a luggage compartment between the passenger compartment
and the engine, nor does it apply in the case of corridor stock where there
is a lavatory or a passage between the end of the vehicle and the leading
compartment.
It is not necessary' to prevent passengers travelling in the compartment
nearest the engine in the case of ordinary passenger trains, or trains made
up of an engine and one vehicle only, or an autocar train. ( 0 . 1901).
PASSENGER COMPARTMENTS NEXT ENGINE ON TRAINS
FROM N.E. TO G.N. LINE.
General Rule 165.
Trains working to the G.N. line may have ordinary passenger vehicles
attached next the engine provided the two front compartments are locked
up. In the event of a saloon or corridor vehicle being attached to the front
of the train a van must in every case be attached between such vehicle and
the engine.
When stations north of York attach a vehicle for the G.N. line so that
it will be between the front van and the engine, on leaving York, that
station must, in wiring York, give a description of the vehicle so that the
staff may know whether to be prepared with a van.
EMMY VEHICLE IN FRONT OF L. & N.W. PASSENGER TRAINS WHERE
OCCUPIED VEHICLES ARE NEXT THE ENGINE.
General Rule 165.
Where saloons are attached next the engine of trains from this Company's
line to the L. & N.W. line, and no dummy vehicle is provided, a wire must
be despatched to the Stationmaster at Leeds informing him of this in order
that arrangements can be made for a dummy vehicle to be attached between
the engine and the saloon at Leeds. ( O . 5812).

150 G e n e r a l instructions.—Continued.
GUARDS TO ATTEND TO LAVATORY COMPARTMENTS.
General Rule 165.
Guards are responsible for seeing that the lavatory compartments of •
carriages are properly cleaned ; that the tanks are supplied with water,
and that soap and towels are provided before their trains commence their
journeys.
Although the lavatories in N.E. vehicles are not supplied with drinking
water, Guards must see that this is always provided in the case of
Foreign Companies' lavatory coaches equipped with water bottles.
Any failure on the part of the staff responsible for cleaning and
providing the necessary equipment for lavatory compartments, must be
brought under the notice of the Station Master and be recorded on dm
Guards' journals.
Instructions to Guards and others in charge of Excursion Trains.
General Rules 165 and 162.
1.—Where the whole distance cannot be accomplished before dark, the
guard in charge, on the outward journey, and also any guard sent to work
a train on the return journey must obtain a gas key and a spirit torch in
order to light each carriage, and must also see to their being lighted in proper
time. Under no circumstances must a turpentine stick be used for lighting
gas lamps. 0 . ( 2763).
2.—Upon the outward journey being completed, and after the passengers
have alighted, the first duty of the guard in charge is to have his train
shunted into a siding, and, if possible, so arranged that upon return the
engine will merely have to put the train to the platform, and, under no
circumstances, must the work of shunting be deferred until the engine
arrives for the return journey, if it can possibly be avoided. Before leaving
the Station after arrival in the morning, he must ask the Station Master or
Inspector in charge if there are any special instructions in regard to his
duties at night ; and when he comes on duty for the return journey he must
also report himself to the Station Master or Inspector on duty.
3.—Guards must take proper rest between the time of arrival and departure
of excursion trains.
4.—Immediately upon the carriages being placed in the siding, the guards
must examine whether any property has been left in them, and, if they
find any, must immediately hand it over to the Lost Luggage Office of
the station at which they may happen to be at the time. Windows to be
closed on completion of both outward and return journeys.
5.--In dealing with excursion trains, guards are ordered to keep the
doors of all unoccupied carriages locked on the platform side, and gradually
to open and fill them, so as to leave the leading carriages available for roadside
stations. The guard must inform the engine driver of this arrangement,
in order that the train may be stopped with the carriages intended for roadside
passengers opposite the platforms of the different stations. Unnecessary
carriages should be detached at the last available station before arriving at
destination. When an excursion train does not stop at roadside stations,
as many of the leading carriages as are not required should be detached
before starting.

General !nstructions.—Continued. 1 5 1
instmtions to Guards and ethers in charge of Excursion Trains.—Continued.
When an excursion train starting in one district is reduced at any station
in another district, the Station Master at the Station where the train is
reduced must immediately wire the District Superintendent or District
(Stock) Inspector of the District from which the train started particulars
of the stock taken off, and at the same time wire similar information to my
Coaching Rolling Stock Department, York. Unless an instruction to the
contrary is received it must be understood that all stock taken off such trains
must be returned to the starting point.
el.—When the trains have to be labelled for the return journey, the guard
in charge must obtain from the Station Master, or Inspector in charge, the
labels required for his train, and see that they are put on before the train
is shunted to the departure platform at night.
Position ol Brake Vans on Excursion Trains.
General Rules 165 and 170.
On the following sections of line excursion trains run without a van in the
rear, the van as a rule being attached next the engine :—
York to Saltburn. H u l l to Leeds.
Saltburn to Leeds, via York. S e l b y to Goole.
York to Stockton. G o o l e to Selby.
Darlington to Saltburn. H u l l to York.
Normanton to Scarborough. Y o r k to Hull.
Leeds to Scarborough, via York and Y o r k to Darlington.
Bridlington. Leeds to York.
Moorthorpe to Scarborough, via York. Normanton to York.
Moorthorpe to Bridlington . H u l l to Doncaster.
Normanton to Bridlington. H u l l to Scarborough.
Leeds to Bridlington, via York. S c a r b o r o u g h to Hull.
Doncaster to Scarborough, via Cottingham. Scarborough to Leeds.
Leeds to Hull.
When only one guard is with the train he must ride in the van, and when
there are two guards one must travel in the van and the other in the last
compartment. ( O . 9891).
CARRIAGE DOORS.
General Rules 167, 104, 166 and 205.
1.—Passengers must not be permitted to alight on the wrong side of the
train, and passengers who attempt to do so must be requested to re-enter the
carriage ; if they persist in leaving the carriage on the wrong side, their names
and addresses must be taken, and the case reported.
2.—Passengers may attempt to alight on the wrong side for the purpose
of evading payment of the proper fares ; and to prevent this a careful watch
must occasionally be kept on the off-side of the trains, especially after dark
and at junctions or stations where many passengers alight ; and it is desirable
that at such places wherever it can be done, a porter should be placed where
he can command a view of the off-side of the train so long as it remains at
the junction or station.
3.—In collecting and examining the tickets of trains at stations, the carriage
doors must be locked by the ticket examiners as they proceed with their
examination, but they must all be unlocked after the examination is completed
and before the train starts.
4.—The doors of passenger carriages must not be locked except as prescribed
in paragraph 3. ( 0 . 7274).

152 G e n i a l Insinntions.—Continued.
WORKiNG OF AUTOCARS.
General Rule 170 (a).
Guards of Autocar trains, when a car is running first, must, in all cases,
ride in the Guard's compartment adjoining the Driver's compartment.
(O. 1028).
CLEARING OF LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTS AND VANS AT
TERMINAL STATIONS.
General Rule 170 (c).
On the arrival of trains at terminal stations, Guards must see that the
luggage compartments and vans on their trains have been cleared.
GUARDS JOINING OR LEAVING PASSENGER TRAINS
ON THE JOURNEY.
General Rule 171-
Whenever an additional guard joins a train on the journey to work a
van which is nearer the engine than that in which the other guard is travelling,
the additional guard must, as soon as the train has come to rest, and
before he joins the van, inform the driver that he will give him the signal
to start, and also advise him how far he will accompany the train.
When a guard leaves a train on the journey, and the signal will afterwards
be given by a guard nearer the rear, he must inform the driver before
reaching the station at which he will leave, or as soon as the train stops at
that station, that he is leaving. ( 0 , 5571).
SHUNTING OF TRAINS.
General Rules 175 and 187.
Station Masters, Inspectors, Yard Foremen, Signalmen, Guards, and
Drivers are 'required to note the following instructions with reference to
the shunting and starting of trains :—
1.—Where telegraphic communication and relief sidings are provided,
Station Masters, inspectors, Yard Foremen, and Signalmen at stations or
boxes have authority to order that trains be shunted and detained to the
extent necessary to avoid detention to more important trains. Where telegraphic
communication and relief sidings are not provided, the responsibility
as to shunting and detention of trains will rest with the drivers and guards,
but the signalman, station master, or person in charge, must call the driver's
and guard's attention to the fact of any more important train being due
or nearly so, when such is the case.
2.—Passenger trains must not be passed over loose points in the facing
direction unless they are clamped, subject to this single exception, that
autocars may pass over them for the purpose of attaching and detaching,
if they are secured by chock or common rail keys.
S.—Before a loaded passenger train or vehicles (except autocars) containing
passengers are shunted over loose points for the purpose of attaching or
detaching, care must be taken to see that the points are in all cases made
secure by means of the clamp.
4.—It must be understood that a signalman shall allow a train to precede
a passenger or other train upon the request of a Station Master or foreman
in charge of the goods yard or sidings, the responsibility in these cases resting
with the latter.

GUARDS OF PASSENGER TRAINS KEERING GOOD LOOK-OUT.
General Rule 177 (a).
With reference to Rule 177, clause (a) : a number of Guard's compartments
are now running on the system in vehicles which are built to the
full load gauge width, so that it is not possible to provide side duckets
and this fact will, of course, be taken into account in applying the instruction
that Guards must keep a good look-out. ( O . 6409).
Between
J)
General instructions.—Continued. 1 5 3
Engines Propelling 7frains.
(See General Rule 179).
Engines may propel Irains as shewr2 below :
-
From Tweedmouth North to Tweedmouth South. ( 0 . 6622.)
t Shilbottle Colliery Junction to Alnwick Station Junction. (During
daylight only).
Blyth Goods to Blyth Crossing. (Goods pilot with traffic for
Cowpen Colliery and Brickworks).
t Plessey Road 'to Newsham North. (Blyth pilot with Goods traffic
from Plessey Road to Blyth).
22 Newsham South to Crofton Mill Colliery. (Vans only).
12 Crofton Mill Colliery to Links Road. (Freight trains).
Links Road to Newsham South. (Vans only).
Blyth Crossing to Blyth Shipyard.
" A " Pit Sidings, Bedlingrton, to " Dr." Pit Sidings.
Between Cambois Colliery and Cowpen Staiths (Cowpen Coal Co.'s single
line. Cowpen Coal Co.'s engines propel wagons. N.E. engines
propel vans only). ( O . 6885).
Percy Main North Junction and Percy Main Junction (Brake
Van to be leading vehicle).
From Percy Main North Junction to Engine Shed Junction. (Vans only).
Engine Shed Junction to No. 1 Commissioners.
No. 1 Commissioners to Percy Main North Junction.
No. 1 Commissioners and Northumberland Dock. (Vans only).
No. 1 Commissioners and Albert Edward Dock. (Vans only).
No. 1 Commissioners and Whitehill Point. (Vans only).
From Forth Junction to Newcastle Central No. 1. (Not more than three
vehicles).
Trafalgar South Yard, Newcastle, to Quayside Yard. (20-ton Brake
Van to be leading vehicle). ( O . 7388).
Delaval Box to Elswick Station. (Six horse boxes or other empty
Coaching Stock vehicles not exceeding a total length of 46
yards on Up Independent towards Elswick, in order to pass
through crossover road from Up to Down Independent near
Elswick Station Up Independent Home Signal). (O. 6484.)
t The propelled train must not be accepted by the Junction Box under B.T.R. 5 (unless
a van only or a ballast train is being propelled), but must be hold beck at the
rear box until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4. O . 6571).

154 G e n e r a l instructions.—Continued.
Engines Propelling Trains.—Continued.
From Swalwell Branch End to Swalwell Colliery.
Lambley Station to Lambley Fell Sidings. (Wagons).
J/ S t a t i o n to Plenmeller Colliery. (Wagons during daylight
only).
London Road Junction to Upperby Junction (Carlisle). (L. & N.W.
Engine and Vans). ( O . 6944.)
Petteril Bridge Junction to London Road Junction, Carlisle. (Not
more than 12 wagons. Brake van to be leading vehicle).
(O. 7388).
Between Newcastle and Park Lane and Greensfield. (Engines must only
propel their vans to avoid detention by having to run round,
in Central Yard).
t From Greensfield Junction to High Street.
High Street to Greensfield Junction.
Felling to St. James' Bridge.
St. James' Bridge to Park Lane Junction.
Between Park Lane Junction and Allhusens Sidings. (Vans only). (O. 6549).
From Redheugh Bank Foot to Teams.
Between Redheugh Bank Foot and Dunston Exchange Sidings. (O. 6441).
From Derwenthaugh Junction to Blaydon Main Colliery. (Van only).
(O. 7044).
Dunston West to Whickham Junction. (Vans only). (O. 6549).
Between Dunston East Box and Exchange Sidings.
From King Edward Bridge Junction to Norwood Junction. (Vans only).
Between Low Fell Station and Dunston East. (Vans only).
From Bakers Bank Foot to Lobley Hill Bank Head.
Blackhill North to Blackhill South.
Consett North Junction to Consett South Junction.
t Con,sett South Junction to Hownes Gill Junction.
53 Hownes Gill Junction to Consett South Junction. (Not more than
40 wagons. Van to be leading vehicle).
Annfield Plain Mineral Yard to Annfield Plain Junction. (qp• 7388).
Annfield Plain to Louisa Colliery, Stanley Level. (Vans only).
(0. 6965).
South Medomsley Colliery (Signal Box) to South Medomsley Colliery.
(Van only). ( O . 7107).
Morrison's Colliery to Annfield Plain Mineral Yard. (During daylight
only).
Waldridge Bankhead to Eden Hill Bank Foot. • (O. 6549).
Tyne Dock Bottom to St. Bede's Junction.
Between Green Lane Junction and Harton Junction.
Harton Junction and Garden Lane, via Whitburn Junction.
t The propelled train ntitSii MIO be accepted by the Junction Box under B.T.R. 5 (unless
a van only or a ballast train is being propelled), but must be held back at the•
rear box until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4. (O. 6571).

)2
General rnstructions.---Continued. 1 5 5
Engines PrepePing Trains.—Continued.
From Green Lane Junction to Tyne Dock Bank Top. (Freight trains).
(O. 6549b).
,) St. Bede's Junction to Tyne Dock Bottom. (Vans only).
2, Tyne Dock Bank Top to Tyne Dock Bottom. (Vans only) (O. 6549).
Tyne Dock Bottom to Green Lane Junction. (Freight trains)
(O. 6549).
Pontop Crossing to Green Lane Junction. (Van only). (O. 6984).
I) Boldon Colliery to Brockley Whins (During daylight only).
Between Brockley Whins and Green Lane Junction. (Vans only).
From Wearmouth Junction to Monkwearmouth Station. (Wagons on Up
Independent).
Between North Dock Junction and Wearmouth Dock (North Dock Branch)
(Freight Trains). Engines propelling trains on to the North
Dock Branch must in all cases stop at North Dock Junction
Box, and in view of this, Drivers must set back steadily. The
propelled train must not be allowed to proceed to Fulwell
Crossing until permission has been received from the Gatekeeper
at that point, who must place the level crossing gates
against the roadway befdre giving permission. ( O . 6549).
Between Washington Station and South Junction. (Vans only).
Fawcett Street Junction and South Dock. (Engines must only
propel their vans or short trains consisting of not more than
seven vehicles). ( O . 704).
South Dock and Ryhope Grange Junction. (Engines must only
propel their vans or short trains consisting of not more than
seven vehicles).
From Burnfield Junction to Fawcett Street Junction. (Vans only).
(O. 6705).
-
B From Doxford's Siding to PaIlion Station. (Wagons).
e
tBetween
Belmont Junction and Grange Ironworks.
( O . 6372).
wt
From Ferryhill No. 1 Box to Coxhoe Junction Box, on Down Learn-
e
side Line. ( O . 7047).
e1
Mainsforth Colliery to Ferryhill Yard. (On Up Main during day-
-
light only).
2 n 1
1
P
Mainsforth Colliery to Ferryhill No. 3. (On Down Independent
) during daylight and clear weather).
a
I
Between Ferryhill South (Goods Yard) and Ferryhill North (Goods Yard).
(Engines may propel loads crossing from one Yard to the
l
other).
i
t The propelled train must not be accepted by the Ntsirtion Box under B.T.R. 5
o (unless a van only or a ballast train is being propelled), but must be held back
n
S
t
a
t
at the rear box until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4. (O. 6571).

156 G e n e r a ! instructions.—Continued.
Engines Propelling Trains.--Continued.
From Cornforth Lane to Tursdale Colliery.
Broomside to Sherburn Colliery Junction.
Sherburn Colliery Junction to Broomsidc (Freight trains). Van to
be at front end of train Train to be brought to a stand at
tho junctioti signals before the points are set for the passenger
line. ( O . 7388).
From
P,
P2
Between
From
Between
JP
Pt
From
P)
P
P
Franldand Junction to Framwellgate Colliery Siclings.
Hetton Colliery to Hetton Station.
(0. 704).
Thornley junction to Wheatley Hill Junction. (Freight train).
(O. 6612).
only). (Private
Pesspool Junction to South Hetton Colliery. (Vans
tine).
Kelloe Bank Head and Kelloe Bank Foot. (Vans only).
Deaf Hill to Trimdon Station.
Wingate South Junction and Wingate Station. (Freight trains).
Wingate Station and Wingate Colliery Junction. (Freight trains).
Wingate Colliery Junction and Wingate Colliery. (Freight trains).
Seaham Junction to Dawdon Crossing (Freight trains) (O. 6930).
Seaham Station to Seaharia Junction Box. (Empty Coaching Stock
trains).
Flass Junction to Waterhouses Goods Station. (Engines and vans
only). -
Baxter Wood No. 1 to Dearness Valley Junction. (Empty Coaching
stock trains on Mineral lines).
Baxter Wood No. 2 to Dearness Valley Junction or Dearness West.
(Freight trains only). ( O . 6367.)
Dearness West to Dearness Valley Junction. (Cattle train).
(O. 4497).
Between Bitrnhill J unction and Waskerley. (Freight trains of not more than
40 wagons. Van to be leading vehicle). ( O . 7388).
From Waskerley to Black Cabin Siding. (Not more than 2 wagons.)
(O. 4022).
Betweext Tow Law Junction and Tow Law Ironworks Junction.
St. _Helen's Colliery Junction and Fie'don Bridge. (Van on Up
Main and Up and Down Independent lines ; and except during
foggy weather or falling snow, not more than 10 wagons on the
Up Independent and 20 wagons on the Down Independent).
Between Sbildon Tunnel North and Black Boy. (Mineral trains during
daylight only. Guard must ride in the van which must
always be the leading vehicle of the propelled train). (O. 6549).
From Kildon junction to Simpasture Janct:I. (Not more than 18
wagons on Up Reception line). ( O . 7447).
PP • Filtildon Junction to Masons' Arms Crossing. (Not more than
50 wagons during daylight and in clear weather.)
t The propelled train must not be accepted by the Junction Box under B.T.R. 5 (unless
a van only or a ballast train is being propelled), but must be held back at the
rear hox until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4. (O. 6571).

General Instrections—Continued. • 1 5 7
Engines Propelling Trains.—Continued.
From Masons' Arms Crossing to Shildon Junction. (Not more than
20 wagons during clear weather. Vans at any time). (0 5386.)
Wear Valley Junction to Witton' West on Down Independent.
(Not more than 20 wagons ; during daylight). ( O . 6931).
Daddry Shields and Coronation Sidings to Wearhead. (Not more
than 3 wagons). ( O . 7445).
Wear Valley Junction to Howden. (Down Reception line).
Witton West to Marshall Green Saw Mills (Not more than 20
wagons, during daylight.)
Tebay to Sandy Bank. (Permanent Way Specials only, during
• daylight). ( o . 1876).
Appleby, Mid. Junction to Appleby Mid. Station. (Not more than
25 wagons). ( O . 2740).
t t, Appleby Mid. Junction to Appleby N.E. Station. (Not more than
25 wagons).
Kirkby Stephen West to Bleath Gill. (Permanent Way Specials
only).
Kirkby Stephen East to Sandy Bank. (Permanent Way Specials
only).
P Middleton-in-Teesdale to Lunedale Quarxy.
Barnard Castle West to Barnard Castle East, on the North and
South Up Mineral lines only. (Not more than 13 wagons).
Barnard Castle East to Barnard Castle West, on the North and
South Down Mineral lines only. (Not more than 6 wagons).
(O. 6892).
From Marshall Green Saw Mills to Witton-le-Wear. (Not more than
12 wagons during daylight). ( O . 6448).
Etherley Station to George Pit. (On Up Independent).
Bishopley Junction to End of Bishopley Branch. (Not more than
29 wagons and van). ( O . 6557.)
Between Stooperdale and Charity Junction.
t Stooperdale and Hopetown Junction.
From Hopetown Junction to Charity Junction.
Charity Junction to Hopetown Junction (Mineral Lines). Not
more than 35 wagons. ( O . 7388).
Hopetown Junction to Albert Hill Junction (Mineral Lines only).
(Not more than five vehicles. E•xception.—During daylight
only, trains of not more than 30 wagons with van as leading
vehicles may be propelled.) ( O . 7388).
Albert Hill Junction, to Parkgate Junction. (Vans and stern frame
specials on Goods Independent. During daylight only, trains
of not more than 30 wagons on Goods Independent).
Parkgate Junction to North Junction. (Vans and wagons of
Cattle on Goods Independent. During daylight only, trains
on Goods Independent).
t From Geneva to South Junction. (On branch line during daylight only).
(Van only at any time). ( O . 7067).
t The propelled train must not be accepted by the Junction Box under B.T.R.
(unless a van only or a ballast train is being propelled), but must be held back
at the rear box until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4. (O. 6571

158 G e n e r a l instrudions.—Continued.
Evgines Propelling Trains.—Continued.
Between Low Beaumont Hill and Ayclitre Station. (Ballast train not working
in section). ( O . 1889).
2) Croft Junction Sidings and Croft Depots.
From Newburn Junction to Church Street (West Hartlepool). (Passenger
line. Empty Coaching vehicles and wagons).
Between Seaton Snook Junction and Seaton Snook Works. (During daylight
only).
t From Norton West to East. (Freight trains).
SY Leasingthorne to Chilton Crossing (Not more than 8 wagons).
Chilton Colliery to Leasingthorne. (Vans only).
33 Chilton Junction to Chilton Crossing. (Vans only). ( O . 7394).
Between Tees Bridge and Old River Junction (Thornaby). (Vans only on
Mineral lines).
Thornaby Old River Junction and Newport East. (Trains on
Mineral lines).
P) Newport East and Middlesbrough Old Town Junction. (Vans
only on Mineral lines).
Middlesbrough Old Town Junction and End of Marsh Branch.
(Trains on Mineral lines).
Middlesbrough Old Town Junction and End of Acklam Branch.
(Trains on Mineral lines).
• Middlesbrough Old Town Junction and Goods Yard. (Trains on
Mineral lines).
From Flatts Lane Junction to Eston Station. (Empty Coaching Stock
and Freight trains).
SY Guisborough Junction to Cargo Fleet Junction. (Vans only on
D,own Mineral line).
• Cargo Fleet Junction to South Bank Station. (Vans on Slag line
and Independent).
St South Bank Station to Grangetown Station. (Vans only on
Down Slag line).
Cargo Fleet Inner Junetin to Cargo Fleet Junction. (Vans).
• Saltburn Junction to Tofts Depots. (Not more than two wagons
on Up Independent and during daylight only. Up Independent
points at Tofts Depots box to be set for dead end in all
cases where this working is resorted to). ( O . 6958).
SP Tofts Depots to Saltburn Junction. (Not more than 2 wagons,
during daylight).
Yr Saltburn Junction to Saltburn Station. (Empty Coaching Stock
trains). ( O . 19).
Between Saltburn Junction and Saltburn Station l (Steam autocars may
Hutton Junction and Guisboro' Station I propel one passenger
coach or one fully braked coaching stock vehicle during daylight
and in clear weather providing the driver is on the engine.
In darkness or during fog or snow storms, this regulation
must not be carried out unless the propelled vehicle is such
that the guard can ride in the compartment at the leading
end and have access to the brake as well as the driver being
on the engine). ( O . 6762).
t From Guisborough Station to Hutton Junction. (Goods trains).
t The propelled train must not be accepted by the Junction Box under B.R.T. 5 (unless
a van only or a ballaA train is being propelled), but must be held back at the
rear box until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4, ( 0 - 6571).

General instructions.—Continued. 1 5 9
Engines Propelling Trains.—Continued.
From Hutton Junction to Guisborough Station. (Goods trains.—One
double brake should be pinned down for a train of 10 loaded
wagons, and one extra double brake for every five additional
wagons). ( O . 7388).
st Guisborough Station to between Crossover Roads, Nos. 3 and 10.
(Loaded passenger trains).
IP Spa Wood to Slapewath. (Not more than three wagons).
PI North Ormesby to Guisborough Junction. (Van). ( O . 6406),
1: C a r l i n How Junction to Kilton Embankment.
Skinningrove Sidings to Kilton Embankment.
It Stockton Cut to Bowesfield Junction. (Freight trains on Down
Freight line only). ( O . 6549).
PI Portrack Lane to Loco. Junction. (Trains or wagons).
It Loco. Junction to North Shore Junction. (Trains or wagons.
During foggy weather, falling snow, or darkness, Van must
be the leading vehicle.
Between North Shore Junction and Bishopton Lane. (Trains or wagons on
Freight lines. During foggy weather, falling snow, or darkness,
Van must be leading vehicle).
From North Shore Junction to Portrack Lane. (Trains or wagons).
(O. 6549).
Hartburn Junction to Bishopton Lane (not more than 20 vehicles).
(O. 7075).
P Oak Tree Junction (Dinsdale) to Fighting Cocks. (Van and one
empty coal wagon). ( O . 6840).
9, Battersby Junction to Incline Foot.
Grosmont Deviation Junction to Dowson's Garth Siding. (Not
more than 20 wagons). ( a B . T . 412).
IP Harmby Quarry Siding to Leyburn Station. (Wagons, during daylight
only). ( 0 . B . T . 428)
ir tP Northallerton South Junction to Cordio Junction. (Two wagons
of Coal).
Castle Hills Inner Junction to Castle Hills South Junction. (Empty
Coaching Stock trains).
57
Castle Hills South Junction to Castle Hills Inner Junction.
High Junction to Castle Hills South Junction Freight trains and
t PI Castle Hills South Junction to High Junction pilot engine with
Between Low Junction and Low Gates J wagons.
tFrom Boroughbridge Road to Low Junction. (Wagons).
Between High Junction and South Junction.
tFrom Low Junction to High Junction. (Freight trains and pilot engine
with wagons.)
35 Castle Hills South Junction to Danby Wiske. (Two wagons of
coal for pumping station and two empty wagons to Danby
Wiske).
P Castle Hills South Junction to Wiske Moor. (Engine tender with
water).
t The propelled train must not be accepted by the Junction Box under B.T.R. 5 (unless
a van only or a ballast train is being propelled), but must be held back at the
rear box until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4. (O. 6571).
: See special instructions Pages 283-4.

160 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Contiwital.
Engines Propalling Twains.--Continued.
t From High Junction to Low Junction. (Freight trains and pilot engine
with wagons. The van must be at the front (or lower) end of
, trains).
_Between Thirsk Middle 'Box and South Junction. (Empty Coaching
vehicles, goods van, and nc , more than six wagons to and
from the South Sidings).
Between Thirsk Town Goods and Town Junction.
From Sessay Wood Junction to Sunbeck Junction (Pilmoor). Empty
Coaching Stock trains. ( 0 . 7213).
Skelton Bridle to Beningbrough Station. (Two wagons of coal).
Poppleton Junction to Clifton. (Pilot with wagons for Waterworks
Sidings).
Between Poppleton Junction and Severus Junction. (Goods lines).
Dringhouses and South Points, York. Vans only. ( 0 . 7136).
From Burton Lane to Foss Islands. (Van only).
Between Milford Junction South and Monk Fryston Station. (Not more
than six wagons).
t
Wath Road Jet. and Bolton-on-Dearne Station
Bolton-on-Dearne Station to Hickleton South. (Not more than
Hickleton South to Bolton-on-Dearne Station. t w o guards'
Hicideton South and Hick
27
Between
From -Hickleton
Colliery Sidings to Frickley Colliery j
leton
Sidings
C o l l i e r
(
y
O . 4733).
Moorthorpe Station Junction to South Kirkby Colliery Box.
S i(Empty d i wagon n g trains s in clear weather. Guard must ride in
b van, r which a must k always be leading vehicle of propelled train).
e Moorthorpe South to Moorthorpe Station on Down Independent.
(Freight trains) ( 0 . 3067).
vWheldale a Colliery n box s to Castleford Old Station box. (Freight
) trains. .
( O . 7118),
Castleford Old Station box to Castleford Inner Juncloion box.
(Freight trains). ( 0
Castleford Goods Yard to Victoria Brick Yard.
Castleford Goods Yard to Lumb's New Yard.
. ms),
Castleford Goods Yard to Lumb's Hightown Works.
Castleford Station to Glasshoughton Colliery Box. (Two vans).
Glasshoughton Colliery to Castleford Station. (Not more than 6
wagons and van. The van must be at the front (or lower) end
of the train.. 2 3 1 8 ) .
Methley Colliery to Whitwo od Junction (Van only during
daylight).
Sherburn-in-Ehn et Station to Junction box.. (Wagons). (0. 7
Selby South to Selby Canal. 078 (Wagons of ballast on Nos. I and 2
Up Independent lines).
Selby Canal to Selby South.
) (Not more than 3 vehicles. During
daylight only). ,
Barlby to Barlby junction ( Selby). (Not more than 20 wagons).
Barlby junction to Barlby ( Selby). (Wagons over Nos. 1 and 2
Up Independents only).
(O. 6827)
t The propelling train must not be accepted by the Junction Box under B.T.R. (unless
a van only or a balla4 train is being propelled), but must be held hack at the
rear box until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4. (O. 0671).

General nstructions.—Continued. 1 6 1
Engine3 Pvqpni]Y3E; Trains.—Continued.
From Barlby Junction to Barlby on Down Duplicate. (Wagons, clear
weather only). ( 0 . 6827).
t ,) Brayton Junction to Brayton East Junction (Selby). (Freight trains
during daylight only). ( 0 , . 6569).
Between Pickering High Mill and New Bridge Quarry. (During daylight
only.
From Seamer Junction to Seamer Station. (Empty trains on Down
Independent line).
Between Washbeck and Gasworks (Scarborough).
Scarborough Station and Washbeck. (Steam autocars may propel
one passenger coach provided the guard can ride in the compartment
at the leading end and have access to the brake, as
well as the driver being on the engine). ( 0 . 457).
From Hagg Lane to Gascoigne Wood Junction. (Wagons from Down side
to Up Independent or Up Mineral Reception lines). (0. 6986),
I, WOrtdeZ,' Junction (Mid.) to Wortley Junction (N.E.) (Not more
than 2 Vans). ( O . 7388).
., Leeds " B " Box to Geldard Junction. (Down line. Freight trains.
Trains with more than 15 wagons of goods or 10 wagons of
coal to have heavy brake van in front. ( 0 . 6549)
Between Geldard t Junction and Castleton Bridge.
From Neville Hill Junction to Waterloo Junction. (On Down Independent
only).
Starbeck North to Stonefall Sidings. (Not more than 25 wagons
or 8 Empty Coaching Stock vehicles. If the load is mixed,
• one empty coaching vehicle to equal 3 wagons). ( 0 . 6849)t
Crossgates East Junction to Mouton.
tBetween Arthington South Junction and North Junction
t - From Arthington West Junction to South Junction Ithree wagons.
tBetween Arthington North Junction and West Junction Brake Van to be
t ) Arthington N „ o t m o r North e Junction t h and a Long n Siding leading i vehicle.
(O. 7388),
Between Dutch River Low Level and Potters Grange Junction (Goole).
I From Dutch River to Potter's Grange Junction (Goole). (Not more
than 30 wagons with van at leading end, on Down Main or
Down Reception line).
Between Dutch River Low Level and L. & Y. Junction (Goole).
From Brough Up Slow Line to Down Slow Platform Line. (Empty
Stock train a in clear weather). ( 0 . 6526).
tBetween Staddlethorpe Junction and Staddlethorpe East. (Not more than
20 vehicles). ( O . 5168).
tBetween Wilmington Junction and East.
From Southcoates Junction to Dansom Lane. (Not more than 15 wagons). •
Holderness Drain North to King George Dock Junction. (Wagons).
„ Beverley Station to Cherry Tree Crossing. (Wagons). (O. 7388)
t The propelled train must not be accepted by the Junction Box under B.T.R. 5 (unless
a van only or a ballast train is being propelled), but must be held back at the
rear box until the junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4.
t Befor offering the "Is Line Clear" signal for a train which is to be propelled
from Dutch River to Potters Grange Junction on the Down Main Line, the
Dutch River Signalman must inform the Signalman at Potter's Grange Junction
of the fact that the train is to be propelled, and the latter must not accept
the train until it has been offered to and accepted by Boothferry Road Junction
under B.T.R. 4.

1
162 G e n e r a l instructions.—Continued.
Propelling of Bailest Trains.
General Rule 179 (g), and Recording Tel. Regns.
In accordance with Rule 179 (g), authority is given for an engine to propel
a ballast train through the section on either side of any of the boxes, on the
section of line named below, irrespective of whether work has to be done
in the section or not, except that in the case of the box at each end of the
section, the arrangement will only apply in one direction, that is, in the•
direction in which the section extends.
As a rule the propelling must be confined to one section, i.e., between two
signal-boxes, but if it is not practicable for the engine to get round the train
at the first box, or the circumstances are exceptional and it is considered
desirable to propel through more than one section, this may be done on the
instructions of the Permanent Way Inspector, or other person in charge of
the work, in order to facilitate the working.
It is not intended that trains should be propelled under this authority
through more than two consecutive sections, except under very special
circumstances.
On sections of line worked under the Regulations for Train signalling by
Recording Telegraph Instruments, a ballast train must not be propelled
into a section which is already partly occupied.
From Corbridge to Hexham.
Stocksfield to Prudhoe.
Between Hexham East and Border Counties Junction,
From Newcastle Central to Benton Quarry.
Heaton East to Percy Main.
Newsham South to Plessey Road.
IP
Newsham North to Isabella Colliery Junction.
Hamsterley Junction to Westwood Colliery Junction.
Y1
Lockhaugh Junction to Rowlands Gill.
22
Garden Lane Junction to Harton Junction.
Hartburn Junction to Norton South.
Eaglescliffe to Bo
-Thornaby
East to Tod Point.
)3 Cargo Fleet Junction to Inner Junction.
wesfield
Guisborough Junction to Kiltonthorpe.
JBrotton u n Junction c t i o to Cliffe.
Between Wistow n . Junction and Gascoigne Wood Junction.
Chaloner Whin Junction and Church Fenton North.
Church Fenton North and Burton Salmon Junction.
Castleford Station and Fryston North.
From Church Fenton to Micklefield.
Between Barlby Junction and Joan Croft Junction.
Strensall and Barton Hill
Mallon West and Rillington Junction.
Pannal and Weeton.
Staddlethorpe East and Howden.
Cottingham Junction and Cherry Tree Crossing.
Staddlethorpe East and Thorne.
Thorpe Gates and Barlow.
Drax Hales and Oakhill Junction. ( 0 1876).

Propelling of Stores Vans.
General Rule 179.
Under no circumstances must stores vans be run with the engine in the
rear when passing over the main lines and running independent lines.
Consett
Crook ••
Darlington
Driffield
Durham
•
•
•
Station Limits.
General Rules 179 and 207.
For the purposes of General Rules 179 and 207 the following sections of
line must be considered as within Station Limits •--
Loaded passenger trains must not be propelled within station limits unless
special instructions are issued to the contrary.
STATION)
Alnmouth
tBedlington
tBishop Auckland
Bridlington.
tOastleford
Choppington
tehurch Fenton
General instructions.—Continued. 1 6 3
BETWEEN.
North and South boxes. ( O . 3851).
North and South boxes. ( O . 4785).
North, East and West Boxes. ( O . 6987).
South and Quay Crossing boxes. ( O . 5894).
Station and Gates boxes.
Fryston North and Fryston South boxes.
Station. and Colliery boxes.
North, South and West boxes. (Also applies to loaded
passenger trains propelled from No. 5 Bay Platform
towards West Box to clear Cross-over Road
Na. 91 Down Branch to Up Branch and from
No. 91 Cross-over to No. 5 Bay Platform).
(O. 7134)t
Carr House East and West boxes.
East and West boxes. ( 0 . 2740.)
North Junction and Croft Junction boxes.
Junction, Wansford Crossing and North boxes. (0. 457).
North and South Boxes.
Vehicles fitted with continuous brake in use
guard or shunter to ride on leading vehicle during
propelling and on rear vehicle when running without
a van in rear.
Vehicles not fitted with continuous brake in use
not more than one unbraked vehicle to be propelled
from South to North Box, and not more
than one unbraked vehicle to run without a van
in rear from North to South box. ( O . 7413),
North and South boxes. ( O . 6549).
Nos. 1, 2 and 3 boxes. . (O. 2522).
East and West boxes. ( 0 . 6353).
High Street and St. James' Bridge boxes. (Freight
lines), excluding the Allhusens Branch. (O. 6549).
Station and Boothferry Road Junction boxes.
, ( O . 5542.)
-
• •
EFerryhill
Garforth
aGateshead
g
l
Goole
•
•
•
•
•
.
Ae
propelled train must not be accepted by a box controlling a junction under B.T.R. 5
s (unless a van only or a ballast train is being propelled), but must be held back
o
n
&
gt the rear box until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4. (O. 6571).

General Irgstructiens.—Continued.
Station Limits.—Continued.
STATION. B E T W E E N .
tGrosmont S t a t i o n and Deviation Junction boxes. ( o . 457).
Hartlepool Cemetery North and Cemetery Junction South boxes.
Harbour Street Crossing and Queen Street. (Not more
than 20 wagons to be propelled from Queen Street
to Harbour Street Crossing at one time, and not
more than three wagons to be propelled from
Harbour 'Street Crossing to Queen Street at one
time).
Harbour Street Crossing and Hartlepool Station.
(Not more than 20 wagons to be propelled at
one time).
Cemetery Junction South and Coal Staith Hartlepool
(Mineral lines). ( O . 5917).
Harrogate N o r t h and South Boxes. (This also applies to 'Loaded
passenger vehicles no exceeding six in number
being propelled ell her with or without a brake
van in the rear). (See special instructions, page
220). ( O . 6549).
Haverton Hill South and Station Boxes. (The propelling Authority
only applies during daylight and in clear weather,
and when the section is clear to the Home signal
at the Advance Box. Not more than 12 wagons
must be propelled in either direction between the
two boxes unless a van is the leading vehicle.
(o. 7146.)
Haydon Bridge • East and West Boxes. ( 0 . 6695).
Hexham ▪ East and West Boxes.
Hull • Hessie Junction and Manor House Junction.
Albert Dock West Junction add Riverside Quay
Station.
St. Andrew's Dock West Jct. and Hessle Road Junction.
Hessle Road Junction and Dairycoates East.
Hessle Haven Junction and Dairycoates East, via
, Priory Mineral Yard. ( O . 3624);
t W e s t Parade Junction and Paragon Station Yard
Boxes. ( O . 6549.)
Leeds New Station East and Canal Boxes. (This also applies to loaded
passenger vehicles not exceeding six in number
being propelled either with or without a brake
van in the rear). ( O . 6549).
tMalton E a s t , Station and West boxes. ( O . 457).
tMarket Weighton• East and West Boxes.
Middlesbrough E a s t and West boxes. ( o . 2459).
tMilford Junction Junction South, Junction North and Junction East.
.(During foggy weather not more than 20
,wagons may be propeLed under Rule 179
between these boxes). ( O . 6548).
Otley S t a t i o n and Goods Yard boxes. ( o . 6688),
Pelaw S t a t i o n and Junction boxes. ( O . 6644).
t A propelled train must not be accepted by a box controlling a Junction under RT.&
5 (unless a van only or a ballast train is being propelled), but must be held back
at the roar box until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4. (O. 6571).

STATION.
Pickering
Port Clarence
Redcar
t Seghill
tScarborough
South Dock
Spennymoor
Stockton
t Tynemouth
Washington
West Hartlepool
Whitby
tYork
t York
York
Gummi Instrintioris.—Continued. 1 6 5
StaticiE9 Limits.—Continued.
BETWEEN.
• High Mill and Mi11 Lane Junction boxes.
• Port Clarence Junction and Bell's Bank Foot boxes.
(O. 3444).
• East and West boxes. ( 0 , 676).
• South and North boxes. ( O . 6173).
• Washbeck, Falsgrave and Station boxes. (0. 457).
• Londonderry Junction and Hendon Junction, and
between Hendon Junction and South Dock
Goods Yard. (Does not apply to the lines to and
from the Wear Commissioners Sidings). (O. 6549).
West and East boxes. ( O . 6465).
Bishopton Lane and Primrose Hill boxes (Passenger
lines). ( O . 6008).
• Junction, South and North boxes. ( O . 6708).
• Chemical Works and South Junction Boxes. (0. 6549).
• Church Street and Clarence Road Junction boxes
(Passenger lines). ( 0 . 6009).
Cliff House South Junction and Newburn Junction
(Up and Down Goods lines).
Cliff House South Junation and Newburn Junction
(via Cliff ,House Branch).
Newburn Junction to Burn Road Sidings.
Newburn Junction and Clarence Road (Up and Down
Goods and Weigh lines).
Stranton Junction and Church Street (via Stranton
Loop Goods lines).
Clarence Road and Greenland Crossing.
Greenland Crossing and Central Marine Box (not
more than 35 wagons to be propelled at one
time).
Central Marine Box and Harbour Street Crossing.
• Bog Hall Junction and Station boxes. ( O . 457).
• Leeman Road and North Junction. ( O . 457).
• Clifton and South Points boxes (Passenger Lines).
• Severus Junction and South Points (Goods Lines).
The propelled train must not be accepted by a box controlling a Junction under B.T.R. 5
(unless a van only or a ballast train is being propelled), but must be held back
at the rear box until the Junction box can accept it under B.T.R. 4. ( O . 6571).
DAMAGE TO GOODS AND MINERAL WAGONS, LOADED OR E PTY.
General Rules 184, 113 and 151.
1.—Engine Drivers must exercise care and good judgment in applying
the brake when slacked by signals or stopping, during both shunting and
train working, as a sudden application of the brake is likely to badly strain
or break the drawgear and headstocks of wagons.
2.—Particular attention should be paid to the state of the weather and
the condition of the rails, as well as the length and weight of the train,
and these circumstances must have due consideration in determining when
to shut off steam and to apply the brake so as to avoid any sudden
stoppage or unnecessary jerk.

166 G e n e r a l Instructions.--(Continued).
• Damage to Goads and Mineral Wagons.—Continued.
3.--Wagons must not be shunted without remaining attached to the engine,
unless attended by a competent person prepared to apply the wagon brakes
to prevent the wagons coming into violent contact with other vehicles. This
applies equally in Gravitation Shunting Yards.
When such 'wagons as 40-ton Quintuples, 25-ton Ballast wagons, 25-ton
Covered Goods wagons, and special wagons of heavy tare such as trolleys,
are, either loaded or empty, shunted by gravitation, a Shunter or Brakesman
must be sent along with the wagons in order to brake them into the sidings.
4.—Attention is drawn to General Rule No. 113 which prohibits double
shunting, except when done by engines specially used for the purpose of
shunting and attended by experienced Shunters.
5.—Wagons fitted with brake pipes must not be placed next to wagons
with loads likely to damage the pipes, and all cases of pipes so damaged
must be reported.
6.—Yard foremen and others concerned must pay special attention to
the manner in which the wagons are shunted in their yards, and at once bring
before the notice of their superior officer any eases where they consider the
shunting operations have been performed too roughly, when the person or
persons at fault will be severely dealt with. ( T . 9579).
RELIEF SIDINGS.
General Rule 184 (c).
,
of Remergency.
When vehicles are left in a relief siding they must be put
close
e
up to the buffer stops or chock at the far end of the siding
l
SHUNTING OF TRAINS.
i
General Rules 185, and 184 (c).
eGuards
and shunters performing shunting operations must, in addition
to f seeing that vehicles are not left standing foul of the adjoining lines, take
care s that sufficient space is left between the vehicles left standing and the
adjoining i lines, to admit of anyone engaged in shunting operations passing
safely
d
between the vehicles left standing and any vehicles that may be
standing, or are being shunted on the adjoining lines.
i
nGuards
and Shunters with freight or empty coaching ' stock trains
when g shunting are held responsible for seeing that the points which are situate
at
s
a distance from the signal box from which they are worked are properly
closed and that the vehicles are clear of the points before the drivers are
m
signalled to set back, and must render the signalman every assistance during
shunting u operations.
s
t
SHUNTING OF AUTOOARS AT STATIONS.
o
General Rules 185.
nGuards
in charge of Autocars must, during shunting operations at
stations, l accompany the ca2 in order to render any assistance the driver
may y require, such as seeing that the points are in the proper position, transmitting
hand signals, etc., unless a shunter or other member of the station
b
staff accompanies it.
e
This instrUction doe§ not apply in the case of Auto-cars travelling to abd
from u Sheds or Sidings for loco. purposes. ( O . 1028).
s
e
d
f
o

List of Places where special authority is giver; r placing trains
or vehicles outside the Home Signals where there is a falling
gradient towards the box in the rear.
General Rule 186, and B.T. Lt. 15.
When the " Blocking back outside home signal " signal is given for a
train to be allowed outside the home signal, it does not mean that it can
run back any distance on the facing line, but must stand immediately outside
the home signal.
Trains or vehicles when placed outside home signals, in accordance with
this authority, must always have a van at the end towards the box in the
rear, except where otherwise specified. ( O . 4009.)
Box.
Ainderby •
Amotherby • •
Appleby Station • • •
Arthington, South Junction
(Otley and Ilkley Branch)
t (Harrogate and Leeds Line)
Through vehicles which have to
stand in readiness to be
attached to main line trains
may be placed without a van
in rear on the through line
outside the respective home
signals for these two branches.
Arthington, North Junction • •
(Otley and Ilkley Branch)
Arthington, North Junction • •
t (Harrogate and Leeds Line)
Arthington, Long Siding
Arthington, West Junction
Balne • •
Bardsey • •
Barton Hill • • •
Castleford, Whitwood Junction
Cherry Burton • • •
Cliburn • • •
Coxhoe Bridge, Kelloe Bank Head
Cross Gates East • •
Cross Gates, Mauston •
Goods vehicles without a van
in rear.
Durham, North. •
Durham South • •
Through vehicles which have to
stand in readiness to be
attached to main line trains
may be placed on the through
line outside the South Box
Up home signals without a
van in the rear.
Durham, Bridge House Junction
Geneq I nstructions.—Continwd. 1 6 7
Line.
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
Box.
Flamborough
Forge Valley •
Garforth, East • •
Goatliland, Summit
Goldshorough • • •
Goole, Dutch River • • •
Goole, Potter's Grange Junction •
Grosmont • • • • •
Guisborough, Slapewath • •
Guisborough, Spa Wood •
Harrogate, Crimple junction •
Towards Pannal or Spofforth for
ballast trains only.
Line.
Down
Up
Up
Down 1
Down
Up
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Down
Down
Hart, Cemetery North • •
Hawes • • •
Headingley • •
Heck • •
Helmsley • • • •
Holbeck, Castleton Bridge •
Holtby • • • • •
Hull, King George Dock Junction.
Hunrnanby • • • • •
Humvick, Newton Cap Junction
Buttons Arnbo • • • •
Hutton Gate • • •
Freight trains ; or vehicles without
a van in rear.
Jarrow, Pontop Junction •
(Vehicles placed outside the Home
Down
Down
Down
Up
Down
Down
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Signal must always have an
Up engine or van at the end towards
Up the box in the rear). (O. 6548)
K ildale • • • Down
Down
Kirbymoorside •
Knaresborough Goods Junction •
Goods vehicles without a van in
rear. •
Knaresboro ugh Station • •
Passenger vehicles without van
• in rear.
Up
Down
(Towards
York).
Down
Ellerby
Escrick
Filey •
•
•
•
•
Up
• U p
.
Leamside Station • •
Leamside, Auckland Junction
I.,eamside, Belmont Junction
Up
Up
Up
f These authorities only to be 1 exercised by arrangement with the Signalman at
Arthington Long Siding whereby D the Siding points at Long Siding leading
from Up Main to the Siding
o
must be opened for the Siding before the
BLOCKING BACK signal is accepted from Arthington North, and must be
left in that position until w OBSTRUCTION REMOVED signal is received
from •rthington North. n •

168 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Placing Trains or Vehicles outside Home Signals, etc.—Continued
Box.
Line.
Levisham • • • •
Market Weighton, East Junction
Down
Down
Micklefield, Junction • • •
Towards Church Fenton or South
Milford.
Up
Middleton-on-the-Wolds
Nabnrn • , • • •
Up
Down
• Newsham, North • • • Up
Normanton, West Riding Colliery. Up
Northallerton, Castle Hills Inner Up
Junction (Hawes Branch)
Northallerton, Castle Hills Junction..
North Skelton, Junction • •
North Skelton, Longacres • •
Nunburnholme • • •
Up
Down
Down
Down
Pannal • • • • •
Pinchingthorpe, Chaloners Junction
Pontefract, South •
Pontefract, Junction •
Riccall, Osgodby
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Ryhope, Colliery Junction
Scarborough, Washbeck • •
Up
Down
When it is necessary in making
up passenger trains to place a
vehicle or vehicles outside the
home signal without a van in
the rear, this may be done.
Seamer, Station • • Down
Selby, Canal
Up
Box.
Shincliffe • • • • •
Sledmere and Fimber • • •
Spennymoor, West •
Spennymo or, East • •
Spennyrnoor, Merrington Lane •
Spennymoor, Binchester Junction •
Spennymoor, Dean & Chapter Jct.
Spennymoor, East Howie •
Stillington Junction
Temple Hirst
Thorne •
•
Thorner • •
Waterhouses, Mass Junction •
Weeton •
Wensley •
Wetwang •
Willington Station • •
*Willington, Bowden Close Coll. Jct.
Wilmington, Dansom Lane •
Withernsea • • • •
Wolsingham, Stanners Close •
Wormald Green •
•
•
Wynyard • •
York, Burton Lane
.
•
•
•
•
.
* Signalman at Rough Lea Colliery
. J'unct.
must set No. 11 points for backing
from Down Main Line to Rough Lea
Colliery Sidings before accepting the
"Blocking Back Outside Rome
Signal" Signal from Bowden Close
Colliery .Tunction. ( O . 4000).
Line.
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
Down
Up
Down
Down
Up
Down
Down
Up
Down
Down
ADVISING STATIONS RE VEHICLES TO DETACH.
General Rules 187 and 186 (b).
When there are vehicles to detach, the stations concerned must be advised
by telegraph, so that preparation may be made to deal with them expeditiously.
The code words applicable in such cases to be made use of, and
in the case of junction stations the destination of the vehicle and the route
it is to travel should also be given. It should be stated in the telegram
sent if the vehicle to detach is empty. ( O . 6014).
DOUBLE BOLSTER TIMBER WAGON&
General Rules 190 and 206.
These long wagons with two fixed bolsters are intended to be used for long
pieces of iron, or similar traffic (in' addition to short timber and deals) which
cannot be conveniently loaded in ordinary goods wagons or other timber'
trucks.
Double bolster wagons may only be used for traffic requiring an underrunner
when (I) the portion of the load projecting beyond the end of the
double bolster is narrow enough to admit of sufficient play to allow of the free
movement of the under-runner, and (2) the weight borne by the under-runner
is not such as to bind on the wagon so as to interfere with the passing of the
load round curves. ( O . 4500). (T. 135/e).
LOADING OF SHOWMEN'S VANS AND ROUNDABOUT TRAFFIC.
General Rules 190 and 206.
Care .
the sides of showmen's vans or other road vehicles containing show traffic
is securely
mus
and safely roped.
t
b e
t a
k e

General instructions.—(Continued). 1 6 9
TANK WAGONS FOR CREOSOTE, GAS TAR, PETROLEUM, ETC.
General Rule 190, 206, and 113 (c).
1.—Tank wagons for Oil, Creosote, Gas Tar, etc., on either side of which
Is painted a black or a white star two feet across, may, when loaded or
empty, be conveyed by Goods trains timed at an average speed not exceeding
35 miles per hour, between booked stopping points, and running not
more than 40 miles without a stop. This does not apply to tank wagons
with a carrying capacity of over 20 tons.
2.—Tank wagons not so painted but fitted with oil boxes may, when
loaded or empty, travel On trains averaging not more than 25 miles per
hour regardless of the distance the trains travel without a stop, except on
the Newcastle and Carlisle line, where a stop at Haydon Bridge must be
made.
3.—Tank wagons other than those described above must, when loaded,
be conveyed only by Pick-up Goods trains or other trains running not more
than 25 miles per hour, nor for a greater distance than 25 miles without
stopping. An exception may, heNvever, be made in the case of the following
runs which are a little more than 25 miles :—
Heaton and Ferryhill 2 6 miles.
Blaydon and Ferryhill
These tank wagons, when empty, must only be conveyed on Goods trains
running not more than 25 miles per hour, except those tanks built since
1899, which may run at 30 miles per hour (see General Instructions in
regard to speed of Freight Rolling Stock, pages 145 to 148).
Guards must, as far as possible satisfy themselves as to whether a tank
is loaded or empty, and that the lids are properly closed before the wagons
are taken forward.
When tank wagons are being loose shunted, care must be taken by all
concerned to avoid undue violence. ( G . 27409). (0 5801).
CONVEYANCE OF ARTICLES OF UNUSUAL LENGTH OR WEIGHT.
General Rule 190.
The following should be added to this Rule :—" Must not be conveyed
by express goods trains timed to run at a speed of over 25 miles per hour,
or a greater distance than 25 miles without stopping.
EXAMINATION OF LARGE, HEAVY, OR BULKY ARTICLES.
General Rule 190 (d), and 62 (d).
When any Guard has on his train any specially large, heavy, or bulky
article, the conveyance of which is attended with more than ordinary risk,
he must carefully examine the condition of the load at each stopping station,
and if his train is booked to run more than 25 miles per hour without stopping
he must arrange with the driver to stDp at intermediate stations for the
special purpose of such examinations be ng made.

170 G e n e r a l Inatnictions.--(Continued).
GOODS DAMAGED OWING TO TRAIN ACCIDENTS.
General .
When an accident occurs Rules involving damage to goods, it is the duty of the
Operating Department to 1do 9what
is necessary to minimise the loss through.
damage or delay, and the
2
Station Master or other person in charge must
take immediate steps to have the goods gathered together, protected, and if
possible, loaded up and aforwarded n to .destination, or to whatever centre the
District Goods Manager d wishes them to be sent for disposal. The Goods
Department should be immediately 2 advised and their instructions taken.
If additional men are required to perform the work of salving, application
should be made to the 7District
Superintendent for assistance.
7 .
DAMAGE TO CASKS OR CASES CONTAINING WINES, SPIRITS,
TOBACCO OR OTHER DUTIABLE ARTICLES.
General Rule 192.
In cases where, owing to damage, the contents of such packages are lost
or destroyed, Guards and Shunters must at once report the matter to the
nearest Station Master or Goods Agent, in order that the necessary steps
may be taken to advise the Revenue Officer of the occurrence in accordance
with the instructions contained in the book of General Instructions relating
to Merchandise Traffic.
SNICKING IN FIRST-CLASS comPARTMENTS OF STEAM AUTO-GARS.
General Rule 195.
Single steam Auto-cars have only one First Class compartment, Which is
non-smoking. Passengers may, however, be allowed to smoke in the compartment
if the 'other occupants do not object. In the case of twin auto-cars,
one 'First Class compartment is labelled " Smoking " and the other is nonsmoking.
INSTRUCTIONS AS TO WORKING SIDINGS (SITUATE BETWEEN
STATIONS) AT WHICH NO COMPANY'S SERVANT
IS EN CHARGE.
General Rules 206, 165, and B.T.R. 8.
Guards in charge of trains which have to stop at sidings (situate between
stations) at which no Company's servant is in charge to attach or detach
wagons, must obtain the key of the points from the person in whose charge
it is kept, and on arrival at the siding immediately place the signals where
such are provided at DANGER and keep them so until the work is done
and the points re-locked. When the work has been completed, the points
and signals must be restored to their normal position. The key must then
either be taken forward to the station or signal box in advance to be returned
from that place to the station or signal-box at •which it is kept, or the key
must, on the return journey, be delivered up to the person from whom it
is obtained.
(See also notice headed " Ballast trains discharging or taking up materials
on running lines between two signal boxes," page 179).
•
POSITION' OF LAIleE COVERED WAGONS ON THROUGH
GOODS TRAINS.
General Rule 206.
In cases where guard's vans with side duckets are not provided, large
covered wagons should not be placed next the guvds' vans if this can be
avoided without causing inconvenience or delay.
(O. 6821).

General instructiers.—Continued. 1 7 1
SIDE AND CENTRE CHAINS AND TIMBER AND DOMER
WAGON CHAINS.
General Rules 206, 57, 109, 189, and 190.
1.—Station masters, inspectors, foremen, guards, shunters, and porters are
required to see that in every case in which the side and centre chains of
wagons are not coupled, they are carefully put up so as to prevent their
coming in contact with the crossings, switch rods, or other portions of the
permanent way.
2.—Long centre chains when not in use, must be hung up on the headstock
hook provided for the purpose, and not on the drawbar hook, unless
there is no headstock hook on the wagon.
3.—Three-link centre chains must not be hung up, as they swing clear of
the permanent way.
4.—When two wagons (one with a long centre chain, and the other with
a short centre chain) have to be coupled together, the short centre chain
must, when practicable, be used for the purpose.
5.—A single side chain is in no case to be used for coupling. If the chain
on the side of a wagon be coupled to the next wagon, the chain on the other
side must be coupled also.
O.—Side chains must not be cross *coupled or hooked on :
chains or centre hooks.
to, t h e c e n t r e
.—Care must be taken that the chains on timber and other wagons are
made secure so as to prevent their coming loose whilst travelling,. All concerned
will be held reSponsible for this beinu done before timber or other
wagons are attached to a train. Guards. will be held responsible for seeing
that such chains remain securely fastened during the journey.
8.—All cases must be reported in which wagon chains of any description are
seen to be hanging down or heard striking crossings, switch rods, or other
pprtions of the permanent way.
WORKING OF CARRIAGE TRUCKS AND OTHER COD,CH MG STOCK
ON FREIGHT TRAMS.
General Rules 206, 23 and 190.
(See pages 201 to 203 for restrictions through Shildon Tunnel.)
1.—Coaching stock may be conveyed by goods train provided it does not
exceed 24 pairs of wheels on any one train. If there are more than this
number the stock must be divided and sent on different trains so that there
may not be more than 24 axles of coaching stock en any train. If there are
more than 24 axles of coaching stock on hand, and there is an unbalanced
engine available, a special may be run.
2.—When coaching stock is conveyed on unbraked goods trains it should
be marshalled next within the rear van when this can conveniently be done.
In cases where it is not practicable to place it next to the van owing to it
being necessary to marshal it in station order for detaching, or other special
circumstances, great care must be exercised during shunting operations to
ensure the Coaching stock not being subjected to violent shocks.
3.—East Coast bogie stock and.N.E. 65 ft. dining oars must on no account
be worked into the empty sidings at Park Lane or through the Up
Independent.

172 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
Carriage Trucks and other Coaching Stock on Freight Trains.—Continued.
4.—Carriage trucks, open or covered, may, whether loaded or empty,
be conveyed on goods trains, provided that the loads are of usual nature
for such stock, i.e., carriages, motor-cars, theatrical scenery, etc. ; ordinary
good§ traffic must not be .'
loaded 5.—In all icases n the loads must be effectively secured to the sides of the
ttruck, h eas m well . as to the cross bars ; in the case of road vehicles the wheels
must be securely wedged, in addition to being fastened to the cross bars.
6.—In all cases where possible the screw couplings on the coaching stock
should be used in preference to the link couplings on the wagon ; the
coupling should be screwed up till the buffer faces meet.
7.—Care should be taken that the screw coupling when not in use does not
hang foul of crossings, etc.
8.—The guards must shew on their journals the number and description
of each vehicle conveyed on freight trains, and between what points conveyed.
(G. 20325).
GENERAL REPAIRERS, PAINTERS, ETC., VANS AND CARRIAGES.
General Rules 206.
The Vans and Carriages for the conveyance of the Company's General
Repairers, and Painters, Stores, etc., must only be conveyed next within
the rear van of Goods trains. ( O . 176/61.-1910).
Braked Freight Trains.
General Rule 206. •
(1) These regulations refer to trains which are signalled by " Is line
clear " signal 5 consecutively or 3 pause 2 according to the composition of
the train.
(2) For the purpose of calculating the number of braked vehicles of which
the train is to be composed, the following table must be observed :—
Engine, including tank engine—counts as 2 'vehicles.
Tender 1 vehicle.
4 or 6 wheeled vehicle 1
8 wheeled bogie 2 vehicles. (O. 4200).
(3) Braked Freight trains are divided into the five following classes :—
Freight Trains Booked at over 45 TR.P.H. average—Class 1.
These trains must be composed of vehicles built on coaching stock lines,
tight coupled, and piped throughout. If the van is piped but unbraked, the
next vehicle within it must be braked.
Freight Trains Booked up to 45 M.P.H. average—Class 2.,
These trains must be tight coupled. The whole of the vehicles need not
be braked or piped, but in other respects they must comply with coaching
stock requirements. Unpiped vehicles in all cases to be in the rear next
within the van.
Freight Trains Booked up to 610 M.P.H. average—Class 3.
These trains must be tight coupled and have long buffers, oil boxes and
8 feet 6 inches minimum wheel base. The springs must be secured to hangers
or be bolted. (This includes springs bolted to axle-box or to the shoes).

Average
M.P.H.
Not to
exceed
General Instructions.—Continued. 1 7 3
Bra!vmi Freight Trains.—Continued.
Freight Trains Booked up to 35 M.P.H. average—Cass 4.
These trains must be composed of tight-coupled wagons with their springs
- secured to hangers or bolted, except that not more than two slack coupled
wagons may be placed in the rear within the van, provided that their gross
weight does not exceed 30 tons. (This includes springs bolted to.axle-box
or to the shoes.)
Freight Trains Booked up to 30 M.P.H. average—Cass 5.
These trains must be composed of tight-coupled wagons with their springs
secured to hangers or bolted, except that not more than 5 slack coupled
wagons may be placed in the rear within the van, provided that their gross
weight does not exceed 50 tons. (This includes springs bolted to axle box
or to the shoes). ( G . 23213).
(4) The following table shows the MINIMUM PERCENTAGE OF
BRAKE POWER allowed for the maximum average speed at which the
train is booked :—
1 Partly composed of unpiped
Piped throughout. - s t o c k and van unbraked.
Vehicles
braked.
Vehicles
Percentage. braked.
Percentage.
55 8 in 9 90
50 4 5 80
45 2 3 66 3 in 4 75
40 2 50 2 3 66
35 3 33 2 50
30 4 25 3 33
It will be observed that trains composed partly of unpiped stock and with
van consequently unbraked are restricted to a maximum average speed
of 45 m.p.h.
(5) The Guard in all cases must, in accordance with the Automatic' Brake
Rules, test the brake before starting, by either
(i.) Applying the brake, in the rear van when this vehicle is piped
or braked, or
(ii..) Opening the cock or valve on the last vehicle which is piped or
braked.
In order that the signalman may know at what speed these trains are
travelling when signalled on the block as Coaching Fish trains, the trains
must be reported on the Telegraph Instrument as under :—
Booked trains according to their Working Time Table number.
Specials :— Braked train 5 5 miles per hour.
50
45
40
35

174 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
CLASSES OF VANS TO BE USED ON BRAKED FREIGHT TRAINS.
The following are the Brake Vans to be used on Classes 1, 2, 3 and 4
Braked Trains :—
Class
Six-wheeled Passenger Luggage Vans.
Class 2.—
Vans built to diagram V 4 with oil boxes, auxiliary bearing springs,
screw couplings and long buffers.
Classes 3 and &—
Vans fitted with oil boxes and screw couplings. ( G . 26557).
WAGON BRAKE PANS AND CHAINS COMING IN CONTACT WITH
THIRD RAIL—TYNEMOLITH ELECTRIFIED AREA.
General Rule 200.
Guards of Freight trains which are to pass on to the Electrified Area must
satisfy themselves that all Wagon Brake Pin Chains are sufficiently looped
up to clear the third rail. ( T . 21063-5/11).
FASTENING DOORS OF GOODS, MINERAL, AND CATTLE WAGONS.
General Rules 206 and 210.
All doors (including bottom doors) of goods, cattle, and mineral wagons
must be properly fastened before the wagons are forwarded, loaded or empty.
List of Sections over which Freight Trains may run
without a van in the rear.
General Rule 207.
Where a train is authorised to run without a brake van in the rear, a
brake van or other suitable vehicle for the use of the man in charge must
be so attached as to be conveniently used by him, and also with due regard
to safety in working the train. A tail lamp must be carried on the last
vehicle.
From Tweedmouth South to Tweedmouth North (N.B. trains only).
(O. 6622).
Between Old Blyth and Newsham North.
New Blyth and Newsham North. ( O . 7387),
Whitehill Point, Albert Edward Dock and Percy Main North
Junction.
From Lambley Fell Sidings to Lambley Station.
12 Newsham North to Plessey Road. (Cattle wagons).
Between Newcastle Central Station and Heaton Carriage (Empty Coaching
Sidings S t o c k trains fitted
Pt Newcastle Central Station and Delaval Sidings fwith the continor
Scotswood Bridge Sidings u o u s brake in use,
provided the proportion of unbrake,d vehicles is not less than
for a Passenger train and that of the last three vehicles, not
more than one is " piped " only ; Guard or Shunter to ride in
rear vehicle). ( 0 . 6921).
From Plenmellor Colliery to Haltwhistle Station. Freight Trains Temporary
arrangement. ( O . 8647).

Genera! instructions•—Continued. • 1 7 5
List of Sections over which Freight Trains may ran without
a van in the rear.—Continued.
Between Heaton North and Riverside Junction.
From Argyle Street to Newcastle Central.
.„ Newcastle Central to Heaton North.
Newcastle Central to Forth. ( O . 6579).
Citadel Station to London Road Junction, (L. & N.W. engine
and not more than three P.O. vans). ( 0 . 6 9 4 4 ) .
Ainmouth North to Alnwick Station. (Only applies when assistant
engine is in rear). ( O . 6573).
Between Haltwhistle Station and East boxes—Wagons.
Felling and Park Lane Junction on the Goods lines.
Felling and Newcastle Central.
Penshaw Junction and Penshaw..
From High Street (Gateshead) to Greensfield Junction. ( O . 6549).
Park Lane Junction (Gateshead) to Albany Road Crossing. (O. 6549a).
Between St. Bede's Junction and Tyne Dock Bottom.
From Hebburn West to Pontop Junction.
Between Green Lane. (Tyne Dock) and Whitburn Junction.
Bank Top and Green Lane Junction boxes, Tyne Dock. (O. 65491).
High Shields Station Box and South Shields East Box. (Not more
than three vehicles). ( O . 6692).
From Cornforth Lane Junction to Coxhoe Station. ( O . 7009).
Between Eden Hill Bank Foot and Waldridge Bank Head.
Lobley Hill Bank Head and Bakers Bank •Foot.
Gateshead junction and King Edward Bridge junctio3,t.
Derwenthaugh junction and Blaydon East (Does not apply to
Goods trains).
Redheugh ,Bank Foot and Whickham Junction. (Does not apply
to Goods trains from Whickham Junction to Redheugh Bank
Foot. ( O . 7331).
Low Fell Sidings and Norwood Junction.
Ryhope Grange Junction and South Dock.
South Dock and Fawcett Street Junction.
From Seaham Junction to Seabanks Junction.
Between PaIlion Station and MiHeld (does not apply to Mineral trains).
PaIlion Station and Deptford Junction.
Frankland Junction and Framwellgate.
Usworth Colliery and Washington South Junction.
Washington South Junction and Washington Colliery.
Washington South Junction and Penshaw Junction.
Washington South Junction (North Biddick Colliery) and Harraton
Colliery. (During daylight only, and not more than one wagon.
• Applies to Lambton Colliery Co.?s engines only). ( O . 6779).
From Sherburn Colliery Junction to Broomside Junction.
Between Pesspool Junct. and Haswell Station. (Daylight only). (Few wagons).
Sunderland South and Villette Road Box. E m p t y co9ching ,
Sunderland South and Wearmouth Junction. I stock.
Annfield Plain Mineral Yard and Stanley Bank Head.
Durham North and Littleburn Colliery. (Not more, than one
wagon). ( O . 737S).
From Wheatley Hill Colliery or. Thornley Colliery to Thornley Junction.
(0. 6612).

• 176 G e n e r a l Instructions--Continued.
List of Soctions over which Freight Trains may run without
a van in the rear.—Continued.
Between Ferryhill No. 1 box and Coxhoe Junction box.
Ferryhill No. 3 box and Mainsforth Colliery box.
Ferryhill No. 1 and Thrislington Coke Ovens.
From Chilton Junction to Gipsy Lane. (Only applies to trains divided
for the purpose of working forward in two or more portions.
A brake van must be in rear of the portion left at Chilton
Junction).
Chilton Crossing to Chilton Junction.
Between Chilton Junction and Bishop Middleham.
37
Wingate Station and Wingate Colliery Junction.
From Murton to Hetton. (Does not apply to Goods trains)
Between Baxter Wood No. 2 and Dearness West.
Between Darlington, Parkgate Junction and North Junction.
P2
Darlington, Geneva and South Junction.
Hopetown Junction and Stooperdale.
Charity Junction, Hopetown Junction, and Albert Hill Junction.
Albert Hill Junction and S. & D. Crossings.
Albert Hill junction and Parkgate Junction. • (O. 7387).
From Barnard Castle East to Barnard Castle West, on the North and
South Down Mineral lines only. (Not more than six wagons.)
Witton West to Wear Valley Junction on Up Reception line.
Howden to Wear Valley Junction on Up Reception line. (O. 6931).
Wearhead to Coronation and Daddry Shields Sidings. (Not more
than three 'wagons). ( O . 7445).
Between West Auckland Station and West Auckland Colliery Junction.
3)
33
Shildon Tunnel South and Shildon Junction.
Shildon Junction and Middridge junction.
Tow Law and Blackfield Junction.
Bowesfield Junction and Grangetown Station (Mineral lines) and
all Goods or Mineral lines, connected with either in that area.
From Grangetown Station to Tod Point (Down Slag Line). (O. 5549).
Nunthorpe Station to Marton Lane Depots.
Between Cargo Fleet Inner Junction and Cargo Fleet Junction (not more
than 10 wagons when running from Cargo Fleet Junction to
the Inner Junction).
From Saltburn Junction to Tofts Depots (not more than 2 wagons).
17
Kilton Mines to Brotton Station.
Ingleby Incline Foot to Battersby Junction.
Ingleby Station to Battersby. (One horse box fitted with continuous
brake in use. Guard to ride in vehicle).
Ballast Crossing Up Independent to Cemetery Junction South.
' Between West Hartlepool, Church Street and Stranton Junction. On Pas-
Stranton Junction and Newburn Junction. t senger
PP
Cliff House Crossing and Newburn Junction. l i n e s .
Cliff House Crossing and Cliff House South Junction. (O. 5917).
PP
From Cliff House South Junction to Cliff House South Ground Frame.
(On Up Independent). ( O . 7392).
Seaton Snook Junction to Seaton Snook Works.
Between Primrose Hill and North Shore Junction.
North Shore Junction and Portrack Lane. (Not to exceed thirty
wagons). ( 0 . 7387).
Stockton Bank and Hartburn Junction (Goods lines). (O. 7319),.

Genera! instructions.—Continued. 1 7 7
List of Sections over which Freight Trains may run without
a van in the rear.—Continued.
Between Park Pit and Slapewath (Mineral lines). -•
13 Northallerton, South Junction, High Junction and Castle Hills
South Junction.
From Northallerton, High Junction to Low Junction.
Between Northallerton, Low Junction box, •Boroughbridge Gates and Cordio.
Northallerton, Low Junction and Low Gates.
York, Poppleton Junction and Severus Junction.
13 York, Poppleton Junction and Clifton.
31 Pickering High Mill and New Bridge Quarry (during daylight only)..
From Dowson's Garth Siding to Deviation Junction, Grosmont.
(0.B.T. 412),.
Between Malton East and Scarborough Road Junction.
Milford Junction South and Monk Fryston.
Gascoigne Wood Junction and Milford Junction East.
From Barlby Sidings to Barlby Junction on Down Duplicate line. (O. 6567).
Between Gascoigne Wood Junction and Hagg Lane Signal boxes (Up and
Down Independents only). ( O . 6704)..
From Seamier Station to Junction.
Between Scarborough, Washbeck and Gas Works.
Scarborough, Falsgrave and Gallows Close.
Geldard Junction and Castleton Bridge.
From Leeds New Station to Marsh Lane (not more than 6 wagons—Fish),.
Leeds Neville Hill to Hunslet, N.E. (Not more than 6 wagons).
Between Arthington North and West.
From Arthington South to North.
31 Arthington North to South. (Not more than 3 wagons. By
arrangement and Arthington between North, the whereby signalmen the at siding Arthington points Lonan at Siding Long
Siding leading from Up Main to the Siding will be kept open
for the siding during the time such movements are being made).
From Arthington Long Siding to North. (Not to exceed 8 wagons.
Siding points at Long Siding leading from Up Main to the
siding to be kept open for the siding during the time such,
movements are being made).
From Starbeck North to Stonefall Sidings.
( O . 7387).
)1 Stonefall Sidings to Starbeck North. (Not more than 30 wagons).
(If train exceeds 20 wagons it must proceed in direction of
Bilton Road Junction for the purpose of setting back into
North Goods Yard). ( 0 . 6849).
31
Garforth East to Garforth Inner Junction (not more than 25 empty
wagons for Trench Pit).
Garforth East to Garforth Inner Junction (Colliery Co.'8 engines
and wagons).
Between Beverley Cherry Tree Crossing and Beverley Station. ( 0 . 4886).
From Beverley Junction to Cherry Tree Crossing. (Not more than six
wagons). ( O . 7387)..
Between Goole, N.E. and L. & Y. Junction.
Goole N.E. and Dutch River (High Level).
33
Wilmington Junction and East.
From Wilmington Junction to Southcoates Junction. (Not more than
50 wagons). ( 0 . tog).
King George Dock Junction to Holderness Drain North.
(O. 7817).

178 G e n e r a l 'Nnstructions.---Continued.
SIGNALLING ifi". LIGHT ENGINES 1N:TH SECOND TENDER ATTACHED. -
General Rules 207 (14) and B.T.R.
A light engine with a second tender attached must be signalled on the
block bell as light engines coupled, viz., 2 pause 3. The Locomotive Department
will in all cases provide a man with hand signals and detonators to
ride on the second tender. ( O . 2593).
TRANSIT OF ANIMALS.
General Rule 210.
1.—Care must be taken from time to time to see that the animals are
travelling safely, and if any are found to be down in the wagons, steps
must be taken to have them put right as soon as possible, and a note of the
occurrence must be made on the guard's journal. •
2—Guards of Freight trains must shew at the foot of their journals tohe
number of wagons loaded with live stock which are conveyed by their
trains and the points at which the wagons are attached and detached.
When horse boxes or special cattle boxes are conveyed on goods trains,
guards must distinguish them from other live stock vehicles.
When trains consist entirely of live stock, it will suffice if the total number
of vehicles of each class is given, i.e., horse boxes, special cattle boxes, and
eattle trucks. ( O . 4500).
3.—Guards must take special care of the documents handed to them in
connection with live stock sent by their trains, and must give all such documents
to the proper person at the place where they detach the wagons.
HORSES AND OTHER L:VE STOCK FOR ROADSIDE sTATIoNs
BY NIGHT.
General Rule 210.
1.—Except by previous arrangement with the receiving station, no horses
or other live stock must be sent to any station unless they will arrive while
there is attendance at the signal box at that station. If the station is one at
which the hours of attendance are not given, live stock must only be sent so
as to arrive at or between the hours at which the first morning and last
evening trains are shown in the working time table to stop at such station
and, if, from special or unforseen detention on the road, the guard finds
that the train cannot arrive at the station at or between those hours, he
must decide at which nearest station (where there is attendance) he will leave
the live stock, and instruct the driver accordingly.
When an arrangement is made to detach live stock at night at stations
.after block working has ceased for the day, the Station Master must arrange
for the attendance of the signalman.
2.—In order to ensure live stock reaching their destination as early as
possible, they may, when desirable, be sent to the nearest station thereto
at which there is attendance, or when an earlier arrival can be secured by
means of a train from the opposite direction, they may be sent to the nearest
station beyond their destination at which there is attendance, and brought
back, but no charge must be made for the extra distance they are so conyeyed.:
In such cases the guard of the train must, before starting, be distinctly

General Instructions.—Continued. 1 7 9
Horses and other Live Stock tor Roadside Stations at night—Continued.
informed what the arrangement is, and so must the sender (if the arrangement
is made at the forwarding station) and the persons, if any, in charge of
the live stock, in order that no responsibility may attach to the Company
for the delay which will necessarily arise owing to the live stock not being
taken direct to their destination according to the contract for conveyance.
3.-1f anything is noticed to be amiss with live stock detached at a station
at night, when none of the staff is there to attend to the animals, the guard
must, if the nature of the case appears to warrant it, call up the Station,
Master if practicable, and if it will not seriously detain the train.
DELIVERY OF GOODS TRAIN AT END OF JOURNEY.
General Rule 214.
Guards of Freight trains on "exchanging turns," may for the purpose of
exchanging from train to train, leave their trains unattended on running
independents or reception lines. ( O . 7415).
BALLAST TRAINS DISCHARGING OR TAKING UP MATERIALS ON
RUNNING LINES BETWEEN TWO SIGNAL BOXES.
General Rule 216.
Clause (a) of this rule also applies to Freight trains stdpping at intermediate'
sidings.
OFFICERS' SPECIALS.
General Rule 217.
When an Officers' Special is intended to stop in a section for more than
three minutes and will stand unprotected by fixed signals, the Signalman
at the rear box should be advised whenever possible.
As, however, such advice cannot always be given, Signalmen must be
prepared for Officers' Specials stopping unadvised in sections between a
Boxes, and in such cases the provisions of B.T.R. 11, and also of Rule 21'7
as to the protection of the train will not apply. ( O . 7063).
ENGINES UNABLE TO DEAL WITH TRAINS ON GRADIENT.
General Rule 221.
Under no circumstances must an engine be detached from a train fitted
with the Westinghouse Brake on a gradient, and the train or portion of train
left on the line secured only by the Westinghouse Brake. This instruction
will not apply in the case of trains when standing at passenger stations
or when engines are running round their trains. ( 0 . 3468).
WRONG LINE ORDER FORMS.
General Rules 221 and 222.
The forms A. B, and C, after being used, must be sent by the signalman
to the Station Master, along with a report giving particulars of the circumstances
which called for their use. These forms must not under any circumstances
be made use of for more than one journey, and only then in the
authorised direction.

180 G e n e r a ! instructions.—Continued,
List of Catch Points on Passenger Lines, to act in case of a
Train or part of a Train running back.
, General Rules 224,, 157, 235, 236, 237 and 238.
In case of • Single Line working having to be adopted in any emergency;
reference must be made to this table, so that if catch points intervene, the
rovisions of General Rules 236-7 may be carried out.
Line.
Box.
Between.
Box.
Distance from nearest
Signal Box.
Box. - 31. C.
Dist fr om
n
Signal in
" advance
"
s m. C.
--
t
Onwhich
Line.
Ainmouth and Alnwick .. Alumouth North Shilbottle Cony. Shilbottle Cony. 0 21 s
t
0 19 Down
Ainwick and Coldstream .. Alnwick North Alnwick Junct.
Manors North .
Alnwick North .
Manors Junct. .
0 3
0 8/
o
p
0 18
0 10/
Down
Down
Maarnioorss m North J . m . Jesmond . 0 9 0 13 Down
Manors and Backworth {
South Goforth & Ponteland.
Jesmond
N
. .
u
o
West Jesmond . West jesmond . 0 21 0 14 Down
n
c
t
l
.
.
South Gosforth West Gosforth 0 14 0 23 Down
Gosforth Loop to Ponteland
Branch.
South Gostorth
East Junction
West Gosforth
West Loop Jet.
South Gosforth
East Junction
0 4 0 8 Down
Benton South West curve..
Benton South East Curve ..
Benton Quarry .
Benton Quarry .
Benton (B. & T.)
Benton (B. & T.)
Benton Quarry . 0 1
0 6
0 5
0 14
Down
Down
Benton Quarry . Newcastle and Tynemouth j
-
Riverside Branch. 1
Malings Sidings.
Walker . .
Benton E. Jet. .
Riverside Jet. .
St. Anthonys .
Benton Quarry .
Malings Sidings.
Walker . .
0 9
0 14
0 43
0 5
0 18
0 13
Down
Up
Up
Below and South Shields .. Hebburn . .
Pontop Jot. .
, S cotswood
Junction
Scotswood .
qcotswood Newborn, and
Junction
Wylam Montague Cony.
,
Walbottle .
- Walbottle .
Pontop Jet. .
Jarrow . .
Montague Cony.
Montague Cony.
Walbottle .
Newborn . .
Newborn . .
Pontop Jet. .
Jarrow . .
,
Scotswood .
Junction
Montague Cony.
Walbottle -
Walbottle .
Newborn . .
0 30/
0 19/
0 171
0 Of
0 131
0 201
0 241
0 9/
0 14/
0 17
9 101
0 101
0 11/
0 121
Up
Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Up
Reny Mill .
Junction
Baxter Wood .
No. 1
Mahon Cony. .
Blackhill South
Westwood Cony.
Junction
Durham and Scotswood
via Blackhill Lintz Green .
Friarside Cony.
Junction
Lockhaugh
Junction
- Lockhaugh .
Junction
Baxter Wood
No, 1.
Bearpark Cony.
Lanchester .
Blackhill North.
Hamsterley
Junction
Eriarside Cony.
Junction
Rowlands Gill .
Swalwell .
Swalwell .
Relly Mill .
Junction
Bearpark Cony.
Lanchester
Blackhill North
Hainsterley
Junction
Lintz Green
Friarside Cony.
Junction
Lockhaugh
Junction
Swalwell
0 21
0 26
0 48
0 01
0 1/
0 1/
0 171
0 561
0 30
0 184
0 171
0 35/
0 7
0 161
1 681
0 131
0 49f
1 651
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
,Birtley, Annfield Plain,
andlBlackidil
.
Ouston Junction South Pelaw Jet. Ouston Junction 8 0 181 Up
Ouston Junction South Pelaw Jet. South Pelaw Jet. 301 0 23 Up
South Pelaw Jet Pelton . . Pelton . . 2 0 171 Up
Pelton . . Beamish . . Pelton . . 37
4
1 51 Up
Felton . . Beamish . . Beamish . . 26 0 221 Up
Beamish . . Shield Row . Beamish . . i251
1 231 Up
Shield Row . Anntield Plain . Shield Row • 341 1 301 Up
Junction
Shield Row . Annfield Plain Annfteld Plain . 231 0 181 Up
Junction Junction
Annfield Plain . Annfield Plain . Annfield Plain . 125 0 17/ T_Tp
Junction
junction
Anntleld Plain . SoMedomsleyCol Annfield Plain . 24 2 l i Up
Bradley Crossing Carr House East Bradley crossing 20 0 18/ Up
Carr House East Carr House West Carr Ho se West 25 0 3/ Up
Carr House West Consett East Jet Carr House West 195 0 181 Down
Carr House West Consett East Jet. Carr House East 31 0 9 ' Down
Carr House West Consett East Jct. Carr House East ,3/ *
0 9/ Down
Consett East Jet. Consett North Consett North 19/ 0 171 Down
Junction Junction
Consett East Jet Consett North . Consett North . 75 0 9 Down
Junction Junction

Line.
General instructions.—Continued.
Between.
ths t !r um
nearest s top.
Distance from nearest' 1 sig..' in
Signal Box. i advan cc.
Box. Box. B o x . M. C. ! M. C.
Sunderland and Renshaw .. Sunderland . Fawcett Street Sunderland . 0 91 0 10 Up
South Junction South
Newcastle and Carlisle . . Corby Gates . Broadwath . Broadwath . 0 33 0 28 Up
Broadwath . How Mill . . How Mill . . . 0 37f 0 2.51 Up
On
which
Line.
'Gateshead to Dunston-on- King Edward Norwood Jet.. King Edward 0 511 0 371 Up
Tyne Bridge Jet. Bridge Jct.
Norwood Jct. . Dunston . . Dunston . . 0 41 0 191 Down
Sunderland to Hartlepool
Seaton . . Ryhope . . 0 01 1 111
Ryhope . . Seaton . . Seaton . . 0 501 0
Up
351 Up
t Ryhope
Ryhope
.
. Seaton . . Seaton . . 0 141 0 131 Up
Ryhope . . Seaton • . Seaton . . 0 191 0 14 Up
Murton and Durham Elvet.. Murton . . Hetton Colliery. Murton . . 0 191 0 12 Down
Bridge House Junction to
Baxter Wood No. 1
List of Catch Points •Pil Passenger Lines, etc.—Continued.
Bridge House
Junction
Baxter Wood
No. 2
Bridge House
junction
0 21 0 27 Down
Willington . Brancepeth .
Durham and I
Station Colly. Jct. Willington . 0 35 0 331 Down
Bishop Auckland Brancepeth . Brandon Jct. . Brandon Jet. . 0 20 0 231
Brandon Jet. .
UP
Dearness Valley Brandon jet. . 0 251 0 241 Up
I.
Junction
Spring Gardens
Junction
Evenwood . Evenwood . 0 221 0 151 Up
Bishop Auckland and
Barnard Castle
Evenwood .
Woodlands Jet.
Gibbs Neese .
Coal Road .
Crossing
Woodland Jct. .
Cockfield .
Forthburn .
Barnard Castle
East
Woodland Jet. .
Cocklield . .
Gibbs Neese .
Coal Road .
Crossing
0
0
0
0
291
39
251
251
0
0
0
0
15
231
211
211
-
GUp
Down
Down o
Lane Binchester Jct. . Binchester Jct. .
Binchester Jct. . Dean & Chapter Dean & Chapter
Bishop Auckland and Colliery Colliery
Ferryhill Dean & Chapter East Howie . Dean & Chapter
Colliery
Crossing Colliery
0
0
4
151
0
0
131
22
181
Down
Down
0 331 0 30 Down
Bowden . . Beechburn Cony.
Junction
Bowden . . 0 32 0 30 Down
Darlington and Blackhill
1
Bowden . .
Crook West .
Crook West .
Tow Law Ironworks
Junct.
Beechburn Golly.
Junction
West Durham
Junction
West Durham
Junction
Blackfield .
Beechburn Cony.
Junction
Crook West .
West Durham
Junction
Blacklield .
0
0
0
0
01
71
371
201
0
0
0
0
261
151
17
151
Down
Down
Down
Down
1
Burnhill Junct. .
Burnhill Junct. .
Burnhill Junct. .
Rowley .
Rowley .
Rowley .
.
.
.
Burnhill junct. .
Rurnhill junct. .
Rowley . .
0
1
0
481
561
34
0
1
2
31
11
' 261
Up
Up
Up
Tees Valley .
Junction
Tees Valley .
Junction
Lartington .
Quarry Jct.
Lartington .
Quarry Jet.
Tees Valley .
Junction
Lartington .
Quarry Jet.
1
0
11
24
0 781
b 17
Down
Down
Darlington and Tebay
Lartington . Hulands Quarry.
Quarry Jct.
Lartington . Hulands Quarry
Quarry Jct.
Hulands Quarry. Bowes . .
Bowes . . Spital . .
Spital . . Summit.
Summit . . Bleath Gill .
Summit . Bleath Gill .
Bleath Gill . Belah . .
Bleath Gill . Belah . .
Bleath
•
Gill . Belah . .
Belah . . Kirkby Stephen
E a s t
Belah . .
,
Kirkby Stephen
East
Lartington .
Quarry Jct.
Hulands Quarry.
Bowes . .
Spital . .
Summit . .
Summit.
Bleatil Gill .
Bleath Gill .
Belah . .
Belah . .
Belah . .
Belah . .
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
401
241
30
191
191
261
361
231
501
191
32
71
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
2
22/
211
27
17
151
231
27
211
30
70
251
01
Down
Dow
n
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Belah . .
Sandy Bank .
Ravenstonedale
Ravenstonedale
Gaisgill . .
Kirkby Stephen
East
Ravenstonedale
Gaisgill . .
Gaisgill . .
Tebay Yard .
Kirkby Stephen
East
Sandy Bank
Ravenstonedale
Gaisgill . .
Gaisgill . .
0
0
0
0
0
551
291
281
381
231
4
0
0
3
0
331
281
23
19
231
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up

182 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
List of Catch Points on Passenger Lines, etc.--Confinued.
Line.
, B o x .
Between.
Box.
Distance from nearest
Signal Box.
Box. Si. C.
Dist. fr om
pr1Sr' On
.d, which
iL,
i n e .
K. 0.
,,,
Cem3tery North Hart . .
•
Hart . . 0 30/
,e
0 211
c.
Down
Hart . .
Hart . .
Hart . .
Hesleden Bank
Head
Helloe Bank
Head
Hartlepool and Ferryhill 1 Raisby Hill
.
L High Quarry
Hesleden Bank
Head
Hesleden Bank
Head
Hesleden Bank
Head
Hesleden . .
Raisby Hill High
Quarry
Helloe Bank
• Foot
Hart . .
Hesleden Bank
Head
Hesleden Bank
Head
Hesleden . .
Kelloe Bank
Hellos Bank ead
Foot
0 63
0 741
0 281
0 91
0 181
0 181
0 731
1 46
0 271
0 101
0 16
1 19
Down
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
West Hartlepool to I
Hartlepool.
Cemetery Junet.
South
Ballast Crossing
Ballast Crossing
Hartlepool .
Ballast Crossing
Ballast Crossing
0 11
0 151
0 14
0 11
Up•
Up
West Hartlepool to f Clarence Road
Sunderland.
Junction
Cemetery North
Norton East to f Norton East .
Norton West.1 Norton East .
Stockton and Wellfield . Wynyard . .
Cemetery West
Hart . ,
Norton West .
Norton West .
Hurworth Burn.
Cemetery West.
Hart , . .
Norton East .
Norton West .
Wynyard . . .
0
. 0 31
'
0 5
1
0 41
1
0 251
0 181
0 211
0 101
0 191
2 67
Down
Down
Up
Down
Down
Darlington and Saltburn
f
Saltburn junct.
Thornaby East
Itarske . .
Tofts Depots .
Tees Bridge .
Tofts Depots .
Saltbum Junct.
Tees Bridge .
Tofts Depots .
0 13
0 21
0 21
0 41
0 15
0 181
Up
Up
Down
Middlesbrough and
Guisborough.
Pennyman's .
Ormesby . .
Ormesby . .
Chalonns Jet. .
Ormesby . .
Nunthorpe .
Nunthorpe .
Hutton Gate .
Ormesby . .
Ormesby . .
Nunthorpe .
Chalmers jet. .
0 261
0 251
0 201
0 251
0 19
1 14
0 10
0 66
Down
Down
Down
Down
Guisborough and Brotton
f
Hutton Junct. .
Brottou Junct..
Kiltonthorpe .
Spa Wood . Hutton Junct. .
Kiltonthorpe • . Brotton Junct..
Priestcroft Jet... Priestcroft Jet..
0 31
0 251
0 191
0 15
0 15
. 0 14
Down
Up
Up
Saltburn and Whitby
Saltburn Jona.
Saltburn Junct.
North Skelton .
Junction
Cliff . .
Longacres .
Longacres .
Lumpsey Mines.
Crags Hall .
Saltburn Junct.
Longacres .
Lumpsey . .
Crag Hall .
0 10
0 531
0 32
0 181
0 181
0 51
0 301
1 441
Down
Down
Dowse
Up
Priestcroft Branch . . North Skelton
Junction
North Skelton .
Junction
Priestcroft .
Junction
Priestcroft .
Junction
North Skelton
Junction
Priest-croft .
.1 unction
. 0 151
0 191
0 13
0 76
Up-
Up
Estou Branch . . . . Cargo Fleet .
Junction
Cargo Fleet .
Inner Junction
Cargo Fleet .
Junction
0 5 0 13 Down
Northallerton and f Kirklevington .
Eag1escliffe. Kirklevington .
North Yorkshire
-
and
1. Cleveland
Yarns . . 1 Kirklevington .
Yarm . . 1 Yarm . , . I1
0 311
0 431
0 301
1 91
Up
Up
. Ingleby . . Battersby . Ferrybridge Jet.
Swinton and Knottingley Moorthorpe .
Joint Line.
.
{ Bolton-on- o
Battersby . l
l
Pontefract Jet. . Pontefract Jet. .
Royd Moor . Royd Moor .
HicOeton South Hickleton South
0 281
0 40
0 341
0 251
0 15
0 36
0 33/
0 18
Down
UP
Down
Down
South Kirkby Branch
o i
. South Kirkby
r(W,11.
& G. Riy)
South Kirkby .
Colly. (S. & K.)
t
t
o
h
n J
-o
u
nD
n
- e
c t
a
i
r
o
n
South Kirkby . 0 5 0 21 Up
Mexbro' West 0 C. Branch . Mexbro' West
Junction Hearne Junction Mexbro• West .
Junction
0 2f 0 61 Down
South Elmsall Branch . . South Elmsall Moorthorpe
North Juliet. South Elmsall . 0 7 0 15 Down
Whitby and Pickering . .
York and linaresborough ..
Grosmont
Deviation
Sleights . .
Goldsborough .
Goathland • .
Eskdale Mines .
Hnaresborough
Goods Junction
Goathland .
Eskdale Mines .
0 31
0 ad
0 29
0 26
Up
Up
Koareaborough
Goods J unction
0 7
9
0 71 Down

General instructions.—Continued.
List of Catch Paints 6n Passenger Lines, etc.—Continued.
Line. Between.
Distance from nearest
Sirmal Box
Dist.from
nearest Stop
Signal in
advance.
Box. Box. Box. m. c. m. c.
'..""".....'...
On
which
Line.
Starbeck and Harrogate .. Starbeck North Dragon Junction Dragon Junction 0 35 0 23 Down
Cardigan Road • Headingley • Headingley . 0 27 0 23 Down
Headingley • Hawksworth . Headingley . 0 74 0 23 Down
Quarries
Hawksworth • Horsforth . Horsforth . 0 37 0 26 Down
Leeds and Thirsk Quarries
Arthington • Moseley • • Arthington . . 0 12 0 8 Up
South Junction South Junction
Dragon Junction Harrogate North Harrogate North 0 33 0 23 Up
Hilton Road Jct. Dragon Junction Dragon Junction 0 28 ' 0 23 Up
Leeds and Selby — • • Cross Gates East Mauston • . Cross Gates East 0 32 0 21 Down
Hawthorne • Micklefield • Miclefield . 0 321 0 221 Up
Quarry
Cross Gates and Wetherby• • Cross Gates East Cross Gates Nth. Cross Gates Nth. 0 161 0 16 Down
Church Fenton Huddleston . Huddleston • 0 241 0 23 Up
South Quarry Quarry
Church Fenton and Huddleston • Micklefield • Micklefield . 1 121 0 65 Up
Micklefiele Quarry Junction Junction
Huddleston . Micklefield . Micklefield • 0 511 0 24
..
Up
Quarry Junction Junction
Church Fenton (SL Harrogate. • Spofforth • Crimple Junction Crimple Junction 0 76 0 25 Down
Pannal Loop — — Palma! Junction Crimple Junction Crimple Junction 0 22 0 25 Down
Otley and Ilkley • • — Otley West . Milnerwood Jet. Milnerwood Jct. 0 27 0 23 Down
Arthington and Ilkley • • Arthington West Arthington South Arthington West 0 31 0 7 Up
Junction Junction Junction
Castleford and Manley . • Methley Junct. Methley Station. Methley Junct. 0 21 0 10 Up
N.E. N.E.
Garforth and Castleford • . Garforth East Garforth Inner Garforth East 0 5 0 15 Up
Junction Junction Junction
Casyke Branch . . • • Castleford • Glasshoughton Castleford • 0 121 0 24 Up
Station Colliery Station
183
Scarborough and Whitby .. Rayburn Wyke. Staintondale • Staintondale . 0 3i 0 61 Down
Hull and Scarborough — Quay Crossing • Flamborough • Flamborough . 0 28/ 0 131 Down
Market Weighton Goodmanham • Market Weighton 0 21 0 101 Down
Market Weighton and East East
Driffield. { Market Weighton Goodmanham . Goodmanham . 0 151 0 14 Down
(East)
Victoria Dock Br'anch . . Sculcoates . Wilmington . Sculcoates . 0 41 0 161 Down

184 G e n e r a l Instructions.—Continued.
FIRES OCCURRING IN CONNECTION WITH THE CONVEYANCE OF
ACIDS, MATCHES, CHARCOAL, ETC.
General Rules 226 and 279.
The following instructions must be observed in dealing with FIRES in
connection -
with
t h e
Fires in Wagons (General).
c Isolate o n vthe
wagon at once and forward it as quickly as possible to the
enearest y awater n supply or Fire Station, unless it is clear that the fire can be
dealt with by buckets of water from the locomotive tender or by smothering
cwith e ballast. After a fire, the wagon must be detained under observation
oat
the nearest Station for a sufficient time to make sure that no further out-
f break of fire will occur.
A Where c any smouldering goods are left at the side of the line, the Station-
i
master
d
at the nearest Station must be notified, and he must take steps to
have the goods, after extinction of any remaining fire, removed to his
s Station , without delay.
MWhen a possible, packages on fire should be removed from the wagons
tbefore cextinguishing,
so as to avoid damaging more goods than necessary
h
with water.
e
s ,
Acids.
C When h consignments of acid are on fire, care must be taken to apply water-
afrom a r safe distance, as the contact of water may cause some dangerous
spurting of the acid.
c o
Sand or earth may be used to stop a fire started by acid, but in that
acase water l should be used soon afterwards to prevent the fire breaking out
, again. Sufficient water must be used to flush away all acid which has been
espilt.
t It is dangerous to breathe acid fumes ; keep, therefore, to the windward,
cand
avoid entering enclosed spaces where such fumes are present.
. Oleum (Fuming Sulphuric Acid) gives off fumes like white smoke, and
may therefore sometimes appear to be on fire if a vessel containing it is
broken or leaking. Do not assume fire in this case unless flame can be seen.
For putting out a fire, ashes, lime or ballast is much better than water in
this case, owing to the heat given out when water comes into contact with
the acid. Avoid getting any acid on the hands or clothes.
In cases where Oleum is leaking from a drum or glass vessel, and the
containing vessel is not broken, the package should either be carefully lifted
out of the wagon and deposited on the ground in a safe place until it can
be attended to by some authorised person, or, if the leak can be temporarily
closed with a wooden plug and the vessel securely scotched in the wagon, it,
should be surrounded with ashes or lime and sent forward to destination.
Celluloid and Celluloid Scrap.
These fires rapidly become fierce so should be dealt with promptly. Water
is the . best extinguisher, but chemical extinguishers may be useful. Such
fires cannot be extinguished by smothering, and therefor. ballast, etc., is
of no use in putting out such fires.

General Instructions,—(Continued). 1 8 5
Fires occurring in connection with the conveyance of Acids, Matches,
Charcoal, etc.—Continued.
Charcoal.
Some kinds of Charcoal are liable to ignite spontaneously, and damp
charcoal is especially liable. It is best to unload the portion which is
alight before putting out the fire with water. If this is not practicable,
water may be used sparingly to extinguish the visible fire ; then, after
removal of all the charcoal from the wagon, the wet should be separated
from the dry. The portion remaining dry and undamaged should be forwarded
with all speed to destination, and the wet portion should be stored
in the open and held pending instructions. The special attention of the
guard should be called to the load in either case.
Cotton, Wool, etc.
Bales of Cotton.
before - extinguishing the fire under the water column or by buckets, as wetting
the unburnt cotton increases the loss. Do not remove the bands, as loose
cotton If oon nfire l y is difficult to deal with and the fire loss is greater. It is
better, a after the blaze has been checked, to pluck out of the bales such
of fthe ematerial w as is smouldering.
b Cotton a in l bags e or Waste in bags.
s -In
all cases of cotton or wool fires special care is necessary to make sure
that a Proceed the fire r is entirely a extinguished s as it tends to break oat again. Avoid
as far as possible soiling the unburnt material with mud and dirt as it
increases e w ithe t loss. h
b c uo rt
t o n
Lime.
n i i nn
The g b
lime , a
near
l
the burning
e s
part
.
should be thrown out and fire extinguished,
if possible, by smothering. If water has to be used, care must be taken
not t to wet the lime remaining in the truck.
r
Matches.
y
If packed in a well-made case, although a few matches,may go off, they
are t generally smothered by their own smoke, which clears away without
any o fire breaking out. In such cases, do not apply water. When, however,
it is s clear ethat
the contents of the case are really alight and water must be
used, do not attempt to open the case.
p a
r a Spent Oxide from Gas Purifiers—Sulphur.
Extinguish t e with water. The fires are generally localised in the truck,
and if the fire is discovered at the start the burning portion may be removed,
but
t
a load after once being on fire is likely to kindle again, so keep under
•special h observation. The fumes of the burning sulphur should be avoided.
e
(O. 7370).
s
e
RESUMPTION OF DOUBLE LINE WORKING AFTER
SINGLE LINE WORKING.
General Rule 239.
(a) When the line is clear, and before ordinary working is resumed, the
-pilotman must accompany the driver of the first train in each direction,
and withdraw the single line notices when he makes his first journey.

186 • General Instructions.—Continued.
Resumption oi Double Line Working atter Single Line Working.—Continued.
(b) When block working has been suspended and before the pilotman
leaves the box in the rear, the signalman must forward to the box in
advance the opening and testing signals, and the signalman receiving such
signals must peg the block indicator for the line on which the train conveying
the pilotman is approaching to " Train on line." When block working
has not been suspended the train must be signalled in the ordinary way.
(c) The signalman at each end of the section over which the single line
has been worked, and the signalman at any intermediate boi, must give
the driver of the first train in each direction a notice to the effect, " Engine
No i s the last one cautioned," and instruct the driver to stop at
the next signal box and hand the notice to the signalman. The pilotman
is responsible for seeing that this is properly done.
• (d) The signalman receiving this notice must give " Train out of
section " signal to the box in the rear when signalling for that line must
be recommenced in the ordinary way.
(e) On ordinary working being resumed, any order suspending block
telegraPh working will be cancelled by the withdrawal of the forms for
single line working.
(f) All forms which have been issued in connection with the single line
working must be sent to the District Superintendent.
The following indicates the course to be adopted by the Pilotman
A EA
v O
B
S T
R U
C T
V W
.
Pilotman at C. Bloch Working in operation.—First ascertain if preceding
train is out of section, then withdraw the form at C ; obtain extract
in accordance with clause (c) and .proceed to B, lift the form there,
deliver up extract from 0, obtain extract and proceed to A, withdraw
the form there and deliver extract from B. Obtain extract A to B,
proceed to B, deliver up extract from A, obtain extract from B, proceed
to C. deliver up extract obtained from B.
Pilotman at G. talWt Working suspended.—The same procedure to be
adopted except that the opening and testing signals must be sent and
the block indicator at the box in advance pegged to "train on line"
ign accordance with clause (b).
Pilotrnan at /31 Mock Working M operation.—Obtain extract A to B,.
withdraw form at A, proceed to B, deliver up extract from A, obtain
extract • B to C, withdraw form at B, proceed from B to C, deliver up
extract B to 0, withdraw form at C, and afterwards accompany the
first train in. the opposite direction from C to A and obtain extracts
in accordance with clause (c).
Pilotman at A. Bleck Working stispendedo-The same procedure to be
adopted except that the opening and testing signals .must be sent and
the block indicator at the box in advance pegged to "Train on line"
in accordance with clause (b).
VS"
'
C
Or/

General Instructions.
-
Platelayers' Trolleys Continued. Going Into or Through Tunnels.
General Rule 249 and B.T.R. 9.
The 'following is a complete list of the
Instruction contained in Block Telegraph
applied :—
Tunnel. Length.
Miles. Yards.
Arthington, Bramhope
Burdale • • •
•
•
2
0
241
1745
Burton Salmon, Brotherton • 0 319
Grinkle • • 0 993
Harrogate, Crimple • 0 825
Kettleness • 0 308
Ravenscar • • 0 279
Sandsend • • • 0 1652
Scarborough, Gallows Close • 0 260
Scotswood • • 0 269
,Shildon • • 0 1217
Sunderland • • 0 1116
Tynemouth • 0 786
Walker • 0 182
Station Masters
Inspector at once
full particulars to
FIRES AT STATIONS.
General Rule 26&
tunnels to which the Special
Regulation No. 9 must be
Remarla.
187
Between the hours of 3-30 and 7-30
a.m. on week-days except Mondays,
and from 3-0 a.m. to 6-0 a.m. on
Mondays, when the Engineer has
possession of the tip line through
the tunnel platelayers' trolleys will
not be signalled on the block
instruments.
and all concerned must advise the Permanent Way
of any outbreak or fire, and must afterwards report
the District Superintendent and Divisional Firemaster.
(O. 2710). (0. 6085.)
OBSTRUCTIONS PLACED IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO LINES.
General Rule 270 (c).
Coal, cinders or other obstructions, other than permanent way materials
required in connection with relaying, etc., must not, where it can possibly
be avoided, be placed or allowed to accumulate within a space of 4 feet
6 inches from any running line or siding, especially in Goods Yards or any
places where shunting is carried on. ( O . 7160)
VEHICLES CONTAINING EXPLOSIVES ON FREIGHT TRAINS.
General Rules 279 and 206. -
In the case of a vehicle or vehicles containing explosives being attached
to a Freight train or engine, the Guard or Shunter in charge must so inform
the Driver, and must also tell him when and where such vehicle or vehicles
will be detached en route. ( O . 7110).

188 G e r a l Instructions. —Continued.
FIRE PROTECTION IN THE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF PICRIC ACID.
General Rule 279.
Owing to the highly inflammable nature of Picric Acid and the danger
arising from fires which might occur in the vicinity of places where Picric
Acid is dealt with, the following precautions are to be taken
(a) Smoking should be prohibited in Goods Yards where explosives7or
inflammable materials used in this manufacture are handled.
fb) Particular care should be taken to prevent accumulation of combustible
materials such as straw, empty wood cases, hay, etc., in
the same Yards as explosives : at the very least they should be
removed as far as possible from the latter.
(c) Wagons containing explosives should be, wherever possible, unloaded
at separate sidings, so that in case of fire breaking out elsewhere,
they can be removed from danger without any difficulty.
• (0, 6238 (b.)).
SPECIAL INSTIRUCTIONS APPLICABLE AT PARTICULAR
PLAC,'ES.
NEWSHANL—LEVEL CROSSING, PLESSEY ROAD.
When Freight trains are stopped at Plessey Road whiting acceptanc&
by the North box signalman, or for the purpose of working at the Depot.
Siding, care must be observed not to block the level crossing.
When trains cannot be drawn clear, they must be set back or divided,
as may be necessary, to prevent detention to ihe • crossing traffic. (O. 4921).
BETWEEN GOSWICK AND BEAL—{JP AND DOWN INDEPENDENTS.
The Standard Recording Regulations are in operation on both Up
and Don Independents. Both lines may, however, be used for standage
as under :—
The Up Independent may be used in case of emergency for affording
relief to the Tw eedmouth Yard, and Up Freight trains may be despatched
from Tweedmouth and remain in the Independent until they can be worked
forward.
The Down Independent may be used for the standage of Down Freight
trains which cannot be accepted at Berwick. The Station Master at Tweedmouth
will arrange the forward working of the trains which are held upon
the Independent. ( O . 6601).
QUAYSIDE TUNNEL, MANORS.
A Platelayers' trolley ntust not 'be permitted to enter •upon the singleline
until the man in charge of it has obtained possession of the staff, which
he must retain until the trolley is removed clear of the single line, when the
staff must be returned to the Signalman at Argyle Street box. (O. 6636).

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. .189
Tynemouth Tunnel.
Gradient from North Shields towards Tynemouth falling 1 in 300 for 704 yards
and then rising 1 in 200 for 835 yards.
1.—Trains are not allowed to pass in the tLitinel-
2.—After a Down train has been accepted by Tynemouth Junction box,
the Is line clear signal for an Up train must not be offered to North Shields.
Station box until the Down train has passed over the treadle at the east
end of the tunnel.
3.—After an Up train has been accepted by North Shields Station box,
the Is line clear signal for a Down train must not be •offered to Tynemouth
Junction box until the Up train has arrived at North Shields Station.
If block working is suspended the trains must be signalled by telephone•
until block working is restored. Should the telephones also be out of order'
the traffic must be worked by Pilotman, the section under his control
extending from the Down Starting signal at North Shields to the Tynemouth
Junction box. General Rules 227 to 239 must be observed as far
as they are applicable. The Station Master at North Shields to make all
the necessary arrangements.
4.---Should an engine or train not emerge from the tunnel in the usual
time, the signalman at North Shields box, after communicating with Tynemouth
Junction box, Must at once advise the foreman in charge of thestation,
who will switch ,pn the electric light in the tunnel and proceed
into the tunnel to make enquiries as to the cause of delay and to render
assistance, if necessary. If considered advisable, the third rail -must be
made dead. ( O . 1069.)
COXLODGE COLLIERY SIDING, FAIRGAIRN'S OCCUP TION CROSSING.
Guards of trains being marshalled or standing in Coklodge Colliery Siding
must avoid fouling Fairbairn's Occupation Crossing when the crossing is
requiredf or the passage of carts, etc. Trains must be divided when
necessary, to allow carts to pass. •
PERCY M NN.—DISPOSAL OF MINERAL TRAINS AT THE
COMMISSIONERS' SMITHS, EXCHANGE SIDINGS.
The Tyne Improvement Commissioners will provide a man who will meet
• each train on arrival and give the necessary instructions as to its disposal
to the guard. The Tyne Commissioners' man will accompany the front
portion of the train, and the guard must maintain such a position as the train
advances as will enable him to receive hand signals from the front of the
train and transmit them to the driver.
The guard must be as near to the front of the train as will enable the driver
to receive any signals given. The guard must also assist in securing the
train, and must not leave the sidings until he has received permission to do
,so from the person in charge. 5 8 ) .

190 Special Instructions applicable7at Particular Places.—Cotetinued.
ST, PETER'S STATION.—WORKING OF TRAINS TO MORRISON'S SIDINGS.
Spring safety points have been provided on the incline leading from St.
Peter's to Morrison's Sidings. The points are 30 yards east of the Level
Crossing over Glasshouse Street. Men in charge of trains going to MOrriSWI
'Sidings
must hold up the lever of the points as the trains pass over. (0. 71/12/17)•
S
RIVERSIDE RANCH.--WORK/NG OF TAR WORKS SIDING ON
UP LINE BETWEEN WALKER AND ST. ANTHONY'S STATIONS.
Traffic to or from the Siding must be attached in front of the train.
On arrival at the Siding, and after the train clears the catch points leading
to the runaway siding, it must be set back with its rear brake an against
the buffer stops in the latter siding before work is commenced. (O. 6310).
LIGHT ENGINES AND EMPTY COACHING STOCK TRAINS
FROM HEATON SHEDS, ETC., FOR NEWCASTLE
CENTRAL STATION OR BEYOND.
Drivers
North, - of Heaton Carriage Sidings, or the Tynemouth Branches, must, when
travelling
a l l
on the Up Main Line, STOP their Engines and advise the
Signalman at Heaton Station Box, or when travelling on the Up Tynemouth
L i Line the signalman at Ouseburn box, what trains they are going
to gwork h from the Central, or their destination if they are going direct to
some t point beyond Newcastle. The signalman at Heaton Station and
Ouseburn •boxes will immediately transmit the information to the signalman
E at Manors Junction box.
n
When Heaton Station and Ouseburn signal-boxes are closed, the inform-
Ation g must i be given to the signalman at Manors Junction box. (O. 5213).
n
e
s
CARLISLE, GAS WORKS SIDING.
aNo
train must be allowed to enter or leave the siding except in clear
•daylight, and care must be taken not to obstruct the main lines more than
is absolutely n necessary.
d
Drivers • of both Up and Down trains must approach the Gas Works
•Siding, E and also Rome Street Junction, with great caution. ( O . 5471).
m
p
SLAGGYFORD. t
WORK;NG OF TRAINS AT BARHAUGH CoLuERY.
y
Owing to the gradient between Alston and Slaggyford Stations, trains
-working C into and out of the Sidings must always have the engine at the
'lower o end, or the whole of the train must be placed in the Sidings clear of
the a Main line before any shunting operations are commenced.
cUnder
no circumstances must the van, wagons, or any portion of the train
be hleft
on the Main line during the time the engine is engaged in the Sidings.
(0.B.T. 562).
i
n
g
S

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Paces.---Continued. 191
HALTWiliSTLE.--WORKING OF PLENMELLER COLLIERY SIDINGS
BETWEEN HiA,LTWHIVILL AND
Drivers working , C Oto Plenmeller A N I N CColliery O D . Sidings from Haltwhistle will be
supplied with an Occupation Key instead of a Tablet, also the key of the
Ground Frame Box. The occupation key locks and tmlocks the Sidings
Ground Frame. The Signalman at Haltwhistle will instruct the Guard as
to whether the tablet working is to be restored as soon as the train reaches
the Sidings. On arrival at the Sidings the Guard will obtain the keys from
the Driver, and by means of the occupation key he niuSt release the lock
fixed on the lever of the ground frame. He must then set the points to allow
the train to proceed into the Sidings, leaving the occupation key in the Ground
Frame Lock, the Driver will then proceed with the whole train into the Sidings.
In no case roust the van or any portion of the train be lett on the Main line.
If tablet -
workin Guard must restore the points to their normal position, lock the frame,
withdraw the key, and work the occupation instrument as follows
g
i s (1) Put Occupation Key into the instrument, which will be shewing
t o
the figure " 3 " and turn till No. 1 appears.
(2) Telephone the Signalman at Haltwhistle and inform him that the
b whole of the ttain is locked in the sidings clear of the Main line,
e and that the key has been inserted in the Occupation Instru-
r e s ment at the Sidings and turned to position " 1."
t The o HaItwhistle r
'Signalman will then be able to restore the ordinary
eTablet d working between Coanwood and Haltwhistle.
b When e the train is ready to leave the Sidings, the Guard must 'act as
follows
t w
e (1) eTelephone
Haltwhistle Signalman that the train is 'ready to leave,
n and he will give the necessary instructions for the return journey.
H (The occupation key cannot be withdrawn from the occupation
instrument if a tablet is out of either instrument).
a
(2) When permission to obtain the key is given by the Signalman at
l t Haltwhistle, the Guard must turn the key until No. 2 appears,
w and wait till the word " FREE " appears above, he must then
h turn the key until No. 3 appears, when he can withdraw the
occupation key.
i
s
(3) The points may then be unlocked and the train brought out on to
the Main. line, and after restoring the points dnd locking the
t l frame and box, the occupation key and the key of the ground
e frame box must be handed to the Driver, who will proceed to
a Haltwhistle and deliver the keys to the Signalman there.
nIf
the Occupation Instruments either at Haltwhistle or Plenmeller Colliery
Sidings d fail, the Guard must obtain instructions on the telephone from the
Station Master or Signalman at Haltwhistle as to what course is to be-
C
adopted. If a failure of the telephonic communication between the ground
frame o and Haltwhistle occurs and the guard is unable to carry out these.
instructions, a he must at once dispose of the train and proceed with the
engine n to Hahwhistle, taking with him the occupation key, and advise the-
Signahnan verbally that the points are locked in the normal position. He
must w then hand the key to the Signalman at Haltwhistle in order that the
tablet o
- o
wo d
r, k i
ntg

192 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
Haltwhistle.—Working of Memeller Colliery Sidings between
Haltwhistle and Coanwood.—Continued.
If, however, the key is locked in the occupation instrument, he must
proceed on foot and advise the Signalman of this, and at the same time
inform him that the points are locked in the normal position.
If it be known that the telephonic communication has failed before the
train leaves Haltwhistle, the train must he detained until there is sufficient
margin to make the journey to the Sidings and back without restoring
Tablet Communication. ( 0 . B . T . 455). (O. 6693).
HALTWHISTLE.—WORKING OF TRAINS AT PLENMELLER COLLIERY.
Owing to the gradient between Haltwhistle Station and Plenmeller Colliery
Junction, trains working traffic into and out of the Colliery must always
have the engine at the lower end, or the whole of the train must be placed
in the sidings clear of the Main line before any shunting operations are
commenced.
Under no circumstances must the van, wagons or any portion of the train
be left on the Main line during the time the engine is engaged on the sidings.
BARD011 MILL—LEVEL CROSSING EAST OF STATION.
(0.135. 455).
When freight trains are shunted from one Main line to the other
or into the Down Relief Siding at Bardon Mill Station, and cannot be drawn
clear of the public road crossing, they must be divided to prevent detention
to traffic passing over the crossing. ( O . 5541).
MINERAL TRAINS FROM WEST CALLING AT SOUTH BENWELL
OR ELSWICK WORKS.
Drivers of mineral trains frOm the West and Newburn Branch having to
call at South Benwell Colliery or Elswick Works must travel along the
Independent from Scotswood and stop at Delaval and inform the Signalman
at which of the places they are going to call.
The information will then be transmitted to Elswick Station Box, and
the Signalman at that place will give sanction before the train is allowed
to proceed. This will enable the Signalman at Elswick Works Box to observe
a proper margin between a train having to work at Elswick Works and a
following passenger train. ( O . 6310).
ELSWICK.—EMPTY CARRIAGE TRAINS FROM THE DIRECTION
OF ELSWICK TO CENTRAL, ETC.
Guards of all empty trains must instruct their Drivers to slacken speed
on passing Els
-man
at, that place what they are next required to work. This information
to be transmitted by telephone to No. 3 Box Central.
wick Whit trains are for beyond the Central, the Signalman at No. 3 Box must
Sinstruct t a tthe i oSignalman
at Forth Junction whether to send them up
n by the passenger or the goods line. In the absence of any orders from
B
No. 3
o
Box,
x
empty trains must be sent up by the passenger line, as it is
important they get the best possible despatch.
, Guards will be held responsible for being in a position to give the Signal-
sman at o Elswick correct information. ( O . 5386).
a
s
t
o

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 193
NEWCASTLE—WORKING OF GOODS AND MINERAL TRAINS BETWEEN
FORTH JUNCTION AND NEWCASTLE CENTRAL (No. 3 BOX).
Ordinary goods and mineral trains must be sent forward from Forth Junction
on the up goods line, except when the goods line is occupied and another
mineral or up goods train arrives from the west, in which case, if a passenger
train is nearly due, the goods or mineral train may be sent forward on the
up passenger line, the signalman at No. 3 being advised of this by telephone,
so that he may admit the goods or mineral train into the central yard as
soon as possible.
Class A trains may be allowed to leave Forth Junction on'the up passenger
line when the goods line is occupied and there is no risk of stopping a passenger
train by doing so, after permission has been obtained from No. 3 Box by
telephone.
Class A or B, or mineral trains for beyond Elswick Works may be allowed
to run on the passenger line from No. 3 Box to Forth Junction, when no
passenger trains are due to leave the Central within eight minutes.
GATESHEAD.—LIGHT ENGINES BETWEEN NEWCASTLE,
CENTRAL STATION, AND GATESHEAD SHEDS.
All engines to or from Gateshead Sheds passing over the High Level Bridge,
must travel via Gateshead West Station unless it is absolutely necessary for
them to travel via High Street for the purpose of turning. ( O . 3808).
GATESHEAD.—WORKING OF PASSENGER TRAINS VIA DOWN
SLOW LINE, GATESHEAD JUNCTION SIGNAL BOX TO
NEWCASTLE No. 1 SIGNAL BOX.
All Passenger trains which are to be run over the Down Slow line must
be brought to a stand at Gateshead East and West Stations before
being allowed to proceed. ( O . 5825).
GATESHEAD.—LIGHT ENGINES AND EMPTY COACHING STOCK
TRAINS PASSING OVER HIGH LEVEL BRIDGE,
NEWCASTLE, IN DOWN DIRECTION.
The drivers of all light engines and empty coaching stock trains which
require to enter Newcastle Station via High Level Bridge, must inform the
signalman at Gateshead Junction signal-box when passing that box what
trains they are to work out of the Central Station. ( O . 4071).
NEWCASTLE TO YORK.—WORKING OF VACUUM ONLY COACHING
STOCK VEHICLES ON EMPTY COACHING STOCK TRAINS.
Vacuum only Coaching Stock may be worked on the Up Empty Stock
trains, Newcastle to York. When this is done, such vehicles should be
placed next within the rear van, and it will be necessary to prohibit
passengers in charge of horses, etc., travelling by the Stock trains.
When such vehicles are attached, Regulations 2, 3, 4 and 5 in regard to
Braked Freight trains shewn on pages 172 and 173, must be adhered to.
Should all vehicles on the train be fitted with the Vacuum Brake, or the
through pipe in proper proportion, there is no objection to the Vacuum
Brake being worked and passengers in charge of horses, etc., being permitted
to travel with the train. ( B . 1720). (O. 6331).

194 Special Instruciions appiicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
ALM GRANGE STATION.—OCCUPATION CROSSING.
No train must be left foul of the Occupation Crossing situated about
125 yards South of Aldin Grange Station.
When trains cannot be drawn clear, they must be divided to prevent..
detention to the Crossing traffic. ( O . 6878).
EBCHESTER. WORKING OF TRAFFIC INTO AND OUT OF
SIDINGS AT STATION.
Owing to the gradient of the line, trains working traffic into and out of
the sidings must always have the engine at the lower end, or the whole of
the train must be placed in the sidings clear of the Main line before any
shunting operations are commenced.
-
be left on the main line during the time the engine is engaged in the sidings..
U
n
d
e
r
n
o
c
i
r
c
u
m
s
t
a
n
c
e
s
m
u
s
t
t
h
e
v
a
n
,
w
a
g
o
n
s
o
r
a
n
(0 B.T. 432).
HIGH WESTWOOD.--STOPPING OF GOODS TRAINS.
Owing to the gradients at High Westwood goods trains must not under
any circumstances be brought to a stand at the station.
A mineral or ballast train may be brought to a stand for the purpose of
discharging coal for station use, the wagon however must NOT be detached,
from tb:! train, but the coal must be unloaded by dropping the bottom,
boards. ( 0 . 1 3 . T . 453).
LINTZ GREEN.—FOOTPATH LEVEL CROSSING NEAR
SOUTH GARESHELD COLLIERY.
When trains are shunting or standing on the Independent line between.,
Friarside and Lintz Green signal-boxes, care must be observed not to block.
the footpath level crossing. Guards must divide their trains when necessary'
to avoid detention to foot passengers. ( O . 4921).
ANNFIELD PLAIN BRANCH.—PASSENGER TRAINS WORKED
BY TENDER ENGINES.
Tender engines drawing loaded passenger trains between Birtley or Ouston,
Junction and Annfield Plain, which do not stop at the intermediate stations,.
must always be run chimney first in each direction.
BEAMISH JUNCTION.—WORKING OF MINERAL. TRAINS
UP VIGO BANK.
If a train comes to a stand on the Bank owing to the inability of the engine
to take the whole of the train forward, the signal near Beamish Junction.
must be immediately placed to danger by means of .either of the two levers,
provided for the purpose. If the guard of the train clears the line by dividing
his load and taking it forward in two portions, he must return the lever to,
its normal position when leaving with the second portion.
If the line is cleared by the train being assisted, the guard with the assisting
engine, or in the absence of a guard the fireman must, on return after having
assisted the train to the Bank Top, return the lever to its normal position,
so as to indicate to the signalman at Beamish Junction that the line is again
clear. ( O . 3831).
DERWENTHAUGH.—WORKING OF ENGINES AT GARESFIELD SIDINGS.,
Delays occasionally take place at Garesfield Junction, Derwenthaugh,
when wagons are left on the Main line until an engine goes into Consett
Garesfield Siding to attach.
In future, wagons should not be left on the Main line unless it is known
with some degree of certainty that delay to other trains will not take place
in consequence. ( G , 18164).

Special Instructions applicable at Pariicular Places.—Continued. 195
GATESHEAD.—ALLHUSENT, BRANCH, ALBANY ROAD CROSSING.
In order tliat the above crossincx' may be kept clear for vehictilar traffic,
Guards working trains exceeding 15 wagons into the United Alkali Co.'s
Works must divide their trains at Albany Road Crossing, and a sufficient
number of brakes must be pinned down on the rear portion. The engine
must then run forward with about 15 wagons to the first pair of points in
the works and leave them standing there. The engine must then be uncoupled
and return to the top of the bank, afterwards propel the whole
of the train into the works after both portions have again been coupled
together. ( O . 5757).
-
T
R
A
I
N
-
S
r
F
e
R
g
uO
lM
aT
tH
iE
oD
nu
sN
. s
A
T
l
o
l
r
t
ri
aB
iR
nA
s N
oC
tH
hA
eC
r
C
t
E
h
P
a
n T
lE
iD
BRIDGE JUNCTION BOX FROM BLANDON JUNCTION LI NDF.n
. BLOCK TELEGRAPH REa3LILA
, -
Trains which are accepted by the Signalman at Scotswood Bridge Junction
13ox under the FION Section N clear o . to Home 5 . Signal only " signal will not be
verbally cautioned at Blaydon Junction in accordance with the standard
than two brakes which have not been accepted at " Line Clear" by the
signalman at Scotswood Bridge Junction will be brought to a stand at the
Blaydon Main Junction Home signals, and the lowering of the Home Signal
at that place, and also the lowering of the Home and Distant Signals at
Blaydon, Junction in such cases, will be an indication to a Driver, without
-any further caution, that the train has been accepted under Regulation 5,
and that the line is only clear to the Scotswood Bridge Junction Down Home
signal.
When a train is accepted by Scotswood Bridge junction at " Line Clear"
it will not be brought to a stand at Blaydon Main Junction Home Signal.
(0 3789).
BRANDON COLLIERY. WCoRKMG OF 7 R A i r 4 3
BRANDON BANK.
When a congestion of mineral traffic is likely to occur at Baxter Wood or
Dearness Junction owing to the arrival of more trains than the pilot engine
can assist, arrangements will be made between the signalmen at Baxter Wood
No. 2, Dearness Valley Junction and Brandon Junction for the engines of
other trains to be utilised in turn to assist trains from Dearness Junction to
Brancepeth Station as may be necessary, the loads of such engines to be
left in the sidings at Baxter Wood or Brandon Colliery clear of the running
lines and properly secured.
An engine with van in front or behind may assist a freight train or two
coupled freight trains in the rear from Dearness Valley Junction to Brancepeth
Station during daylight and in clear weather. •
An engine with van attached in front or behind may also assist single
freight trains in the rear from Dearness Valley Junction to Brancepeth
Station during the night when circumstances necessitate this being done.
(O. 9093).

196 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
WORKING OF GOODS AND MINERAL TRAINS BETWEEN HIGH
STREET JUNCTION AND PEL W JUNCTION.
Up Trains from West of High Street Junction.
Light engines and engines with vans attached, also Goods and Mineral
trains not having work to do at the Park Lane and Boro Gardens sidings,
must be run over the passenger lines to Felling or Pelaw Junction when this
can be done without interfering with the passenger traffic or when goods
lines are blocked, and drivers of such engines or trains must give two whistles
on approaching the High Street Junction signal-box.
The signalman at Felling will decide whether Goods or Mineral trains sent
from High Street Junction on the passenger lines are to be turned on to the
Goods lines at his box or to be allowed to continue on the passenger lines
throughout, every care being taken to avoid detention to passenger traffic.
Down Trains.
Down Goods and Mineral trains going to the Team Valley or Dunston
direction, North or to West of Central, which have not to call at Park Lane,
may be run on the passenger line from Pelaw Junction, Felling, St. James'
Bridge, or High Street Junction, when permission has been obtained from
the Park Lane Junction signalman for this to be done, and when it can
be done without delay to passenger traffic.
Should the signalman at Park Lane Junction require to run a train from
the Down Goods to Down Main line for beyond High Street whilst the Down
Goods line is occupied between Park Lane Junction and High Street, he
must ascertain that the High Street signalman can give it a clear run.
To enable the signalman to arrange this, the following whistles must be
given by drivers as they approach the Felling Station box :—
No. of Whistles.
Long. Short. Long.
To continue on Goods line
To Dunston . .
To Team Valley . .
To Newcastle, via K.E.B. . . .
To Newcastle, via High Level Bridge
1
1
1
2
2 .. —
3
1
To Allhusens, Hawks, and Permanent Way
Sidings . . . . . .
2 .. 2
Unless the signal is then given indicating that the goods line is clear up
to St. James' Bridge Junction, the train must not pass Felling Station until
the signalman there has been given clearly to understand the destination of
the train and that it is not required to call at Park Lane or Boro' Gardens.
In some cases it will be possible to send Mineral trains for Boro' Gardens
(from Felling Station) via the passenger line and Park Lane Junction, and
the trainmen must therefore when stopped at Felling give the signalman
there particulars of their load, etc.
Trains proceeding on the Goods lines to St. James' Bridge must repeat the
whistle at the signals there..
Should a train from any of these directions be brought to a stand at the
Pelaw Junction signals, the same whistles must be given. This will sometimes
enable the Pelaw Junction signalman to obtain permission and run
trains via the passenger lines when the goods lines are blocked east of Felling.

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 197
Working of Goods and Mineral trains between High Street Junction
and Pelaw Junction.--Continued.
•
Down Trains.—Continued.
During the period when the passenger trains are not running, from about
midnight until 4-30 a.m., the signalmen at Park 'Lane and Pelaw Junctions
will permit through Goods and Mineral trains which have no shunting to do
on their way, to run on the up and down passenger lines betWeen these
boxes in each direction, care being taken that the lines are kept clear for
Class A and other important trains.
Guards will in every ease be held responsible for correctly informing their
drivers prior to their approaching High Street in the Up or Pelaw junction
in the Down direction the destination of the train and whether or not it is
required to call at Park Lane or Boro' Gardens.
WORKING OF TRAFFIC TO AND FROM INTERNATIONAL SIDING ON
THE UP GOODS LINE BETWEEN FELLING AND PELAW.
Accommodation is provided at the sidings in question, to enable an engine
to get round its load, and wagons must not, therefore, be pushed by the engine
either from Park Lane to Felling or from Felling to Pelaw.
No vehicles must be left on the up goods line while shunting is going on
in th6 sidings, but the whole of the train must be shunted clear of the main
line as soon as possible, and the levers in the dwarf frame restored to their
normal position, after which the gong signal, intimating that the line is clear,
must be given to the Felling Station Box, in order that the following goods
or mineral trains may not be delayed.
The key of the dwarf frame is kept at the Felling Station Box when the
siding is not being made use of.
No train working this siding should exceed 22 wagons, otherwise it cannot
be got in clear.
WORKING TRAFFIC OVER WEARMOUTH DOCK INCLINE.
The load to be hauled up Wearmouth Dock Incline must not exceed
45 tons, and in no circumstances must there be more than three wagons,
and the load down the Bank must not exceed 50 tons. As the process of
shunting requires upward and downward movements, the load for shunting
with the rope at the Dock Bottom must not exceed 45 tons.
In the event of it being necessary to deal with heavier loads, special permission
must be obtained as the rope will have to be inspected before such
loads are dealt with. ( O . 7444).
SUNDERLAND.—MAXIMUM NUMBER OF VEHICLES ON EXCURSIONS.
The platform at Sunderland will not accommodate more than 9 fifty-two
feet bogie vehicles, and excursion trains having to stop at Sunderland must
not exceed this length. ( O . 5446).
SUNDERLAND.—INSTRUCTIONS TO GUARDS WORKING
PASSENGER TRAINS.
Guards working passenger trains to Sunderland must not leave them until
they have ascertained where the trains are to be placed, and, if required, they
must work them to the sidings at Villette Road, or elsewhere as instructed.

198 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
SUNDERLAND.—WORKING OF CALLING-ON SIGNALS IN THE
TUNNEL AT SUNDERLAND NORTH.
When these Calling-on Signals, which are under the Up Main and Duplicate
Home Signals, are in the " Off" position, a purple light is shewn.• When
they are in the " Danger " position, a red light is shewn.
(O. 18/262/21).
SUNUERLAN.11—FASENGER TRAINS ASSFITE0 FROM SOUTH BOX
TO FAWCETT STTILET Lasvmou hOX BY AN ENGINE
IN THE REAR.
Loaded passenger trains assisted by an engine in the rear must not be
allowed to start out of Sunderland Station until it has been ascertained that
the line is clear as far as -
signal 1'vlillfield has been lowered. This information the signalman at Fawcett Street
SJunction t a tBox i omust n supply by telephone when informed by the signalman
at Sunderland South Box that a train to be So assisted is ready to start, and
a n d
the signalman at Fawcett Street junction box must not lower his signals for
a t train hso assisted e until after the Burnfield Box signals have been lowered.
F a w c e
t
A slip
t
coupling is kept at Sunderland to be used 'in connection with the
above arrangement.
S t r e
e t
RVHOPE. PAOSENGER TRAINS DOWN SEATON BANK.
"
D All Down i Passenger s trains must come to a stand at Ryhope Station
tPlatform. a n
t
• DIAMOND HALL MitgOTION (FAILLFIELD) AND SOUTHWICK JUNCTION
(USINCRTH), VIA QUEEN ALEXANDRA BRIDGE.
Double-headed trains must not be run over this section of the line.
(G. 31568).
COUPLING OF ENGINES—liESLEDEN AND KELLOE BANKS.
On Hesleden and Kelloe Banks, an engine or an engine and van may be
coupled to, and run in rear of a Freight train, or of two coupled Freight
trains, when ascending the Bank. ( O . 7416.)
WORKING C
HIGH , QUARRIES BETWEEN COXHOE BRIDGE AND TRIMDOlt
Owing F to the heavy gradient, traffic into and out of these quarries must
only be T Rattached A F and detached by trains running from the Ferryhill
direction
F I C
If the load consists of more than 35 wagons, it must be divided on the
main line, I Nand
not more than 35 wagons must be put into the quarry sidings
at one Ttime, O the portion left standing on the main line must always have
the assistant A engine as well as the brake van in the rear.
A sufficient N number of brakes must be pinned down to hold the wagons
when they are pushed into the quarry sidings, and the engine brake must
be kept D for cases of emergency. ( O . 7037).
O
U
T
O

Special Instructians applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 199
DEEPDALE VIADUCT, BETWEEN LARTINGTON AND BOWES, AND
BELAH VIADUCT, BETWEEN BARRAS AND KIRKBY STEPHEN.
When passenger or freight trains are run from Barnard Castle to the West
with two engines, the engine assisting must be attached in the rear from
Barnard Castle to the Summit.
In the case of double mineral trains worked in this manner, each such
train must be divided at the Summit, and run from there to Kirkby Stephen
or Tebay as single trains. In no case must the engine, which has been
assisting from Barnard Castle in the rear, be allowed to go forward from
the Summit to Kirkby Stephen in the same position.
When passenger or freight trains are run from Kirkbv Stephen to the East
with two engines, the engine assisting must be attached in the rear from
Kirkby Stephen to the Summit, and from the latter to Barnard Castle the
respective trains will be run with one engine, the, assisting engine returning
from Summit to Kirkby Stephen or otherwise following the -
when the section is clear to Barnard Castle.
Lain l i g h t ,
Two trains running in opposite directions must not be allowed to cross
either of the Viaducts at the same time.
When a train is approaching Deepdale Viaduct from Barnard Castle at
the same time as a train from Bowes, the latter must be brought to a stand
at the stop signal at the west end of the Viaduct, and must not be started
again until the train in the opposite direction has passed.
When a train is approaching Belah Viaduct from Kirkby Stephen at the
same time as a train from the Summit, the former must be brought to a
stand at the stop signal at the west end of the Viaduct, and must not be
started again until the train in the opposite direction ha's passed.
In the event of the 25-ton Steam Crane from Darlington being required
at a breakdown west of the Deepdale or Belah Viaduct, it may be allowed
to pass over these Viaducts subject to the following restrictions :—
(1) It should not pass over the Viaducts at a higher speed than
5 miles per hour.
(2) A wagon or van must be interposed between the Crane and the
engine, and under no circumstances must the Crane travel
over either Viaduct in its own power or with the jib off the
match wagon.
In the event of the Crane travelling over either Viaduct the matter must
be immediately reported by the Loco. Department to the Chief Engineer,
York, and the District Engineer, Bishop Auckland. ( O . 5900). -

200 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
WORKING OF THE LINE BETWEEN BOWES AND BELAH DURING
SEVERE SNOWSTORMS.
In the event of a severe snowstorm occurring and a block taking place on
the line, the traffic may be worked on a single line between Belah and Bowes,
viz. : on the DOWN line between Belah and Summit, and on the UP line
between Summit and Bowes, it being necessary to work the single line in
this way owing to there being several sets of safety points between Belah
and Bowes. •
During the suspension of ordinary working, all the intermediate boxes
will remain open as block boxes, and the pilot sections will be between
Belah and Summit, Summit and Bowes.
The signalmen at Belah and Summit must keep the Station Masters at
Kirkby Stephen and Bowes acquainted with the condition of the line, and
the Station Masters will provide pilotmen from the station staff, working
in accordance with General Rules.
WORKING OF GSRLING'S SIDING ON UP LINE BETWEEN
ROWLEY AND BURNHILL STATIONS.
Traffic to or from the siding must be attached in front of the train.
On arrival at the siding, and after the train clears the catch points leading
to the runaway siding, it must be set back with its rear brake van against the
buffer stops in the latter siding before work is commenced. (0_13-T. 518).
HARPERLEY COLLIERY SIDING, BETWEEN CROOK AND TOW LAW,
The siding connection with the main line between Crook and Tow Law
is locked by the tablet for the section. Owing to the heavy gradient on
which this connection is situated, traffic to and from the siding must only
be worked by trains with the engine at the lower end. In consequence all
traffic from the Crook direction for this siding must be worked through to
Tow Law and brought back over from there.
• Guards working this siding must be careful, before detaching the engine,
to pin down sufficient brakes to keep the train at rest until the engine is
again attached.
BETWEEN TOW LAW & CROOK.
- Should a freight train run at too high a speed, or should the Driver lose
WORKING control on the gradient O from F Tow Law to West Durham Juncion, he must
Fgive Rone Econtinuous I G whistle H T on approaching West Durham Jundtion, and
the Signalman there must advise the Signalman at Crook West by giving
T"vehicles R running A I away N on S right . line" signal.
The signalmen at the Crook Boxes must give preference to Main Line
trains over all other trains, and keep a good look-out for them when due,
and if the Junction and the line upon which the train is required to run
are clear, take off the signals as soon as the train appears.
The Drivers and Guards of ascending freight trains which have wagons
to detach or attach at Tow Law must, before commencing to shunt, place
their trains within the catch points at the station. ( 0 . 7068).

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 2 0 1
WORKING OF TRAFFIC INTO AND OUT OF SIDINGS AT
SCOTCH ISLE, BETWEEN HARPERLEY AND WOLSINGHAK
Owing to the heavy gradient, traffic must only be worked to and from
this Siding by trains travelling in the Up direction, i.e., with the engine at
the lower end. ( 0 . 1 3 . T . 671).
WORKING OF TRAFFIC INTO AND OUT OF THE SIDINGS AT
CAMBOKEELS, BETWEEN EASTGATE AND WESTGATE,
WEAR VALLEY BRANCH.
Owing to the gradient Of the line, trains working traffic into and out of
these sidings must always have the engine at the lower (or Eastgate) end.
In consequence wagons should not be detached into these sidings from trains
passing in the down direction. The sidings must only be worked by trains
terminating there or those passing in the up direction. (0.13.T. 647).
BOWDEN CLOSE COLLIERY SIDINGS, WILLINGTON.
Engines must not pass through any of these Sidings to Bank Foot for
any purpose until the Guard has obtained authority from the signalman
at Bowden Close Colliery Junction Box, who must first get permission from
the Pointsman at Bank Foot Box. The Pointsman must only give this
permission provided the safety points are set against an engine approaching
from the colliery and there is no engine shunting at the Bank Foot which
can foul the engine coming from Bowden Close signal box.
When the Bank Foot Box is closed, the signalman at Bowden Close Colliery
Junction may authorise the running of the engine to Bank Foot.
(O. 7569).
SHILDON TUNNEL.
Gradient 1 in 242 falling towards Bishop Auckland.
No engine or train of any description must be allowed to enter the tunnel
at either end when it is occupied by a Passenger train, Engineer's Ballast
or Work train stopping and working in the Tunnel, or a train conveying
a snow plough.
No Engine or Train (passenger train excepted) must be permitted to enter
the Tunnel at either end after a Passenger Train has been signalled as
leaving Bishop Auckland or Simpasture Junction respectively.
NORTH END OF TUNNEL.
I.—After a Down Passenger train has been accepted by the Signalman
at Tunnel North Box the Is line clear signal for an Up train must not be
offered to Tunnel South, nor must the Is line clear signal for an Up Passenger
train be offered to Tunnel South box if a Down Freight train has been
accepted, until the Down train in either case has passed Tunnel North box
with tail lamp attached.
2.—The signalman at Tunnel North must not accept an Is line clear signal
from Tunnel South for a passenger train until the signal has been forwarded
to and accepted by the Signalman at Black Boy Junction.
•

202 Special Cnstructicas appflcable at Particular Places.--Continued.
Shildon Tunnel.—Continued.
3.--Three Mineral trains (when none consist of more than 40 wagons) may
be allowed to pass through the tunnel coupled together, except between
the hours of 6-30 p.m. and 8-0 p.m., when not more than two must be
allowed to run through the tunnel coupled. The first engine that arrives at
the tunnel signals to be first to enter the tunnel, unless one line is required
to be clear before the other. Should a train be approaching at a good speed
when the signalman has just received intimation from Tunnel South that
the line is clear, he must allow that train to pass on before other trains that
may be standing on the other line, or in a siding. Any instructions the
signalman may receive from the Shildon Foreman with respect to passing
any mineral train through the tunnel before another must be attended -to.
SOUTH END OF TUNNEL.
• 4.—After an Up Passenger train has been accepted by the Signalman at
Tunnel South box the Is line clear signal for a Down train must not be
offered to Tunnel North, nor must the Is line clear signal for a Down
Passenger train be offered to Tunnel North box if an Up Freight train has
been accepted, until the Up train in either case has passed Tunnel South
box with tail lamp attached.
5.—The Signalman at Tunnel South must not accept an Is line clear signal
from Tunnel North for a passenger train until the signal has been forwarded
to, and accepted by, the Signalman at Shildon.Junction.
6.--Two engines with empty mineral trains may be allowed to enter the
Tunnel if coupled together.
GENERAL.
7.—The signalman at either end of the tunnel, if unable to satisfy himself
that the whole of the train has passed out of the tunnel, must keep it
blocked until he has ascertained that the line is clear, either by sending a
man through the tunnel to examine the lines, or by running a light engine
in both directions.
8.—All open and covered Fish Trucks, all Goods, Mineral and Ballast
Guards' Vans fitted with side duckets, and certain types of wagons and
tanks lettered "MUST NOT BE SENT THROUGH SHILDON TUNNEL
ON FREIGHT TRAINS," must not be attached to goods, mineral, or
ballast trains passing through the tunnel. ( T . 23274).
Goods and mineral guards must remove their right hand or " 6 ft." side
van lamp before entering the tunnel, and replace it after they have passed
through.
Coaching stock generally, including motor carriage trucks and special
cattle boxes, also Foreign Companies' horse boxes, carriage trucks, and special
cattle boxes, must not be attached to Goods, Mineral, or Ballast trains
passing through the Tunnel. N.E. horse boxes and ordinary carriage trucks
may, however, be allowed to work through the Tunnel on Goods trains.
(O. 5422. B. 39).

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Piaces.---Continued 203
Shildon Tunnel—Continued.
9.--In case there should be any defect in the block instruments, the
trains must be signalled by telephone until the defect is rectified. Should
the telephone be also out of order the traffic must be worked by a pilotman
in accordance with General Rules 227 to .239, an engine being provided
which he must make use of when necessary.
10.—For the purpose of repairing the lines through the tunnel the Up
line will be closed between 3-30 a.m. and 7-30 a.m. on week-days, except on
Mondays, when it will be closed from 3-0 a.m. to 6-0 a.m. Should, however,
the platelayers have completed their inspection before 6-0 a.m. on Mondays,
or before 7-30 a.m. on other days, the ordinary working must be resumed
after the instructions for resuming ordinary working have been complied
with. The platelayers must not enter the tunnel until their Foreman has
ascertained from the Signalmen at the respective ends of the tunnel that
the Up line has been blocked ; and the Up line must be blocked in accordance
with regulation 15 of the Block Telegraph Regulations before the foreman
is so informed. The signalman at the North end must not inform the
foreman platelayer that the line has been blocked until he has seen that the
indicator is pegged to train on line. The line must be kept blocked until
the foreman in charge of the platelayers has reported to the respective signalmen
that the whole of the men under his care have come out of the tunnel
and the line is clear, and on this being done ordinary working may be resumed.
When the Tunnel South box is opened before ordinary working is resumed
the signalman there must, before switching into circuit, peg the Up line
block indicator to the train on lino position, and he must then carry out the
instructions as given when resuming ordinary working. The foreman platelayer
must report to the signalman at Tunnel South box when that box is
open, and to Shildon Junction box when the former is closed. During the
time the platelayers are in the tunnel repairing the lines they must use
proper means to protect themselves, as trains will occasionally be passing
on the Down line.
During the time that the Up line through the tunnel is blocked, i.e., from
3-30 a.m. to 7-30 a.m. on weekdays, except Mondays, and from 3-0 a.m.
to 6-0 a.m. on Mondays, a platelayers' trolley may be allowed to run a short
distance on the Up Facing line towards Fieldon Bridge in order to tip refuse,
but before this is done the signal " Blocking Back Outside Home Signal"
(3 pause 3) niust be given to and acknowledged by the signalman at Fieldon
Bridge box, in accordance with Recording Telegraph Regulation No. 7.
The indicator must remain in the " Train on Line " position until the
signalman at Tunnel North is informed by the Foreman platelayer that the
line is again clear. The Down Main line at Tunnel North must not be
obstructed by the trolley until the signalman's authority has been obtained
for this to be done. ( O . 5422).
UNCOUPLING
TUNNEL
Authority is
in mbtion on
Junction.
OF COUPLED FREIGHT TRAINS BETWEEN SHILDON
SOIM1 AND SHILDON JUNCTION SIGNAL BOXES
ON UP INDEPENDENT.
General Rule 149A (d).
hereby given for coupled Freight trains to be uncoupled while
the Up Independent between Tunnel South and Shildon
(O. 6651).

204 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
STAITH ES VIADUCT,
No train must be permitted to travel along the viaduct when the windgauge
affixed to the viaduct registers a force of 28 lbs. to the square foot
or more.
The wind-gauge is so connected electrically with a bell in the Staithes
signal box that should the wind pressure amount to 28 lbs. per square foot
the bell will ring continuously so long as that or any higher pressure exists.
In the event of a gale, the ganger or one of the platelayers must proceed
to the station sons to be ready in case the bell rings, to make an inspection
of the Viaduct on the bell ceasing ringing before a train is allowed to pass
on to the Viaduct. Should the Viaduct bell commence ringing, and there
is no permanent way man at the station, the Station Master will be held
responsible for sending for the nearest platelayer to make an examination
of the Viaduct.
Immediately the bell commences to ring, the following instructions must
be observed :—
(I) When the bell from the Viaduct rings in the Staithes box, the signalman
there must at once send the Obstruction danger signal to Grinkle, and
this must not be cancelled until the Viaduct is safe for trains to cross, except
as under :—
In the event of a mineral train arriving at Grinkle for Boulby Mines
during the time that the Obstruction danger signal is in force, the Station
Master there should communicate with the Station Master at Staithes. The
latter, after satisfying himself that the protection of the obstruction has
been carried out in accordance with Rule 217, may authorise the signalman
to withdraw the Obstruction danger signal. This will enable the signalman
at Grinkle to obtain the occupation key by giving the prescribed bell signal
and so allow the mineral train to have acce§s to Boulby Mines. The train
must, after working at Boulby, return direct to Grinkle, and upon replacing
the occupation key in the instrument at Grinkle and giving the prescribed
bell signal, Staithes must again give the Obstruction danger signal, and keep
the line blocked until the Viaduct is 'safe for trains to cross.
(2) If permission has not been given for a train to leave Hinderwell, the
signalman at Staithes must send the Blocking back inside home signal to
Hinderwell, and the latter station may then offer the Is fine clear signal for
any train which, if it is advisable it should run to Staithes, must be accepted
under the Section clear to Home Signal only signal, and the driver informed
of the circumstances.
(3) Should a train have been accepted by the Staithes signalman from
either direction, when the bell' commences to ring, the Obstruction danger
signal must at once be sent, all fixed signals placed at danger, and prompt
measures taken to stop the train. If such train has entered the section from
Grinkle, it must be detained at the outer home signal until the viaduct is
safe, or arrangements are made for working it back to Grinkle. If a train
has entered the section from Hinderwell it may be brought to the platform
after having come to a stand at the home signal, and the driver informed
of the circumstances. If it is desirable that a second train should reach
Staithes from the Hinderwell direction, it must be dealt with in accordance
with paragraph 2.

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 205,
Staithes Viaduct. —Continued.
Should the train be stopped at Hinderwell, the signalman there must give
the Cancelling signal, on receipt of which the signalman at Staithes will give
the Obstruction removed signal, and, after acknowledgment, the Blocking
back inside home signal, and the following trains must be dealt with in
accordance with paragraph 2. ( O . 721.)
WORKING OF EOULBY AND GRINKLE PARK MINES SIDINGS
BETWEEN GRINKLE AND STAITHES STATION.
These sidings can only be worked by trains from the direction of Grinkle
Station, and only one train' must be allowed to work the Mines at the same
time.
Drivers working to these sidings will be supplied with an Occupation
Key instead of a Tablet, also the key of the Ground Frame Box. The
Occupation Key locks and unlocks the King Lever of the Ground Frame,
which, when pulled over, releases the locking in the Frame. The Signalman
at Grinkle will instruct the Guard as to whether Tablet working is to
be restored between Grinkle and Staithes as soon as the train reaches the
Sidings.
Whether tablet working is to be restored between Grinkle or Staithes or not :—
On arrival at the Ground Frame, the Fireman will obtain the keys from
the Driver, and by means of the Occupation Key release the lock fixed on
the Kina Lever of the Ground Frame, pull it over and set the points to
allow the train to enter the sidings, leaving the Occupation Key in the•
Ground Frame Lock, the Driver wil then draw the whole of the train toReception
Line. In no case must the van or any portion of the train
be left on the Main Line, but must be drawn to the Reception Line at the
Mines to be worked, and the van left between the safety points and the points
leading to the empty sidings. After the empty wagons have been disposed
of, the van must be drawn by the engine and brought to a stand at a point
where it will gravitate to the sidings adjoining the laden sidings, and after
the engine is detached and has entered the laden siding, the van brake must
be released and the van run to the required position. A post painted white
has been provided at each Mines to enable drivers to see when the trains
are clear within the safety points.
Should it be necessary to transfer wagons from one Mines to the other,
the Engine must in all cases be at the Staithes end when on the Main Line.
If it be known that the telephonic communication has failed before the
train leaves Grinkle, the train must be detained until there is a sufficient
margin to make the journey to the Mines and hack without restoring Tablet
communication.
A wall lamp shewing a white light has been fixed on the end of the Platelayers'
Cabin, situated at the west end of Twizzie Gill Curve (195 yards
north of the Ground Frame operating the points leading to the Mines), so
as to assist drivers working to the Mines to bring their trains to a stand at
the Ground Frame during darkness.

206 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
Working of Boa'lby and Grinkle Park Mines Sidings between Grinkle
and Staithes Station.—Continued
If tablet working is to be restored between Grinkle and Staithes :—
The Guard must restore the points to the normal position, lock the frame; •
withdraw the key, and work the occupation instrument as follows
1.—Put Occupation Key into the instrument, which will be shewing
figure " 3," and turn till No. 1 appears.
2.—Telephone the Signalman at Grinkle and inform him that the whole
of the train is locked in the siding clear of the Main Line, and
that the key has been inserted in the Occupation Instrument at
the Ground Frame and turned to position " 1."
The Grinkle Signalman will then be able to restore the ordinary Tablet
working between Staithes and Grinkle.
- When the train is ready to leave the Mines Sidings, the Guard must act
as follows :—
1.—Telephone Grinkle Signalman that the train is ready to leave. If
not ready to depart direct, say how long the movements are
likely to occupy. The Signalman will then give the necessary'
instructions for the return journey. (The occupation key cannot
be withdrawn from the Occupation Instrument if a Tablet is out
of either instrument).
2.—When permission to obtain the key is given by the Signalman at
Grinkle, the Guard must turn the key until No. 2 appears, and •
wait until the word " FREE " appears above, he must then
turn the key until No. 3 appears, when he can withdraw the
Occupation Key.
3.—The points may then be unlocked and the train brought out on to
the Main Line, and after restoring the points and locking the
frame and box, the Occupation Key and the key of the Ground
Frame box must be handed to the driver, who will proceed to
Grinkle, and deliver the keys to the Signalman there.
If the Occupation Instruments either at Grinkle or the Ground Frame
fail, the Guard •must obtain instructions on the telephone from the Station
Master or Signalman at Grinkle as to what course is to be adopted.
If a failure of the telephonic communication between the Ground Frame
and Grinkle occurs and the Guard is unable to carry out these instructions,
he must, unless he can communicate with Grinkle by telephone from the
boulby Mines Office, at once dispose of the train and proceed with engine
to Grinkle, taking with him the Occupation Key, and advise the Signalman
verbally that the points are locked in the normal position. He must then
hand the key to the Signalman at Grinkle in order that the tablet working
may be carried on.
If, however, the key is locked in the Occupation Instrument, he must
proceed on foot and advise the Signalman of this, and at the same time
inform him that the points are locked in the normal position. (O. 6532).
FREIGHT TRAINS CALLING AT LONGACRES MINES
BETWEEN SALTBURN AND NORTH SKELTON.
Whenever it is necessary for the trains to call at this place for the purpose.
of detaching, the whole of the train must be drawn into the siding clear of
the Main line. Traffic to be detached should be marshalled in the rear.
(O. 2489).,

4
I
:
T
h
.
e
p
l
a
o
s
o
s
p
e
l
n
i
g
n
e
e
r
m
t
u
r
s
a
t
i
-
n
t
o
i
h
t
s
e
b
e
y
e
n
f
*
t
u
u
e
l
s
r
l
e
i
y
d
n
u
f
g
n
-
o
t
d
M
r
h
e
i
t
e
r
n
r
U
s
e
a
p
t
s
i
I
a
g
n
r
s
d
o
c
e
w
u
o
p
h
n
n
e
a
d
v
n
t
f
e
d
i
r
y
e
s
a
i
n
b
m
n
t
e
g
f
i
f
p
r
n
o
a
o
g
r
u
Special Instructions applicable at Partici;lar Places.—Continued. :207
SALTBURN,—LOOP LINE, JUNCTION SIGNAL BOX.
The loop line must not be used as a siding, and no vehicles must be left
,standing on it.
No train or engine must be allowed to stand on the loop line whilst a
HUTTON GATE—WORKING AT BELMONT MINES SIDING.
(0.135. 533).
The North Eastern Railway Company's engine must not be attached to
a train of laden traffic standing in the siding without the Guard informing the
Belmont Mines Traffic Chargeman that he is going to do so, and ascertaining
from the latter that it is in order. The Driver must not attach his locomotive
to the trucks unless he is ready to take the train out forthwith.
The engine having been attached after such permission has been given,
the Belmont Mines Traffic Chargeman must not gravitate a set of laden traffic
into the laden sidings without informing the Guard that he is going to do so.
The Guard having been informed that a portion of the set is to be gravitated
into the laden sidings, must inform the Fireman and Driver, and see that
any work they may be doing on the engine.
There is a chock placed clear of the fouling point of the outgoin„: • of the
laden sidings. Drivers, if they have any work to do on their engine before
leaving with an outward load, must do so beforo this chock is moved and
their engine is attached to the laden traffic. ( O . 50/11/12).
WORKING OF ROSEBERRY MINES SIDING, BETWEEN
NUNTHORPE jUNCTiON AND GREAT AYTON.
An Intermediate Tablet Instrument has been provided at the Roseberry
The Roseberry Mines Sidings, and so clear the running line for the passing
of other trains. The signalman at the box from which the train starts will
instruct the guard as to whether the train has to lock in as soon as it
reaches the siding. Guards to be on the look out when passing the signalbox.
On arrival at Roseberry Mines the fireman will obtain the tablet with
key attached from the driver, and insert the tablet in the lock of the lever
'frame. He must then set the points to allow the train to enter the sidings.
If tablet working has to be restored, after the whole of the train has been
placed in the siding, the guard must make the train secure and afterwards
proceed to the frame and, restore the points to their normal position, withdraw
the tablet and work the intermediate tablet instrument as follows :—
(1) Put tablet into slide of instrument and pull the handle from No. 1
to No. 2 position.
(2) Telephone the signalmen at Nunthorpe Junction and Great Ayton
and inform them that the whole of the train is locked in the
siding clear of the running line, and that the tablet has been
inserted in the instrument and handle pulled to No. 2 position.

208 Special instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
Working of Roseberry Mines Siding, between Nunthorpe Junction
and Great Ayton.—Continued.
(3) When the word FREE appears on the instrument the guard must
pull the handle from position 2 to 3 and then push in the plunger
in front of the instrument.
(4) When the word FREE again appears on the instrument the guard
must pull the handle from position 3 to 5 and notify the signalman
at Nunthorpe Junction and Great Ayton Station that he
has done so.
Tablet working will then be restored between Nunthorpe Junction and
Great Ayton Station.
When the train is ready to leave Roseberry Mines the guard must act as
follows :—
(1)
Telephone Nunthorpe Junction and Great Ayton signalmen that the
train is ready to leave the siding, and the direction it is about
to travel, also take what instructions are necessary for the
journey.
(2) On getting signalman's permission to leave siding, insert key
attached to tablet pouch in the latch on the left-hand side of
the instrument, release the lever, and push it from No. 5 to
No. 4 position. Advise the signalman at Nunthorpe Junction
and Great Ayton Station that this has been done.
(
3
)
When the work FREE appears on the instrument the guard must
push the handle from position 4 to 3, and then push in the
plunger in front of the instrument.
(4) When the word FREE again appears on the instrument the guard
must push the handle from position 3 to I, when he can withdraw
the tablet, and after doing so, advise the signalman at
Nunthorpe Junction and Great Ayton Station.
(
5
)
The points may then be unlocked by inserting the tablet in the
frame, when the train may be brought out on to the running
line, and after restoring the points and locking the frame the
tablet must be inserted in the pouch and handed to the driver.
When using the plunger sufficient time must in all cases be given to allow
the movements at the respective instruments to be made.
If the load has to be attached from two sidings the guard must acquaint
the signalman of this before asking to withdraw the tablet, at the same time
informing them how long the operation is likely to occupy ; as when the
tablet is once withdrawn it cannot again be replaced in the occupation
Instrument.
The key attached to the tablet pouch applies both to lock of ground frame
and the latch on the intermediate instrument.
During the time trains are in the siding the tablet pouch must be hung
upon the hook provided in the ground frame for the purpose.
In the event of a failure of the instruments the guard must obtain
instructions on the telephone from the Station Master or signalman as to
what course is to be adopted.

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 209
Working of Roseberry Mines Sidings, between Nunthorpe Junction
and Great Aytaa--Continued.
If, owing to the failure of the telephonic communication, the guard is
unable to carry out these instructions, he must at once dispose of the
train in the sidings and proceed cautiously with the engine to Great Ayton
Station, taking with him the tablet, and advise the signalman verbally that
the points are locked in the normal position. He must then hand the tablet
to the signalman in order that tablet working may be carried on.
If, however, the tablet is locked in the Intermediate Tablet Instrument,
he must proceed on foot and advise the signalman of this, and at the same
time inform him that the points are locked in the normal position.
If it be known that telephonic communication has failed before the train
leaves Nunthorpe Junction or Great Ayton Station, as the case may be, the
train must be detained until there is sufficient margin to make the journey
through the section, or to the Mines and back, without restoring tablet
communication. ( O . 4407).
NORTHALLERTON.—SHUNTING OF TRAINS ON TO THE
DOWN LEEDS LINE AT LOW JUNCTION.
When it is necessary to set a train back to the Down Leeds line at thisplace,
the Guard must precede the train and protect the Springwell Lane
Level Crossing.
Passenger trains must not be shunted at Low Junction. ( O . 1630),
WORKING AT HARMBY QUARRY SIDING BETWEEN
LEYBURN AND SPENNITHORNE.
(I) This Quarry is situated about 600 yards east of Leyburn East Box,
and is controlled by two ground frames, which are interlocked with the
electric tablet. The sidings point at the east end are facing to Down trains,
and those at the west end are facing to Up trains.
(2). The Quarry may be worked by trains as under :—
East End Connection.
By trains travelling in the Up direction only.
West End Connection.
By trains travelling in either direction.
The working must be as follows :—
Up Direction (West Ground Frame).
(3) Wagons for the Quarry must be placed next the engine at Leyburn.
On arrival at the siding, the Guard must properly secure his train, obtain
the Tablet from the Driver, and set the points for the siding before uncoupling.
(4) Traffic for the siding must be placed in the right hand line of the
loop, the engine must be uncoupled and run forward clear of the loop
points, and then return to train by left hand loop, pushing out any traffic
that has to be removed from that siding.

210 Special instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
Working at Harrnioy Quarry Siding between Leyburn and Spennithorne.—
Continued.
'(5). After the engine has again been coupled to the train the Guard must
place the points in the normal position, and hand the Tablet to the Driver.
if the Quarry Company's Engine is available, the following alternative method
of working may be adopted
(6) The train engine will draw the wagons for the Quarry clear of the
siding points, and when the latter have been reversed, the Quarry Company's
engine will come on to the main line, take hold of the empties, and
push them into the Quarry Sidings:
(7). When these wagons have been placed in the Quarry Company's
-Sidings by the private Company's engine, the siding points must be
reversed ; the train engine must then set back to its train, and the
•
TUp
Direction (East Ground Frame).
a (8). On arrival at the Dwarf Frame, the Guard must properly secure
bhis
train by putting the van brake hard on, and pinning down one wagon
lbrake
in every three wagons before uncoupling the engine from the train,
and the Fireman must hand the Tablet to the Guard. The engine will
e
then draw forward over the points, and set back into the siding to attach
t
the outward traffic. After this has been done, the engine must draw the
mwagons
on to the main line, and after the points have been placed in their
unormal
position, the engine will either propel the front portion to the rear
sof
the train, or the portion left on the main line must be allowed to
t
gravitate Carefully towards the front part of the train.
b (9). When the two portions of the train are coupled together the Fire-
e man must go to meet the Guard, and obtain the Tablet from him.
;Down h Direction (West Ground Frame).
a (10). Wagons for the Quarry must be placed next the van.
n
(11). On the train coming to a stand with the van at the West side of
dthe
points leading to the siding, the Guard must put his brake hard on, and
eremain
near his van until the Fireman hands him the Tablet. As soon as
d this is received, the siding points must be set for the Quarry, and train
dealt with as under :—
t
Back the van into new laden siding, or right hand loop line, and
,
o
u
tright
hand loop line, as most convenient. Then attach van and draw train
n
hon
to main line, where it must be broUght to a stand, clear of the siding
c
e points. The Guard must then place the points in the normal position
and deliver the Tablet to the Fireman. The Fireman must walk towards
o
D
the Guard to obtain the Tablet.
u
r
p
i ,(12). Occasionally laden wagons from the Quarry for the West can be
-
l
v
r
e
(13). When it will facilitate the working on the Branch, the wagons may
e
;
r be propelled during daylight from the Siding to Leyburn Station.
m
t
t (14). Trains working at the Quarry must be dealt with in accordance
o
h
o with the instructions contained in Electric Train Tablet Regulation 8.
v
e
p
(0.B.T. 428).
e
n
r
d
p
o
i
l
c
n
a
e

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Pcas.—Continueët 2 tr
RAVENSCAR STATION SIDING.
Wagons to and from the siding may be worked in dither direction.
Wagons from the • Scarborough direction must be attached next the
engine. The train must be run to the Down Platform line. The engineand
wagons to run through crossover road No. 12, afterwards propel the.
wagons to Up Platform line, and when these have been brought to a stand
and properly braked, the engine must be uncoupled and move forward to.
the Whitby side of points No. 9, and the wagon or wagons must be pushed
into the Siding. If any wagons are to attach, they must be ,pushed out of
the Siding to the Up Platform line with the engine at the Tunnel side of:
No. 9 points, then picked up by the engine and taken on to the train.
If from any cause wagons cannot be pushed in or out by hand, the train.,
must be left standing properly secured on the, piece of level line at the
.Scarborough side close to No. 6 points, and the wagons should then be
drawn into the Loop and run round.
Wagons from the Whitby direction must be attached next the engine.
The train must be run to the Down Platform line, and after the Guard has
properly secured the train, the engine, or engine and wagons, may leave
for the Siding via the Up Platform line, after No. 9 points have been set.
for the Siding. 4 0 9 ) .
FlAVENSCAR.—WI-IMAKER'S SIDING.
Wagons will be delivered at and removed from the siding by the ordinary
Goods train, and only .during daylight. When on the Up journey, after the
points are reversed by the guard,. the whole train must be backed into the
siding clear of the Main line, and remain there until the work is completed,.
and the train is ready to proceed.
On the Down journey, after the points are reversed by the Guard, the whole
train must be drawn into the siding clear of the Main line, and remain there.
until the work is completed, when it may back out to the Main line.
On each journey after the train has returned to the Main line, the Guard
must place the points lever to its normal position, and hand the tablet to
the engine driver before proceeding on his journey.
Drivers and guards must distinctly understand that under no circumstances.
must the van, wagons, or any portion of the train be left on the Main lino
during the time the engine is engaged in the sidings.
DRIFFIELD.---ENGINES OF DOWN GOODS TRAINS
REQUIRING WATER.
When Down Goods trains, whose engines require to take water at Driffield,
are of such a length that they will block the level crossings at Driffield Station
and Junction when the engine is opposite the water crane, they must be
brought to a stand at the Driffield Junction Down Home Signals. Theengine
will then be uncoupled and run forward to the water column to
take water, after which it will set back again to its train. The engine will
be signalled in accordance with the Special Instructions, dated 5th June,
1909. - ( 0 . 3363. )

212 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
QUARRY SIDING BETWEEN WHARRAM AND BURDALE.
No vehicles must be left standing on the Main line at or near this siding
connection. ( 0 . B . T . 872).
MARKET WEIGHTON.—ENGINES TAKING WATER AT DOWN
PLATFORM WATER COLUMN.
When engines of Down Goods trains require water at Market Weighton,
the trains must be left standing at the West Junction, clear of the level
crossing, whilst the engines run forward to take water.
COUPLING OF TRAINS BETWEEN PICKERING AND GROSPAONT.
In order to facilitate the working over the Summit between Pickering
and Grosmont, an engine and van may be coupled to the front or rear of
a goods train when necessary, provided that the following instructions are
observed :—
1.--When ascending the •bank from Grosmont to Summit with a double
load and the assisting engine and van coupled to the front of the train, both
guards must travel in the rear van so as to be able to pin down wagon brakes
in the case of coupling breaking and the brake power of the rear van being
insufficient to keep the rear portion of the train from running back.
2.—When descending the bank between Summit and Levisham with a double
load the additional engine and van should be coupled in front, to save the
necessity of pinning down wagon brakes at the Summit.
If an engine and van requires to be attached to a train having a single load
in either direction between Pickering and Grosmont, it may be attached to
the front or the rear, as is most convenient.
ENGINES AND VEHI CLES AUTHORISED TO WORK OVER PICKERDIG
AND WHITBY SCARBOROUGH AND WHITBY, AND
WHITEY AND SALTEURN BRANCHES.
(1) NORTH EASTERN AND EAST COAST COACHING STOCK.
All types of North Eastern and East Coast Coaching Stock may be used
for working between Saltburn and Whitby, and Scarborough and Whitby,
via the Coast Line, and between Pickering and Whitby.
(2) FOREIGN COMPANIES' COACHING STOCK.
Six-wheeled vehicles belonging to Foreign Companies must not be
•allowed to work on any of the three branches named above, except as
provided for in paragraph 5. Four-wheeled vehicles with a wheel base
not exceeding 19 feet and bogie vehicles not exceeding 65 feet 6 inches in
length over headstocks may however be accepted provided that the bottom
footboards on any vehicles exceeding 54 feet in length over headstocks are
attached to the bogies and not to the underframe. All vehicles must okar
the North Eastern standard load gauge.
(3) FREIGHT STOCK.
Four-wheeled wagons with a wheel base exceeding 19 feet, six-wheeled
wagons, and bogie wagons more than 56 feet over buffers must not be allowed
to work on any of the three branches in question ; this restriction applies
both to North Eastern and Foreigh Companies' wagon stock.

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 213
Engines and Vehicles Authorised to Work Over Pickering and Whitby,
Scarborough and Whitby, and Whitby and Sa!thorn Branches.—Continued.
(4) ENGINES.
Engines exceeding 13 feet rigid wheel base must not be run between
Pickering and Whitby.
Engines of 16 feet 6 inches rigid wheel base and above must not be run
between Scarborough and Whitby, via Coast Line.
(5) STOCK REQUIRING TO STAND IN SCARBOROUGH GOODS YARD OR
GALLOWS CLOSE CARRIAGE SIDINGS.
All kinds of stock, North Eastern and Foreign, with the exception of short
buffered stock, will be permitted to pass through Gallows Close Tunnel to
stand in the Goods Yard or Carriage Sidings.
There are certain G.N. and Midland trains consisting of short buffered
stock which may work into Scarborough on excursions, and which can be
taken through the tunnel to stand in the Goods Yard or Carriage Sidings
provided that the personal authority of the Scarborough Station Master, or
official in charge of the station at the time is obtained, and on the distinct
understanding that a speed of 5 miles per hour is not exceeded. (O. 3399).
(6) LOFTUS AND WHITBY-CLEARANCE.
As regards the lines between Loftus and Whitby, there must be a clearance
of at least 9 inches above the rail level on the outside of the track.
(B. 56). O . 3390).
POCI-1,',LINGTON.—BLOCKING OF WEST GREEN CROSSING BY
GOODS OR MINERAL TRAINS.
When Freight trains have shunting operations to perform at Pocklington,
guards must uncouple the wagons nearest the West Green Crossing, and leave
it clear for foot and vehicular traffic. ( O . 3002).
CASTLEFORD.—VVORKING OF TRAFFIC FOR MESSRS. CLOKIE'S
SIDING, MOSS STREET.
All traffic, loaded or empty, for this siding, must be placed in position
clear of the gate on the east side of Pottery Street.
Traffic from this siding must be placed by Messrs. Clokie's people at the
same point, ready for removal by our engines.
Under no circumstances must wagons be pushed on to the siding in
question or drawn out over the level crossing.
CASTLEFORD.—WORKING OF TRAFFIC INTO AND OUT OF
GLASS HOUGHTON COLLIERY SIDINGS.
Whenever trains having wagons to attach or detach at the Glass Houghton
Colliery have to leave the train, or part of the train, on either the Up or
Down Main lines at Glass Houghton Colliery N.E. signal-box, the portion
of the train left on the main line.must be securely held by the van brake being
put hard on, and in addition the brakes of the wagons in the proportion of
1 in 10 must also be pinned down. ( O . 4751).

214 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continved.
HICKLETON MAIN COLLIERY, LOADED WAGON SIDINGS.
When more than one train is engaged in the Sidings at the same time,
.,before giving the guard of the second train permission to commence shunting,
the numbertaker (or in his absence the guard) must satisfy himself that the
first engine has gone beyond the signal applicable to the shunting neck. This
instruction, however, will not apply to H. & B. and L. & Y. trains.
In the case of a 14,..& B. or a L. & Y. train being in the Colliery Sidings,
at the same time as one of the other Company's trains, the H. & B. or
L. & Y. guard, as the case may be, will be held responsible for satisfying
himself that the first train has gone beyond the signal applicable tothe
shunting neck, or is clear on to the H. & B. or Dearne Valley Line.
In the event of a •train coming to a stand owing to the inability of the
engine to draw out of the Sidings, the guard must go back and arrange with
the _numbertaker before instructing the driver to set back.
If the signal controlling the exit from the Colliery Sidings is not pulled off
immediately after an engine requiring to leave the Colliery has whistled,.
the numbertaker (or in his absence the guard) must telephone to the signalman
in order to take any instructions the latter may have to give as to
future movements.
A train requiring to leave the Colliery Sidings must have preference over
one engaged in shunting if the signalman has lowered the signal for the
former to come out ; and in the event of more than one Company's train.
being ready to leave at the same time, the numbertaker (or in his absence
the guard) must ascertain on the telephone from the signalman which train
is to proceed on the lowering of the signal. The guard- of the train selected
will then signal to his driver to start, and that latter must satisfy himself
that he has a proper signal from his own guard before making a move.
(0. 7666)„
HICKLETON MAIN COLLIERY EMPTY WAGON • BRANCH.
In order that a train or engine may not run upon the Hickleton Maim
Colliery Empty Wagon Branch, between the Hickleton Main South Box
and the empty wagon sidings beyond the colliery, when there is an.
obstruction on the line the Empty Wagon Branch is worked by Train Staff
without tickets, and no engine or vehicle must be upon the Empty Wagon
Branch unless the Driver, as regards an engine, or an authorised person,
as regards any other vehicle other than an engine, is in possession of the
Train Staff.
The shape of the staff is round, colour black, and it is lettered " Hickleton
Main Colliery Empty Wagon Branch."
The Hickleton Main South Signal Box is the Train Staff Station, and
during the time the Hickleton Main South Signal Box is open the Signalman
on duty is the person authorised to have charge of the staff when it is not
in use.-
All wagons going to the Empty Wagon Sidings must be taken in front
of the engine.
The signalman on duty at Hickleton Main South Signal Box is held
responsible for informing the person on duty at the Empty Wagon Weigh.
Office, by means of the telephone, when a train or engine is ready to proceed
towards the colliery. ( O . 7666).

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 215
FR;SKLEY COLUERY.—INSTRUCTIONS FOR WORKING THE
LOADED AND EMPTY WAGON SIDINGS.
The Frickley Colliery loaded and empty wagon sidings are on a heavy
gradient falling from the Swinton and Knottingley Joint Line, and are
connected with other Colliery lines and sidings, and the Hull and Barnsley
Railway at the lower end.
Great care must be exercised when placing wagons in or removing them
from the sidings to prevent the connections at the lower end being fouled,
and all wagons left standing in the sidings must be properly secured by the
brakes being applied, and as far as possible wagons left standing in the
loaded Wagons Sidings must be coupled together.
Before any wagons are placed in the Empty Wagon sidings from the
Swinton and Knottingley sidings the number-taker must walk along the
-sidings as far as may be necessary to ascertain that all is right for the wagons
to be placed in them, and that wagons are not being placed in the sidings
that are about to be used from the opposite end.
Drivers and Guards must keep a good look-out when entering any of the
Colliery sidings, and Guards must render any assistance necessary to the
number-taker. • ( W . 5104).
SELEY.--LIP GOODS INDEPENDENT LINES.—BARLBY AND SELBY
SOUTH.
Working of Goods and Mineral trains on the Up Main lines and on the Up
Goods Independent lines between Barlby Junction and Selby South.
1.—In the event of a train being accepted by Selby South under the
Section Clear to Home Signal only signal, this signal must be repeated from
North to Barlby, and from Barlby to Barlby Junction, unless the train for
which the signal has been offered has already arrived at Barlby Home signal,
-or has been accepted by the Barlby Signalman under Block Telegraph
Regulation No. 4, in which case the train will have to be dealt with in
accordance with paragraph ,3 of these instructions.
2.—Drivers of trains on the Up Main at Barlby Junction which are
accepted by the Signalman at Selby South under the Section Clear to Home
Signal only signal, will receive a Caution at Barlby junction, which will be
an indication that the line is only clear to Selby South Home signals, no
Caution being given at the intermediate boxes, namely, Barlby and Selby
North, except as shewn in paragraph 3.
3—In the case of trains or engines which have been accepted by Barlby
from Barlby Junction at Line Clear, under Block Telegraph Regulation No. 4,
which are brought to a stand at Barlby Home signals, or trains or engines
on the Independents, and which are accepted by Selby South under the
Section Clear to Home Signal only signal, the drivers, when the Barlby Home
signal is lowered, must run forward at Caution, on the understanding that
the line is only clear to Selby South Home signals.
COUPLING OF ENGINES BETWEEN WISTOW JUNCTION, SELBY
AND HAGG LANE, GASCOIGNE WOOD.
Three light engines coupled together are allowed to run between Wistow
Junction, Selby, and Hagg Lane, Gascoigne Wood.
When three engines are coupled together the leading engine only must
use steam, the other two being hauled by it. ( O . 2463.)

216 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
LEEDS NEW STATION.
WORKING OF EMPTY PASSENGER TRAINS.
On arrival of trains at Leeds New Station, the guards in charge must not
leave until they have first ascertained from the Station Inspector on duty
where the empty carriages have to be shunted, and whether they will be
required to accompany them to Neville Hill or elsewhere.
When empty trains standing at Neville Hill Carriage Sidings are required
at Leeds New Station for immediate use, the guard in charge must inform
the Waterloo signalman on arrival with the engine at what time the train
is due to leave Leeds, and the signalman must use his discretion as to allowing
the empty trains to precede Up passenger trains. ( O . 6220).
LEEDS NEW STATION.
Instructions - to drivers in regard to the method of cautioning trains and
engines EAST into platform A Nlines D and through road when these are already occupied
by other W trains E or S vehicles, T during foggy weather or falling snow.
When S " I Calling-on G N A" signals L are provided, the
stand - -at
the Home signal. The " Calling-on" signal will then be lowered,
and
train
the B driver Ow Xi must
lEl proceed S . b
slowly
e
and cautiously to the end of the platform
at the entrance to the station and come to a stand there. The Fognian
b r o u g h t
appointed will then verbally inform the driver as to the position of the train
or tvehicles o in advance.
a
Where " Calling-on " signals are not provided, the train will be brought
to a stand at the Home signal. The signal will then be lowered and the train
brought to a stand at the signal-box. The driver will then be instructed
to proceed cautiously and stop before entering the platform line. The Fog.
man stationed at platform end will verbally instruct the driver in regard
to the position of the train or vehicles already occupying the platform line.
(O. 3728).
LEEDS NEW STATION.—WORKING AT CANAL AND WEST BOXES.
Drivers of engines requiring to set back from Canal to West Box are
hereby instructed that a hand signal from Canal box is sufficient authority
for the movement (where no fixed signals exist) and indicates the line or
lines are clear up to the West box. ( O . 8298).
LEEDS.—UP GOODS TRAINS REQUIRING TO ENTER THE
UP RECEPTION LINE AT CASTLETON BRIDGE.
When an Up Goods train has wagons to detach at Armley Bridge, the
guard must advise the engine driver of the circumstances, and on approaching
Castleton Bridge signal box, the engine must give one long whistle.
Should the Reception Line be occupied when a train is required to be turned
into it, the Reception Line Home signal will be kept at danger until the
approaching train has been brought nearly to a stand ; a green flag by day
and a green light by night will then be shown to the driver, and after this
has been acknowledged by a short sharp whistle from the engine, the
Reception Line Home signal may be lowered.

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 217
LEEDS.—WORKING OF TRAFFIC BETWEEN NEVILLE HILL
SIDINGS AND HUNSLET GOODS YARD.
More than one engine or train may be allowed on the branch at one time,
the following instructions being observed :—
1
Yard, ; shewing the point at which the drivers must stop, and during
darkness
-
a red light will be shewn at this point.
-2.—The
first train or light engine entering the branch in the morning
must do so on the understanding that the line is only clear to the " Stop
A
board opposite the shunters' box, and the driver must not go beyond this
board " until he receives instructions from the guard who must first receive
the Sauthority
of the shunter. In the case of a light engine, the driver will
receive t instructions from the shunter direct.
3.—When o a second train or engine requires to enter the branch, the
signalman p at Neville Hill box will verbally inform the driver that a train
or
"
engine is already in the Hunslet Yard, and that he must go cautiously
forward, as the line is only clear to the " Stop" board referred to.
b
4.--In
o
foggy weather the Goods Yard Shunter must place one detonator
opposite the depots, on the Down line, to warn drivers of Down trains
when
a
they are approaching the point at which the train must be brought
to ra
stand.
6.--A d red light is fixed at the dead end of the Down line to indicate to
drivers i where the chock is.
Automatic s levers have been fixed at the undermentioned points
f (a) From the incoming road to the Wagon Shops Storage Siding.
i (b) From the incoming road to the Wagon Shops Siding.
x (c) From the incoming road to the Manure Dock.
e (d) From the incoming road to the Coal Lines.
(e) Two levers in connection with the line leading into and out of
d
the Exchange Sidings. ( 0 . 6409).
o
p
COUPLING OF ENGINES BETWEEN WATERLOO JUNCTION
p
AND LEEDS EAST BOXES.
o
Six s engines coupled together are allowed to run between Waterloo Junction
and Leeds East Signal boxes.
i
t When three engines are coupled together the leading engine only must
use e steam, the other two being hauled by it, but when more than this
number
t
are coupled, the first two engines must use steam in order to
haul the remainder. ( O . 7416.)
h
e
LEEDS.----WAGONS FOR MARSH LANE CONVEYED BY TRAINS
s
STARTING FROM LEEDS (WELLINGTON STREET) OR
h HUNSLET SIDING, AND RUNNING IN THE
u
DIRECTION OF NEVILLE HILL.
n
When a train, running as above, has on wagons ticketed to Marsh Lane
Station,
t
the guard must instruct the driver to stop at Marsh Lane to detach
them e there, instead of taking them through to Neville Hill Sidings.
r
Wagons
s
should, however, be sent by booked trains as far as practicable.
'
b
o
x
i

218 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places. Continued.
LEEDS.—WORKING OF G.N., G.C., AND L. & N.W. GOODS AND
COAL TRAINS BETWEEN " B " BOX, G.N., AND
GELDARD JUNCTION, N.E.
All G.N. and G.C. Goods and Coal trains must be drawn from Geldard
Junction to " B " Box, and for this purpose an additional engine is provided
by the G.N. Co., so that trains will have one engine at each end.
(The rear engine must not assist until the whole of the train has passed
clear over the crossings at Geldard Junction Signal box).
L. & N.W. goods trains working between " B " Box and Geldard Junction,
must have the engines in front in both directions.
During foggy weather and snowstorms, and when fixed signals cannot
be seen at either end of the section, no goods or mineral trains except an
engine and brake must be allowed to enter the section in either direction.
between Geldard junction and " B " Box without an engine at each end.
(O. 6549).
TRANSFER OF VEHICLES BETWEEN LEEDS CENTRAL STATION
AND GELDARD JUNCTION OR ARMLEY SIDINGS, N.E.
Not more than four vehicles fitted with the Vacuum or Westinghouse
brake , complete, whichever is in use on the engine, may be transferred..
between Leeds Central Station and Geldard Junction or Armley Sidings,
N.E., without a brake van in the rear, provided the brake pipes are
coupled up throughout and connected with the engine.
When the vehicles are not fitted with the same continuous brake complete
as that in use on the engine, and also when there are more than four
vehicles, a brake van must be attached at the rear.
A shunter must, in all cases, accompany the vehicles, and a red flag or
, a lamp by day and a lamp shewing a red light by night must be exhibited.
, on the rear vehicle. ( O . 6919).
GARFORTH COLLIERY EAST SIDINGS.
In order to facilitate the working at this place, the Colliery Company
have erected a stage which guards can mount so as to have a view over the
sidings, and thus be in a position to signal clearly to the drivers when necessary
during shunting operations.
Wheel chocks are fixed in order to prevent wagons running foul of thelevel
crossing, and guards must be careful to signal drivers in ample time
when to stop. ( O . 4826),

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.--Continued. 2 1 9
KiPAX.---WORKING OF TRAFFIC INTO AND OUT OF THE MING.
When trains from the direction of Castleford have traffic to attach or
detach in this Siding the portion of the train left on the Main line must be
securely held by the van brake being put hard on, and in addition the
brakes of two vagons on the portion of the train left on the Main line must
also be pinned down.
All wagons to be attached to the train must be set back with the engine
-coupled to them and must come up to the standing train as gently as possible.
(0.13.T. 478).
,
K
BOWERS ALLERION COLLIERY JUNCTION.
I Owing to the gradient of the line, trains working, traffic into and out of
the sidings must always have the engine at the lower (or Ledston) end, or
P
the whole of the train must be placed in the sidings clear of the Main line
Pbefore
any shunting operations are commenced. •
A Under no circumstances must the van, wagons, or any portion of the train
Xbe
left on the Main line during the time the engine is engaged in the sidings.
.
KNARESE;OROUGH.—ENGINES RUNNING ROUND TRAINS.
—
WIf
it is necessary after the arrival of a train at the Up platform for the
driver, after he has been instructed by the Station Master or person in charge,
O
o pass the Platform Starting signal at danger, so that the whole of the train
Rmay
be brought up to the platform to enable the passengers to alight, the
engine K roust not be run forward to the Goods Junction until instructions
to I do so have been given to the Driver by the Station Master or the person
:in charge, but these instructions must not be given until the Starting signal
has N been lowered.
G If the whole of the train can be brought to the platform without the
engine O having to pass the Starting signal, the Driver should either take the
train F forward to the Goods Junction or uncouple the engine and round round
by the Goods junction as instructed by the Station Master or other person
T
in charge, but he must not go forward until the Starting signal has been
lowered.. R
( O . 1528).
A
F
KNARESBOROUGH BRANCH SIDING.
F
When train sets or vehicles are shunted into the above siding to stand
overnight, I or for a lengthy period, they must be placed up to the buffer
stops C or against other vehicles already standing at the buffer stops.
I In order that the occupation crossing may not be obstructed, a train set
must N be divided if necessary, leaving a clear passage over the crossing.
(O. 7329)
T
RIPON O AND NIASHAN BRANCH. SPECtAL AND EXCURSION TRAINS.
AWhen
trains are advertised as having bookings to Or from Ripon, the
'trains N must be reduced or strengthened at the latter station, as the case
may D be, so that they do not travel either to or from Masham with more
'than ten six-wheeled vehicles, or their equivalent if the train is composed
of Obogie
stock or the stock is mixed. ( O . 7643.)
U
T
O
F

220 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
HARROG TE.—STATION LIMITS.
Referring to the entry on page 164, the following special instructions
must be observed :—
Propelling of Trains or ehicies.
No propelling of trains or vehicles from the Harrogate South box or from
the lines and sidings South of Harrogate North box in the direction of
Harrogate North box is allowed, unless—
(1) The continuous brake is coupled up and in use throughout the
whole of the vehicles, and the leading vehicle is fitted with the
brake ; or
(2) The leading vehicle is a van fitted with hand brake, and a shunter
is riding in that vehicle.
(3) Or only one vehicle is propelled, fitted with hand or side brake,
and a shunter rides in or on the vehicle or walks with it.
These instructions also apply to the through road when vehicles are being
propelled from South to North over that road when such a movement
necessitates the trap points worked from North Box being closed.
Vehicles in motion without van in rear.
No train sets or vehicles must be drawn from the lines on the falling
gradient in the neighbourhood of Harrogate North box in the direction of
Harrogate South box without a van in the rear unless :—
(1) The continuous brake is coupled up and in use throughout the
whole of the vehicles and the last vehicle is fitted with the
brake.
• (2) Only one vehicle is being drawn fitted with hand or side brake, and
a shunter rides in or on the vehicle or walks with it. (O. 6549).
HARROGATE NORTH.—TRAINS, ENGINES, ETC., LEAVING THE
LONG SIDING.
Drivers of Trains, Light Engines, etc., leaving the Long Siding for the
Up Platform line must run cautiously on all occasions, and be prepared to
stop short of any obstruction on the Platform Line. ( O . 6640).
HARROGATE GOODS STATION.
Trains are worked between Dragon Junction Signal Box and Harrogate
Goods Yard under the following instructions :—
The signals to and from the Goods Yard are worked by a Goods Porter.
Should an engine or train be on the Goods Line, or working in the Goods
Yard, and another train be required to enter at Dragon Junction, the signalman
at Dragon Junction must not lower the Junction " Home" signal until
the driver has reduced the speed of the train, so as to be able to stop at the
signal, after which it must be taken off, providing the line be clear to the
starting signal, or there is room for it to draw within the safety points clear
of the Junction.

Special Instructions applicable at Particu;ar Places.—Continued 2 2 1
Harrogate Goods Station.—Continued.
When a train is standing at the " Stop " signal, the Dragon Junction
signalman must not lower the " Starting" signal for another train to proceed
in the direction of the Goods Yard until it has been brought nearly to
a stand ; and when the signal has been lowered, the driver must proceed
cautiously as far as the line is clear.
During foggy weather and snowstorms, the Groundman at Dragon Junction
Signal box mnst render assistance to the signalman with trains entering
and leaving the Goods Yard.
ARTHINGTON.—TRAP SIDING, SOUTH JUNCTION.
Guards in charge of short trains from Ilkley to Arthington must accompany
their trains when being shunted from the up to the down branch
platform to attend to the trap points on the up main line on their being
shunted from the up to the down platform.
Trains must not be allowed to pass the home signals as far as the advance
signal until the tunnel section is clear.
ARTHINGTON.—HORSE BOXES TO DETACH OR TRANSFER.
Horse boxes and other vehicles by up trains for Arthington, or requiring
transfer at that station, to be attached next to the engine.
NIDD VALLEY LIGHT RAILWAY.—NORTH EASTERN STOCK
WORKING OVER.
North Eastern and East Coast four and six-wheeled vehicles and bogie
vehicles not exceeding 52 feet in length over headstocks can work over the
Nidd Valley Light Railway as far as Lofthouse, but they must not in any
circumstances be accepted for places beyond Lofthouse. The stock may,
if required, be worked over the crossover roads into the spare platform lines
at Wath, Ramsgill, and the Nidd Valley Light Railway Company's Pateley
Bridge Station, and it may also be placed in the Warehouse line at Lofthouse.
When, however, North Eastern or East Coast stock is run through
any of the crossover roads a speed of 5 miles per hour must not be exceeded.
The Warehouse lines at Wath and Ramsgill are not suitable for carriage
stock and North Eastern or East Coast carriages must not be placed therein.
No train exceeding more than six North Eastern six-wheeled vehicles,
34 feet over headstocks, or an equivalent length in bogie stock, can work
over the Light Railway, as there is not room at Lofthouse to run round a
greater number of vehicles.
North Eastern engines are not allowed to travel on the Light Railway.
PATELEY BRIDGE—TRANSFER OF LOADED PASSENGER VEHICLES
FROM THE NIDD VALLEY LIGHT RAILWAY TO THE
NORTH EASTERN RAILWAY AND VICE VERSA.
When loaded passenger carriages are being transferred from the Nidd
Valley Light Railway to the North Eastern Railway or vice versa, the
operation must be personally conducted by the Station Master at Pateley
Bridge
speed.
(ME.), and the carriages must not travel at more than a walking
(0.13.T. 383).

222 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Placcs.—Continued
,
BRAMHOPE TUNNEL.
South of Arthington Station.
Gradient I in 94 falling towards Arthington.
Regulations for working the line between Moseley Signal Box and
the Iftrharfe Viaduct, Arthington.
•
I.—When from any cause one line of the tunnel is blocked, the statiOn
'masters at Arthington and Ilorsforth must arrange for single line working
in accordance with General Rules 227 to 239. •
2.--The Permanent Way Department, before commencing any work
which will obstruct the running of trains •
the between Wharfe Viaduct, M o smust e lmake e y arrangements with the signalmen con-
scerned, i to g have n athe l line blocked until the line is again in working order.
3.—In the event of a failure of the block instruments between the Moseley
b o x
and Arthington South Junction signal boxes, all trains must be signalled
ain, and clear n of the d tunnel, by telephone. Should this also fail, arrangements
must be made by the Arthington Station Master to work all trains
through.the tunnel by a pilotman, who must travel with each train between
the two boxes.
4.—A lamp shewing a white light has been fixed on the Down side wall
of the tunnel 400 yards from the Arthington end, as an indication to drivers
of Down trains that they are approaching the end of the tunnel.
BRAME-ROPE TUNNEL—LIGHTING OF ORDINARY, EXCURSION, AND
SPECIAL TRAINS PASSING THROUGH DURING DAYLIGHT.
The gas in all trains must be lighted and placed on the bye-pass when
passing through Bramhope Tunnel during daylight, and the lights must
be extinguished at the first suitable station beyond the tunnel. In the case
of stopping trains (except certain trains running from Leeds to Ilkley),
which pass through the tunnel in daylight, the lights Must be extinguished
in the Down direction at Arthington, and in the Up direction at Horsforth.
The lights of certain trains running from Leeds to Ilkley are not extinguished
at Arthington as the terminal time at Ilkley is insufficient to allow
of the gas being relighted. ( B . 1766).
BRAMHOPE TUNNEL—TAIL AND SIDE LAMPS OF TRAINS
PASSING THROUGH DURING DAYLIGHT.
Passenger Trains.
The Tail lamps of all passenger trains passing through Bramhope Tunnel
must be lighted at the most suitable point before reaching the tunnel, and
extinguished as soon as convenient after having passed through the tunnel.
The Side lamps of passenger trains must be lighted and extinguished as
follows
Up trains to be lighted, before reaching Arthington South signal box, and
extinguished after passing Moseley signal box.
Down trains to be lighted before reaching Moseley signal box and
.extinguished after passing Arthington South Junction signal box.
Goods Trains.
Up trains.--The tail and side lamps of Goods trains must be lighted before
reaching Arthington South Junction signal box and, extinguished after
passing Moseley signal box.
• Down Trains.—The tail and .
side •before passing l a m the p s Moseley signal box, and extinguished after passing the
o•Arthington f South Junction signal box. ( O . 4200qa
G o o d s
t r a i n s
m u s t

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 223'
SHEREURN-IN-ELMET.--OCUPATION CROSSING BETWEEN
STATION Al) dUNGTION SIGNAL BOXES.
When trains of 49 wagons and upwards are shunted into the Down
Running Independent, the occupation crossing situate midway between the
Station and Junction boxes is liable to be blocked.
Guards of trains which will not stand clear of the crossing, and which arelikely
to be in the siding for upwatds of ten minutes must uncouple the wagons
nearest the crossing and so leave it clear for foot and vehicular traffic.
(O. 7700..
MICKLEFIELD.—WORKING OF TRAFFIC AT PECKFIELD
COLLIERY SIDINGS.
When an Up train has work to do in the sidings, no portion of the train
must be, left on the Main line, but the whole of it must be taken inside clear
of the Main line, before shunting operations are commenced. (0.B.T. 506).,
TADCASTER.--INGLEBY'S MILL SIDING.
In working traffic to or from Mr. Ingleby's Mill Siding at Tadcaster, the
following instructions must be strictly observed in connection with thehighway
crossing :—
The engine must in all cases bring the vehicles to a stand short of the
high road, and a porter will then, after he has satisfied himself that all is.
clear, open the gates at each side of the road for the engine to cross, and
during the time the engine and wagons are passing he must exhibit a red.
flag to warn approaching foot passengers or drivers of vehicles,.• cattle, etc..
No engine to proceed at a greater speed than three miles per hour over
the highway.
The porter in each case must close both gates immediately the train has
passed'.
GOOLE.----WORKING OF TnAuls RETWEE.E1 DUTCH RIVER, POTTER'S'
GRANGE JUNCTION AND L. St. Y. ENGINE SHED BOXES.
1.—When Freight trains from the direction of Doncaster have traffic for
the Exchange Sidings at the L. & Y. Junction, the other portion of the train
may be left on the Down Reception line at Pottei's Grange Junction, but
in 'such a case the Guard must secure the train by applying the hand
brake in the Guards' van, and also a sufficient number of wagon brakes.
at the front end of the train.
The Guard must instruct the Driver of a train requiring to detach traffic
at the L. & Y. Junction, to whistle for the Down Reception line on
approaching the Dutch River signal-box.
2. In the event of Freight trains being required to attach wagons at the
L. & Y. Junction, the Joint Inspector must advise the Dutch River and
Potter's Grange Junction Signalman by telephone, so that the train may
be turned into the Down Reception line.
3.—In accordance with the authority on page 156, wagons May be
worked between Goole N.E. and Goole L. & Y. without a van in the rear
in either direction.

224 Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued.
Goole.—Working of Trains between Dutch River, Potter's Grange Junction
and L. & Y. Engine Shed Boxes.—Continued.
4.—Permission is also given on page 161 for engines to propel trains
between Potters Grange Junction and L. & Y. Junction. ( O . 5494).
5.—Whenever a N.E. or G.C. train has wagons to detach in the Exchange
Sidings at Goole Junction, and it is necessary to leave the rear portion of
the train standing on the main line between Dutch River and Goole Engine
Shed boxes during the time the engine with the front portion runs forward
to Goole Engine Shed box to detach the front portion at that point, the
following arrangements must be carried out :--
6.—The train must be brought to a stand in advance of the crossover road
at Dutch River, the wagons which require to be placed in the Exchange
Siding at Goole Junction must be uncoupled and taken forward to that point.
After they have been placed in the sidings the engine must return along the
down main line from Goole Engine Shed to Dutch River box and afterwards
set back to the rear portion of the train and draw it from the Up to the Down
Main line. Before the rear portion of the train is drawn from the Up line
at Dutch River the guard of the train must place a tail lamp on the last
wagon, and he will be held responsible for advising the signalman at Dutch
River that the whole of the train has been drawn clear of the Up line.
7.—Whenever a L. & Y. Goods or Mineral train has wagons to detach in
the Exchange Sidings at Dutch River box and it is necessary to leave the
rear portion of the train standing on the line between that box and Goole
Engine Shed box during the time the engine with the front portion is detaching
in the N.E. Sidings, the following arrangements must be carried out :—
8.--The train must be brought to a stand on the West side of the crossover
road at Dutch River, and wagons which require to be placed on the N.E.
Sidings must be uncoupled and taken forward to that point. When they
have been placed in the sidings the engine must return on the Up Main line
from Dutch River box to Goole Engine Shed box and afterwards set back
to the rear portion of the train, and draw it through the crossover road at
Engine Shed box on the Up Main line. Before the rear portion of the train
is drawn from the Down line to the Up line at Engine Shed box, the guard
of the train must place a tail lamp on the last wagon, and he will be held
responsible for advising the signalman at Engine Shed box that the whole
of the train has been drawn clear of the Down line.
9.—Light engines or engines with stores van attached may be allowed to
travel in the wrong direction on either the Up or Down lines between Goole
Engine Shed and Dutch River signal boxes in accordance with the
instructions issued to the signalmen. ( O . 3916).
GOOLE.
-
AND POTTER'S GRANGE JUNCTION.
,TRAIN Engines of Up trains, after detaching their loads in the Exchange Sidings
at WL. O86 Y. RJunction,
may, when necessary, be allowed to push their vans back
on K the I Nproper
line from Dutch River Low Level Box to Potter's Grange
Junction, before proceeding to Doncaster, but whenever this is done, the
G
speed must not exceed 15 miles per hour.
B E
T W
E E
N
D

Special Instructions applicable at Particular Places.—Continued. 2 2 5
GOOLE.--TRAINS STANDING ON UP RECEPTION LINES.
Drivers of Goods trains brought to a stand on the Up Reception Lines
must take care that the train is clear of the points at Boothferry Road
Junction.
Two notice boards have been erected to indicate the position an engine
should reach in order to clear with 70 or 90 wagons, respectively, and owing
to the difficulty in starting again, heavy trains must not proceed beyond
these boards. ( O . 5712).
BROONIFLEET LEVEL CROSSING.
Whenever a Down train is conveying live stock traffic for Broomfleet
siding, it will be necessary for the guard to instruct the driver to stop the
train clear of the through roads at the Staddlethorpe side of the level crossing,
and these through roads only will be used in getting the wagon or wagons across
to the points leading from the Up Slow to the Goods Siding. The engine
must then be uncoupled, and the wagon or wagons pushed by hand into the
siding. The engine must return by the same through roads to its train.
Guards of Up trains having work to do at this siding must see that the
public crossing is kept clear.
HULL—ARRANGEMENTS TO BE OBSERVED IN REGARD TO WORKING
OF PASSENGER TRAINS TO RIVERSIDE QUAY STATION, HULL,
WHEN THE MAIN LINES BETWEEN HESSLE ROAD JUNCTION
AND PARAGON STATION ARE BLOCKED OWING
TO ACCIDENTS, ETC.
In the event of the lines between Hessle Road Junction and Hull Paragon
Station becoming blocked, Passenger trains from the direction of Hessle
may be run to the Riverside Quay, and passengers detrained there till the
Main line is again clear.
Billingsgate and Riverside Quay signal boxes will be opened specially
to meet such an emergency,
In the event of the obstruction not being removed within a short period,
it may be found necessary to despatch Passenger trains from the Riverside
Quay, and in such an event this will be authorised.
During the time that trains are being diverted to this route, the instructions
dated 13th January, 1913, in regard to Passenger trains working to
the Riverside Quay must be strictly adhered to. ( O . 6760).
WILMINGTON.--TRAiNS FROM DRYPOOL GOODS YARD ACCEPTED
BY DANSOM LANE UNDER B.T.R.
When a train is accepted by the signalman at Dansom Lane box from
Southcoates Junction box under the "Section Clear to Home Signal only"
signal, the driver will not be verbally cautioned at the latter box, but a green
flag or green light will be exhibited by the signalman as an indication to
the driver that the line is only clear to the Dansom Lane Home signal.
(0. 2390).

226
STATION.
Castleford •
t
t
Burton •
Salmon
Monk
Fryston
York •
Pt
Bening- •
borough
Pt
Tollerton
Sections of Line Worked by Recording instruments.
Gates
BETWEEN
Normanton
Fryston South
Junction •
llam Gates
Station
tMilford Jet., So.
t Dringhouses
South Points
• Leeman Road
• Waterworks
• tWaterworks
• tLeeman Road •
Leeman Road.
0
Loco. Yard •
tNo. 2 Up
Goods
North Junct.
No. 1 Down
Goods
Severus Jet.
Severus Junction
Poppleton Junct.
Station •
Newton Siding •
Station
Station
AND
and Newcastle.
Whitwood Junct •
Fryston North •
Hillarn Gates •
Station
Milford Jet., So.
Milford Junction.
South Points
Loco. Yard
Clifton
Clifton
Clifton
Clifton •
North Junction
North Junction
No. 1 Up Goods
No. 1 Down Goods
Severus Junction.
Poppleton jct.
North Junction
Skelton Bridge
Newton Siding
Tollerton Station.
Newton Siding
Alne Station
•
LINES.
Up Independent
Up and Down Independents
Up & Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
Up Independent .
Up and Down
Reception lines
Up and Down Ex
- cursion lines
Up Station line •
Up Main line •
Down Main •
Down Station line }
Up & Down Goods
Down Independent.
Up Leeds
Up and Down
.f Doncaster. Down, Leeds and
Nos. 3 and 4 Independents
Down Goods
Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
Up Goods • •
Up & Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
Down Independent
Up Slow •
Down Goods
t Facing line working authorised.
REGULATIONS UNDER
WHICH LINES
ARE WORKED.
Standard Recording. •
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording,
Regulations.
Standard Recording'
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording,
Regulations.
(O. 7136).
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations with
modifications dated
13th Sept., 1917.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 3392).
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 3292).
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations. .44
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Absolute block.
(O. 5398).
Standard Recording
Regulations.

STATION.
Thirsk
'Croft Spa
Darlington
iP
Ferryhill
Durham
,
G
a
t
e
s
h
e
a
d
,
1
9
OP
•Newcastle
Manors East.
Annitsf ord
,
S
t
a
Almnouth
n
n
i
n
g
t
o
n
Sections ol? Line worked by Recording Instruments.—Continued.
•
•
•
*Worth
BETWEEN
Green Lane
Middle
Hommiton
North Junction
Avenue Junction
f*Black Banks
South Junction
Park-gate
Springfield
tNo. 1 box
King Edward
Bridge Junction
Gateshead Jot.
King Edward
Bridge Junction
Newcastle
No. 1
Manors Junction.
Dudley Colliery
Stannington
South
South
AND
and Newcastle.—C on tinned.
South Junction .
North Junction .
Avenue Junction
Otterington
Station
Croft Junction
North Junction
North Junction
Park-gate Junct.
No. 2 box
Greensfield Jct.
Newcastle No. 1
Newcastle No. 3
and Berwick.
Manors Junction.
Argyle Street
Dam Dykes
Clifton Crossing
Wooden Gate
Crossing
't Facing line working authorised.
* In case of accident only
LINES.
Up & Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
Down Independent
Up and Down
Independents
Up Independent
Up Independent
227
REGULATIONS IENDER
WEICEE LINES
ARE WORKED.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 4441).
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Up and Down Regulations, with
Platform
f
modifications dated
10th Aug., 1917.
S
Up and Down
Platform t Regulations, with
f
modifications dated
a
10th Aug., 1917.
Up & Down Goods Sn
and Mineral In
Standard Recording
t
dependents
d Regulations.
a
Up and Down nr
Regulations, with
Main & Down
Slow
fd
d modifications dated
23rd Sept., 1913.
Sa
R
Up and Down
South and East
tre
Regulations, with
lines
af
d c
modifications dated
18th July, 1917.
nS
Ro
Up & Down Main dt
er
and Tynemouth
lines
a ac
d Regulations, with
f
modifications dated
rn
oi
10th Oct., 1917.
S d dr
n
Up & Down Main
t
and Tynemouth Ra
dg
Regulations, with
lines
f
modifications dated
ae
ri
10th Aug., 1917.
Up and Down Sn
cd
nStandard
Recording
Independents tdo
Rg
Regulations.
Up and Down a
(O. 7426).
ar
e Standard Recording
Independents nr
dc
Regulations, with
d
modifications dated
io
7th February, 1921.
aR
nr
(O. 7163).
Up and Down r
Independents
eg
d
d
Standard Recording thwith
ci
modifications dated
Ro
n 12th August, 1921.
e{
rg
(O. 7566).
cd
oi
rn
dg
i
n

228 Sections of Line 'Naked by Recording 5nstruments.—Con1inued.
STATION.
Little Mill •
Beal •
Newcastle •
Elswick
pp
Ryton
Prudhoe
Corbridge
Brampton •
Junction
Carlisle
Manors
Percy Main
Ashington •
BETWEEN
Station
Station
Station •
Delaval •
Newcastle
Newcastle
No. 3 box • •
Forth Junction
Peth Lane
§ Prudhoe •
Widehaugh East
Brampton Fell •
London Road Jet.
Bog Junction
Bog Junction
Forks Junction
Rome Street
Dentonholrae S.
Dentonholme N.
Rome Street
London Road •
Bog Junction •
Newcastle to
Manors Junction
Heaton to
Percy Main Jct. •
Ashington
Hirst Junction •
AND
and Berwick.--Co ntinued.
Stamford •
Crossing
Goswick Station •
and Carlisle.
Forth Junction •
Elswick Works •
Delaval •
Scotswood Station
Addison Colliery •
West Wylam Jct.
Widehaugh West
Hell Beck •
Bog Junction •
Rome Street •
Forks Junction •
Rome Street •
Dentonholme S. •
Dentonholme N.
Caldew • •
Dalston Road
Upperby Sorting
Sgs. (L. &N.W. )
Upperby Junction
(L. & N.'W•)
Tynemoutil, via
Manors North •
Tynemouth, via
Percy Main North
Junction
Colliery Co.'s L ine.
Loop No. 2 •
LINES.
Up and Down
Independents
Up and Down
Independents
Up & Down Goods
Down Independent
Up and Down
Independents
Up Independent
Up and Down
Independents
Up and Down •
Independents
Up and Down •
Independents
Up & Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
(2 sets)
Up and Down •
Up and Down •
Up and Down •
Up and Down
Up and Down •
Up and Down •
Up and Down •
Up and Down
Backworth.
Up & Down
Walisend.
Up and Down
Main
Up and Down
§ Special blocking back signal authorised.
REGULATIONS UNDER
WHICH LINES
ARE WORKED. •
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 7281).
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions, dated
24th Sept., 1918.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
modifications dated
26th Jan., 1918.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(a 7194).
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 7047).
Regulations dated
April, 1900, and
Supplementary
Regulations dated
January, 1907.
Regulations dated
April, 1900, and
Supplementary
Regulations dated
January, 1907.
Absolute Block
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
modifications dated
7th Nov., 1918.
(O. 7124).
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(0. 4428).

STATION.
Fencehouses
Pelaw.
P3
Felling.
,
Gateshead
Low Fell
9P
Gateshead
2t
•
Dunston-on-
Tyne.
Dunston-on-
Tyne •
Derwent•
haugh
South Dock
Sections of Line worked by Recording instrument.—Continued. 229
BETWEEN
Ferryhill
Wapping Bridge
Junction
Station
Station
Park Lane Junct
Park Lane Junct.
Greensfield Jct.
Station
DI5Eiston
Low Fell Sidings
Gateshead to
King Edward
Bridge Junct.
Norwood Junct.
Norwood Junction
Dtmston-on- Tyne
Station.
Redhough
Whickharn Jct.
Whickham Jct.
Derwenthaugh
Junction
Blaydon Main
Colliery
Blaydon Main
Colliery
South Dock
*Hendon Junction
AND
Newcastle.
Penshaw Station.
Station
Felling Station
St. James' Bridge
High Street
High Street
High Street
Extension.
Low Fell Sidings.
Norwood Junction
Whickham Jun ction.
Norwood Junction
Dunston-on-Tyne
Dunston East
Whickham Junct
Branch.
Derwenthaugh
Junction
Derwenthaugh
Junction
Blaydon Main
, Colliery
Blaydon Junction
Swalwell Junction
to Ryhope.
Londonderry
Junction
* Facing line working authorised.
LINES. 1
Up & Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
Up & Down Goods
Up and Down
Passenger
Up and Down
Independents
Up & Down lines
Up and Down
Up and Down
Up and Down
Up and Down
Up and Down
Up and down
Up and Down
Up and Down
Independents
Up and Down
Up and Down
Up and Down
Up Independent
REGULATIONS UNDER
WHICH LINES
ARE WOREED.
(
S
t
a
Standard Recording
Regulations
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 5334).
Standard Recording
Regulations..
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Regulations, with
modifications dated
9th July, 1917.
Regulations.
f nStandard
(O. Recording 4662).
dStandard
Recording
a Regulations, with
additions, dated
r 19th June, 1917.
d
R
e
Standard Recording
Regulations.
cStandard
Recording
o Regulations.
(O. 3789).
r
d
' iStandard
Recording
Regulations, with
n modifications dated
g 6th Oct.. 1921.
(O. 3024).
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 7580).
Standard Re &;ording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 3789).
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions dated
15th March, 1921.
(O. 4112).

230 Sections of Line vi/Grked by Recording Instruments.—Continued.
STATION. BETWEEN AND LINES.
REGULATIONS UNDER
WEIGH LINES
ARE WORKED.
Tyne Dock to Annfiekl Plain.
Brockley Pontop Crossing Hedworth Lane hins
°Up and Down • Standard Recording
Regulations.
Boldon Hedworth Lane Boldon Station Up and Down • Standard Recording
Regulations.
Station Three Horse Shoes Up and Down • Standard Recording
Regulations.
Pt
Three Horse Shoes Southwick Junct.
Southwick Jet. Washington
Chemical Works
Up and Down
Up and Down
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Washington Washington
Chemical Works
South Junction Up and Down Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Stella Gill Bearaish Junction South Pelaw Jet. Down Regulations, with
additions dated
26th Aug., 1907.
PP
Stillington
Beanaish Junction South Pelaw Jet.
Sim pasture Branch.
Junction Traveller's Rest
Up
Up and Down
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Pt
Thornaby
Pt
Canton
Carlton
Traveller's Rest
Thornaby
Bowesfield Jet.
Bowesfield, West
Junction
South
Norton to
Station
Simpasture Jot. Up and Down
to Wellfield.
Bowesfield West Up & Down Goods
junction
Carlton, South Up & Down Goods
Station Up & Down Goods
Ferryhill.
Stillington Station Up & Down Goods
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Stillington Station Junction Up & Down Goods Standard Recording
Regulations.
Darlington and Bishop Au ckland.
Darlington
(North
Albert Hill
Junction Parkgate Jet. Up Independent Standard Recording
Regulations.
Road)
Shildon Tunne North and Fie don Bridge.
Shildon
Redcar
Grangetown
South Bank
Tunnel North
Saltburn
Grangetown
Station
Grangetown
Station
Eston West
Fieldon Bridge
to Darlington.
Tod Point
Eston West
South Bank
Station
Up and Down
Down Slag line
Up and Down
Mineral
Up and Down
Mineral
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Cargo Fleet Whitehouse
Thornaby
Crossing
Tees Bridge
Cargo Fleet
Junction
Bowesfield Jet.
Down Mineral
Up and Down
Mineral
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
It Bowesfield Jet. Stockton Cut Up and Down
Mineral
Standard Recording
Regulations.
It Old River Junct. Thornaby East Up Goods Standard Recording
Regulations.

Sections of Line worked by Recording Instruments.—Continued. 231
STATION. BETWEEN. AND LINES.
REGULATIONS UNDER
WHICH LINES
ARE WORKED.
Thornaby—
continued.
Saltburn to Darlington.—Co ntinued
Old River Juliet. t
$
Thornaby East Up Mineral
Thornaby East Thornaby Iron Down Mineral
Works
Thornaby Iron
Works
Standard Recording
Regulations
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Old River Junct. Down Mineral Standard Recording
Regulations.
Thornaby East Tees Bridge Up and Down
Mineral
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions dated
10th Sept., 1909-
(0. 3368).
Middlesbro' tEast West Up and Down
Passenger
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions dated 6th
Eamont
Kirkby Stephen to Penrith.
*Junction
Redhills Junction Up and Down
July, 1910.
(O. 676).
L. & N.W. Regula-
Leeds 'Mast
Leeds to Hartlepool.
West
Up & Down Goods
No. 5 Road
Up and Down
tions dated April,
1901.
i
Station
No. 7 Road
Up and Down
-
Through Road
*
Up and Down
No. 6 Road
E
Up and Down Regulations dated
a
s
t
t
West • •
No. 5 Road
Up and Down
No. 7 Road
Up and Down
1st Nov., 1920.
*
S
Through Road
Up and Down
No. 6 Road
t
a
t
Up and Down
F Road
Up and Down
E Road
i
or*West
n
•
Canal •
Up and Down
D Road
Up and Down
C Road
Up and Down
A Road
Regulations dated LA
November, 1920.
• Up and Down
B Road
Harrogate tNorth South
Up and Down
Up and Down
Passenger
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions dated
26th May, 1921.
Stockton tPrimrose Hill Bishopton Lane Up and Down
Passenger
(O. 6384).
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions dated
Hartburn Juno. Bishopton Lane Up and Down
Goods
27th April, 1917.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
* L. & N.W. Company's pattern. t Facing line working authorised.

232 Sections of Line worked by Recording Instruntents.—Continued.
STATION. BETWEEN. AND LINES.
Stockton–con.
29
West
Hartlepool
2, •
Haverton Hill
Leeds to
Bishopton Lane •
Bishopton Lane
Newburn Junct.
tChurch Street
Billingham B
Haver ton Hill
South
Wortley Juno
Geldard Junction
Hartlepool.—Conti
Stockton Bank
North Shore Jot.
Church Street •
Clarence Road •
Junction
eck Branch.
Haverton Hill
Station
tion to Helbeck
Holbeck " B
(G.N. Box)
need.
Down Independent
Up and Down
Freight Line
Up and Down
Goods
Up and Down
Passenger
Up and Down
Freight
(G.N.R.)
Up and Down •
REGULATIONS UNDHE
WEIGH LINES
ARE '‘ATOILKED.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O• 7277).
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions dated
3rd August, 1913.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 7146).
Leeds
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
modifications and
additions dated 3rd
January, 1912.
Leeds to Hull.
Marsh Lane East Neville Hill Up and Nos. 1 and
2 Down Inde-
Standard Recording
Regulations.
1
,
P
Gascoigne •
Wood
Selby • •
Neville Hill •
Waterloo Junct. •
Junction
Waterloo Junct.
Killingbeck
Hagg Lane.
pendents
Up and Down Independents
Up & Down Goods
Up and Down Independents
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 342/41).
Wistew Junction. South Up and Down Independent
line
& No. 2 Down
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Hassle
Hull
Barlby Junction
Haven Junction •
Hessle Junct.
Barlby
Hessle Junction •
St. Andrews Dock
West Junction
Independent
Nos. 1 and 2 Up
Independents
Up Goods
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Up & Down main St.
St.
Dock
Andrews
Andrews West J.
•
Dock 3unct
St. Andrews Dock
Junction
Up & Down Main
Standard Recording
Regulations
Standard Recording
Regulations
Dairycoates East. 1 St. Andrews •
Dock Junet.
Dairycoates •
East •
Dairycoates •
Dairycoates East.
Albert Dock
West
Up & Down Main
Goods
Up and Down •
Passenger
Up & Down Main
Goods
Standard Recording
Regulations
Standard Recording
Regulations
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Albert Dock East
Albert Dock,
West
0. tAlbert Dock
East
West
Albert Dock,
East
Foreshore
Up and Down •
Passenger
Up & Down Main
Goods
Down Main Goods
Standard Recording
Regulations
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions dated
30th Nov., 1916.
(O. 9365).
t Facing line working authorised.

Hull—con.
Malton
STATION.
Hull East
Hull
Beverley
Selby
Moorthorpo
Sections of Lines Worked by Recording Instruments.—Continued. 233
BETWEEN.
Leeds to
tForeshore
Albert Dock
East
Foreshore
Dairycoates E
St. Andrews
Dock Junct.
Dairycoates E.
Hessle Rd. Jct.
DairycoatesW.
Hessle Rd. Jct.
West Parade Jct.
King George
Holderness Drain
North
Hull Riverside
Albert Dock West
Junction •
tsouth
East
Station
Hull and
York and
York and
Burton Salmon
*Station Junction.
41E1C1.112CMCE:Mr.IES12111WW
AND
Hull.—Continued.
Albert Dock East
Neptune Street
Neptune Street
St. Andrews Dock
Junction
Dairycoates West
Dairycoates West
Dairycoates West
St. Andrews Dock
West Junction
Dairycoates East.
Park Street
Dock Branch.
King George
Dock Junct.
Quay Branch.
Billingsgate
Seamer-
Station
Doncaster,
Canal
Scarborough.
Station
West
to Dearne Jun ction (S. & K.).
South
LINES.
Up Independent
Up Main Goods
Down Main Goods
Up South Main
Goods
Up South Main
Goods
Up North and
Down South
and North
Main Goods
Up and Down
Branch Lines
Up and Down
Branch Lines
Up and Down
Branch Lines
A, F and G lines.
Down Independent
A line
Up and Down
Goods
Up and Down
Up Reception
Up Independent
Up Reception
Down Indep'dnt.
Down Reception
Up Independent
Up Independent
Up and Down
Independents
REGULATIONS UNDER
WHICH LINES
ARE WORKED.
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions dated
10th Aug., 1908.
Standard Recording
Regulations
Standard Recording
_ Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
modifications dated
12th April, 1917.
(O. 6724).
Standard Recording
Regulations.
(O. 7530).
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions dated
13th Jan , 1913.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations, with
additions, dated
3rd April, 1917.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
Standard Recording
Regulations.
* Pacing Line Working authorised on the Down Independent from the
Ground Frame to Moorthorpe South. ( O . 3067).
t Facing line working authorised.

234
The North Eastern Railway, so far as Passenger Lines are concerned, is worked
under the Block Telegraph System.
There are, however, certain exceptions, and the following is a list of these
comprising :—
(1.) TERMINAL sworzoms the platform lines of which are beyond the
terminal signal boxes.
(2.) Where the Block Telegraph Regulations are NOT in operation.
(3.) Where the Block Telegraph Regulations ARE in operation, but where,
in order to meet the working requirements, certain modifications a? the usual
rules are allowed. •
(1.) TERMINAL STATIONS. ( 0 3671).
STATION.. BETWEEN. AND LINES.
DATE or
REGULATIONS IN
FORCE.
Barnard Castle East box Terminal end of Down Regulations dated 9th
bay platform
December, 1912.
PI West box do. Up
Battersby Station box Terminal end of
bay platform
Bedlington North box Terminal end of
bay platform
Blyth Station box Terminal end of
bay platforms
Bridlington. South box Terminal end of
excursion platforms
(Nos. 7
and 8)
Church Fenton North box Terminal end of
bay platform
Up Regulations dated 25th
November, 1912.
Up Regulations dated 6th
December, 1911.
Down Regulations dated 6th
December, 1911.
Down Regulations dated 26th
June, 1915.
Up
Regulations dated 22nd
February, 1912.
Durham North box Terminal end of
No. 5 bay
platform
Up Regulations dated 20th
November, 1911.
Durham Elvet Station box Terminal end of
platform
Guisborough Station box Terminal end of
platform
Up Regulations dated 14th
May, 1917.
Down Regtgations dated 13th
November, 1911.
-

Terminal Stations.—Continued.
STATION. BETWEEN AND L I N E S .
Harrogate North box Terminal end of
bay platforms
Hartlepool Station box Terminal end of
platform
Hornsea Station box Terminal end of
platforms
Hull Paragon Station
Yard box
Terminal end of
Station
Platforms
1 to 10
29
Park Street box Terminal end of
Station
inclusive
Platforms
11 to 14
inclusive
Manors North North box Terminal end of
bay platforms
Masham Station box home
signal
Terminal end of
platform
Middlesbro East box Terminal end of
bay platform
Middleton-in-
Teesdale
Station box Terminal end of
platform
Morpeth Station box Terminal end of
bay platforms
Murton Station box Terminal end of
bay platform
Newbiggin Station box Terminal end of
bay platforms
Pateley Bridge
Pontefract
Port Clarence
Station box home
signal
Junction box
Junction box
Terminal end of
platform
Terminal end of
bay platform
Terminal end of
platform
Richmond Station box Terminal end of
platform
DATE OF
REGULATIONS IN
FORCE.
Up Regulations dated 29th
January, 1912.
Down Regulations dated 1st
July, 1911.
(O. 676).
Down Regulations dated 10th
October, 1912.
Regulations dated 12th
April, 1917.
(O. 6724).
Up Regulations dated 10th
December, 1921.
(O. 3033).
Down Regulations dated 15th
November, 1911.
Up Regulations dated 6th
November, 1911.
Down Regulations dated 8th
October, 1913.
(O. 4233).
Up Regulations dated 6th
December, 1911.
Durham
Elvet
Platform
line.
Regulations dated 28th
July, 1917.
(O. 6833).
Up Regulations dated 6th
December, 1911.
Down Regulations dated 15th
November, 1911.
Up
Down
235
Regulations dated 22nd
February, 1912.
Regulations dated 19th
May, 1916-
(0. 6571).
Down Regulations dated 30th
June, 1916.

236 T e r m h m l Stations.—Continued.
STATION.
Saltburn . . Station box . 1
•
BETWEEN AND LINES.
Terminal end of
station
Scarborough . Washbeck box . 'Terminal end of
excursion
station.
Scarborough . Station box . Terminal end of
station
Scarborough . Falsgrave box . Terminal end of
station
(Platform
lines)
Platform
Down
Platforms
3 to 9
inclusive
Platforms
Nos. 1 & 2
DATE OF
REGULATIONS IN
FORCE.
Regulations dated 13th
November, 1911.
Regulations dated 9th
April, 1914.
Regulations dated 23rd
May, 1916.
(O. 6548).
Regulations dated 9th
April, 1914.
Seaham . . Seaham Junction. Terminal end of Platform Regulations dated 28th
box station platform
Stockton . . Primrose Hill box Terminal end of
bay platform
Wearhead . . Station box . Terminal end of
platform
West Hartlepool
Church Street . Terminal end of
bay platform
Up
July, 1917.
(O. 6833).
Regulations dated 13th
November, 1911.
Down Regulations dated 811
October, 1913.
(O. 4233).
Down Regulations dated 1311
November, 1911.
West Hartlepool Clarence Road . Terminal end of Up Regulations dated 30t1
box b a y platform September, 1913.
Whitby . . Station box . Terminal end of
station
Withernsea . ' Station box . Terminal end of
platforms
STATION.
Scarborough
Newcastle
York
(Platform
lines)
Regulations dated Is
November, 1912.
Down Regulations dated 8t1
May, 1916. 16
(2) WHERE THE FLOCK TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS ARE
P,107 EN OPERATION.
BETWEEN
Park Street box
Falsgrave box
No. 1 box
No. 1 box
No. 2 box
Platform box
Platform box
AND
Paragon Station
Yard box
Station box
No. 2 box
No. 3 box
No. 3 box
Locomotive Yard
box
Waterworks box
LINES.
B, C, D and
E.
Up & Down
Up & Down
Up & Down
Up & Down
Up & Down
Up & Down
REFERENCE TO SPECIAL
REGULATIONS IN ADDITION
TO THE GENERAL RULES
APPLICABLE TO STATION
YARD WORKING.
}
R
e
g}
uR
le
ag
tu
il
oa
nt
i
Regulations dated 12th
April, 1917.
(0. 6724).
Regulations dated 9th
April, 1914.
(0. 6548).
November, 1909.
(0. 459).
July, 1911.
(0. 3507).

(3) 'Where the Block Telegraph Regulations ARE in operation, but
where, in order to meet the working requirements, certain
modifications of the usual Rules are allowed.
BETWEEN AND LINES. PURPOSE OF MODIFICATION
or RULES.
Barnard Castle.
East box West box Single To allow of two trains being brought
together at the platform for connecting
purposes.
Regulations dated 23th September, 1917.
Bishop Auckland. (O. 3671).
East box North box Up & Down ')To allow of more than one train being
East box West box Single in the section at the same time and
West box • North box Single to facilitate working.
Regulations dated lfith October, 1919.
(O. 7116).
Billingham.
Station box home Station platform Up To allow of two trains being brought
signal starting signal together at the platform for connecting
purposes.
Regulations dated 13th November, 1911-
(0. 3671).
Bridlington.
South box Quay Crossing box Up & Down To facilitate working.
Regulations dated 26th dune, 1915.
(O. 3671).
'Oastlellord.
Station box home Station box start- Down To allow of two trains being brought
signal ing signal together at the platform for connecting
purposes.
Regulations dated 23rd November, 1908.
Darlington. (O. ,676).
North Jet. box Platfm. East box Up Platform To facilitate working.
Platform East box South Jet, box f and Up Regulations dated lath October, 1917.
Duplicate (O. 3671).
South Jct. box Platform West box Down Platform
& Down
To facilitate working.
Regulations dated lath October, 1917.
Duplicate _ (O. 3671).
Platform West
box
North Jct. box Down Plat
form & Down
To facilitate working.
Regulations dated lath October, 1917.
Durham.
North box South box
Independent.
1
Up & Down
Platform
lines only
• (O. 3671).
To allow of more than one train or
engine being in the section at one
time.
Recording Regulations with modifications
dated 10th August, 1917.
Raglescliffe.
South box North box Up & Down
(O.. 3671).
To allow of two trains being brought
together at a platform for connecting
purposes.
Regulations dated 13th r4 ovember,1 91 1
ferryhill.
No. 1 box No. 2 box Up & Down
Platform
(O. 3671).
To allow of more than one train or
engine being in the section at one
time.
Recording Regulations with modifications
dated 10th August, 1917.
(0: 3671).
237

238 Where Modified Block Telegraph Regulations ARE in operation.—Continued'._
BETWEEN AND LINES. PURPOSE OF MODIFICATION
OF RULES.
Gateshead.
High Street box
King Edward
Bridge Junet.
Goole.
Boothferry Road
Junction
Harrogate.
North box
Dragon Junction
box
Holbeck.
Wortley Junction
Park Lane
Junction box
Newcastle No. 3
Goole Station
South box
North box 0
Leeds " B " box -
(U.N.)
Up & Down
Up & Down
South and
East
Down
Up & Down
Up
Up &IDown
To facilitate working.
Recording Regulations with modifications
dated 9th July, 1917.
To facilitate working.
Recording Regulations with modifications
dated 18th July, 1917.
(O. 3674
To allow of two trains being brought
-
together at a platform for connecting
purposes.
Regulations dated 28th August, 1909..
(O. 3567).
To facilitate working by allowing two
or more trains being brought to.
gether at a platform at one time.
Recording Regulations with additions.
dated 26th May, 1921.. (O. 6384).
In consequence of heavy gradient from
the rear box (Dragon Junction),.
trains must be cleared back from
North box as soon as they pass
there, so as 'to avoid stopping a following
train at Dragon Junction.
Regulations dated 26th May, 1921.,
(O. 6384)..
Block (N.E.) worked for passenger'
trains except that in clear weather
Passenger trains may be accepted
under Regulation 5 in accordance.
with the special instruction applicable
to these sections sanctioned by
-
N.E. and G.N. Companies.
Regulations dated 3rd January, 1912.,
(O. 4079).
West Parade Park Street box - A. F. kG. To facilitate working.
Junction box Recording Regulations with modifications
dated 12th April, 1917.
(O. 6724).
West Parade Park Street box D, C, D and To facilitate working.
Junction box E. Double line Block Regulations with
modifications dated 12th Aprii, 1917.
(O. 6724).
Kirkby Stephen.
West box East box Up & Down To allow of two trains being brought
together for connecting purposes.
Regulations dated 28th September, 1917.
(O. 3671).
Leamside.
Station Up Home Station Down Home Up & Down To allow of two trains being brought
together at the platforms for confleeting
purposes.
Regulations dated 16th July, 1912.
(O. 5382).

Where Modified Block Telegraph Regulations ARE in operation.—Continued. 239
BETWEEN
Leeds New Station.
East box • •
Station box
West box • •
- Station box
home signal
Manors East.
Argyle Street
Slidelesbrough.
East box
Newcastle.
No. 1 box
No. 1 box
tiorthallerton.
South junction •
box direction
signals
'Pickering.
Bridge Street box
Vtedcar.
East box -
Scarborough.
Washbeck box
AND
Station box
West box
Canal box
Station platform
starting signal
Manors Junction •
West box •
Manors Junction •
Gateshead Junct. .
High Junction box
home signals
High Mill box
West box
Falsgrave box
LINES.
Tip & Down
Up & Down
Up & Down
Up & Down
Down Main
and
Down Slow
Up & Down
Single
(Excursion
platform)
Down
j
-
T
o
f
a
c
i
PURPOSE OF MODIFICATION
OF RULES.
Regulations dated 1st November, 1920.
(O. 3728).
To allow of two trains being brought
together at the up platform for connecting
purposes, and to facilitate
the working by allowing an empty
train to run behind a loaded one
standing at the down platform.
(O. 7560).
l
Up & Down i To facilitate working.
Recording Regulations with modifica-
t tions dated 110th August, 1917.
a
(O. 3671).
Up & Down
t
To facilitate the working by allowing
e more than one train being brought
w to a platform at one time.
Recording Regulations with additions
o dated 6th July, 1910.
r
(O. 676).
k
Up & Down To facilitate working.
i Recording Regulations with modifica-
n tions dated leth October, 1917.
Up & Down
g
(O. 459).
To facilitate working.
Main and . Recording Regulations with modifica-
Down Slow tions dated 23rd September, 1913.
(O. 5825).
To allow of two trains being brought
together at the platforms for connecting
purposes.
Regulation dated 28th June, 1912.
(O. 676).
To allow of two trains being brought
together at the down platform for
connecting purposes, and to facilitate
the working by allowing an
empty train to run behind a loaded
one standing at the up platform.
Regulations dated 14th February, 1912.
(O. 3674
To facilitate working by allowing more
than one train beingbrought to the
platform at one time.
(O. 676).
To facilitate working.
Regulation dated Sth April, 1914„

240 Where Modified Block Telegraph Regulations ARE in operation.—Continuedo
BETWEEN
Selby.
North box
Stockton.
Bishopton Lane
box
Sunderland.
North box
Wellfield.
Wellfield Junct.
box home
signal
West Hartlepool.
Church Street box
Whitby West Cliff.
Station box
home signals
York.
Waterworks box
Leeman Road box
Locomotive
lard box
South Points box.
AND
South box
Primrose Hill box. Up & Down
South box
Platform starting D o w n
signal
Clarence Road U p & Down
Junction box
Station platform U p .S6 Down
starting signals
Clifton box
Clifton box
Leeman Road box
Locomotive
Yard box
LINES.
Up & Down
(Platform
lines only)
Up & Down
Platform
lines
Up & Down
Up & Down
No. 14
platform
Down Leeds
and Doncaster
Main
Lines.
}
PURPOSE OF MODIFICATION
OF RULES.
To allow of two trains being brought
together at a platform for connecting
purposes, and to facilitate the
working by allowing an empty train
to run behind a loaded one standing
at the down platform.
Regulations dated 7th November, 1905.
(O. 372).
To allow of more than one train being
at the platform at one time.
Recording Regulations with additions
dated 27th April, 1917. (O. 6150).
To facilitate working.
Regulations dated 22nd May, 1911.
(O. 676).
To allow of two trains being brought
together at the platform for connecting
purposes.
Regulations dated 20th November, 1911;
(O. 3671).
To allow of more than one train being
at the platform at one time
Recording Regulations with additions
dated 3rd August, 1913. (O. 4483).
To facilitate the working by allowing
two trains to be brought together
at a platform.
Regulations dated 23rd February, 1912.
(O. 3671).
To facilitate working.
Recording Regulations with modifications
dated 13th September, 1917.
(O. 3292).
To facilitate working.
Regulations dated 7th July, 1911.
To facilitate working. ( O . 3292).
Regulations dated 7th September, 1911.
(O. 6512).

List of iock Sections where the
Home Signals is less than 400
in accordance with Clauses (a)
Block Telegraph Regulations.
NAMES OF BOXES.
FROM TO
LINES. REMARKS.
Wooler South • Wooler North • Down
Alnmouth North •
South •
Alnmouth South
North
Up
Down
Choppington Station Choppington Coll. Jet. Down
Bedlington North
South
Bedlington South
North •
Up
Down
Tynemouth South • Tynemouth Junction • Up
Junction • South Down
Blyth Crossing Blyth Station • Down
Prudhoe Colliery Prudhoe Station Up
Hexham West Hexham East Up
Blackhill North Blacklaill South • Up
Y2 South • North • Down
Consett North • Consett South • Up
South Shields West South Shields East Down
Sunderland North Sunderland South Up
Crook West •
Tow Law Iron Works •
Pickering, Bridge Street
Holbeck, Wortley Jct. •
Crook East •
Tow Law Junction
Mill Lane Junction
Geldard Junction
Up
Up
Up
Up
ft. Geldard Jct. •
,) Geldard Jct. •
G.N. "B" Box.
Wortley Junction
G.N. " B " Box •
Geldard Junction
Down
Up
Down
Worked uuder special
regulations sanctioned
by N.E. and aN.
Companies.
Selby North Selby South • Up
Wilmington Junction East Down
Beverley Station Beverley, Cherry Tree Down Except when Cherry
Market Weighton East •
Crossing
Market Weighton West Up
Tree Crossing is
cloqed. (O. 7379).
For trains from Driffield
Branch.
)
,
Hull, Albert Dock West. Billingsgate
Up
Down
241
distance between the respective
yards, and which ARE worked
and (c) of Regulation 4 of the
(O. 2976).
For trains from Hull
in foggy It.ather.
(O. 7623).

242
List of Block Sections where the distance between the respective
Home Signals is less than 400 yards, but where clauses (a) and
(c) of Regulation 4 of the Block Telegraph Regulations are
relaxed in this respect, viz., the Signalman at the box in the
rear may accept a train at "Line Clear" if he has a vertical
needle to the box in advance for the line on which the train
will run and that line is clear, so far as it is under his control.
Edlingham
FROM
NAMES OF BOXES.
•
A
l
n
w
i
c
k
N
o
r
t
h
Gateshead Junction High Street Up and
Down
Gateshead Junction Greensfield Junction. Up
Oreensfield Junction Gateshead Junction Down
Auckland Junction Leamside Station Down
TO
LINES. REMARKS.
(O. 6302).
Up Special instructions.
(O. 842/21-5-1912).
Consett South Consett North Down During fog or snowstorms
clauses (a) and (c) of
B.T.R. 4 must be observed.
'Sunderland South Sunderland North Down Applicable to Duplicate
and Main Lines.
(O. 676).
Leyburn West Leyburn East Up
Leyburn East Leyburn West Down
Normanton, Altofts Junction Up
West Riding Colliery
Normanton, West Riding Colliery. Down
Altofts Junction
1 Special instructions.
O. 1054. Nov. 4th, 1913.
Hull, Billingsgate Albert Dock West Up Special instructions.
O. 1019. 13th Jan., 1919.
(O. 7623).

243
List of Block Sections which are worked in accordance with
Clause (c) of Regulation 4 of the Block Telegraph Regulations,
although the distance between the respective Home Signals is
more than 400 yards.
Flt01.1.
Hetton Colliery.
Ryhope Station
Raisby Hill
High Quarry
Kelloe Bank Foot
Raisby Hill
High Quarry
Shildon Tunnel North.
Shildon Tunnel South.
NAMES OF BOXES.
TO.
Hetton Station
Ryhope Colliery
Kelloe Bank Foot
Coxhoe Bridge Stn.
(When Coxhoe
Bridge Station is
closed line must
be clear to West
Cornf orth Home
Signal).
Kelloe Bank Head
LINES.
Up
Down
Down
Up
Black Boy D o w n
Shildon Junction U p
{
A
t
r
a
i
n
REMARKS.
Permission for a train to approach
from the rear must not be given until
permission for the train to proceed,
has been received from the box in
advance, except for empty coaching
stock trains, goods or mineral trains,
light engine or light engines coupled,
and engine and not more than two
brakes, which may be accepted
under Reg. 5, provided the facing
points are set in the direction of
the colliery laden sidings.
Permission for a train to approach
from the rear must not be given until
permission for the train to proceed
has been received from the box in
advance, except for a light engine,
light engines coupled, and engine and
not more than two brakes, which
may be accepted under Reg. 5.
light engines coupled, or engine and
not more than two brakes) must
not be allowed to leave Kelloe Bank
Head until permission for the train
to proceed has been received from,
the box in advance. (O. 7404).
(
Permission for a train (not including
light engine, light engines coupled,
or engine and not more than two
brakes) to approach from Kelloe
Bank Foot must not be given until
permission for the train to proceed
has been received from Kelloe Bank
n
•-• Head.
o
, ( O . 7404).
t passenger train to leave Tunnel
{ South until accepted by the signal-
i man at Black Boy.
P
n
e
c
r
passenger train to leave Tunnel
.f l Perrnission North until must accepted not be by given the signal-. foras a
m
u
man at Shildon Junction.
i
(O. 5422).
d
s
i
s
n
i
g
o
l
n
i
m
g
u
h

244
BLOCK TELEGRAPH REGULATION 5 : SECTION CLEAR
TO HOME SIGNAL ONLY.
•
Referring to the second italicised sentence of this Regulation limiting
the application of the rule to clear weather, all concerned should note that
at boxes where a sighting object has been fixed upon to enable the signalman
to know when to call out fog-signalmen the weather ceases to be
" clear" for the purpose of this Regulation when the sighting object
becomes invisible. ( O . 6537).
Sections where authority is given to deal with Passenger Trains
under Regulation 5 cf the Block Telegraph Regulations.
FR011
Box.
Bellasis Lane
Bishop Auck!and.
East
, East
West •
North
Bridlington.
Quay Crossing
South
Bessingby Junction
or Carnaby
Station
Sastietord.
Gates
Station
West
North
North
West
South •
To
Box.
Quay Crossing
South
Station
LrNEs.
Up
Platform
(Single)
Down
Plat form
Plat form
(Single)
Plat form
(Single)
Up
Down
Down
Down
AUTHORITY IS GIVEN.
For trains which have to connect at
Billingham Station (during fog or
snow storms only).
When Bellasis Lane is closed, applies to
next open box in rear.
To enable trains to be brought to West
Down Home Signal No. 44-when the
line is only clear to the Down , Main
Line.
For trains which are required to enter
the section when the line is only clear
to North Down Home signal No. 6.
For trains which are required to enter
the section when the line is only clear
to North Down Home signal No. 2.
For trains which are required to enter
the section when the line is only clear
to West Home signal No. 50.
(O. 7115).
In clear weather and under ordinary
circumstances. for trains which owing
to the line at South Box being occupied
cannot be accepted from Quay Crossing
at " Line Clear." , (O. 3671).
In clear weather and under ordinary
circumstances for trains which owing
to the line at Quay Crossing being
occupied cannot be accepted from
South Box at" Line Clear." (0..3671).
In blear weather and under ordinary
circumstances for trains which aannot
be accepted from Bessingby Junction
or Carnaby at "Line Clear" owing
to the Down Platform lines being
cot
For
-
trains which have to connect at
Castleford Ti Station.
ed.
(
O
.
3
6
7

Sections which deal with Passenger Trains under Regulation 5.—Continued. 245
FROM T o
Box.
Goinstream.
Coldstream Station.
Coldstream Station.
Darlington.
North Junction
Platform East
South Junction
Platform West
Platform West
Durham Met.
Sherburn House
Station
Eaglesclifie.
Pennypot
Urlay Nook
Yarm
Gateshead.
Park Lane Junct. —
High Street
Goole,
Potters Grange
• Junction
Boothferry Road
Junction
Box.
Twizell Station
Mindrum Station
Platform East
South 'Junction U P
Platform
and Up
Platform West
Duplicate
No. 4
Down
Platform
and Down
Duplicate
North Junction N o . 4
Down
Platform
North Junction Down
Independent
Dunstort
King - Edward
Bridge Junction
on
-
Norwood Junction. Down
Tyne. Durham.
Belly Mill Junction. South
Down
Durham Elvet
Station
North
South
South
High Street
Park Lane Junct.
Boothferry Road
Junction
Station •
LINES.
Down
Down
Up
Platform
and Up
Duplicate
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Up
Down
Down
AUTHORITY IS GIVEN.
For trains to be accepted from Twizell
when a train has been accepted from
Mindrum at "Line Clear."
For trains to be accepted from Mindrum
when a train has been accepted from
Twizell at "Line Clear."
In clear weather. For trains which are
required to enter the section when the
line is only clear to Home signals Nos.
2, 3, 6 and 9.
In foggy weather or falling snow. For
trains which are required to enter the
section when the line is clear to starting
signals 7 or 10.
For trains which are required to enter
the section when the line is only clear
to South Jct. signals Nos. 18 or 19.
For trains which are required to enter
the section when the line is only clear
to Inner Home signals Nos. 5, 6, 10
and 11.
For trains which are required to enter
the section when the line is only clear
to Starting signal No. 12.
For trains which are required to enter
the section when the line is only clear
to signals Nos. 2 and 3.
To enable a train to be brought to the
Outer Home signal when the line is
only clear to the Inner Home signal
except during fog or snowstorm.
(O. 3024).
For trains which have to connect at
Durham Station.
For trains which cannot be accepted
from Sherburn House Station at "Line
Clear" owing to the platform line
being occupied. ( O . 6833).
For trains which have to connect at
Eaglescliffe Station.
For trains which have to connect at
Eaglescliffe Station (during fog or
snow storms only).
For trains which have to connect at
Eaglesclifie Station (during fog or
snow storms only). ( O . 676).
1 When a Freight train is entering or
f leaving the Goods lines.
(O. 3671),
For trains which have to connect at
Goole Station.
For trains booked to stop at Goole
Station which cannot be accepted
at "Line Clear" owing to the line
inside the Down Intermediate Starting
signal being occupied. Applicable in
clear weather only. ( O . 3567).

246 Sections which deal with Passenger Trains under Regulation 5.—Continued.
FROM
Box.
Goole.--Contd.
Oakhill Junction
(or Rawcliffe
Bridge Junction
when Oakhill
Junction closed).
Guisborough.
Hutton Junction
Harrogate.
Brunswick
Crimple Junction
Hart.
Hart Station
Ho[beck.
G.N. " B "
Wortley Junction
Armley Junction
Leamside.
Auckland Junction.
Rainton Crossing
Leeds.
Marsh Lane East
Leyburn.
East
Mallon.
East Junction
Manirs.
Manors Junction
Manors North Station
Station
Station
Station
To
Box.
Boothferry Road
Junction
South
South
Cemetery North
Geldard Junction
Geldard Junction
Wortley Junction
(N.E.)
Leeds East
West
Station
Manors, North
Station
Manors Junction
LINES.
Down
Down
Down
Down
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Down
Up
AUTHORITY IS GIVEN.
To enable a train to be brought to the
Outer Home signal when the line is
only clear to the Inner Home signal'
except during fog or snowstorms.
(O. 4483).
To allow the pilot engine to travel from
Hutton Junction when it cannot be
accepted at "Line Clear " owing to
the line inside the home signal being
occupied.
For trains which cannot be accepted
from Brunswick box at "Line Clear"
owing to the Down platform line
being occupied. ( O . 6384),
For trains which cannot be accepted
from Crimple Junction box at "Line
Clear" owing to the Down platform
line being occupied. When Brunswick
box is closed. ( O . 6384).
To enable a train to be brought to the
Outer Home signal when the line is.
only clear to the Inner Home signal.
When Hart Station box closed applies
to next open box in rear. (O. 2888).
For trains which cannot be accepted by
Wortley Junction. Applicable in clear
weather only under the special instructions
sanctioned by G.N. and N.E.
Companies. ( O . 4079).
For trains which cannot be accepted by
G.N. " B " box. Applicable in clear
weather only. ( O . 4079).
For trains to Midland line if points are
set for direction of Geldard Junction
and the line is clear as far as Geldard
Junction Up Outer Home. Applicable
in clear weather only. (O. 7642).
For trains which have to connect at
Leamside Station.
For trains which have to connect at
Leamside Station. When Rainton
Crossing box is closed, arrangement
applies to Fencehouses Station.
To enable a train to be brought from
Marsh Lane to clear the Station.
For trains from Constable Burton when
another is approaching from Wensley.
For trains which have to connect at
Melton Station.
To enable trains to be brought to No. 1
Platform when line is only clear to
Manors North Station box. See
instructions dated 10th December,
1921. ( O . 3033).
For trains arriving at No. 2 Platform
when points are set for dead end. See
instructions dated JOth December.
1921. ( O . 3033).

Sections which deal with Passenger Trains under Regulation 5.—Continued. 247
MeIdon, N.B.
Middlesbrough.
Old Town Junction.
Guisboro' Junction.
Pickering.
Mill Lane Junction.
Bridge Street.
Selby.
Barlby
FROM.
Box.
Canal
Wistow Junction
Staithes.
Hinderwell
Stockton.
Hartinum Junction.
To
Box.
Morpeth South
Aliddlesbro' West .
Middlesbro' East
Bridge Street
High Mill -
North
South
South
Staithes
Bishopton Lane
North Shore &dna- Primrose Hill
Sunderland.
South
WeHeld.
Wingate South
1 Junction
West Hartlepool.
Stranton Junction
Cemetery West
'Whitby, West Cliff.
Prospect Hill
Junction
North •
WeHeld Junction.
Church Street
Clarence Road -
West Cliff
LINES.
Up
Down
Up
Down
Down
Up
Down
Down
Up
Down
AUTHORITY IS GIVEN.
For trains which owing to the line ahead
of the Inner Home signal 23 being
occupied, cannot be accepted at
"Line Clear." ( O . 6512).
For trains which, owing to the line at
the west end of the platform being
occupied, cannot be accepted from Old
Town Junction at "Line Clear."
For trains which, owing to the line at the
east end of platform being Occupied,
cannot be accepted from Guisborough
Junction at "Line Clear."
For trains which have to connect at
Pickering Station.
For trains stopping at Pickering, which,
owing to shunting operations at High
Mill, cannot be accepted from Bridge
Street at " Line Clear."
}
F
Selby Station. ( O . 372).
o For trains which cannot be accepted at
r
t
"Line Clear" owing to wind gauge
on Staithes Viaduct registering 28 lbs.
to the square foot or more. See
r Special Regulations, pages 204-5.
a
(O. 721).
For trains which, owing to the Down
i Platform line being occupied, cannot
n
s
be accepted from Hartburn Junction
at "Line Clear" (during fog or snow
storms only).
Up w For trains which, owing to the Up
Down
h Platform line being occupied, cannot
be accepted from North Shore June.
i tion at "Line Clear" (during fog or
c snow storms only).
To facilitate working.
h
Down h For trains which have to connect at
Wellfield Station.
a
When Wingate South Junction box is
v closed, the arrangement applies to the
Down
e next box open in the rear. (O. 3174).
t For trains which, Owing to the Down
Platform line being occupied, cannot
o be accepted from Stranton Junction
Up
c at "Line Clear " (during fog or snowstorms
only).
o
For trains which, owing to the Up Plat-
n form line being occupied, cannot be
Up
n accepted from Cemetery West at
"Line Clear" (during fog or snow.
e storms only). ( O . 4453).
c For trains which have to connect at
t
West Cliff Station, and to facilitate
the working so as to enable a train to
a be accepted from Prospect Hill Junc-
t tion when an empty train is standing
at the West Cliff platform.
•

248
Sections where NO trains are to be dealt with under Regulation 5
of the Block Telegraph Regulations, except as laid down in
Regulations 5 (g) 8 and 9, or in case of accident.
FROM
Alnwick North •
Edlingham • •
Hedgeley • •
Edlingham • •
South Gosforth •
West Gosforth •
West Junction (Loop)
Gateshead, Greensfield
Junction
NLMES or BOXES.
To
Edlingham Alnwick North • • 1
Whittingham • •
Whittingham •
West Jesmond •
•
•
South Gosforth Station •
High Street
•
LINES.
Single
Up
Down
Up
Up
Hedgeley • •
Wooperton • •
Whittingham •
Kirknewton • • •
Backworth Station •
North Shields • •
Tynemouth Junction •
Benton Station • •
Wooperton •
Hedgeley •
Hedgeley • •
Akeld • • •
Monkseaton West •
Tynemouth Junction
North Shields
Benton Quarry
•
•
•
Down
Up
Down
Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Benton East • •
West Jesmond • •
Jesmond • • •
Riverside Junction •
Alston •
•
Coanwood •
•
tLockhaugh
•
Consett North •
Lintz Green • •
Carrhouse East • •
Carrhouse West • •
Consett South Junction.
Hownes Gill Junction
Annfield Plain Station
South Medornsley •
Benton Quarry
Jesmond •
Manors North
Maling's Siding
Lambley •
Haltwhistle •
Swalwell •
Lintz Green •
Friarside Colliery
Bradley Crossing • •
Consett North Junction
Lanchester Station
Consett South J unction
Ouston Junction •
Annfield Plain •
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up and
Down
Browney Colliery •
Hett Mill •
Fawcett Street J
unction.
Sunderland South. •
•
•
Croxdale •
Croxdale •
Sunderland South
Vilette Road
p
Down
Down
p
Up
}
EXCEPTIONS.
Except for light engine, light
engines coupled, or engine
and not more than two
brakes.
Except for light engine, light
engines coupled, or engine and
not more than two brakes, or
empty autocar•
Except fo•r light engine, light
engines coupled, or engine and
not more than two brakes.
(O. 3400).
' Unless line is clear to Starting
signal.
Except for light engines or
engines and vans. (O. 3671).
Seaton Bank Head Ryhope Colliery Junction Down
light engines coupled, or light
engine and not more than
two brakes or ballast train
{ working in section.
E Empty coaching stock trains,
goods or mineral trains, light
x engine or light engines coup-
Murton
Hetton Colliery •
Up c
e
p
led may be accepted under
Regulation 5, provided the
facing points are set in the
direction of the colliery laden
t sidings.
Bear Park Colliery
Hebburn West •
• Baxter Wood No. I U p
Hebburn Sta ion • D o w n
f
o
t Rowland Gill Station when Lockhaugh is r closed.
l
i
g
h
t

249
Sections where Fe trains ;rust be dealt with under Regulation 5, etc.—Continued.
NAMES OF BOXES.
FROM. To
Sherbmm House (Or next
box open)
West Cornforth Station
Coxhoe Junction • •
Rowley Station • •
Howden or Beechburn •
Colliery Junction
Durham (Elvet) •
Coxhoe Junction • Down
Ferryhill No. 1 • Up (Bp.
Auckl'nd
line).
Down
H'pool.
Hownes Gill Junction •
line).
Down
Thistleflat or Crook East • Down
•
LINEs. EXOEPTIONS.
Up
Except for Passenger trains.
Except for light engine, light
engines coupled, or engine•
and not more than two
brakes.
In case of a Down Freight train
attaching or detaching on
Main line at Thistleflat or
Crook East having an Assistant
engine in the rear, B.T.R.
5 may operate for a following
freight *milt. (O. 6869).
West Durham Junction
tThistleflat
ti
-tiBurnhill
Junction •
Gibbs Neese. • •
Forthburn T • • •
Coal o Road Crossing •
Broomielaw • •
Bowes w • •
Burnhill L Junction
Cockfield a Station
Middleton-in-Teesdale •
Tebay
w
No. 3 • •
J
Summit
u
•
Sandy n Bank
c
Ravenstonedale • •
t
Appleby Station • •
North i Road Charity Jot.
o
Hesleden Bank Head •
Cemetery
n
North • •
*Ballast • Crossing • •
tlielloe Bank Head •
Hurworth Burn •
Merrington Lane • •
Coundon • • •
Norton South Junction.
Cliffe • • • •
North Skelton Junction.
Great Ayton • •
Priestcroft Junction •
Marske •
Priestcroft Junction •
Crook West Up
Bowden • • • Up
West Durham Junction • Up
Rowley • • • Down
Spring Gardens Junction. Down
Coal Road Crossing Up
Barnard Castle East Up
Winston • • Up
Tees Valley Junction Up
Blackfield • Up
Gibbs Neese • Up
Cotherstone • Up
Tebay No. 2 Down
Mineral
Spital • • • • Up
Kirkby Stephen East • Down
Smardale • • Up
Ravenstonedale • Down
Gaisgill Station Down
Kirkby Thore • Down
Albert Hill Junction • Up
Main
Hart • •, Up
Cemetery West • Up
Hartlepool • Down
Coxhoe Bridge Down
Canton East • • Up
East Howie Crossing Up
Burnhouse Junction Up
Stockton Bank • Up
Crag Hall • Down
Saltburn Junction Up
Nunthorpe Junction • Up
Kiltonthorpe Junction • Down
Cat Flat Crossing • Up
North Skelton Junction Down
Except for light engine, light
engines aoupled, or engine and
not more than two brakes.
(O. 7286).
(O• 7361).
(O. 349/21/1919).
Except for light engine, light
engines coupled, or engine and
not more than two brakes.
Spa Wood •
Hutton Junction
Hutton Gate •
Hutton Gate •
ttNunthorpo •
Orrnesby Station •
Saltburn Junction
Coundon • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hutton Junction •
Guisborough Station •
Hutton Junction •
Chaloners Junction
Ormesby
Pennymans
Tofts Depot
Bishop Auckland East
Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
if Owing to the heavy falling gradient, trains calling at intermediate sidings
must be dealt with under B.T.R. 4• ( O . 7195).
* Cemetery Junction South when Ballast Crossing is closed.
Trimdon Grange Crossing when Kelloe Bank Head is elosed.

250
Sections where NO trains must be dealt with under Regulation 5, etc.—Continued.
Hawsker
FROM
Tofts Depots
Kettleness •
Hinderwell
tHinderwell
tStaithes
tGrinkle
Kgdale
Battersby
Castleton
Kildale
Castleton
Potto •
Battersby
Danby •
Glaisdale • •
Whitby West Cliff
Summit •
••
Wykeham •
Ebberston •
Wykeham
Wykeham •
Burdale
Wharrarn •
Nawton
Jervaulx •
Bainton •
Staintondale •
Ravenscar •
Ravenscar •
Hawsker •
Prospect Hill Junction
Pi'moor (Simbeck
Junction)
North Grimston •
Burdale •
Nawton •
Amotherby •
Micklefield
Horsforth
•
NAMES or BOXES.
Marsh e
To
• •
• Hinderwell •
• Kettleness
• Staithes
• Grinkle
• Staithes
• Loftus
• Battersby
Ingleby •
• Kildale •
• Castleton
• Danby •
Picton •
• Stokesley
• Glaisdale
• Grosmont • •
Prospect Hill Junction
• Levisham • • •
• t Deviation Junction
• Sawdon •
• Thorntondale
• Svvadon •
• Forge Valley
• North Grimston
• Burdale •
• Helmsley
• Bedale •
• Southburn •
• Cloughton •
• Stainton Dale
• Robin Hood's Bay.
• Robin Hood's Bay.
Prospect Hill Junction •
Bog Hall Junction. •
Pilmoor (Bishophouse •
Junction)
Settrington • •
Sledmere & Fimber •
Kirbymoorside • •
Scarbro' Road Junction •
*Church Fenton South •
Castleton Bridge •
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Down
Up
EXCEPTIONS.
The signalman at Tofts Depots
, may accept a goods or mineral
train under Regulation 5,
from Saltburn Junction, on
being requested to do so by
the signalman at the latter
box, when it is necessary for
the Junction to be cleared
for the approach of a passenger
train.
i
.
e
n
g
i
n
e
s
c
o
u
p
l
e
d
f
,
S
o
e
r
e
s
n
p
g
e
i
Except for light engine, light,
and not more than two
brakes.
13th July, 1903, in regard to.
dealing with trains not conveying
passengers.
c
n Except for light engine, light
i
e engines coupled, or engine
and not more than two-
a brakes. ( O • 7361).
l
It Grosmont when Deviation is closed. r
*Church Fenton North when South box is closed.
t See also pages 204, 205 and 247.
e
g
u
l
a
t

Sections where NO trains must be dealt with under Regulation 5, etc.—Continued.
Moseley
Harrogate North
Dragon Junction
WormaId. Green
Thorner
Scholes
Tanfield
Masham
Harrogate South
Garforth Inner Junction
Ripley Junction
Dacre .
Pateley Bridge
Knaresborough Station
Knaresborough (Goods)
Junction
Crimple Junction
Starbeck South
Wetherby East
Speeton
FROM.
Speeton •
Enthorpe
PP
NAMES OF BOXES.
To.
Arthington Long Siding .
Hilton Road Junction .
Starbeck North . .
Littlethorpe .
Cross Gates . . .
Collingham Bridge .
Masham . .
Tanfield .
Spofforth .
Ledston . . .
Ripley Valley .
Darley . . .
Dacre . . . .
(Goods) Junction . .
Copgrove . .
Pannal Junction
Knaresborough Station
Wetherby South
Bridlington Quay
Crossing
Hunmanby
Market Weighton East
Middleton-on-the-Wolds
LINE.
Down
Down
Up
Down
Up
Down
Down
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up from
East
Up
Down
Up
Down
}
EXCEPTIONS.
251
Except for light engines
Harrogate to Starbeck.
Except for light engine, light
engines coupled, or engine and
not more than two brakes.
Except for light engine, light
engines coupled or engine
and not more than two
brakes. ( O . 7361).
Except for light engine, light
engines coupled, engine and
not more than two brakes, or
empty coaching stock train,
or two empty coaching stock
trains coupled from Flamborough
to Bridlington Quay
Crossing.
Except for light engine, light
engines coupled, or engine and
not more than two brakes.
Signal Boxes where Outer Home Signals are provided at a distance
of not less than 400 yards from the Inner Home Signal.
B.T.R. 4 and 10.
At the Signal Boxes shewn below, the following Special Instructions are
in force :—
1.--If the line is clear to the Inner Home signal, and the Block Indicator
is in its normal position, a train may be accepted up to the Outer Home
signal at Line Clear.
2.--As soon as a train has arrived within the Inner Home signal, the
special bell signal Train arrived within Inner Home signal, 4-2, may be given
to the box in the rear if it is necessary to do so for the purpose of accepting
a second train up to the Outer Home signal before Train out of Section
signal can be given for the previous train. The needle of the Block
Indicator must remain pegged in the Train on line position. If necessary
the is line clear signal may then be offered from the rear box, which must
be acknowledged if the line is clear to the Inner Home signal.

25
1
2 3.—The Train out of Section signal must not be given to the rear box
until both trains have passed out of the section.
S 4.--When it is -
ithe
necessary
Blocking Back signal must be given to the rear box in accordance with
gBlock
t o Telegraph Regulation 15, clause (a), and under such circumstances,
a train may be offered from the rear box and accepted up to the Outer
n f o u l
Home signal at Line Clear provided the line is clear to the Inner Home
asignal,
t but h the Train out of Section signal must not be given until both —
l trains e have passed out of the section, or the obstruction has been removed,
and
B l the i Block n Indicator must remain in the Train on Hue position until
this
o e
has been done.
5.-----When the line is fouled outside the Inner Home signal, the Blocking
i n s
xback
outside home signal signal must be made use of, in accordance with
i d e
eclause
(b) of Block Telegraph Regulation 15.
t6.—During
foggy weather or falling snow, the special arrangement as to
s the h use of the Outer Home signal set out in the above paragraphs must cease,
wand
e Rule 4 of the Block Telegraph Regulations must be strictly adhered
hto
I
so long
n
as the Advanced Starting signal is obscured by fog or falling
snow, or if there is no Advanced Starting signal when t is not possible to
e
see n a distance e of 400 yards beyond the Home signal. ( O . 4483).
r r
e H
O o
STATION.
Signal Box whete Outer L i n e to which Outer Home signal
Home is provided, i s applicable.
u m
Ackworth
t e
Backworth e s i
Barlow
g
r
Bedale n
Beningbrough H
a l
Beverley o
Brockley m Whim
Broomhill e
Billingham
S
Bishop Auckland
i tg
Brough
Burton g Salmon
n
Carlton •
Castleford a
l
Church Fenton
s
Brackerthill Junction
Station
Holywell
Station
Brayton East Junction
Station
Station
Junction
Junction
Station
Station
Station
Station
East
East
West •
Junction
Junction
Station •
Whitwood Junction •
Whitwood Junction
South
South
Down from Sheffield.
Up Main.
Up from Seghill.
Up from Monkseaton.
Down from Thorpe Gates.
Down from Northallerton. (O. 4531)•
Up Main.
Down from York.
Up from Driffield.
Up from Pelaw.
Up.
Up from West Hartlepool.
Up from Port Clarence.
Down from Spennynoor
Down from Barnard Castle.
Down Slow
Up Main.
Down from Normanton.
Up from Norton-on-Tees.
Down from Normanton.
Down from Methley, N.E.
Down from Leeds.
Down from Normanton.
gt a
VP
Coldstream r
Copmanthorpe
e
Cottingham p
tg
Crook r
Darlington
Dinsdale o
Driffield v
i
North
North
Station
Station
Station
Junction
North
West Durham Junction
Geneva
Oak Tree Junction
West
West
Junction
Up Leeds.
Up Normanton.
Up from Sunilaws.
Down from Leeds. •
Down from Normanton. (O. 167).
Down from Hessle Road Junction.
Up from Scarborough.
Down from Crook.
Up from Saltburn.
Down from Dinsdale. (O. 1676).
Down from Market Weighton.
Down from Melton.
Down from Hull.
Durham
d
e
i
L
—
North (when Crook Hall is
closed)
Newton Hall Junction
Up Fast and Slow.
Up from Plawsworth.

Durham
Eaglescliffe
STATION.
Etherley
Ferriby
GEtscoigne Wood
Grangetown
Goole
Harrogate
Hedon
Hessle
Hull
Kirkby Stephen
Knaresborough
Leamside
Levisham
Melton
Market Weighton
Marske
Melmerby
MicKlefield
Middlesbrough
Newburn
North Wylam
Nunthorpe
Pannal
Pelaw
Picton
Pocklington
Port Clarence
Pickering
Redcar
Rillington
Ripon
Seamer
Seamer
Seghill
Selby
Sherburn-in-Elmet
Southcoates
Staddlethorpe
Starbeck
Stillingt on
Stockton
Thornaby
Thirsk
Tweedmouth
Ushaw Moor
WeMeld
Withernsea
Yarm
York
Sign; BOXES wV;ere Cuter kieSignals are prGvided.—Continued. 253
Signal Box where Outer
Home is provided.
Newton Hall Junction
Relly Mill Junction (when
Baxter Wood No. 1 is
closed). •
South
South
Station
Station
Hagg Lane.
Junction
Station
Marshland Junction
Boothferry Road Junction
Crimple Junction
Station
Hessle Junction
Hessle Junction
Hessle Road Junction
Hessle Road Junction
West
(Goods) Junction
Auckland Junction
Station
East
East
Station
Station
Station
Junction
Guisborough Junction
Station
Station
Junction
Junction
Junction
Junction
Junction
Station
Junction
New Bridge Quarry
East
Junction
Junction
Station
Junction
Station
South
Barlby Junction
Thorpe Gates
Junction
Junction
Junction
Junction
Bilton Junction
Junction
Hartburn Junction
East
South Junction
North
New Brancepeth Colliery
Station Junction
Station
Station
Bootham Junction
Chaloner Whin Junction
Chaloner Whin Junction
Chaloner Whin Junction
Line to which Outer Home signal
is applicable.
Up from Leamside.
Up from Lanchester.
Down from Darlington.
Down from Yarm.
Down from Bishop Auckland.
Down Slow.
Up -
Down from Sherburn Junction.
Down 'from Middlesbrough.
Down from Reedness.
Down from Selby.
Down 'from Spofforth.
Down from Hull.
Down from Selby.
Up from Hull
Down from Selby. •
Up from Cottingham Junction..
Up from Penrith.
Up from Borobridge.
Down from Ferryhill.
Up from Whitby.
Up from Scarborough.
Up from Hull.
Down from Middlesbrough.
Up from Northallerton.
Up from Thirsk.
Up from Church Fenton.
Up from Saltburn. ( O . 1676).
Up from North Wylam.
Down from Newburn.
Up from Guisborough.
Up from Starbeck.
Down from Brockley Whins.
Up from Whitby.
Down from Northallerton.
Down from York.
Down from Billingham.
Down from Pickering.
Up from Saltbmla.
Up from Whitby.
Up from Scarborough.
Up from Thirsk.
Down from York, Hull and Pickering.
Up from Scarborough.
Down from Backworth.
Up from York.
Up from WiSlOW Junction and Goole.
Up from Gascoigne Wood.
Up from Withernsea.
Down from Selby.
Down from Doncaster.
Down from Starbeck.
Down from Ferryhill.
Down from Eaglesclifie.
Up Main from Middlesbrough.
Down from Leeds.
Up from Velvet Hall.
Up from Durham.
Down from Wingate South.
Down from Hull.
Up from Eaglescliffe.
Up from Scarborough.
Down from Doncaster.
Down from Leeds.
Down from Normanton.

254 Signal Boxes where Outer Home Signals are provided.—Continued.
At the following boxes where Outer Home signals are provided, special
instructions have been issued at each place as shewn in the remarks column.
STATION.
Amotherby
Barlow
Bedale
Castleford
•Cowton
Dunston-on-Tyne
'Gilling
G o ols
Hart
Hexharn
Hexham
Hinderwell
Jervaulx
Leyburn
Market Weighton
Signal box where
Outer Home
is provided.
Station
Station
Station
Station
Inner Junction
Eryholme
Junction
Norwood Junct.
Station
Boothferry Road
Junction
Cemetery North
East
Border Counties
Station
Station
East
West
Line to which
Outer Home Signal
is applicable.
Up from Scarborough
Road Jct., Malton
Up from Airmyn
and Raweliffe
Down from Brayton
East
Up from Jervaulx
Up from Ledston
Up from Richmond
Down from King
Edward Bridge
Junction
Up from Pickering
Up from Malton
Down from Pilmoor.
Down from Selby
Up from Ferrybill
Up from Seaham
Down from Newcastle
Up from Wall, N.B.
Down from Saltburn.
Down from Bedale
Down from Constable
Burton
Down from Selby
Down from York
}
REMARKS.
Instructions dated 25th April,
1919, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 7222).
Instructions dated 25th Septemher,
1919, altered to meet
Tablet working. ( O . 7062.)
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, altered to meet Tablet
working. - ( O . 5048).
Instructions dated 8th May, 1919,
altered to meet Electric Staff
working. ( O . 2648).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, authorising acceptance of
trains to Outer Home if line is
clear to Starting Signal.
(O. 2928).
Instructions dated 29th March,
1920, authorising acceptance of
passenger trains up to Outer
Home signal under B.T.R. 5 if
line is clear to Inner Home
except during fog or snowstorm.
}
(O. 3024).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, altered to meet Tablet
and Staff working. (O. 4483).
Instructions, dated 29th April,
1918, authorising acceptance of
Passenger trains up to Outer
Home signal under B.T.R. 8,
except during fog or snowstorms.
( O . 4483).
1 Instructions dated 15th August,
I 1917, authorising acceptance of
passenger trains up to Outer
Home under B.T.R. 5.
(O. 2888).
Instructions dated 18th July, 1919,
authorising approach of trains
to Inner Home signal under
Calling-on arm. ( O. 3501).
Instructions dated 1st June, 1921,
altered to meet Tablet working.
(O. 4483).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 6424).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 5048).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 5048).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917,, authorising acceptance of
trains to Outer Homes if line
clear to Intermediate Home.
(O. 4483).

STATION.
Monkseaton
Monkseaton
Newcastle
Nidd Bridge
Northalderton
Nunthorpe
Pilmoor
Pontefract
Redmire
Scarborough
Slingsby
Southburn
Westgate
York
Signal Boxes where Outer Home Signals are provided.—Continued. 255
Signal Box where
Outer Homo
is provided.
West
West
No. 3
Ripley Junction.
High Junction
Junction
Sunbeck Junct.
South Junction
Station
Gallows Close
Station
Station -
Station
Clifton -
Waterworks
Line to which
Outer Home Signal
is applicable.
Up from Hartley -
Down from
• Backworth
East line
From
South line • • •
Down 1 K E Jct. B
Up from
Pateley Bridge
Up from Leybmm
Up from Battersby.
Up from Coxwold
Down fromackworth
Up from Aysgarth
Up from Whitby
Up from Amotherby.
Down from Market
Weighton
Down from Bishop
Auckland
Up from North
Up from Scarborough
REMARKS.
Instructions dated 15th August,.
1917, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 6246).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, authorising acceptance only
of passenger train, light engine,
or engine and van. (O. 6246).
Instructions dated 18th July, 1917,
authorising trains being brought
up to Inner Home signals after
being stopped at Outer Homes.
(O. 3671).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 6424).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, authorising acceptance of
trains to Outer Home if line
clear to Direction signal. Exempted
from Blocking Back
Inside Home Signal.
(O. 4483).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 6424).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 6424).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, authorising acceptance of
other than passenger trains to
Outer Home under B.T.R. 5
when line between Outer and
Inner Home occupied with other
than passenger train. (O. 1553).
Instructions dated 15th September,
1920, altered to meet the Tablet
working. ( O . 7438).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 6424).
Instructions dated 4th February,
1920, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 7312).
Instructions, dated 1st December,
1919, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 6813).
Instructions, dated 21st November,
1921, altered to meet Tablet
working. ( O . 7032).
Instructions dated 15th August,
1917, authorising acceptance of
trains up to Outer Home, but
Clause 4 of the Standard instruction
is deleted as boxes are
exempt from giving Blocking
Back Inside Home signal.
(O. 4483).

256 I n d e x to List of Single Lines.
NOTE.---Lines over which Passenger Trains run are shewn in HEAVY type.
PAGE.
Acklam Bank Head and Middlesbrough Goods 281, 288
Allendale and Hexham • • • • 264, 277
Alnwick and Coldstream . . . . 2 5 7 - 8
Alston and Haltwhistle 2 6 3
Amble and Chevington . . . . 261-276
Ashington Main Line Jet. and Ashington Colliery 292
Axholmo Joint Line . . • . 258
Ayton Bank Mines, W3mn's Quarry & Great .Ayton
Barnard Castle and Middleton-in-Teesdale • . 259
Battersby and Grosmont . . . • • 259
Battersby and Ingleby Incline Bottom • • 279
Battersby and Nunthorpo Junction . . • 269
Bedlington Colliery . • • . • • 279
Bedlington Station Platform Line • • 259
Belmont
Belmont junction
and Hutton
and
Gate
Durham
„
Goods
•
•
.
•
M
Bishop Auckland and Ferryhill . • •
•
260
260
Bishop Auckland and Barnard Castle .
Bishop Auckland Platform Lines . • 259
Bishopley Branch 2 7 9
Bishop Auckland and Blackhill •
Brackenhill Light Railway •
•
•
•
2
2
6
7
0
9
Brampton Junction and Brampton Town • .
Brockley Whine and Hedworth Lane • 280, 287
Broomside Junct. and Sherburn Colliery Junct. 293-4
Burnhill Jet., Waskerley, Parkhead & Weatherhill 279
Burradon and Holywell Siding • • • • 292
Butterknowle and Evenwood • • • • 279
Cambois Colliery Branch • • • • • '279
Carlin How Jet., Mines Sdgs. &Skinningrove Sdg•281, 283
Carlin How Junction and Whitby • • . 2
7Castlemrd
East Branch •
Castleford and Garforth .
5
Cawood, and Selby • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
.
.
279, 284
. 262
. 272
Charity Junction and Stooperdale • • 291
Chevington and Amble .
Chilton Branch 2 8
.
0
2
-
8 1
5
,
-
276
6
Choppington Colliery • • • • 280
Choppington and Morpeth . . . • 267
Clifton and Kirkby Stephen
Coldstream and Ainwick • •
.
.
.
•
.
2 5 7 - 8
Consett East Junction and Hownes Gill Junction 280
Cornforth Lane and Tursdale Colliery • • 281
Cowpen Co.'s Staiths & Cambois Colliery Jct. . 2 7 9
Coxhoe Junction and Co:choe • • • • 280
Coxiodge and Ponteland . . . . 2 6 1
Croft Depots and Croft Junction • • • 280
Darlington and Tebay
Darras Hall Branch
2
2
6 1
6
-
2
2
Deaf Hill Colliery • • • • • • 280
Derwenthaugh and Swalwell Colliery Branch • 282
Driffield and Mallon . . . . 266
Driffield and Market Weighton • • • . 266
Durham (Elvet) and Murton . •
Durham Goods and Belmont Junction
.
•
.
•
267
279
Eston Branch . . . • . • . '262
East Boldon Junction and Hedworth Lane • 292
Evenwood and Butterknowle • • • 270
Ferryhill and Bishop Auckland • • • . 260
Ferryhill No. 1 . and Thrislington Coke . Ovens • 281
Elatts Lane Junction and Normanby • • 281
Forced Branch 2 8 0 , 286
Foss Islands Branch, York • • • • 282
Frankland Jn. & Framwellgate Coll. Bank Foot • 280
Garden Lane Branch • • • • • 286.
Garden Lane Junction and Whitburn Junction • 292
Garforth and Castleforel . . 262
Billing and Pickering
Glaisdale Station
•
2
2
7
6
6
3
Goole and Selby • . . 2 7 2 - 2 7 3
Great Ayton and Wynns Quarry
Grosmont and Battersby 2
•
5
280
9
Grosmont, Beck Hole Branch •
Haltwhistie and Alston 2
•
6
280
3
Harelaw Branch • . • • • • 293
Hartlepool Station and Princess Street, etc• 2 9 3 - 4
Hartley and Monkseaton . • . . 263
Hawes and Northallerton . . . . 2 0 8 - 9
Hadley Hill Col. and Waterhouses Goods Crossing 282
Hedworth Lane to Brockley Whins • • 280, 286
Hedworth Lane and East Boldon Junction • 292
Hepscott and Netherton •
Hexham and Allendale .
•
.
•
.
.
.
281, 287
264, 277
Hirst Junction and Linton Colliery • . • 292
Holywell Sidings and Burradon Colliery . • 292
Hownes Gill Junction & Consett East Junction 280
Hull and Seasner 2 6 4
Hull, Paragon Station 2 6 1
Hull, Rivorslde Quay 2 8 4
Hull and Withernsca 2 8 4
Hutton Gate and Belmont • • 280
Hylton, Southwick and Monkwearmouth •
Ingleby Incline Bottom and Battersby •
•
•
280
279
Isabella Colliery, Newsham . • • • 280
Kiltonthorpe Junction & Lingdale Branch Junct. 280
Kimblesworth Colliery • • • . • 280
Kirkby Stephen and Clifton
Knarosborough and Pilmoor
.
.
.
.
.
.
265
269
Lambley Station and Lambley Colliery • . . 280
Lemington Point and Newburn Station • . 281
'Arita Green And Larichester Station . . 2 6 5 - 6
.PAGE
Lingdale Branch Junction and Kiltonthorpe June. 280
Lingdale Branch Junction and Lingdale Mines • 281
Lingdale Branch Junction and Kilton Mines 2 8 0
Linton Colliery and Hirst Junction
Loftus and Liverton Mines •
•
•
•
2
292
8 1
Malton and Driffield • • . . 266
Malton and Pilmoor . . . • . 270
Market Weighton and Driffield . . . . 266
Meinterby and Masham . . . . . 207
Merrybent Branch •
Middlesbrough Goods and Acklam Bank Head 281, 288
Middleton-in-Teesdale and Barnard Castle • . 259
Monkwearmouth, Hylton and Soutliwick • 280, 287-8
Monkseaton and Hartley • . . . . 263
Morpeth and Choppington . . . . • 267
Morpeth-Wansbeck Branch Platform . .
Murton and Durham ( Eivet) . . .
. 267
267
Netherton Colliery Sidings & Choppington Junction 281
Netherton and Hepscott • • • 281, 287
Newbiggin and Woodhorn . . . . . 275
Newburn Station and Lemington point • • 281
Newcastle Quayside 2 8 1
Nimmo's Branch, Wellfield junction • 281
Normanby Branch
Northallerton and Hawes .
2
.
8
•
1
2 6 8 - 9
Nunthorpe Junction and Battersby • • . 269
Page Bank Colliery . . • • 281-288-9
Parkhead Waskerley and Burnbill Junction • 270
Park Pit and Skelton • • . • 2 8 1
Pateley Bridge and Ripley Junction . 271
Pelton Colliery Branch . • 281
Pesspool Branch 2 9 3 - 4
Pickering and Gilling . . . 2 6 3
Pickering and Snarler . . . 2 7 2
Pickering and 'Whitby .
Pilmoor and Knareshorough
.
2 6
2 7 0
9
Pilmoor and Mallon 2 7 0
Ponteland and Coglodge . . . 2 6 1
Port Clarence Station . . . . 2 7 1 •
Redcar Station Excursion and Platform Line • 271
Ripley Junction and Pateley Bridge •
Rosedale Branch 2 8 1
.
,
. 271
280
Scarborough and Whitby . . 2 7 1 - 2
Scarborough Station .
Sassier and Pickering
.
. . •
•
.
271
272
Seamer and flull . . . . . 264
,
SSelby
and Goole . . . • • 2 7 2 - 3
Seaton Snook Junction and Seaton Snook . 281
e
Seghill Station Platform Line . . . . 273
lSherburn
Colliery Junet• and Broomside Junct. 293-4
bShildon
Lodge Colliery Branch • • 2 8 1 , 289, 290
Shotton Colliery Jet. and Shotton Colliery Sidings 281
y Silksworth Colliery 2 8 1
aSkelton
and Park Pit • • • • • 281
nSkinningrove
and Carlin How Junction • 281, 283
South Blyth Staithes • - • • 281, 290
d South Medomsiey Jet. & South Medomsley Coll 281
CSouth
Hetton Colliery and Pesspool Junction 293-4
aSouthwick,
Nonkwearmouth and Hylton . 280, 287-8
w
Spennymoor Platform Line . . . . 273
Stanghow Junction and Mines • . • • • 282
oStobswood
Colliery and Widdrington Station • 282
oStooperdale
and Charity Junction • • • 293
d
Stoneferry Junction and Stoneferry Goods Station 282
Sunniside and Tow Law • • • • • 282
' Swalwell .
'Colliery and Deriventhaugn • • 282
. Tanfield Branch • • • • • 282, 290
Tebay and D ariingt On . . . . 2 6 1
. Tees - Breakwater and Tod Point • • '28'2, 291
. Thirsk South Junct• & Thirsk Town Station • 291
2
. Thrislington Coke Ovens and Ferryhill No. 1 • 281
.
Throckley Colliery • • • . • • 282
Tod Point and Tees Breakwater • • 282, 291
2Tow
Law and Sunnyside 2 8 2
71
rundon Colliery • • • 2 8 2
2
Tursdale Colliery and Cornforth Lam
Tweedmouth Dock 2 8
2 8
2
1
Tweedmouth Down Platform . . . 273
Upleatham Junction and Mines • • 282
Usworth Colliery • • • 2 8 •2
Washington Colliery • • • • • 282
Waskerley, Parkhead, and Burnhill hi
279
273
-
Waterhouses Branch . . . . .
Waterhouses Goods Crossing & Hadley Hill Colliery 282
•Wear action Valley Junction • and Wearhead . 2 7 2 - 3
West Sleekburn and Colliery • • • • 282
Wheatley Hill Colliery • • • • • 282
Whitburn Junction and Garden Lane Junction • 292
Whitby and Carlin How Junction . . . 275
Whitby and Scarborough . . • • 2 7 1 - 2
Whitby and Pickering
Whitwood Branch
.
2
.
8
. 1 2 7 0
.
Widdrington
2
Widdrington
,
Station Colliery . • ' • • '282
2 9
and Stobswood
2
Colliery • 282
Wingate Colliery 2 9 3
Withernsea and Hull . . . . '2.64
Woodhern and Newbiggin . . . 2 7 5
York, Foss Islands Branch • • • 282, 292
York Station, No. 14 Platform Line . . . 275

Staff or Tablet Stations, Sections, Passing Places, and t Preceding Places, and
Special Instructions with regard thereto.
These limes are worked in accordance with the Regulations for Train Signalling
by Block Telegraph System on Single Lines of Railway ; and under the
Train Staff, or Train Staff and Ticket System, or under the Electric Train
Staff System, or under the Electric Train Tablet System, except where
stated to the contrary.
(1 )•
—
Tra
ins
m
u
s
t
n
o
t
b
e
a
l
l
Single Lines on which Passenger Trains run.
tSee Regulation 5, Single Line Regulations for working by Train Staff
and Ticket, page 3.
Special Instructions to be observed at Passing Places 7—
same time at " Line Clear," except as shown in the " Remarks "
column and then under Clause b " Regulation 4 of the Block
Telegraph Regulations.
,(2).--Trains not conveying passengers may be accepted from opposite directions
under Regulation 5 of the Block Telegraph Regulations where they
cannot be accepted at " Line Clear," unless the use of regulation
5 is prohibited.
(3).—Where trains are allowed to pass esach other, and they cannot be accepted
from opposite directions at the same time, the first train must be
drawn clear on to the loop line, or shunted clear of the running line
before the other is allowed to leave the next Block Station.
NOTES.—Passing Places are denoted thus :—*
The term " Freight Trains" means all trains not conveying passengers.
STAFF OR TARIM
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
REMARKS.
(Also see pares. 1, 2, and 3, above).
o
wAlnwick
and Olds tream.
eALNWICK
NORTH
d AND *EDLINGHAM
t (Electric train staff
• with Green
o handle).
Edlingbam.
- two freight trains may pass each other at
Edlingham. Owing to the gradient, no train
One is to be accepted by Edlingham from Whit-
p tingham a s s eunless n the station lines are clear
a
p
p
r*
oE
O *WHITTINGHAM.
(Electric train staff
aD
with Red handle).
cL
*WmTTINGnAm AND
I
*HEDGELEY.
h (Electric train staff
N with Blue
fG
handle).
g up e r to the starting signal. Any train stopping
to shunt must be brought to a stand within
a the nsafety
points in the loop, which must
d then be placed in the run-off position, arid
no shunting must, under any circumstances
o be done n outside these points. (O. 5092).
e Whittingham—Passonger or freight trains may
f pass r each e other at Whittingham.
i g h
t Hedgeley. ,
o-
two freight trains may pass each other at
Hedgeley.
rOne
p a s s e
rH
n g e r
oA
a n
m M
d
A
o
N
o
n
257
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at Ainwick
North.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Edlingham.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Whittingharn.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Hedgeley.

258 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Alnwick and Coldst ream.—(Continued).]
SMEDGELEY AND
*
(Staff Iwith
square L handle
and tickets). D
SILDERTON E AND
Wool,nn R SOUTH.
(Staff with'N T
round Ohanclle
and tickets). N
WOOLER . NORTH
AND *ARELD.
(Staff with crosshead
handle and tickets).
* AXELD AND
*Kunn
(Staff , with
round handle
TEwr and tickets.)
oisT.
*
K
*
I (Staff with 1
R square 1 handle
K and tickets). 1
N*MINDRUM
1 AND
E COLDSTREAM.
N
I (Staff Pwithl
T round Rhandle
T and tickets). I
O
T
N Axho!me I Joint (L.
A
A
N
MARSHLAND
.
JCT. AND
D
*MEEDNESS JCT.
(Electric Train
Staff).
*MEEDNESS JUNCTION
AND *
(Electric C R O Tablet).
*CROWLE W L EAND
. *BELT0N.
(Electric Tablet).
•MELTON AND
*ErwonnEr.
(Electric Tablet).
*EDWORTH AND
MAXEY JUNCTION.
(Electric Tablet).
zusram...nmommonm•nr
xlEmAnrcs.
(Also see paras. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
liderlon.
- two freight trains may pass each other at
Ilderton.
Preceding One Place—Wooperton.
p a s s
The line between Wooler Smith and Wooter
e North n g eis
double.
r
a n
d
AkeI o d.
-n
freight trains may pass each other at Akeld.
One e
pf a rs
sKirknewton. e e in
g- pass each other at Kirknewton. Owing to
g gradient, e hr
no train is to be accepted by Kirk.
aPassenger
t newton , from Akeld unless the station lines
no
o
are r clear up to the starting signal. Any
d f
train
r r e
stopping
i g
to shunt must be brought to
a stand within the safety points in the loop,
oh
which t must then be placed in the run-off
nt
position, r a and i no shunting must under any
circumstances be done outside these points.
e nMindrum.--One s
passenger and one freight, or
fm
two freight trains, may pass each other at
Mindrum.
ra
y
e
—
i
g
h
t ,
& oY.
& NEE. Railways).
r
t
Reedness Junction.—One passenger and one
freight train, or two freight trains, may pass
w each other at Reedness Junction on the
o Fockerby Section.
Crowle.--Passenger or freight trains may pass
each other at Crowle.
Belton.
each other at Belton.
-
Passen Epworth.
ger - each other at Epworth.
oPasseng r
fer r e
io g h
The system
r
of working on the single line between
t f r Beedness e i Junction Station and Fockerby
tg hrthat t of only one engine in steam.
at ri a
ni m
a
y
ns s
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Ilderton.
Signalman or Porter
signalman at
Wooler South.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Wooler
,
North.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Akeld.
Station Master or •
Porter Signalman,
at Kirknewton.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman •
at Minclrum.
Signalman at Cold,
stream.
Signalman at Marsh-land
Junction. -
Station Master, Chief'
Clerk, or Shunter
at Reedness Jct.
Station Master or
Chief Clerk at
Crowle.
Station Master or -
Chief Clerk at
Belton.
Station Master or
- Chief Clerk at
Epworth.
Station Master or--
Chief Clerk ak;
Haxey Junction.

STAPP OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Barnard Castle and
TEES VALLEY JCT.,
BARNARD CASTLE
AND MIDDLETON-IN-
TEESDALE.
(Staff with
square handle
and tickets).
Battersby and Gros molt.
*
..BATTERSBY AND
*
,(Electric KTablet).
I
L
D
KT6DALE AND A
* L
(Electric C E
Tablet).
A .
C S *
A
(Electric T Tablet). D
-*
S L A
D *
T E N
A
, (Electric G Tablet).
L T B
N L
E O Y
B A
T N .
Y I
AO
GLAISDALE . S AND
N
DGROSMONT.
DA
(Electric A Tablet).
N L
Bedlington D E Station
.
;NORTH AND SOUTH
(Up LINB).
(No staff).
'Bishop Auckland
BISHOP AUCKLAND
EAST AND WEST.
(No Staff).
aisnor AUCKLAND
NORTH AND WEST.
(No. staff).
Single Lines.—Continued.
REMARKS.
(Also see paras. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
Middleton-in-Teesdale.
Etattersby.--Passenger or freight trains may
approach Battersby from opposite directions
at the same time at Line Clear.
KiI dalc
- each other at Kildale, and may, except
during foggy weather or falling snow,
Passe approach from opposite directions at the
nger same time at Line Clear.
Castleten.—Passenger
o r
or freight trains may
pass each other at Castleton, and may
f approach. r e from opposite directions at the
i
same
g h
time at Line Clear.
Danby.--One passenger and one freight, or
t two freight trains, may pass each other at
t Danby. r
Glaisdale.
a i
- pass each other at Glaisdale, and may
napproach s from opposite directions at the
Passenger
msame
time at Line Clear, provided the Down
oa Biding r is clear and the Up Siding is clear
f
to
y r
the
e
second
i
trap points, and the points
are set for the Sidings. (See page 276 for
gpadditional h t regulations). a 2204).
tGrosmont. a r a
i- be accepted at Line Clear from Glaisdale
swith
n the s points set for the over-run siding.
mA
s
ap
a s s e
Platform Line.
yn
g e r
The o Up r line between the North and South
f signal r eboxes
at Bedlington is worked as a
i single g hline
for all stopping passenger trains,
and may also be used as a single line for
t trains of any description when the Down
t line ris
occupied. (See also special regulations
a
dated
i
31/10/11. ( O . 4785).
Platform n Lines.
m
Signals
a
at each end are electrically interlocked.
y
Signals at each end are electrically interlocked.
259
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman at Tees
Valley Junction.
Signalman or
Porter Signalman
at Middleton-in-
Teesdale.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Battersby.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Kildale.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman,at
Castleton.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Danby.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Glaisdale.
Signalman at Orosmont.

260 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Bishop Auckland
FORTHBURN AND
COAL ROAD
CROSSING.
(Electric Tablet).
Bishop Auckiand
ETHERLEY STATION
PLATFORM LINE
(No staff).
CROOK EAST
AND WEST.
PLATFORM LINE.
(No staff).
WEST DURHAM JCT.
AND Tow LAW
JUNCTION.
(Electric Tablet).
BLACKFIELD AND
BURNHILL JUNCT.
(Electric Tablet).
ROWLEY STATION &
HOWNES GILL JCT.
(Electric Tablet).
HOWNES GILL JCT.
AND CONSETT
SOUTH JUNCTION.
(Electric Tablet).
Bishop Aticiciand
BISHOP AUCKLAND
EAST AND
*
(Electric C Tablet).
...,OUNDON OAND
BURNHOUSE U JCT.
(Electric N Tablet).
D
O
N
•
REMARKS.
(Also see paras. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
and Barnard Castle
Forthburn.
- may be accepted at Line Clear from the rear
box with the points set for the over-run
An siding. U p
pCoal a Road s s Crossing.
e- freight n g etrain r may be accepted at Line Clear
from Barnard Castle East with the points
oA
set Dfor o the w n over-run siding.
r pThe aline s between s e nBishop g Auckland and Fort hburn
also between Coal Road Crossing and Barnard
fe r rCastle e is double.
io g hr
and t Blackhiii.
t r
Signals interlocked at each end.
a i
n
Crook East signals are interlocked by Crook
West.
The line betweex Crook West and West Durham
Junction is double. •
West Durham Junction---In clear weather and
under ordinary circumstances, passenger or
freight trains may approach from opposite
directions at the same time at Line Clear.
Tow Law Junction.
- may approach Tow Law from opposite directions
at the same time at Line Clear.
Passenger
The line between Tow Law Junction and Black-
o field r is double.
f
Burnhill
r e i
Junction,A
g h t
passenger or freight
t train r may a ibe accepted n from Rowley at Line
s
Clear with the points set for the over-run
siding.
The line between Burnhill Junction and Rowley
is double.
Rowley.--A passenger or freight train may be
accepted from Burnhill Junction at Line
Clear with the points set for the over-run
siding.
and Ferryhill.
Coundon.—One 15assenger and one goods, or
two goods trains may pass each other at
ComIdon.
The line between Burnhouse Junction and lorryhill
is double.
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet •
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman at Forth.
burn.
Signalman at Coal
Road Crossing.
Signalman at West
Durham Junction.
5ignalman at Tow
Law Junction.
Signalman at Black.
field.
Signalman at Burn.
hill Junction.
Signalman at Rowley
Station.
Signalman atHownes
Gill Junction.
Signalman at Consett
South jct.
Signalman at Bishop
Auckland East.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman a t
Coundon.
Signalman at Burn-
- house Junction.

STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Brampton Junction
BRANTT ON JUNCTION
AND
BRAMTTON TOWN.
(Staff with key
attached).
Chevington and A
AMBLE JUNCTION
AND BROOMBILL
(Electric Tablet).
BR OOMBILL AND
AMBLE.
(Brass Staff).
mble.
Coxledge and Pont eland.
Single LineS.—Continued.
REMARKS.
(Also see pares. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
and Brampton Town.'
Worked in accordance with Regulations for
working by one engine in steam (see pages
9 and 10).
The line between Broomhill and Amble is
double. The up line is used as a single line
by the Broomhill Colliery Co. after the N.E.
traffic has ceased. (See special regulations,
page 276. ( O . 2240).
COXLODGE AND
*
(Electric C Tablet).
A
Callerthn.--One passenger and one freight, or
two freight trains, may pass each other at
L
Callerton.
*
L
C
EPONTELAND.
A
(Electric R Tablet).
L
T
LDar/ington
O and Te bay.
E
N
FORCETT
R
.
JUNCTION Forcett Junction.
AND *
T(Electric
W I NTrain
Staff
- may be accepted at Line Clear from Piercebridge
with the points set for the Forcett
O
with
STO
Red handle). A Quarry line.
passenge
(See Special Instructions dated 10th March,
N N.
r o
1909).
r
A
Winston.
f r e i g
N
- each other at Winston, and may approach
h from t opposite' directions at the same time
D
Passeng at Line Clear.
*WINSTON AND er Broomielaw.
t r a
BRoomaELAw. i n
(Electric Train Staff o-be r
accepted at Line Clear from Barnard
Castle East with the points set for the over-
(with Blue handle). fA run r esiding. i
The
gpassen h
line
t
between Broomielaw and Barnard Castle
East is double.
BARNARD CASTLE tger r a
EAST AND %VEST io n r s
PLATFORM LINE.
(No staff).
mf
r e i
The ag
line h t between Barnard Castle West and Kirkby
y t Stephen r is double.
pa
i
an
sm
sa
y
261
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman a t
Brampton Junct.
Signalman at A mble
Junction.
Signalman • at
Broomhill.
Stationmaster o r
Porter Signalman
at CoNlodge.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Callerton.
Station Masteraor
Porter Signalman
at Ponteland.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at Forcett
Junction.
Signalman Or Porter
Signalman at
at Winston.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Broomielaw.
•

262 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Darlington and To
KIRKBY STEPHEN
WEST AND
SANDY BANK.
(Electric Tablet).
TEBAY YARD No. 3
AND STATION
PLATFORM.
(Square Staff).
Darras Hail Branch
PONTELAND AND
DARRAS HALL.
(Staff).
Eston Branch.
CARGO FLEET INNER
JUNCTION AND
FLATTS LANE.
(Electric Tablet).
FLATTS LANE AND
ESTON.
(Staff with key
attached).
•
Garforth and east!
GARFORTH INNER
JUNCTION AND
KIPPAX.
(Electric Train Staff
with Red handle).
KIPPAK AND
*BOWERS ALLERTON
COLLIERY JUNCTION.
(Electric Train Staff
with Blue handle).
*BOWERS ALLERTON
COLLIERY JUNCTION
AND *
(Electric LEDTrain
Staff
with
STO
Green handle).
*LEDSTON AND
CASTLEFORD N. INNER
J•crNcTiox.
(Electric Train Staff
with yellow
handle).
(Also see pares. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
bay.—Continued. •
REMARKS.
Sandy Bank.
- may be accepted at Line Clear from the rear
box with the points set for the over-run
An siding. U p
The p aline s sbetween e Sandy Bank and Tebay Yard
No. 3 Box is double.
n
Worked
g e r
in accordance with Regulations for
o working by one engine in steam (see pages
r 9 and 10) and special instructions dated
f
August,
r e
1921.
i g h
t
t
Worked
r
in accordance with Regulations for
working by one engine in steam (see pages
a 9 and i 10).
n
Cargo Fleet Inner Junction.
- freight trains may approach Cargo Fleet
Inner Junction from ory, osite directions at
Passenger the same time at oLine r.Clear.
Worked in accordance with Regulations for
working by one engine in steam (see pages
9 and 10).
(amt.
Bowers Merton Colliery Junction.—One passenger
and one freight, or two freight trains,
may pass each other at Bowers Allerton Colliery
Junction.
Ledston.
- two freight trains may pass each other at
Ledston.
One
p a s s
e
Castleford
n g e
Inner Junction.
r
- or snowstorm, passenger and freight trains
may approach Castleford Inner Junction
a
Except from opposite d u directions r i n g at the same time
n
f at oLine gClear.
The train from Ledston
must not be allowed to pass the Outer Home
d signal until the train from Old 'Station has
o been brought to a stand at the Down Home
Signal. ( O . 2648).
n
e
f r
e i
g h
t ,
MIONMIN
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman at Kirkby
Stephen West.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Sandy Bank.
Signalman at Tebay
Yard No. 3.
Station Inspector,
Tebay.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Panteland.
Signalman at Cargo
Fleet Inner Junction.
Signalman at Matta
Lane.
Signalman at Garforth
Inner Junction.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Kippax.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Bowers Allerton
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Ledston.
Signalman at Castleford
Inner Jot.

1
IIIMIS MIMME hmonatilM• tragE tarTA IN E FE E E R MO S ZE ZN iMmlo2P
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Gilling and Picker!
Single Lines.--Contimted.
REMARKS.
.
(Also see paras. 1, 2 and 3, page 257). .
:
*GILLING AND
0
Gill ing.
3
*
•
(Staff Hwith
one -
each other at ailing, and may approach
1
from opposite directions in accordance with 1
ring round middle Passe
2
and tickets). E
the special regulations dated 25th March, E
M
nger
1909.
I
L
M
o
Helmsley.
r
P
M
O
f
- pass each other at Helmsley, and may
approach r e from opposite directions at the T
S
E
i
Passenge
same time at Line Clear.
g h
M
L
Preceding O
*
t
r o r Place
W
E
H *
-Kirby
moorside.—Passenger or freight trains Z
M
t
f may r
r
epass i each other at Kirbymoorside, and
I
Y
E K(Staff
with two Nunnington.
C
rings round . middle a
g may h
i
t approach from opposite directions at
the same time at Line Clear.
E
L I
M
and tickets). n
t r
s
a
Preceding Place
a
M
* R
S
K B
GOSLIP BRIDGE.
m
i n s
-Goslip
Bridge.--A passenger or freight train
(Electric Tablet). a
mmay
be accepted from Mill Lane Junction
Nawton.
L
I Y
y
a with the points set for the over-run siding.
The line between Goslip Bridge and Mill Lane
E
R M
p
y Junction is double.
Y
B O
a
A
YHaltvitistle
O and Ai stop. s
N
M R
HALT
D
O
WRESTLE
s
S
Coanwood.
STATION AND
O I *
- or two freight trains may pass each other
at Coanwood.
R (Electric D C Tablet). One
S
* E O
p a s s e
I
C . *LAMBLEY• A
nLambley.--A g e r passenger and a freight train may
pass each other at Lambley. Passenger
D (Staff
O N
with
a
round handle
trains n must not be accepted at Lambley
E
A and tickets). W
d from Coanwood on one side or Alston on
the other if the staff for the section beyond
&
N O
o Lambley n in which the train is about to
W O
e proceed is not then in the possession of the
O D
f Lambley r e Stationmaster. When a passenger
and freight train have to pass each other at
O .
i Lambley, g h the freight train must always be
t shunted , into the Lambley Fell line before
D
the passenger train is accepted.
* A
L
ALSTON.
N (Staff with
AD
square handle
M and tickets).
B
Hartley and Monk seaton.
L
HARTLEY E STATION
Y AND AVENUE
CROSSING.
A (Electric Tablet)
N
AVENUE CROSSING
D
•
AND MONKSEATON
WEST.
(Electric Tablet).
4
-
4
,
L
-
3
,
.
.
.
.
0
3
263
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Station Master, Signalman
or Porter
Signalman at
GiRing.
Station Master, Signalman
or Porter
Signalman at
Helmsley.
Station Master, Signalman
or Porter
Signalman at
Kirbymoorside.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Goslip Bridge.
Signalman at Haltwhistle
Station.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Coanwood.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Lanabley.
Porter Signalman at
Alston.
Signalman at Hartley
Station.
Signalman at Avenue
Crossing.
Signalman at Monkseaton
West.

264 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Hexham and Alien dale.
BORDER COUNTIES
JUNCTION AND
ALLENDALE.
(Staff in form of a
metal disc).
Hull, Paragon Stat
PARK STREET AND
PARAGON STATION
YARD
(E & F Lines).
(No Staff).
Hull, Riverside Qu
HEDON AND
RYE HILL
(Electric Tablet).
OTTRINGIEAM AND
WINESTEAD.
(Electric Tablet).
Hull arRil Somer.
FLAMBOROUOR
AND *
(Electric BE Tablet).
M F
TO
N.
*BEMFTON AND
*SFEETON.
(Electric Tablet).
I
I
S
P
E
E
T
O
HUNMANBY.
(Electric Tablet).
REMARKS.
(Also see paras. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
Worked in accordance with Regulations for
working by one engine in steam.
(See pages 9 and 10).
Worked in accordance with Special Regulations
dated 12th April, 1917.
Signals at each end of the Station are controlled
by power signalling.
ay.
BILLINGSGATE AND The section is treated as shunting ground,
RIVERSIDE QUAY except when the Billingsgate and Riverside
STATION. Quay Station signal boxes are open.
Electric Tablet).
See Special Regulations dated 13th
January, 1913.
Hull ann Witherns ea.
Hedon.—Except during fog or snowstorm,
passenger or freight trains may approach
Hedon from opposite directions at the same
time at "Line Clear." The train from
Mar
, -Outer
Home signal until the train from
flee
Rye Hill has been drawn clear of the Main
line.
Ryehill.--Passenger t
or freight trains may
mapproach
Ryehill from opposite directions
at the same time at Line Clear.
The u line between Rye Hill and Ottringham is double.
Ottringham.—Passenger s
or freight trains may
t approach Ottringhani from opposite directions
at the same time at Line Clear.
n
oThe
line between W inestead and Withernesa
is double.
t
b
Flamborough.—Passenger e
or freight trains
amay
approach Plaraborough from opposite
directions at the same time at "Line Clear."
Bemptort.
l
- l each other at -Bempton, and may approach
Passenge o
from opposite directions at the same time
at "Line Clear."
r Speeton.—Passenger w o r or freight trains may pass
f eeach
other at Speeton, and may approach
r
from
e
opposite
i
directions at the same time
g d hat "Line t Clear."
tHunmanby.—Passenger t r a
or freight trains may
i o
approach Hunmanby from opposite directions
n s at the same time at " Line Clear."
m
a
y
p
a
s
p
a
s
s
t
h
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman at Border
Counties Junet.
Porter Signahnan at
Billingsgate.
Porter Signalman at
Riverside Quay.
Porter Signalman at
Hedon.
Porter Signalman at
Rye Hill
Porter Signalman at
Ottringham.
Porter Signalman at
Winestead.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Flamborough.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Bempton.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Speetom
Station Master, Sidnalman,
or Porter
Signalman at
Hunmanby.

CANIMEMOCISMEEMSEULISMVZIEMINV
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Kirkby Stephen an
KIRKBY STEPHEN
WEST AND
*
(Staff with W
square handle
and tickets). A
*WAnc Or AND R
A.PPLEBY
C
STATION.
(Staff with
round handle O
and tickets). P
APPLEBY (MID.
.
JCT.)
AND
*
(Electric K Tablet).
I
R
*
K
K
BAND
*
I
(Electric Y CLI Tablet).
R
T BU
*
I
HRN.
C (Electric
C
O Tablet).
LLanchester
B
R and Lin
I
Y
N
BLANCHESTER
T
. STATION
AND *
U
H KNI STATION.
R
O TSL
(Electric Tablet).
N
R EY
&
N
C*KNITSLEY
STATION
L
I
F
T
O
N
.
AND CONSETT
SOUTH JUNCTION.
(Electric Tablet).
CONSETT NORTH
JUNCTION AND
BLACKHILL SOUTH.
(Electric Tablet).
BLACKHILL NORTH
AND *
SH BRIDGE.
(Electric
OTL
Tablet).
EY
Single Lines.—Continued.
REMARKS.
(Also see paras. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
d Clifton.
Warcop.--One passenger and one freight, or
two freight trains may pass each other at
Warcop.
The line between Appleby Station and Midland
Junction is double,
Midland Junction.
- train may be accepted from Appleby
Station at Line Clear with the points set
A for the over-run siding.
pKirkby a s sThere.—Passenger e n g e or freight trains
r may pass each other at Kirkby There, and
may approach from opposite directions at
o the same r time at "Line Clear."
Cliburn. f r e i g
-
two freight trains may pass each other at
h Cliburn. t The siding at Cliburn is 210 yards
One in length, and will accommodate engine,
p van, a s and s 27 wagons.
e n g e
r
tz aGreen.
n
d
o
n
Knitsley Station.—One passenger and one
freight, or two freight trains may pass each
e other at Knitsley Station..
f r
e i
g h
The
t
line
,
between Consett South Junction and
o Conseil North Junction is double.
r
The line between Blackhill South and Blackhill
North is double.
Shotley Bridge.
-
or two freight trains may pass each other
at Shotley Bridge.
One
p a s s e n g
e r
a n d
o
e
n
f r e i
g h t ,
265
Persons authorised
-to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman a t
Kirkby Stephen
West.
Signalman a't
Warcop.
Signalman a t
Appleby Station.
Signalman a t
Midland Junction.
Signalman a t
Kirkby There.
Signalman a
Cliburn.
Signalman a t
Clifton.
Signalman a t
Lanchester
Station.
Signalman a t
Knitsley Station.
Signalman a t
Consett South
Junction.
Signalman a
Consett North
Junction.
Signalman o r
Porter Signalman
at Blackh ill South.
Signalman o r
Porter Signalman
at Blackh ill North
Signalman o r
Porter Signalman
at Shotley Bridge.

266 S i n g l e Li
MgMffMr• WZIE S NS OOFOIS
nes.—Continued.
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
REMARKS.
(Also see pares. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
Lanchester and Lin tz Green.--(Continued).
*SHOTLEY BRIDGE
AND *EBOICESTER.
(Electric Tablet).
*BBCIIESTEB, AND
Ebchester.
- or two freight trains may pass each other
at Ebchester.
One
WESTWOOD COLLIERY
JUNCTION.
(Electric Tablet).
p a s s e
n g e r
aThe line n between Westwood Colliery Junction and
HAMSTERLAY
JUNCTION AND
d
o
Hamsterley Junction is double.
LINTZ GREEN. n
(Electric Tablet). e
f r
Malton and Driffie
e
Id. g
i
h
SCARE ono' ROAD tScarboro'
Road Junction.—Passenger and
JUNCTION AND
*WHARRAM.
freight trains may approach Scarboro' Road
Junction from Settrington and Mahon, or
(Staff with one
ring round middle
and tickets).
from Amotherby and Settrington at the
same time at " Line Clear."
Wharram
- or two freight trains, may pass each other
at Wharram.
*WHARRAM AND
*Rnanaul.
• (Electric Tablet).
*BURDALE AND
*
S FIMBER.
(Staff with two
rings
L
round middle
E and tickets).
*
D
S BINDER AND
BRIFFIELD M WEST
L (Staff E with three
Erings
R
round middle
D and tickets).
E
MMarket
A Weighten
E
N
RENTITORPE
AND
D*
E
M THE WOLDS.
A (Electric Tablet).
I
N
D
D
D
* L
M EWOLDS
AND
*BAINTON.
I (Electric
T
Tablet).
D*BAINTox
O AND
D N SOUTHBURN.
(Electric Tablet).
L -
E O
T N
O -
N
-
One Preceding Place
pBurdale. - a s s e
n- pass
g e
a
r
light engine, engine and van, or an
North officers' special.
aA Siedmere C r in mand s tFimber. o
d p-n freight, a. s s or two freight trains, may pass
each other at Sledmere and Fimber.
oeOne
n g e
nr
p a s s e n g e r
e oa
n d
fr o r n e
ef r i
ge ih
Preceding Place—Wetwang.
t g h,
t
and t Driffield•
rEnthorpo.
a-
approach Enthorpa from opposite directions
at the same tint* at " Line Clear."
iPassenge
Middloton
n r - trains may pass each other at Middleton
mo
on-the-Wolth
r
and may approach fro-a
on
a
opposite directions at the same time )i
f-" rLine e Clear." i
ygthe
Banton. h t
t - pass each other at Bainton, and may
approach r a from oppgaite directions at tl
iWolds. Passen same n time s at "Line Clear."
m-
ger Southburn.
,
aPassenger
o- aapproach
r
Southburn from opposite directions
at the same time at " Line Clear."
yo
fPassonger r e
r io gr h
ft f r e i g
r e
ith t
gr h
tat
ri a
ni ns s
gr n=IMME IN E N IZIK E ME lk
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman or Porter
• Signalman at
Ebchester.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Westwood Colliery
Junction.
Signalman o r
Porter Signalman
at Hamsterley
Junction.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Lintz Green.
Signalman or
Porter Signalman
at Scarboro' Road
Junction.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Wharram.
Station Master at
Burdale.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Sledmere and
Fimber.
Signalman and
Porter Signalman
at Driffield West.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Hathorpe.
Station Master or
Pertor Signalman
at Middleton-ontlae-Trelds.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Baiaton.
Statile]] Master or
Porter Signalman
at geuthblrn.

mooxoemzolimmzEtsvatworalotar.rwArnawanumalsconrenrxr.te•
STAFF OR TABLET
STATION S AN D
SEC TION S.
Melmerby and Ms
Murton and Durha
•
N
O
R
T
*
H
P
H
I
E
T
T
I
O
N
G
A
T
N
O
D
N
A
N
D
MURTON J U N C TION
AN D H ETTON
COLLIERY.
(Electric Tablet).
HETTON C OLLIER Y
AN D *
H E T
T O N
STATION .
(Electric Tablet).
•HETToN STATION
AND *NORTH
HETTON.
(Electric Tablet).
*PITTINGTON
STATION.
(Electric Tablet).
*BROOMSIDE.
(Electric Tablet).
•BROOMSIDE AN D
DURHAM ELVET.
(Staff with
round handle
and tickets).
Single Lines.—Continued.
REMARKS.
(Also see paras. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
ham.
m Eve.
twurten Junction.—Trains may be accepted
from Hetton Colliery in accordance with
the Special Regulations dated 28th July,
1917.
Hetton Station.
- • or two freight trains may pass each other
at Hetton Station.
One
North p a sHetton. s e n g
-e
or
r
two freight trains, may pass each other
at North Hetton.
One a n d
When po a sNorth ns
eHetton n Box is closed the Tablet Section
ea tends Hetton Station and Pittington Station.
ge e r
Pittington.
af rn e i
-d
gor two h freight t trains may pass each other
at Pittington.
One o n
pBroomshle. e a s s e
n-f or
gr two
e r e
freight
i
trains may pass each other
at Broomside.
aOne g hn t , • •
d p a s s e n
Preceding og
e r Place
-na
n
Sherburn
e d
Hfo or nues
e
ie g h
t f r, e
i g h
267
IIN V N Ir mar r E mno.or mb
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
MELMERBY STATION MeInnerby.
Signalman at Mel.
AN D *
T A N (Staff with one
-
be accepted at Line Clear from Tanfield merby.
with the points set for the over-run siding.
F I E L
ring round kind A
D .
Porter Signalman at
tickets).
passe
Tanfield.
*
Tanfield.
T
MASHAM. nger
Porter Signalman at
A
(Staff with two
- two freight trains may pass each other at Masham.
o Tanfield. r
N
F rings round middle One
f r e
I and tickets). p
E
i
a
g
s s
h
LMorpeth
(Wansbec k Branch e
t
n g ePlatform
Line).
D
r
A
t r
MORPETH SOU TH
N
aThe signals
D AN D MOR PETH a
n at each end of the section are
i
STATION . d
electrically controlled.
n
(No staff). o
m
n
Morpeth and Chop pingten. a
e
y
CHOPPINGTON
f r
• Signalman a t
COLLIERY AN D e i
Choppington Col-
HEPSC OTT
(Electric Train Staff
g h
liery.
Signalman a t
with Blue handle). t ,
V Hepscott.
HEPSCOTT AN D
o a•
Signalman a t
BARMOOR WEST.
(Electric Train Staff r
Barmoor West.
with Red handle).
(O. 5146).
Signalman or
Porter at Murton
Junction.
Signalman a t
Hetton Colliery.
Signalman a t
Hetton Station.
Signalman a t
North Hetton•
Signalman a t
Pittington.
Signalman a t
Broornside.
Signalmen a t
Durham Eh-et.

268 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Nerthallerton and
NORTEALLERTON
HIGH JUNCTION
AND CASTLE HILLS
INNER JUNCTION
(Staff with one
ring round middle
and tickets).
CASTLE HILLS
SOUTH JUNCTION
AND CASTLE HILLS
INNER JUNCTION.
(Staff with two
rings round middle
and tickets).
CASTLE HILLS INNER
JUNCTION AND
*AINDERBY.
(Electric Tablet).
*AINDERBY AND
EEEMING BAR.
(Electric Tablet).
BEDALE AND
*
(Electric J Tablet).
E
R
V
A
U
L
X
.
*
J *CONSTABLE
BERTON.
E (Electric Tablet).
R
V
*CONSTABLE BURTON
AND LEYBURN
A
EAST.
D (Electric Tablet).
L
X
A
N
DEEYBURN
WEST
AND *WENSLEY.
(Electric Tablet).
ramirxmouccinutnagaamstrasso• mramosmanammommangomm
,
...."
Hawes.
REMARKS.
(Also see paces. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
Ainderby.
- sengers may pass a passenger or freight
A train at Ainderby.
s h o r t
teeming Ban—Passenger or freight trains may
t r a
approach Leeming Bar from opposite dir-
i ections n at the same time at ," Line Clear."
n o
t The line between Leming Bar and Bedale is double.
c o
nBedale. v
e y i
- freight trains may approach Bedale from
n opposite g directions at the same time at
pIn
"Line Clear." When two passenger trains
ac
or l ean
Up passenger and a Down freight
sa
train r have to pass, the Up passenger must
be dealt with at the platform and des-
-w
patched e before the down train (passenger
a or t freight) h is allowed to pass the Down
e
Outer
r ,
Home Signal. During fog or snowstorm,
a Down Passenger and an Up Freight
p train, a or two freight trains, may approach
s from s opposite directions at the same time
at " Line Clear."
eJervaulx.. n
g-pass e each other at Jervaulx, and, except
r during fog or snowstorm, may approach
Passenge from opposite directions at the same time
ar
at "Line o r Clear."
nf
Constable
r e i
Burtolt
dg
- may pass each other at Constable Burton,
and h may t approach from opposite directions
t
Passenger
at rthe asame
time at "Line Clear."
i
oLeyburn n
r East
s
and West —Passenger or freight
m
f
trains
r e
may
i g
approach
h
in accordance with
special instructions dated 4th November,
a
t 1913.
y
tThe line r between a i Leyburn East and West Boxes is
double.
n s
Wensley.—Passenger or freight trains may
pass each other at Wensley, and may
approach from opposite directions at the
same time at "Line Clear."
aME R V IMMOR ME ME C
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman o r
Assistant Signal.
man at High
Junction.
Signalman o r
Porter Signalman
at Castle Hills
Inner Junction.
Signalman a t
Castle Hills South
Junction.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Ainderby.
Station Master, Signalman,
or Porter
Signalman at
Leeming Bar.
Station Master, Signalman,
or Porter
Signalman at
Bedale.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Jervaulx.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Constable
Burton.
Signalman o r
Porter Signalman
at Leyburn East.
Station Master, Signalman,
or Porter
Signalman at Ley.
burn West.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Wensley.

STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Northallerten and
Single Lines.—Continued.
REMARKS.
(Also see pares. I, 2 and 3, Page 257).
Halves.—Continued.
*WENSLEY AND Reamire.
*REDMIRE
- two freight trains may pass each other at
(Electric Tablet). Redmire, and may approach from opposite
One directions at the same time at "Line
p Clear. a s sThe e passenger train must always be
n
turned
g e r
to the platform line.
*RE MIME AND aAysgarth.—Passenger n
or freight trains may
*AYSGARTH. d pass each other at Aysgarth, and may
(Electric Tablet). approach from opposite directions at the
o same time at "Line Clear."
n
*
A
*ASKRIGG. e Askrigg.--One passenger and one freight, or
two freight trains, may pass each other at
(Staff with two f Askrigg, r and may approach from opposite
Yrings
round middle e directions i at the same time at "Line Clear."
S and tickets).
g
The
h
passenger train must always be turned
G
to the platform line.
t ,
A*ASKRIG
G AND
oHawes.
R
*H AWES.
T
(Staff with three r-
each other at Hawes, and may approach
from opposite directions at the same time
rings round middle Passen at "Line Clear."
H and tickets). ger
A-
N*
HAWES JUNCTION. o r
(MID.) f r e
DH
(Roand Black Staff). i g h
A
t
W
Nunthorpe Junction and t Battersby.
r
E
a i
S NUNTHORFE
A JUNCTION AND n s
m
N *
aGreat
Ayton.--One passenger and one freight,
D G(Electric
Tablet). or two freight trains, may pass each other
y
*GREAT R
at Great Ayton.
AYTON 1
EAND
BATTERSBY.
:
A(Electric
Tablet).
)
T
,
Pilmcor A and K nar esbereugh. s
Y
PIL HO OR AND
s
T
Etoroughbridge.
*B OROUGHBRIDGE.
O
- or two freight trains may pass each other
(Staff with one at Boroughbridge.
ring N round middle One
and tickets).
- .
pPreceding a s s ePlace—Bragerton. n g e
*
KNARESBOROUGH r
( G 0 DS ) JUNCTION. a n d
B (Staff with two o n e
Orings
round middle
R and tickets:). f r e i
gPreceding h tPlace—Copgroix.
O
U
G
H
B
R
I
269
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Redmire.
Station Master or
Porter Signalmen
at Aysgartn.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Askrigg.
Station Master,
Signalman or
Porter Signalman
at Hawes.
Signalman a t
Nunthorpe June
tion.
Signalman and
Porter Signalman
at Great Ayton.
Signalman o r
Porter Signalman
at Battersby.
Signalman a t
Pilmo or Station
Junction.
Signalman o r
Porter Signalman
at Boroughbridge.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Knaresboro'
(Goods) Junction

270 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Pickering and Whi
PICKERING NEW
BRIDGE QUARRY
AND LITVISHAM.
(Electric Tablet).
Pliiii/OGI• and Malta
PILMOOR SUNBECK
JUNCTION AND
*COXWOLD.
(Electric Tablet).
*
C
*
(Electric
O
GTablet).
X
I
W
*GILDING AND L
*
O
D
(Staff with S three
L rings round I
L
middle
D
and tickets). N
I
•
A
G
N
N G
D S
B
Y
.
*SLINGSBY AND
*AMOTHERBY.
(Electric Tablet).
l'AMOTHERBY AND
SCARBOROUGH ROAD
JUNCTION,
MALTON.
(Electric Tablet).
thy.
REMARKS.
(Also , see paras. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
New Bridge Quarry.—Except during fog or
snowstorm, passenger or freight trains may
approach New Bridge Quarry from opposite
at the same time at "Line Clear."
Levisham.
-
approach Levisham from opposite directions
at the same time at "Line Clear."
Passenge
The line between Levisham and Whitby is double.
r o r
n
f r e i
. gSunbeck h t Junction.
t-storm, r apassenger
and freight trains may
i approach
Except n s Sunbeck Junction from Coxwold
and Sessay Wood Junction or Bishophouse
md
Junction u r i nat g the same time at "Line Clear."
af
Coxwold.
o g
yo
- pass each other at Coxwold, and may
approach r from opposite directions at the
s
Passeng same
n
time
o
at
w
"Line Clear."
-
er Gilling.
o-each r
other at Gilling, and may approach
from opposite directions in accordance with
fPassen the r Special e i Regulations dated 25tb March,
gger 1009.
h t
Slingsby.
to r
- or two freight trains may pass each other
af at r iSlingsby.
e Except during fog or snow-
One
ni storm, g s h an Up passenger and a Down freight
p
mt
atrain s smay e approach from opposite directions
at the same time at "Line Clear," and
n
at
g
when r
e r
a passenger and freight train have to
a
ya
pass i
n the freight train must be shunted into
d the siding before •the passenger train is
n allowed s to pass the Up Outer Home signal.
o
m During for or snowstorm, when a passenger
n
a
and freight have to pass, paragraph 3 on
e page 257 must be adhered to.
y Preceding Place
f
p
r
-
eAinotherby. a
i
Hovingham
g-train, s
h
or two freight trains, may pass each
S other p a at . Amotherby. Except during fog
t One
s or snowstorm, an Up passenger and a Down
tp
freight a s s train e n may approach Amotherby from
rg
opposite
e r
directions at the same time at Line
Clear," and when a passenger and freight
a train n have to pass, the freight train must be
id
shunted to the siding before the passenger
train is allowed to pass the Up Outer Home
no
signal. n During fog or snowstorm, when a
e passenger and freight train have to pass,
f paragraph r e 3 on page 257 must be adhered
to.
iScarborough g h Road Junction.
t-
freight trains may approach Scarborough
Road Junction from Settrington and Malton
Passenger East, also from Settrington a n d and Arnotherby
at the same time at "Line Clear."
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from.
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman or'
Porter Signalman.
at Pickering New
,Bridge Quarry.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman.
at Levisham.
Signalman or Porter
,
.
Signalman at Sun–
bock Junction.
Station Master or
, Porter Signalman,
at Goxwold.
Station Master, Signalman
or Porter'
Signalman [at
Gilling.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman.
at Slingsby.
Station Master or'
Porter Signahnan)
at Amotherby.
Signalman or Portet--
Signalman
Scarborough RoadA
Junction..

- START OR TABLET
STATION S AN D
SEC TION S.
'Port Clarence Stati
POR T C LAR EN C E
JUNCTION AN D
,POR T C LAR EN C E
STATION .
(Staff only).
1
REDCAR EAST AN D
1
WEST BOXES.
1 (No staff).
e3tedcar
Excursion
d REDCAR EAST AN D
c
a
r
S
t
a
t
i
o'
r
n R
I
P
L
iE
WEST BOXES
(No staff).
Single Lines.—Continued.
REMARKS.
(Also see pares. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
on.
Worked according to Regulations for Working
by one engine in steam (see pages 9 and 10)
tform Line.
'The Signals at each end of the Section are
controlled.
Platform Line.
The crossover between the Station and Excursion
Platform lines is worked by ground
frame at the East End and controlled from
both boxes. The Up Excursion Platform
Line Outer Direction signal at East Box is
controlled from West Box. (O. 2933).
Iticy Junction an d Pateley Bridge.
RIPLEY J U N C TION Ripley Valley.
AN D *
R I P VALLEY.
L E Y
(Electric Tablet).
- or two freight trains, may pass each other
at Ripley Valley.
One
p a s s e n
AN D *
(Electric B I R Tablet).
*BIRST S T W ITH AN D
W I
*
T H
(Electric D
. Tablet).
A
Y *DARLEY & *
a
R
VD
A C(Electric R E Tablet).
L
A
E
-L
Y
* L
PATELEY BR ID GE.
DE
AY
(Electric Tablet).
g e r
Birstwith.
a n d
- two freight trains may pass each other at
o Birstwith. n
Onc,
e
Darley.
p
f
- awo sfreight s e trains may pass each other at
Darley. r e i
n
g
One Dacre.--One
g e r
h t , passenger and one freight, or
ap two a snfreight s trains may pass each other at
d
Dacre.
e n g e
or
na
C
RScarborough
Station
E FALSGR AVE AN D
A WASHBECK
N
(No. 1 EXC U R SION
D
LINE).
(No staff).
e n
fd Worked
r e
in accordance with Special Regula-
iotions g dated 9th April, 1914.
hn t ,
oe
FALSGRAVE AN D
WASHBECK
(MIDDLE LIN E) .
rfWorked
r in accordance with Special Regulations
dated 9th April, 1914.
e i
(No staff). g h
-
FALSGRAVE AN D
S *
GSC
AR BOR OU GH .
c A(Electric
Tablet).
a L
L
•*
r O
G AND *
W
Ab
S
L CL (Electric Tablet).
C
Lo
OL U
O
O
Wr
G H S
S
E
Co
T °
,
L
Ou
N
t ,
Whitby.
o
Gallows Close.—Passenger or freight trains
r may pass each other at Gallows Close, and
may, except during fog or snowstorm,
approach from opposite directions at the
same time at "Line Clear." •
Cloughton.--Passenger or freight trains may
pass each other at Cloughton, and may
approach from opposite directions at the
same time at "Line Clear."
S
Eg
.
271
Persons authorised
to receive a table
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman at Port
Clarence Junction.
Signalm an o r
Porter Signalman
at Ripley Junct.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Ripley Valley.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Birstwith.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Darley.
Porter Signalman at
Dacre.
Signalman o r
Porter Signalman
at Pateley Bridge.
Signalman or Underman
at Falsgrave.
Signalman or Porte,
Signalman at
Gallows Close.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Cloughton.

272 S i n g l a Lines.—Continued.
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
REMARKS.
(Also see paras. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
Scarborough and Wh itby.
*CLOUGHTON AND
*
S(Electric
Tablet).
T
*STAINTON A DALE
-
Stainton Dale.--Passenger or freight trains may
Conpass
each other at Stainton Dale, and may
tinu approach from opposite directions at the
same time at "Line Clear."
ed.
Ravenscar.
AND I *
RN(Electric A V Tablet).
ET N S
- pass each other at Ravenscar, and may
approach from opposite directions at the
Passenger
same time at "Line Clear."
*RAVENSCAR CO A R AND oRobin r Hood's Bay.
*ROBIN . N HOOD'S BAY.
D(Electric
Tablet).
A
f-may r epass i geach
other at Robin Hood's Bay,
and may approach from opposite directions
hPassenger at t the same time at "Line Clear."
*ROBIN L HOOD'S BAY
EAND
*HAWSKER.
. (Electric Tablet).
*HAWSKER AND
toHawsker. rr a
if-or rn an
e
officer's
s i g h
special may pass a passenger
or a freight train at Hawsker.
mt
A Prospect Hill Junction,
*PROSPECT HILL atl-itrains
gr h t may a ipass
each other at Prospect Hill
JUNCTION. Junction.
(Electric Tablet).
ynePassenger
n
(See sg
para. 3, page 257, and special regu-
io n r e lations , dated 13th June, 1903.)
Seamer and Picker ing. ef r ne
i g h t
SEAMER JUNCTION
AND *
g i
Forge Valley.---One passenger and one freight,
n or e two freight trains may pass each other
F O R VALLEY a at Forge Valley.
(Staff G Ewith
One
ring and tickets).
*F013,GE VALLEY
n
Sawdon. d
*
S
A
W
AND *
(Staff S Awith W two
rings D Oand N tickets).
.
*
(Staff S with three
rings N and tickets).
-v
two freight trains may pass each other at
Sawdon.
One a
pSnainten.—Passenger n a s s
or freight trains may
e, pass
n g
each
e
other at Snainton, and may
approach from opposite directions at the
r same time at "Line Clear."
D*SNAINTON
A AND
O I EASTGATE.
N (Staff N with four
A rings T and tickets).
a
n
d
N O
Selby D and N Cawood.
.
o
n
WISTOW JUNCTION, e Worked in accordance with Regulations for
SELBY AND
CAWOOD.
(Staff with
square handle).
f working r by one engine in steam.
e i
(See pages 9 and 10).
g h
Selby and Goole.
t
o
,
BRAYTON EAST rBrayton
East Junction.
JUNCTION AND
*BARLOW.
(Electric Tablet).
- passenger and freight trains may approach
Brayton East Junction at the same time
In from c lopposite e a r directions at "Line Clear."
wDuring e a fog t hor esnowstorm, r passenger or
freight trains may approach from Thorpe
Gates and Barlow or from Brayton Junction
and Barlow, at the same time at "Line
Olean"
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Stainton Dale.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Ravenscar.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Robin Hood's
Bay.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Hawsker.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Prospect Hill Jot.
Signalman at Seamer
Junction.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Forge Valley.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Sawdon.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Snainton
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Eastgate.
Signalman or Assist.
ant Signalman at
Wistow Junction.
•
Signalman or Porter
Signaltwan at
Brayton East
Junction.

STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Selby and Goole.—
*BARLOW AND
AIRMYN AND
RAWCLIFFE.
(Electric Tablet).
Seghill Station Pla
SEG HILL NORTH
AND SOUTH
(UP LINE).
(No staff).
Spennymoor Plat
• SPENNYMOOR WEST
AND EAST BOXES.
Tweedmouth Down
TWELDMOUTH
NORTH AND
SOUTH BOX26S.
(No staff).
Waterhouses Bran
Continued.
ch.
Single Lines.—Continued.
REMARKS.
(Also see pares. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
Barlow.
- each other at Barlow, and may approach
from opposite directions at the same time
Passen at "Line Clear."
ger Airmyn and RaviCliffe.—Passenger or freight
o
trains
r
may approach Airmyn and Rawcliffe
from opposite directions at the same time
f at r " eLine
Clear."
tform i gLine. h
t
The t rUp
line between the North and South
a signal i boxes at Seghill is worked as a single
n
line
s
for all stopping passenger trains, and
may also be used as a Single line for trains
m of any description when the Down line is
a occupied. (See also Special Regulations
y
dated 25th October, 1911). ( O . 4791).
rm pLine.
a
The
s
signals at each end of the section are
electrically controlled.
s
Platform Line.
Worked in accordance with Special Regulations
dated 19th June, 1917.
NEW BRANCEPETH
COLLIERY AND
*
U JUNCTION.
(Electric Tablet).
*Uallaw S MOOR
HJUNCTION
AND
*
A
F(Electric
Tablet).
* W
L
FAND
M WATERHOUSES
AGOODS
CROSSING.
L O
S(Electric
Tablet).
A O
S
S R
J
S
U
J
Wear N
U Valley Junct
C
NWITTON
T
WEST AND
C *El A RPERLEY.
I
T (Electric Tablet).
O
I
N
O
.
N
New Brancepeth Colliery.
- foggy weather or falling snow, Passenger or
freight trains may approach New Brancepeth
Except Colliery from d uopposite r i ndirections g at the
same time at Line Clear.
Ushaw Moor Junction.
- one freight, or two freight trains, may pass
each other at Ushaw Moor, Junction.
One
Hass p a sJunction. s e n g e r
-
or two freight trains may pass each other
aat Plass n Junction. d
Goods One trains may be worked to and from
p Plass a s sJunction e n g after a passenger train has
e
proceeded
r
to Waterhouses. (See Special
Regulations dated 7th August, 1916, and
a page n277). d
ion oand nWearhead.
e
Witton f r West. e i
-gmay
h be t accepted , at "Line Clear" from
Wear Valley Junction with the points set
A for the over-run siding. (See Special In-
p sterstatioas a s s e npage
2771.
g e r
o r
f r e i
g h t
t r
273
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet'
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman at
Barlow.
Station Master, Signalman,
or Porter
Signalman at Airmyn
and Rawcliffe
Signalman at New
Brancepeth Colliery.
Signalman at Ushaw
Moor Junction.
Signalman at Plass
Janetioa.
Signalman at Waterhouses
Goods
Crossing.
ignalisaan at
Witte)" West.

271 S i n g l e Lines.—(Continued).
STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Wear Valley Junetion
*HARPERLEY AND
STANNERS CLOSE.
(Electric Tablet).
WOLSINGHAM AND
BISHOPLEY
JUNCTION.
,
(
BROADWOOD E AND
STANHOPE l JUNCTION.
e(Electric
Tablet).
c
t
r
i
c
T
a
b
l
e
t
)
.
"
-
'
3
W
E
S
T
TANHOPE
JUNCTION AND
*WESTGATE.
(Electric Tablet).
WEARHEAD.
(Electric Tablet).
REMARKS.
(Also See pares. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
and Wear head .
- Harpetley.—Passenger or freight trains may
Continue
pass each other at Harperley, and may
approaCh from opposite directions at same
d, time at "Line Clear." (See Special Instructions,
page 277).
The line between Stanners Close and Wolsing -
ham is double.
Wolsingham.—Passenger or freight trains may
be accepted from Stanners Close at "Line
Clear " with the points set for the over-run,
siding.
The line between Bishopley Junction and Broadwood
is double.
Broadwood.
- approach Broadwood from opposite directions
at the same time at "Line Clear."
Passenger
Stanhope LI uncti on.---Passenger or freight trains
o may r approach from opposite directions at
f
the
r e
same
i g
time at "Line Clear." with the
points set for the over-run sidings. The line
h between t Stanhope Junction box and the
t west r end a of the station is double, and when
a train arrives at the station from Eastgate
i
and
n
another
s
train is waiting to proceed in
m the direction of Eastgate tablets are con-
a veyed to and from the signal box by the
fireman. In order that the fireman of an
y
Up train may know that the whole of the
train has arrived at the platform before he
leaves with the tablet he and the guard
should communicate with each other, the
men walking towards each other for the
purpose.
When an Up freight train of over 38 wagons
loading from Newlandside Quarry is propelled
on to the Main line, and the engine
does not come opposite the box, the fireman
must proceed to the signal box to obtain
the tablet from the signalman before departure.
(See Special Instructions page 277).
Westgate.—One passenger and one freight, or
two freight trains may pass each other at
Westgate, and, in clear weather and in
ordinary circumstances, may approach from
opposite directions at the same time at
"Line Clear" if the line is clear between
the Up Home and Down Outer Home. The
train from Wearhead must first be brought
to a stand at the Up Home signal No. 24,
after which that signal must be lowered to
allow the train to proceed to No. 23 Starting
signal, or in the case of a freight train to the
Loop line if necessary. Until the Up train
has been finally brought to *rest the Down
Outer Home signal must be kept at danger.
In no circumstances must a train be accepted
from Wearhead with points set for the Loop
line. (See Special Instructions, page 277).
(O. 7032).
WearheaeL (See Special Instructions, page
277).
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver.
Signalman at
Harperley.
Signalman a t
Stanners Close.
Signalman at
Wolsingham.
Signalman a t
Bishopley Junot.
Signalman a t
Broadwood.
Signalman a t
Stanhope Junet.
Porter Signalman:at
Westgate.
Porter Signalman at
WearhoLA.

STAFF OR TABLET
STATIONS AND
SECTIONS.
Whitby and Carlin
Single Lines.—Continued.
REMARKS.
(Also see paras. 1, 2 and 3, page 257).
How Junction.
Boo HALL JUNCTION
AND PROSPECT
HILL JUNCTION,
(Electric Tablet).
Prospect Hill.—Trains not conveying passengers
may be accepted by Prospect Hill
Junction from Hawsker under Rule 5, when
trains not conveying passengers are passing
between Whitby Town and West Cliff. See
PROSPECT HILL
special regulations dated 13th June, 1903.
JUNCTION AND West CHIC
*
- pass each other at West Cliff, and may
approach from opposite directions at "Line
(Electric W Tablet). Passeng Clear." See also Special Regulations dated
*WEST CLIFF E AND er Oth February, 1912.
* S
o
Kettleness.
r
(Electric KT
Tablet). f
- pass each other at Kettleness, and may
approach r e i from opposite directions at the
* EC
g
Passenger
same
h t
time at "Line Clear."
K *HINDER TL
WELL t
oHinderwell. r
a
E
(Electric TI
Tablet). i
f-pass r
n
e
each
i
s
g
other at Hinderwell, and may,
except during foggy weather or falling snow,
T LF
m
hPassenger approach t from opposite directions at the
T EF
a
to same r time a at "Line Clear." See special
*
L N.
H *
y
if instructions
r ne s i g
dated 15th August, 1917.
Staithes.
E E
I
(Electric S Tablet). -mhpass
t each other at Staithes, and may,
N S
at
except r aduring
foggy weather or falling snow,
N T
Passeng approach from opposite directions at the
E S
D
* A
er yi
same n time s at " Line Clear."
S .
E
S I
*
Grinkle.
o
m
r
R
TS
(Electric
T
GTablet).
-a
each other at Grinkle, and may approach
f from r eopposite i directions at same time at
W
A*
A H
R
Passeng
y "Line Clear."
g h t
E
IG
N E
I *L0Frus. er Lottus.
t r
L
TR
D
(Electric
S
NTablet).
o-each a
r other at Loftus, and may approach
from i opposite directions at same time at
L
HI
* .
K
fPasse "
n
rLine s
e iClear."
A
EN
L CARLIN L How' gnger Carlin
m
h How t Junction
N
S KO
E
JUNCTION. to- may approach Carlin How Junction from
(Electric Tablet).
a Crag
rr
Hall direction simultaneously with Up
D
AL
F •
afDown y
trains r i e from Loftus, provided the Skinnin-
NE
T
nip grove ag s shsBranch e n gis eclear, r and the points are
set for that direction, and that the Skinnin-
DA
U
m t
grove
r a
Branch
i n
staff
s
is in possession of the
NS
at
signalman r at Carlin How Junction.
DA
Woodhorn aErid Ne wbiggin. y a i
(O. 4447).
N
pn
s
WOODHORN COLLIERY
D JUNCTION AND
am
NEWBIGOIN sa
STATION. sy
(Electric Tablet). p
a
York Station (No. 14 sPlatform
Line).
LEEMAN ROAD AND
LOCOMOTIVE YARD
(No. 14 PLATFORM
LINE).
(No Staff).
s
Worked in accordance with Special Regulations
dated 7th July, 1911.
Signals electrically interlocked.
275
Persons authorised
to receive a tablet
staff or ticket from
or deliver it to
the driver,
Signalman at Bog
Hall Junction.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at Prospect
Hill Junction.
Station Master or
Signalman at.
West Cliff.
Station Master Or-
Porter Signalmant
at Kettleness. •
Station Master or
Porter Signalman
at Hinderwell.
Station Master or-
Porter Signalman
at Staithes.
Station Master or
Porter Signalman,
at Grinkle.
Signalman at
Loftus.
Signalman at Carlin.
How Junction.
Signalman or Porter
Signalman at
Woodhorn Colliery--
Junction.
Signalman or Porter-
Signallnan at
Newbiggin Station t

276 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
Additional Regulations and Exceptions in regard to specific places
included in the foregoing List of Single Lines.
BROORMILL COLLUE,IciM AND maim,
The line between Amble Junction and Broomhill Station will be closed
each night after the last engine or train has passed off the Branch at Amble
Junction until 7-0 a.m.
When the North Eastern Railway Company's traffic has ceased, and the
Train out of Section signal has been received from Amble Junction box for
the last train off the Branch, the Signalman at Broomhill Station box must
send the CIOsing signal in each direction, and when this has been acknowledged
by the Signalmen at Amble Junction and Amble Station respectively,
the points leading from the Up Main line to the Colliery must be set so that
the Bromnhill Colliery Company's engine may use the Up line only in working
either to or from Amble. The Inward and Outward signals worked from
Broomhill Station box must be left in the " off " position, and the Down
Main line must remain entirely closed until the signal-box is re-opened and
,ordinary working resumed.
A brass Staff lettered " Broomhill Colliery and Amble Station Up Line"
is provided, and after the signal-box at Broomhill has been closed in accordance'
with the foregoing instructions, the Signalman must hand this staff
to the Driver of the Colliery Company's engine. The Driver will then have
-possession of the Up line between Broonahill and Amble, and he must work
on this line only, in each direction. He must observe the signals at Amble
Station, and obey the instructions of the Signalman there in the usual way.
The Signalman at Broomhill Station must, before opening the box each
morning, obtain possession of the Staff. He must then place all the signals
at Danger, and communicate with the Signalman at Amble Station box,advising
him that he has got possession of the Staff, and that all is in order
for resuming ordinary working. When this is clearly understood, he may
give the Opening signal and resume ordinary working.
The Staff must be kept, in the custody of the Signalman •
Station at Bbox r oduring o m h the i l ltime
when ordinary working is in force.
In addition to the foregoing regulations, the regulations shewn on page
and 10 must be observed so far as they are applicable. ( O . 2240).
GLAISDALE STATiON.
When it is necessary for one passenger and two freight trains, or for two
passenger and one freight train to pass at Glaisdalc, one freight train must
be shunted into the Up Siding beyond, and clear of the second trap-point,
and the guard must obtain the Valley key from the signalman so as to
unlock the ground lever and open the trap point by pushing the lever back,
-
tallow
trains to approach in accordance with the Regulations.
h The guard must remain at the box, and when the signalman is in a position
e
to allow the train to leave the siding, he must give the Staff key to the
n
guard. The guard must then unlock the trap, point lever, pull over and
,secure it by means of the Valley lock and return the Valley key to the
w
,signalman. ( O . 2204).
i
t
h
d
r

Single Li nes.—Continued. 2 7 7
HEXHAM AND ALLENDALE BRANCH.
The siding points at Glendue Siding, Elrington, Langley, Staward and
Allendale Stations are worked from a ground frame. The levers can only
be worked by inserting the staff in the receptacle provided in accordance
with the instructions exhibited at each ground frame.
If an engine should become derailed or disabled while the staff is in the
frame, the ,point levers must be restored to their normal pgsition (being disconnected
if necessary) in order to relieve the staff and admit of Regulation
8 of the Regulations for working single lines of railway by only one engine
in steam being carried out.
WATERHOUSES.—FLASS JUNCTION.
Up Passenger trains proceeding from Mass Junction to Waterhouses
Station, and also engines and vans proceeding from Mass Junction to
Waterhouses Colliery to pick up a load may, when necessary, return to Mass
Junction without passing through the section to exchange the Tablet at
Waterhouses Goods Crossing Box. ( O . 234 4. )
• CORONATION SIDING BETWEEN WEARHEAD AND WESTGATE.
Freight trains proceeding from Wearhead to Coronation Siding between
Wearhead and Westgate may, when necessary, return to Wearhead without
passing through the section to exchange the tablet at Westgate. When a
Freight train has to return to Wearhead, arrangements must first be made
with the Signalman there, and no shunting outside the Home Signal must
be allowed until the Freight train has passed out of the section. (O. 7639.)
CAMBOKIELS SIDING AND GREENFOOT QUARRY SIDING
BETWEEN STANHOPE JUNCTION AND WESTGATE.
Freight trains proceeding from Stanhope Junction to Greenfoot Quarry
or Cambokiels Siding between Stanhope and Westgate may, when necessary,
return to Stanhope Junction without passing through the section to exchange
the tablet at Westgate. When a Freight train has to return to Stanhope
Junction, arrangements must first be made with the Signalman there, and
no shunting outside the Home Signal must be allowed until the Freight
train has passed out of the section. ( O . 7639.)
MARSHALL GREEN SIDING AND WITTON-LE-WEAR STATION
SIDING BETWEEN WITTON WEST AND HARPERLEY•
Freight trains proceeding from Witton West to Marshall Green Siding
oliWitton-le-Wear Station between Witton West and Harperley, may, when
necessary, return to Witton West without passing through the section to
exchange the tablet at Harperley. When a Freight train has to return to
Witton West, arrangements must first be made with the Signalman there,
and no shunting outside the Home Signal must be allowed until the Freight
train has passed out of the section. ( O . 7639.)

278 S i n g l e Li
nes.—Continued.
Regulations for Working Single Lines of Railway over which
passenger trains DO NOT RUN, by Train Staff, Train Staff
and one Train Staff Ticket, or by Train Staff and Train Staff'
Tickets.
1.--On lines which are worked with a train staff and train staff tickets, or a
train staff and one train staff ticket only, the Regulations as shown for working
single lines with train staff and train staff tickets must be observed (see pages
3 to 8), together with the following additional Regulations :—
2.—Where a staff and one ticket only is in use, in the event of there being one
engine only to go on to the line, the ticket must be attached to the staff by the
signalman or person in charge of that end of the section at which the engine
enters, so that a driver may know that he has full possession of the line, and
drivers carrying the staff only, will understand that there is a train in advance,
and must run with caution accordingly.
3.—On those lines where a staff only is used, only one engine must be allowed
on the line at one time, except as shewn in Clause 4, and it must in all cases
carry the staff, except on those lines where authority is given for trains to
run coupled, marked on the following list thus IT, when they must be considered
as one train, and the driver of the last engine must carry the staff, but it
must be shewn to the driver of the front engine, who must know that the rear
driver has it in his possession.
4.—Where a staff only is used, and more than one engine is allowed upon the
line at one time, the driver of the last engine must carry the staff and the drivers
of all preceding engines must see the staff before entering upon the single line.
5.-1n all cases when one engine has been allowed to precede another on to
the single line, the driver of the engine following must be made aware of the fact
by the signalman or person in charge of that end of the section, except at those
places where the drivers deal with the staff working, when a driver who leaves
,
without the staff must acquaint the driver or drivers who have to follow him
that he is about to do so.
6.—On lines marked §, should an engine be at the opposite end of the branch
with the staff, and a second engine arrive at the Junction and signal by two
crow whistles that it requires to enter the Branch, the engine at the opposite
end must immediately return to the Junction with the staff, so as to admit the
second engine.
7.—In the event of a train or engine becoming disabled and requiring assistance,
or an accident occurring which renders it impossible for the engine to
proceed, the fireman must take the staff and make the best of his way to that
end of the section whence assistance can be obtained, and inform the person in
charge there of the circumstances, who must, on receipt of such information,
allow a second engine to enter the section.
Should the driver of the disabled engine carry a ticket, the guard, or if it be
a light engine, the fireman, must take immediate steps to protect the train orengine
in accordance with General Rule 217, when the fireman must proceed
to that end of the section where the staff is.
The relieving engine must be accompanied by the fireman of the disabled
engine or train, who must hand the staff to the engine driver and explain to him
where, and under what circumstances, the disabled engine or train is situated.
The driver of the disabled engine must not allow it to be removed until the
assisting engine has arrived.

The guard of a disabled train or the driver in the case of a disabled light
'engine will be held responsible for the safe and proper working of the line
until both engines have left it and it is again clear.
When proceeding for assistance, the fireman of the disabled engine, if he is
not in possession of the staff, must show a hand danger signal so as to be seen
by the driver of an approaching train, and take such other means as are at his
disposal for drawing the driver's attention, such as placing detonators on the
line, etc., and when the train has been stopped he must instruct the driver to
proceed to the assistance of the disabled engine, and accompany him, carrying
out the instructions laid down in the preceding clause, but before doing so if the
'driver does not carry a staff, he must place detonators on the line which will be
an indication to the driver of a following train that there is an obstruction in
the section and that he must proceed with caution.
The following List of Single Lines over which Passenger Trains
DO NOT run are worked as indicated.
Where a staff only is provided, the lines are worked on the principle that
not more than one engine or train is permitted to travel upon them at one
time, except where otherwise specified.
LINE.
Battersby and Bottom of
Ingleby Incline •
:Bedlington Colliery :—
From West End of Passing Siding
to Bedlington Old Pit empty
Siding, or Doctor Pit.
Belmont Junction and
Durham Goods
Billingham Beck.
North Shore Junction
Haverton Hill South
Bishopley Branch
33rackenhill Light Railway,
Ackworth :—
Brackenhill Junction and
Hemsworth Colliery
Turnhill Junction, Waskerley,
Parkhead, and
Weatherhill :—
1. Burnhill Junction and Waskerley
Down Home Signal
2. Waskerley Up Home Signal and
Weatherldll
'Butterknowle & Evenwood
Cambois Colliery Junction
and Co
-Blyth
Staiths :—
Cambois Colliery junction and
wpen Cowpen Co.'s North Biyth Box
Castleford C o . East Branch :—
Castleford Old Station and Rye
' s Bread Works
N o
r t
h
Single Lines.—Continued. 2 7 9
WORKED BY.
Round brass staff
Electric Staff
Plain staff with round handle
and two tickets
Electric Tablet
Staff with triangular handle
Staff
Staff with round handle and
tickets
Staff with round handle and
ticket
Staff with square handle
Electric staff
Staff with One ring •
Staff or Tablet kept in
charge of
Signalman at Battersby
Bedlington Coal Co.'s Assistant
Traffic Manager at
' A ' Pit
Signalman at Belmont Junet.
Signalman at North Shore
Junction.and Haverton Hill
South.
Signalman at Bishopley June.
Signalman at Brackenhill
Junction Box.
Signalman at Burnhill Junet.
or Shunter at Waskerley
when on duty. When Shunter
not on duty, man on
duty at Loco. Shed.
Shunter at Waskerley when
on duty. When Shunter
not on duty, man on duty
at Loco. Shed. (O. 2933/.
Crossing Keeper at Evenwood
Signalman at Cambois Colliery
Junction Box and North
Blyth Box.
Signalman at Old Station Box
For Regulations
see pages.
278-0
See Electric
Staff Block
Regulations
278-9
See Block
Regulationsl
and Specia
Instructions
on page 283•
(O. 7146).
278-9
9-10
278-9
278-9
278-9
See Electric
Stall Block
Regulations
(0.4046).
278-0-284

280 S i n g l e Li
nes.—Continued.
LINE.
Chilton Branch :----
1. Chilton Junction and Gipsy Lane.
2. Gipsy Lane and Chilton Crossing.
' 3. Chilton Crossing and Teasingthorne
Choppington Colliery :—
1. Choppington Junction and Low
Pit
2. Low Pit and High Pit
Coxhoe Junction & Coxhoe:
. 1. Coxhoe Junction and Comforth
Lane
2. Cornforth Lane and Coxhoe
Cornforth Lane & Tursdale
Colliery
Croft Junction and Croft
Depots
§Deaf Hill Colliery :—
Deaf Hill Colliery Junction and
Wingate Limestone Quarry
Junct. and Deaf Hill Colliery
Ferryhill No. I Box and
Thrislington Coke Ovens
Forcett Branch :—
1. Foreett Junction and Eppleby
2. Eppleby and New Quarry Office.
FranIdand Junction and
Framwellgate Colliery
Bank Foot
Great Ayton and Wynns
Quarry or A3rton Banks
Mines
Grosmont, Beckhole Branch
Deviation Junction and
Dowson's Garth Siding
Hedworth Lane to Brockley
Whins
Hownes Gill Junction and
Consett East Junction
Hutton Gate and Belmont
Hylton, Southwick, and
Monkwearmouth :—
Wearmouth Colliery and Priestman's
Siding
Isabella Colliery, Newsham:
Isabella Junction and Colliery
Kiltonthorpe Junction and
LingdaAe Branch June.
Kimblesworth Colliery :—
Kimblesworth Junction Kimblesworth
Colliery
Lambley Station & Lambley
Colliery
Lingdale Branch Junction
WORKED BY.
Electric tablet •
Electric tablet
Staff with one ring round
middle and tickets
Staff with round handle
Staff with round handle
Staff with round handle and
ticket
Staff with round handle and
ticket
Staff with square handle
Round brass staff
Staff with round handle and
, ticket
Plain round staff
Brass staff with square
handle and ticket
Brass staff with round
handle and ticket
Plain round staff and ticket
Brass staff
Staff in the form of metal
disc
No staff
Electric Tablet •
Brass staff
Electric Tablet •
Staff with round handle
Round staff with one brass
ring and two tickets
Plain round staff and ticket.
Plain brass staff .
Round at& with three brass
rings
Staff or Tablet kept in
charge of
Signalman at Chilton Junotion
or Gipsy Lane.
Signalman at Gipsy Lane or
Chilton Crossing.
The tickets and staff from
Chilton Crossing to Leasingthorne
are in charge of
the signalman at Chilton
Crossing
Signalman at Choppington
Colliery Junction
Colliery Weighman
Signalman at Coxhoe Junction
Signalman at Cornforth Lane.
Signalman at Comforth Lane.
Yard Inspector at Croft Jct.
Signalman at Deaf Hill Colliery
Junction Box
Signalman at Ferryhill No. 1
Box
Signalman at Forcett junct.
or quarryman at Eppleby
Quarryman at Eppleby or
clerk at New Quarry Office
Signalman at Frankland Jot.
Signalman at Great Ayton
Station
Signalman at Deviatton Jot.
Signalman at Hownes Gill or
Consett East.
Signalman at Hutton Gate
Station
Signalman at WearmouthCol.
and Priestman's Sdg.
Signalman at Isabella Junct.
Signalman at Kiltonthorpe
Junction
Signalman at Kimblesworth
Colliery Junction
Station Master at Lambley
Signalman at Lingdalc Branch
junction
to Kilton Mines
§ See instructions in paragraph 6, page 278..
- •
For Regulations
see pages
See Block
Regulations
and pages
278-0,285-6•
O. 1842).
278-9
278-9
278-9
278-9
-78-9
278-9
(O. 7436),
278-9
278-9
1
2 278-9-286
7
8
-
278-9
9
-
2
8
6 278-9
. (0.B.T. 412)
287
See Block
Regulations
278-9
See Block
Regulations
and regulations
on
pages 287-8
278-9
278-9
2
7
278-9-
8
-
278-9
9

LINE.
Lingdale Branch Junction
to Lingdale Mines
Loftus and Liverton Mines
Merrybent Branch :—
Merr
y
bent (Commencing at No. 4 Stop signal
leading from Acklam Branch)
J uand
Acklam Bank Head
n c
tChoppington i Junction and Neth-
o n erton Colliery Sidings
a
n Lemington Point
d
B
a
rJunction
t
oPlatte
Lane Junction and. Nor-
n manby Mines
•
Middlesbro' Goods Yd. Box
Netherton Colliery :—
Newburn Station and
Newcastle, Quayside
Nimmo's Branch, Wellfield
Normanby Branch :—
Page Bank Colliery
Pelton Colliery Branch
Rosedale Branch :—
1. West Rosedale Mine and Blakey
Junction
2. East Rosedale Mines and Blakey
Junction
3. Blakey Junction and Incline Top
Seaton Snook Junction and
Seaton Snook
Shildon Lodge Colliery
Branch :—
Shildon Gas Works Crossing and
Shildon Lodge Colliery
Shotton Colliery Janet. &
Shotton Colliery Sidings
Silksworth Colliery :—
Silksworth Junction ad Colliery •
Sldnningrove and Carlin
How Junction
Skelton and Park Pit
South Blyth Staiths :—
I From a notice board fixed south
of No. I spout to telephone
box at summit of stains
2. From telephone box at summit
of Staiths to a notice board
north of No b spout.
ItSouth Medomsley junct.
and South Medomsley
Colliery
Single Lines.—Continued.
WORKED BY.
Round staff with tw..
,
rings
brass
Round brass staff •
Round brass staff •
Round brass staff
Staff only
Round brass staff •
Staff with round handle •
Staff • •
Round brass staff •
Staff
Round brass staff •
One ring •
Two rings.
Three rings
Staff and two tickets
No staff
Stall
Electric Tablet •
Round braku staff •
Round brass staff •
Round staff • •
Square staff
Staff with round handle
Staff or Tablet
kept in charge of
Signalman at Lingdale Branch
Junction
Signalman at Lr_ftus Station.
Signalman at Merrybent Jct.
Signalman at Middlesbrough
Goods Yard box.
Signalman at Choppington
Junction
Signalman at Newborn Station
Signalman at Argyle Street
Box
Signalman at Wellfleld junct.
Signalman at Platte Lane •
Man at Bank Head Box
Pointsman a', South Side Box.
Shed Foreman at West Rosedale
and man at Blakey
Junction. When 00.13 one
engine in steam n the
branch all the rings are
secured together and iiept
- in charge of Shed Foreman
at West Rosedale
Signalman at Seaton Snook
Junction
Signalman at3hotton
Junction Box.
Signalman at Junction and
.Colliery
Signalman at Carlin How
Junction
Signalman at Slapewath Jct.
Staff kept in telephone box a
summit of Staiths
Signalman cit South Medomsley
Junction
It See instructions in paragraph 3, page 278.
281
For Regulations
see page
278-9
278-9
278-9
278-9 and
288
(O. 71(11).
278-9-287
278-9
278-9-188
278-9
278-9
278-9 288-9
1
2
7
8
-
9
-
2
8
9
278-9
278-9
289-290
278-9
See Tablet
Regulation&
278-9-283-4
278-9
278-9-290
278-9

282 S i n g l e Li
nes.—Continued.
LINE.
Stanghow Junct. &Mines
Stoneferry Junction and
Stoneferry Goods Station
Swalwell Colliery and
Derwenthaugh
Tanfield Branch :—
1. Bnker's Bank Head and Bowes'
Bridge •
2. Bow- s' Bridge and Tanfield Lea:
Thirsk South Junction and
Thirsk Town Station
Throckley Colliery :—
Throckley Junction and Colliery
Tod Point & Tees Breakwater
Tow Law and Sunniside
1[§Trimdon Colliery :—
Trimdon Station Box and Trimdon
Colliery
Tweedmouth Dock
Upleatham Junction and
Mines
Usworth Colliery :—
Colliery Junction Box and Colliery.
Washington Colliery :—
Washington South Junction and
Colliery
Waterhouses Goods Crossing
and Hedley Hill
Colliery
§West Sleekburn and
Colliery :—
West Sleekburn Junction and
Colliery
Wheatley Hill Colliery :—
Wheatley Hill Colliery Junction
and Wheatley Hill Colliery
Whitwood Branch :—
Whitwood Junction Box and
Pottery Street Crossing
Widdrington Colliery :—
Widdrington Colliery Junction and
Colliery
Widdrington Station :—
Widdrington Station and Stobswood
Colliery
York, Foss Islands Branch:
Burton Lane Junction Box and
Foss Islands
WORKED BY.
Round brass staff
Round brass staff
Staff with round handle
Staff with ticket
Staff with one ring
Staff
Plain brass staff
Round brass staff
Staff with round handle
Staff and ticket
Staff with round handle
Round brass staff
Plain brass staff
Plain brass staff
Plain round staff
Staff with round handle and
one ticket
Staff
Staff with one ring and
one ticket
Staff with ound handle
Staff with round handle
Staff with one ring and
four tickets.
Staff or Tablet
kept in charge of
Signalman at Stanghow Jct. 278-9
Porter Signalman at Stone- 9 & 10
ferry Junction Box
Signalman at Derwenthaugh
Junction
11 See instructions in page 3 paragraph 278.
§ See instructions in paragraph 6 page 278.
For Regulations
see pages
278-0
1
.
FSignalman
at Thirsk South 278-9-291
Junction Box
o
r
e
Signalman a t Newburn 278-9
m Station
Signalman at Tod Poin 278-0-201 •
a
n
a
Signalman at Tow Law Jet. 278-9
t
B
oSignalman
at Triradon Station 27 8-9
w box
e
Goods Foreman, Tweedmouth 278-9
s
'
Signalman .4 Upleatham 278-9
B Juncton
r
i
d
Signalman at Usworth Colliery 278-9
g
e
2Signalman
at Washington 278-9
South Junction
7
8Signalman
at Waterhouses 278-9
-
Goods Crossing
0
-
2
9
Signalman at West Sleekbum 278-9
9 Junction
Signalman at Wheatley Hill 278-9
Colliery Junction Box
Signalman at Whitwood Jet. 278-9-292,
Signalman at Widdrington
Colliery Junction
Signalman at Widdrington 278-9
Station
Signalman at Burton Lane 278-9-292 •
Junction

Single Lines.—Continued. 2 8 3
Additionai Regulations applicable to certain of the lines shewn
in the list on pages 279-282.
BILLINGHAM BECK BRANCH.
(1). The single line between the boxes named is worked in accordance
with the Regulations for Train Signalling on Single lines of Railway on the
Electric Train Tablet Block system with the following modification
(2). Up Trains. In clear weather as soon as an Up train has arrived
at the North Shore Junction Up Home Signal, the tablet must be handed
to the signalman, and if a following train is required to enter the section
before the Train out of section signal has been given, the tablet must be
placed in the tablet instrument and the second train may be accepted by
the signalman 'rum the box in the rear under the Caution signal, which
must be acknowledged by the signalman in the rear. The signalman
giving the Caution signal must then hold his bell plunger in to allow the
signalman in the rear to withdraw a tablet, and the signalman at the latter
box must then stop the train or engine and warn the driver to proceed
cautiously, informing him why it is necessary that he should do so. He
must then give the Train entering section signal which must be acknowledged
in the usual way.
(3). Down Trains. In clear weather as soon as a Down train has arrived
at the Haverton Hill South Down Home signal, the tablet must be handed
to the signalman, and if a following train is required to enter the section
before the Train out of section signal has been given, the tablet must be
placed in the tablet instrument and the second train may be accepted by
the signalman from the box in the rear under the Caution signal which must
be acknowledged by the signalman in the rear. The signalman giving the
Caution signal must then hold his bell plunger in to allow the signalman in
the rear to withdraw a tablet, and the signalman at the latter box must
then stop the train or engine and warn the driver to proceed cautiously,
informing him why it is necessary that he should do so. He must then
give the Train entering section signal which must be acknowledged in the
usual way. ( O . 7146).
CARLIN HOW JUNCTION, CARLIN HOW MINES SIDINGS,
AND SKINNINGROVE SIDINGS.
1.
• Junction - is responsible for the custody of the staff, and the Station Master
at Sldnningrove is responsible for the working of the line. No train must
T
• enter upon the single line unless the staff is at the end at which it is about
• to enter. h When it is necessary that trains should precede each other from one
end e of the single line the driver of the last engine must carry the staff, and the
driver l or drivers of the preceding engine or engines will be held responsible for
seeing
i
the staff before entering upon the single line.
n
e
i
s

284 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
Carlin How Junction, Carlin How Mines Sidings, and
Ski nni ngrove Sidi ngs.—(Continued).
2.—In the case of double trains with an engine at each end, unless there is
another train to follow, the driver of the rear engine must carry the staff.
3.—Should the driver of an engine carrying the staff require to enter the single
line at Carlin How Junction for the purpose of going to the Carlin How Mines,
and a train for Sk-inningrove Sidings has preceded it, the driver of the engine
going to the Skinningrove Sidings must wait below the Junction to the Carlin
How Mines and obtain the staff from the driver of the engine going to Carlin
How Mines before proceeding to Skinningrove Sidings.
4.—On returning to Carlin How Junction the train may leave the Carlin How
Mines without the staff, but the driver must, before entering upon the single
line, satisfy himself that the staff is at the Skinningrove Sidings_ and under such
circumstances the guard will be held responsible for protecting his train whilst
coming out of the Carlin How Mines Sidings from another train which might
be approaching from the Skinningrove Sidings.
5.—Should the train not have left the Carlin How Mines Sidings when the
last train from the Skinningrove Sidings passes there, the driver of the engine
of the latter must transfer the staff to the fireman of the engine at Carlin How
Mines Siding.
6.—In stormy weather the loads of trains are to be reduced, the Skinningrove
Stationmaster to decide what reduction should be made. When the rails are
greasy or in stormy weather the men working the train must use their own
judgment as to how many brakes should be pinned down.
7.—Engines will propel vans or trains with Van in leadinab position from
Carlin How Junction to the Kilton Embankment when descending, and from
Skinningrove Sidings to the Kilton Embankment when ascending.
(G. 13-3-13). (O. 7588).
CASTLEFORD EAR' BRANCH.
1.—On the down journey the train must stop at Wheldale Road Bridge until
the driver receives a hand signal from the gateman that all is clear at the level
crossing, and also an all-right signal from the assistant guard.
2.—The assistant guard must precede the train from Wheldale Road Bridge
to see the points are right and the road clear in the yard.
3.—Engine to be in front and guard's van in rear in both directions.
4.—Pilot engines with saddle or side tanks must only be used, and must in
all cases go down bunker first.
5.—The speed must not exceed four miles per hour.

Single Li nes.—Continued. 2 8 5
CH I LTON BRANCH.
Chilton Junction, Gipsy Lane, and Chilton Crossing Signal Boxes.
I.--The single line between the boxes named is worked in accordance with
the Regulations for Train Signalling on Single lines of Railway worked under
the Electric Train Tablet Block system, with the following modifications
2.—Up Trains. When it is necessary for a train to be worked from Chilton
Junction to Gipsy Lane in two or three portions, the tablet must be retained
by the Engine Driver until the last portion of the train has been worked forward
to Gipsy Lane box.
3.--In clear weather as soon as an Up train has arrived at the Gipsy Lane or
Chilton Crossing Up Home signal, the tablet must be handed to the signalman
except as provided for in Clause 2, and if a following train is required to enter
the section before the Train out of section signal has been given, the tablet must
be placed in the tablet instrument and the second train may be accepted by the
signalman from the box in the rear under the Caution signal, which must be
acknowledged by the signalman in the rear. The signalman giving the Caution
signal must then hold in his bell plunger to allow the signalman in the rear to
withdraw a tablet, and the latter must then stop the train or engine and warn
the driver to proceed cautiously, informing him why it is necessary that he
should do so. He must then give the Train entering section signal, which must
be acknowledged in the usual way.
4.—Down Trains. In clear weather as soon as a Down train has arrived at
the Gipsy Lane Down Inner Home signal, the tablet must be handed to the
signalman, and if a following train is required to enter the section before the
Train out of section signal has been given, the tablet must be placed in the
tablet instrument and the second train may be accepted by the signalman
at Gipsy Lane from Chilton Crossing under the Caution signal, which must be
acknowledged by the signalman at the latter box. The signalman at Gipsy
Lane must then hold in his plunger to allow the signalman at Chilton Crossing
to withdraw a tablet, and the signalman at the latter box must then stop the
train or engine and warn the driver to proceed cautiously, informing him why
it is necessary that he should do so. He must then give the Train entering
section signal, which must be acknowledged in the usual way.
5.--In clear weather as soon as a Down train has arrived at the Chilton
Junction Down Inner Home signal, the tablet must be handed to the signalman,
and if a following train is required to enter the section before the Train
out of section signal has been given, the tablet must be placed in the tablet
instrument and the second train may be accepted by the signalman at Chilton
Junction from Gipsy Lane under the Caution signal, which must be acknowledged
by the signalman at the latter box. The signalman at Chilton Junction
must then hold in his plunger to allow the signalman at Gipsy Lane to withdraw
a tablet, and the signalman at the latter box must then stop the train
or engine and warn the driver to proceed cautiously, informing him why it is
necessary that he should do so. He must then give the Train entering section
signal which must be acknowledged in the usual way. The train so accepted
must be held at the Chilton Junction Down Outer Home signal until the line
is clear to the Inner Home signal.
6.—Passing of Trains at Gipsy Lane Box. A DOW11 train must not be allowed
to pass the Down Outer Home signal at Gipsy Lane unless accepted by the
signalman at Chilton Junction, or an assurance has been received from the
latter by telephone that such train will be accepted before sending an Up
train.
,

286 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
Chilton Branch--Continued.
Chilton Crossing.—
In the event of a train arriving from Leasingthorne simultaneously with the
arrival of one from Gipsy Lane, the latter must draw into the Chilton Colliery
line clear of the trap points ; after the train from Leasingthorne has arrived at
Chilton Crossing the signalman must obtain the staff from the dEiver and hand
it to the guard of the train to Leasingthorne for transfer to his driver. The
guard will then manipulate the ground frame and turn the train on to the
Leasingthorne Branch.
Chilton Colliery.—
The arrangements admit of trains working to Chilton Colliery while the staff
is at Leasingthorne. Trains for Chilton Colliery to stop short of the crossover
near the ground frame. The guard will then manipulate the ground frame and
allow the engine to run round the train via Chilton Crossing. Before placing
the signals from Leasingthorne to danger, the guard must satisfy himself that
no other train is within sight. ( O . 1842).
FORCETT BRANCH.
1.—Drivers of engines or trains requiring to travel from the New Quarry to
the Old Quarry or Goods Yard must in all cases be in possession of the
Eppleby and New Quarry staff.
2.—The Forcett Quarry Company will arrange for a man being in attendance
at Eppleby on the arrival and departure of all engines or trains who will have
charge of the staffs and tickets there.
3.—The Forcett Quarry Company's Clerk, stationed at the New Quarry office;
will have charge of the staff and ticket working at that place.
4.
for - an incoming train, care must be taken to see that this is done before the
inward train leaves Forcett Junction.
W
5.--It must be understood that trains travelling to and from the Quarries
shall
h
not approach the Eppleby Engine Shed from opposite directions at the same
time, e also that engines must not foul the engine shed line until the driver is in
possession n of either the train staff or a train staff ticket.
i6.—The
person handing a staff to a driver must inform him whether an
engine t or train has preceded him. When the driver has a ticket he will know
that no train has preceded him.
i
s
n
e
c
e
s
s
a
r
y
f
o
r
t
h
FRANKLAND JUNCTION AND FRAIVIWELLGATE BANK FOOT,
INCLUDING FOSTER'S SIDING.
1.--In the event of both staff and ticket being in use on the Branch, no
other engine must be allowed to enter the single line until the staff has been
returned and given to the signalman, except as shewn below.
2.—When two engines for the Colliery Branch arrive at the Junction
simultaneously, or any engine arrives and a second engine is timed to arrive
shortly afterwards, the driver of the first engine must take the ticket, leaving
the staff for the second engine, and on return from the Colliery the last engine
must carry the staff.
3.—When one engine is already in the Colliery and another arrives, the
guard of the second train must walk to the Bank Foot in order to arrange
with the guard of the first train as to the working. • ( O . 4148).

Single Lines.—Continued. 2 8 7
GARDEN LANE BRANCH, SOUTH SHIELDS.
The Guard and Assistant Guard of the train working the Branch will be held:
responsible for opening the gates and protecting the level crossings. The guards.
must obtain the keys for the gates from the signalman at Harton Junction or
Garden Lane boxes, and after opening the gates, the two guards must walk
forward with red flags in their hands and stand one on each side of the railway.
As soon as the road is clear they must signal the driver forward at CAUTION,
a,nd prevent pedestrians from crossing until the train has passed, after which the
level crossing gates must be closed against the railway. ( O . 4755).
HEDWORTH LANE TO BROMLEY WHIN&
This line must only be used for traffic from Hedworth Lane or Boldon Colliery
going in the direction of Brockley Whins Station, and no engine or train must
be permitted to run on the loop line from Brockley Whine Station to Boldon
Colliery or Hedworth Lane signal-box.
HEPSCOTT AND NETHERTON. INDEPENDENT TO NETHERTON.
The Single Line Regulations only apply to that part of the Branch between
the Up Stop signal, worked from Choppington Colliery Box, and the Netherton
Colliery Sidings.
The portion of the line between Choppington Junction and the Down Stop
Signal is not worked in accordance with the Regulations for working Single Lines,
and engines or trains will be allowed to enter thereon for refuge purposes or for
the purpose of working at Messrs. Foggo's Brickyard Siding, while another engine
in possession of the staff is at Netherton Colliery Sidings or standing at the Up
Stop signal.
A key is attached to the staff for the gate leading into the Branch, and the
driver will be held responsible for seeing that the gate is locked by the fireman
after the engine has passed through in either direction.
HYLTON, SOUTHWICK AND nolONKWEARMOUTH BRANCH,
BETWEEN PRIESTIKAN'S SIDING AND WEARIVIOUTH
COLLIERY SIGNAL BOXES.
During ate time Priestman's Siding Box is closed, ordinary double line working
is maintained between that box and Wearmouth Colliery box, the left hand
line being the running line in qach direction, and the section will be worked
under the Regulations for Working Goods Lines shewn on pages 14
-when
Priestman's Siding box is open, the Down line from Priestman's Siding
box to Wearmouth Colliery box is worked as a single line under the regulations
16, for train b signalling u t by electric tablet, and the Up line from Wearmouth Colliery
box to Priestman's Siding box will be used exclusively by the branch goods
train, which may work in either direction upon it.
The Goods Porter at Southwick Goods Yard must secure the points leading
from the Up line to the Goods Yard immediately after the departure of No. 1
Pilot from the yard. He must then convey the key of the padlock to Wearmouth
Colliery box and hand it over to the signalman there. The latter will
then inform the signalman at Priestman's Siding box that he has received the
key, and the latter box will then be closed and ordinary double line working
resumed.

288 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
Hylton, Southwick, and Monkwearmouth Branch.—Continued.
The signalman at Wearmouth Colliery box will hand the key of the padlock
securing the points leading to Southwick Goods Yard to the guard of the first
train leaving Monkwearmouth after 8-0 a.m. which requires to enter Southwick
Goods Yard. Immediately he does this single line working will be resumed
until the key is returned.
Under no circumstances must Priestman's Siding box be closed and tablet
working suspended until the key securing Southwick Goods Yard points is
brought to the Wearmouth Colliery box. ( O . 2709).
MIDDLESBROUGH GOODS YARD AND ACKLA1 BANK HEAD.
Tie signals at the bank head must be worked by guards, and placed by them
at danger when detaching is completed and they are ready for leaving:
When the train consists of not more than 20 wagons, the guard will ride on
the first wagon ; and in the same way if a train consists of more than a bank
load, and has to be worked up in two trips, the guard will ride on the first
wagon on the first trip, remaining on the bank to receive the second portion
of the load.
When the load consists of more than 20 wagons, but not more than can be
propelled in one trip, the guard must walk up the bank in order to see the points
and work the signals, whilst the engine runs round the train. The driver will
commence to propel the load up the bank eight minutes in daylight or ten
minutes after dark after the guard has left, and the signalman' at the goods yard
signal-box will not lower his signal until this time has elapsed.
In order to admit the working of traffic between the Tees Side running line
and Acklam Hole, Acklam Branch Yard and Acklam Bank on Sundays, after
Middlesbrough Goods Yard box closes, the signalman going off duty .must lock
the lever in the box in its normal position with a special key provided for the
purpose, remove the key from the lock and transfer it to the lock attached to
the ground lever situated near to No 6 points, and thus enable the Works
Enginemen to work the latter points as desired.
PAGE BANK COLLIERY BRANCH, SPENNYMOOFL
1.--The man in charge of the staff at Bank Head to hold the safety
points, and before any train is allowed to start, must satisfy himself that
the guard is in attendance on the wagon brakes, a sufficient number of which
must be applied to ensure the train descending safely.
2.----Freight trains descending the Bank must not consist of more than
25 wagons, or 160 tons, and the guard in charge must apply the necessary
brakes and ride on the last wagon. •
3.—The guard, before starting from the Wear Bridge Sidings at the Bank
Foot, must examine the brakes of the last two wagons of his train, and, if
defective, must shunt them off and take on other wagons with brakes in
proper working order. He must ride on the last wagon of the train, and
in the event of any wagons breaking loose from the engine he must
immediately put down sufficient brakes to bring them to a stand.

Single Lines.—Continued. 2 8 9
Page Bank Colliery Branch.—Continued.
4.—Trains conveying the workmen must only consist of the carriages
and vans provided for the purpose.
5.—Messrs. Vell Brothers to provide a guard to take charge of the trains
by which the workmen may be conveyed ; the guard of the mineral train
must, however, accompany each train and render such assistance, under
the instructions of Messrs. Bell's guard, as may be necessary to ensure safety
in working.
6.—The engine or engines must be in the leading position in each
•direction, except when working double loads up the Bank by two engines,
In which case an engine must be attached at each end.
7.—The speed of the trains must not exceed 15 miles per hour. (0, 7425)
ROSEDALE BRANCH.
In cases when two engines are working on the Rosedale Branch at the same
time, the driver of the first engine to leave Rosedale West must personally see
the ring for the West Rosedale and Blakey Junction section, and leave it for
the second engine. • He must take possession of and carry the ring for the section
of the line he is going to work over from Blakey Junction, i.e., Incline Top or
East Rosedale, as the case may be. The second driver to carry the ring for West
Rosedale and Blakey Junction, also the ring for the section he is going to work
over from Blakey Junction.
On arrival at Blakey Junction, the second engine driver must leave the ring
for the section West Rosedale and Blakey Junction in the Staff Cabin. The
driver of the first engine to return from Blakey Junction to West Rosedale must
attach the ring he has been working with to the West Rosedale and Blakey
Junction ring and leave them both in the Staff Cabin, in order that the driver
of the second engine may know he is the last one from Blakey Junction to
West Rosedale. All the rings to be carried by the last engine from Blakey
Junction to • West Rosedale. ( O . 5416).
SHILDON LODGE COLLIERY BRANCH.
1.—A stall is not provided for this line, which is worked upon the principle
that only one engine is to be allowed on the branch at one time. The
branch commences at Shildon Gas Works Crossing and terminates at the Shildon
Lodge Colliery. The shunter at the former place is in charge of the working.
2.—The entrance to the Soho Fields Siding is from this line, and the key of
the points controlling the entrance is kept in the Gas House. When an engine
has entered these sidings, and the points have been locked, an engine may be
allowed to proceed to Shildon Lodge Colliery. The engine when proceeding
from Shildon Sidings to Shildon Lodge Colliery must draw the load from
Shildon Sidings to St. John's Road Crossing.
:3.—When an engine is at Shildon Lodge Colliery and one is required to go to
Soho Fields Siding, it must travel from the Gas Works Crossing on the loop line,
and must not pass on to the colliery 'line immediately at the East side of St,
John's Road Crossing, until the guard has satisfied himself that the first engine
has not left the Colliery. When the engine has got into the Soho Fields Sidings,
it must not leave there until the guard has satisfied himself that there is no
engine on the line from Shildon Lodge Colliery, and when
- it must this return h to a the s Gas bWorks e eCrossing n by the loop line.
d o n e .

290 - S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
Shildon Lodge Colliery Branch.—Continued.
4.
must - be allowed to pass the Gas Works Crossing, and a second engine must not
be allowed to enter either the single line or the loop line until it has returned*-
A
ft 5..—Drivers when running over this line must use great caution when approaching
er Soho Fields Siding, and be prepared to stop short of any obstruction.
s6.---The
shunter is only on duty from 6-0 a.m. to 5-30 p.m. If an engine is
required u on the branch after he leaves, special arrangements must be made by
the Yard Master.
n
s
SOUTH BLYTH STAITHS.
e
t
In the event of either of the pilots leaving the Staiths for the purpose of
working the Brickyard Siding, Gas Works Siding, or going to Shed for Loco.
purposes, a the staff must be taken to the telephone box at the summit by the
Fireman n or Guard, unless the Staithmaster makes arrangements to the contrary,
in d which case the Staithmaster will be responsible for the staff. In every case
when work has ceased at both Staiths the staffs for each section must be taken
to dthe
telephone box at the summit of the Staiths, where they must remain,
until u required again.
r
i
TANIFIELD BRANCH.
n1.--The
section between Bowes Bridge and Bakers Bank Head is worked?
by g a staff and ticket. The staff is lettered "Bakers Bank Head and Bowes.
Bridge," f and the staff and ticket are to be used together all day long, except
(a) o in the morning, when the engine that works on Lobley Hill will take the
ticket and leave it at Bakers Bank Head in charge of the Bank Head man, and
the g Bowes Bridge engine which follows will carry the staff to Bakers Bank Head.
(b) g At night, when finishing work, the Bowes Bridge engine on its last trip will
run
y
with the ticket from Bakers Bank Head to Bowes Bridge, leaving the staff'
in charge of the Bank Head man, who will hand it to the driver of the Lobby
Hill w engine on its arrival at the Bank Head to carry when running from Bakers.
Bank e Head to Bowes Bridge.
a2.--An
engine passing between Bowes Bridge and Lobby Hill will always use
the t rope when running Bakers Bank and be treated as a set. In case of accident
or
h
any special cause, the Traffic Foreman at Bowes Bridge may make special'
arrangements for an engine running the Bank without the rope, and he will be
responsible e for seeing that the Bank is kept clear for the engine when doing so...
r 3—When it is necessary for the engine to run over the points at Bakers Bank
Foot a in order to Change from one line to another while a set is running on the
Bank, n the engine must follow the empty, or up-going set very closely, and the
person d in charge of the Bank Foot must be ready to give the necessary signal
to stop the set in case of anything happening to prevent the engine clearing the
incline s in time for the loaded set. Under such circumstances the guard must
also n pull the signal rope as an extra precaution.
o 4.--When an engine is to be sent on the inclines from Bakers Bank Foot
during w the time that the inclines are working to start a set that is sticking, the
engine-men
s
are t6 keep a particularly sharp look-out and take special care to
get off the incline in sufficient time to avoid being caught by the set that is.
running t down.
o
r
m
s
,

Single Lines.—Continued. 2 9 1
TEES BREAKWATER LINE, REDCAR.
1.---On special occasions the branch may be utilised for the standing of trains
and the following arrangements must be observed :—
2.—A train may be propelled on to the single line. If an engine requires to
leave a train for any purpose it must return to the signal-box, and the staff be
given up to the signalman. A second or any number of trains, so far as the
accommodation will permit, may then be allowed to enter the branch. The
staff must be obtained from the signalman in the usual way in each case, and
care must be exercised in pi opening towards the train or trains standing on the
single line. The trains must, as for as possible, be marshalled and placed in
the branch in proper order for departure.
3.—The train engines may be allowed to enter the branch for the purpose of
drawing out their respective trains. Guards and others responsible for placing
the trains in position must avoid fouling the Fisherman's Level Crossing in the
vicinity of the cottages adjacent to the line, and about 500 yards down the
branch.
4.—In the event of an engine failing to remove its train, a second engine may
be admitted to the branch, providing the train engine is able to return to Tod
Point with the staff, or the Fireman conveys the staff and acts in accordance
with Clause " g " of General Rule 221.
5.--After daylight a- red light must be exhibited on the leading vehicle of the
train standing nearest to the entrance to the branch.
G.—Regulation 2 must be observed until the required number of trains have
been placed in and removed from the branch. ( 0 . 3537).
THIRSK SOUTH JUNCTION AND THIRSK TOWN STATION.
The working of Goods trains will be as under :—
[Jr JOURNEY.
On arriving at the Ground Frame on the Leeds line, controlled from the
Thirsk South Junction signal-box, the Guard wiU obtain permission from the
signalman at South Junction to back his train into the dead-end siding, about
140 yards from the dwarf frame.
After re-closing the main line crossover road points and the usual intimation
has been given to the signalman at South Junction, the train will proceed
cautiously to the dead-end, from which point it will be propelled to Thirsk
Town Goods Station.
DOWN JOURNEY.
On leaving Thirsk Town Goods Station the train must be propelled from there
to the dead-end, and afterwards drawn along the siding parallel with the Up
Leeds main line towards South Junction signal-box, thence proceeding to the
Down Marshalling Sidings, when permission has been obtained from the signalman
at South Junction box. ( 0 . 2512).

292 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued. •
WHITWOOD BRANCH.
The normal position of the Pottery Street Crossing Gates is across the line,
and drivers, when approaching, must sound the engine whistle so that the siding
foreman may reverse the position of the gates. ( O . 4200).
YORK.---FOSS ISLANDS BRANCH. •
The Foss Islands Branch is worked with a Staff and Four Tickets.
The person in charge of the Staff and Tickets is at—
Burton Lane Junction Signalman at Burton Lane Junction Box.
Foss Islands 8 - 0 a.m. to 8-0 p.m. (Staff Attendant).
8-0 p.m. to 8-0 a.m., No person in charge.
At the Burton Lane end of the Branch there is a short section of double
line which extends between Burton Lane Junction Signal Box and Burton
Lane Down Advanced Starting signal protecting the fouling point with the
single line.
When the driver of a train about to enter the single line at either the Burton
Lane or Foss Islands end is given a ticket, 2, 3, or 4, the signalman at
;Burton Lane Junction, or Staff Attendant at Foss Islands, must caution the
driver and inform him how long the preceding train has been gone, and the
driver must proceed with caution. The same practice must be followed in the
case of a train carrying the staff when a train has preceded it with a ticket.
When a driver is in possession of the staff and no train has proceeded it with
a ticket, ito will not be necessary to caution the driver at Burton Lane
Junction, but when a driver has possession tof the staff from Foss Islands to
Burton Lane Junction he must keep a sharp look-out and be prepared to
stop clear of the double line section where a train may be standing at the
Burton Lane Junction Home signal on the Up line of the double section at
the end of the Branch.
In the event of there being no one on duty at Foss Islands to receive the staff
from the driver, the latter will retain it for the return journey, and must keep
a sharp look-out as provided for in the preceding paragraph.
On arrival at the Burton Lane Junction Up Home signal of a train carrying
the staff the guard must, if the rear vehicle is clear inside the fouling point,
so advise the driver, and the latter must instruct his fireman to hand the
staff to the Burton Lane junction signalman, who may then allow a down
train to leave for Foss Islands. ( O . 6859).
The following Lines are worked by Electric Bells and Block
indicators, without any Staff, and on the principle that not
more than one engine is to be allowed in the Section at one
time.
lint Junction and Linton Colliery :—
Ashington Loop Box and Ellington Junction Box.
t Ashington Main Line Junction and Ashington Colliery.
Holywell Sidings Box and Burradon Colliery
Fisher Lane Crossing Box and Bazelrigg Junction Box.
East Boldon Junction and Hedworth Lane.
Whitburn Junction and Garden Lane Junction.

Single Lines.—Continued. 2 9 3
Lines worked by Electric Bells and Block Indicators, etc.—Continued.
Broomside and Sherburn Colliery Junction. (See special additional
regulations, pages 293-4).
tHartl400l Station and Harbour Street Crossing. (See special add-
, itional regulations, page 294).
Princess Street Crossing and, Harbour Street Crossing.
Harelaw Branch.
Annfield Plain Crossing and East Pontop Colliery
(Block Indicators are not provided).
Pesspool Branch
Pesspool Junction and South Hetton Colliery. (See special
additional regulations, page 294).
tWingate Colliery
• Wingate Colliery Junction and Level crossing.
tCharity Junction and Stooperdale Junction
The following regulations are in force on the lines referred to :--
1.--In the event of a failure of the bells or instruments so that the necessary
signals cannot be received or forwarded, the single line must be worked by
pilotman under the usual Single Line Regulations until the ordinary mode of
working is again established.
Any defect in the bells or instruments must be at once reported to the
telegraph lineman.
.2.--In the event of an engine or train becoming disabled and requiring assistance,
or an accident occurring which renders it impossible for the engine to
proceed, the fireman must proceed to that end of the section whence assistance
can be obtained, and inform the signalman or person in charge there of the circumstances,
who must, on receipt of such information, allow a second engine
to be on the line. The relieving engine must be accompanied by the fireman of
the disabled engine or train, who must explain to the driver where and under
what circumstances the disabled engine or train is situated.
The driver of the disabled engine must not allow it to be moved until the
assisting engine has arrived.
The guard of the disabled train, or in the case of a light engine the fireman
will be held responsible for the safe and proper working of the line until both
engines have left it, and it is again clear, and must also inform the signalman
at that end of the section at which both engines leave, that the line is clear.
On Lines marked thus Engines or trains are allowed to run coupled.
Special Additional Regulations.
BETWEEN SHERBURN COLLIERY JUNCTION AND
BROOMS! DE SIGNAL-BOXES.
1.--Electric Bell communication and Block Indicators are provided, and the
Single line will be worked in accordance with the Standard Block Telegraph
Regulations for Single lines of railways, subject to the following modifications
(a) When it is necessary for a train to enter the Single line at Broomside for
the purpose of shunting in the Broomside Sidings, the train may be
allowed to pass the Up Home signal worked from Broomside after
the Blocking Back Outside Home Signal signal has been given to
Sherburn Colliery Junction and acknowledged, provided no train has
been accepted on the single line from Sherburn Colliery Junction.

294 S i n g l e Lines.—Continued.
Between Sherburn Colliery Junction and Broomside.—Cohtinued.
(b) In the event of a train requiring to enter the single line at Sherburn
Colliery Junction box while shunting operations are being carried on
under the circumstances referred to in Clause (a), the train may be
accepted by the signalman at Broomside after the engine performing
the shunting operations in the Broomside Sidings has been brought
within the protection of the Down Home signal worked from Broomside.
A train entering the single line at Sherburn Colliery Junction under
such circumstances must be brought to a stand and the driver verbally
warned that the line is only clear to the Home signal. (O. 2304).
PESSPOOL JUNCTION AND SOUTH HETTON COLLIERY.
On Saturdays, after the closing signal has been given from South Hetton Colliery,
and acknowledged from Pesspool Junction, a train may be allowed to enter the
branch at Pesspool Junction to proceed to the Colliery and back, the trainmen
being informed of the circumstances, and no other train must be allowed on the
Branch until it has returned. No engine of the Colliery Company must enter
the section without the proper signals having first been exchanged. (O. 6549).
HARTLEPOOL STATION AND HARBOUR STREET CROSSING.
When a train is allowed to enter the single line at either end in accordance
with these regulations, it may use the Old Fish Quay Sidings, and, during the
time these sidings are being made use of, no other train must be allowed to
enter upon the single line (except as stated in Regulation 2, page 293) until the
signalman towards whose box the train was proceeding has received an assurance
from the guard or shunter working with the train that the single line has
been cleared ; the guard or shunter must give this information.
The signalman receiving this intimation may then give the TRAIN OUT OF
SECTION signal to the rear box, and another train may be allowed to pass over
the single line.
At which ever end such train enters the single line the signalman concerned
must advise the driver that a train is already at the Old Fish Quay SA ogs
and warn him to proceed cautiously, so that in the event of the single line being
fouled from any cause he may be able to bring his train promptly to a stand.
Before resuming any shunting operations which will in any way foul the single
line, the guard or shunter must obtain the permission of the signalmen at both
ends of the single line, without which the single line must not be fouled.
When the train is ready to leave the Old Fish Quay Sidings for Harbour Street
Crossing Box, the guard or shunter must advise the signalman at Hartlepool
Station Box. If the train is proceeding to Hartlepool Station Box, the guard
or shunter must advise the signalman at Harbour Street Crossing Box, and when
the line is clear and these regulations have been complied with, the signalman
will give the necessary permission, without which the single line must not be
fouled. ( 0 . 2555)
1

A-
ccidents, Appliances on trains
Accidents, Dama
g
Accidents, Extracts re
Accidents, Reporting of
e Acklam t o Bank Head—Middlesbrough
g oGoods o d Yard s
Advanced Starting Signals
Albany Road Crossing, Gateshead
Aldin Grange—Occupation Crossing.
Alighting from wrong side of train
Allendale—Hexham line •
Alnwick—Coldstream line
Alston—Haltwhistle line
_Amble Junction—Chevington Line
Animals, Transit of
Annfield Plain Branch
Appliances on trains, Accidents
_Armley Sidings, Vehicles for transfer
Arthington, Trap Siding
Arthington—Vehicles to transfer at
Articles, unusual length or weight
Articles falling from Locomotives
kshington Colliery Line
Assistant engine in rear of trains
Autocars, attaching vehicles as trailers
Autocars, Custody of staff, etc.
Autocars, Headlights
,Autocars, passing over loose points.
Autocars, shunting of at stations
Autocars, Smoking in first class compartments
Autocars, working of during snowstorms
• •
Autocars, working of
Autocars, Coupling and Uncoupling
Automatic Couplings, Separating
Automatic Couplings, Working of •
Axholme Joint Line
Ayton Bank Mines line
B.
Backing Signals
Bakers Bank—Bowes Bridge Line
Ballast Trains, Propelling of
Ballast Trains, Working between two
boxes
Bardon Mill Level Crossing
.Barhaugh Colliery—Working of trains
Barnard Castle—Bishop Auckland Line
Barnard Castle and Middleton-in-
Teesdale Line
Barrows, Movement of, at Stations
Barrows, Securing of
Barton' Merrybent Junction
Battersby—Grosmont line
Battersb,y—Ingleby Incline
Battersby—Nunthorpe junction line
Beal and Goswick—Up Independent
Beamish Jct.—Trains up Vigo Bank
Beckhole Branch—Grosmont
Bedlington Colliery line
INDEX.
PAGES.
124-6
170
85
84-5
281-8
24
195
194
151
264-277
257-8
263
261-'276
178
194
124-6
218
221
221
169
102
292
113-7
132
16
93
152
166
170
131
102-15'2
28
128
29-30
258
280
40
282-290
162
179
192
190
260
259
27
58
281
259
279
269
188
194
280
279
Bedlington—Platform line .
Belah and Bowes—Snowstorms
Belah Viaduct . . .
Belmont—Hutton Gate line . •
Belmont Jet.—Durham Goods line .
Belmont Mines Siding . . .
Billingham Beck Branch. . .
Bishop Auckland—Barnard Castle line
Bishop Auckland and Blackhill .
Bishop Auckland—Ferryhill .
Bishop Auckland—Platform line
Bishopley Branch . .
Blackhill—Crook line . • . .
Blakey Jct.—Rosedale Mines lines .
Blocking Back Outside Home Signal.
Block Telegraph System . .
Block Telegraph Regulations.—
PAGES.
▪ 2 5 9
• 2 0 0 199
280
279
207
279-283
260
2,60
260
259
279
259
281-9
167-S
16
Extracts from . . . . 17-23
Block Instruments—Non-attention . 5 9
Block Sections, over 400 yards,
B.T.R. 4 (c) 2 4 4
Block Sections, under 400 yards
B.T.R. 4 (a) & (c) 241-2
Boards outside Signal boxes . 2 4
Bogie Vehicles—G.N. Co.'s trains 1 4 9
Bogie Vehicles, Re-railing of . 7 2
Boulby Mines Siding . . 2 0 5 - 6
Bowden Close Quarry, Willington 2 0 1
Bowes and Belah—Snowstorrns . 2 0 0
Bowes Bridge—Tau field Lea Line . 282-290
Bowers Allerton C,Ilicry Junction
Sidings, Kippax 2 1 9
Brackenhill Light Railway . . ' 279
Braked Freight Trains . . 1 7 2 - 4
Brake Pins, Third Rail . . . 1 7 4
Brake Pipes, Short Westinghouse . 57-8
Brake Sticks . . . • . . . 3 4
Braked Vehicles—Distinguishing of . 1 2 6
Brakes, Communication chain . 129-131
Brakes, Continuous . . . • 12
Brakes—Failure .
of . •
Brake Fitters—Protection of .
,6 Brakes, 7 1 Foreign 2 8 Companies .
.
.
1
67-9
1 2 6
Bramhope Tunnel . • • . 2 2 2
Brampton Jct. and Brampton Town. 2 6 1
Branson Colliery, Working at . •
Brandon Bank, Mineral trains .
1 9 5
1 9 5
Break-down Vans . . . . 72-5
Brockley Whins—Hedworth Lane line 280-7
Broomfieet, Level Crossing .
Broomhill Colliery line . .
Broomside Junction—Sherburn
2 2 5
. 2 7 6
Colliery Junction line 293-4
B.T.R. Extracts from .
B.T.R., Terminal stations
.
.
1 7 - 2 3
. 234-6
B.T.R. 5. Definition of Clear weather 2 4 4
T.B.R. 5. Where in force . . 244-7
B.T.R. 5. Where not in force . :248-251
B.T.R. Where modified . . . 237-240
B.T.R. Where not in operation , . 2 3 6
Buck-eye Couplings . • . 29-30
Burdale Quarry Siding . . . 2 1 2
Burnhill Jot.--'•Waskerley, 'etc., line . 2 7 9
Burradon—Holywell Sidings line
Butterknowle—Evenwood line .
2 9 2
2 7 9

C.
INDEX.—Continued.
PAGES.
Cambois Colliery line • 2 7 9
Cambokiels Sidings • • • 201-277
Caretakers by Goods trains • • 27-28
Cargo Fleet—Eston line' • • • 2 6 2
Carlin How Jet.—Skinningrove Siding
line • • • • • 281-3-4
Carlin How Junction—Whitby line 2 7 5
Carlisle—Gas Works Siding • 1 9 0
Carriage and Wagon Examiners 6 2 - 5
Carriage cleaners, Protection of 6 5 - 7 .
Carriage doors, Closing of • 5 9
Carriage doors, Locking of; etc. • 1 5 1 .
Carriage trucks, Freight trains • • 171-2 .
Carriages, Four- and six-wheeled on
G.C. trains • • . • • 1 4 9
Carriages on Whitby Branches • 212-3
Carriages, Outside rear van • • 131-114
Carriages, Repairers, Painters, etc. • 1 7 2
Carriages, Slip—Foreign Co.'s o • 100-2
Carriages, 'Westinghouse Pipe only . • 1 2 6
Castleford, Clokies Siding, Moss Street 2 1 3
Castleford East Branch • • • 279-284
Castleford—Garforth line • • 2 6 2
Castleford, Glasslioughton Coll. Sidings 2 1 3
Castleton Bridge, Reception line • 2 1 6
Catch Points • • • • • 180-3
Cattle by Passenger trains • • 133-111
Cattle Wagons on Main Line trains. 1 2 9
Cattle specials, running of • . 1 4 1
Cattle trains, Passengers by • • 2 7
Cattle wagons on special trains • 1 2 8
Cawood—Selby line • • • • 2 7 2
Chain Communication • . • 129-131
Chaining and Toyiroping • • • 7 1
Chains, Side and centre • • . 1 7 1
Chains in contact with Third rail • • 174
Charity Junction—Stooperdale line • 2 9 3
Chevington—Brooro hill Colliery line • 2 7 6
Chilton Branch • • • • 280-5-6
Choppington Colliery line • • 2 8 0
Choppington—Morpeth line • • 2 6 7
Choppington Jct.—Netherton Coll.line278-9-297
PAGES.
Couplings, Emergency • • • 3 1
Coupling Foreign stock to N.E. stock
Coupling large to small wagons • 3 4
Coupling of Engines, Leeds East and
Waterloo . • • • 2 1 7 '
Coupling of Engines, Selby and Gascoigne
Wood • • • • 2 1 5 -
Coupling of Engines, Hesleden and
Kelloe Banks • . • • 1 9 8 '
Coupling—New—on Coaching stock • 3 2 :
Coupling of engines or trains • • 122-3
Coupling of trains—Headlights • 9 0 •
Coupling of trains—Number of wagons 120-2
Coupling of trains, Pickering and
Grosmont • • • • 2 1 2 :
Coupling of trains, Where not to be
done
120-22_
Coupling • of wagons—Side and centre
chains • • . • • 171
Coupling
•
Vacuum fitted and loosely
• coupled trains • • • • 1 2 3 ;
Coupling • wagons, buffers different
lengths • • • • •
Coupling • and Uncoupling Autocars •
3 2 '
2 8
'
Coupling and Uncoupling of Engines 1 2 4
Coronation Siding, Westagte • • 2 7 7
Covered wagons—Position • 1 7 0
Cowpen Co.'s line • • •
Coxhoe Junction—Coxhoe line
2 7
2 8 0
9
.Cox
-Cordodge—Ponteland
line
Crane Tail Wagons .
lod Cranes, Working of •
2
1
•
6
4
•
1 .
6 -
6 9 •
ge Croft Depots—Croft Junction line • 2 8 0 .
Crook Platform Line • • • 2 6 0 '
CCrook—Tow
Law. Freight trains . 200
o,Custody l of Staff, Ticket, or Tablet—
l i.
Autocars • • 1 6
e
Cyclists,
r
Level Crossings 8 6
y
S
. .
-
Clayton's Machines, Fog Signals for • 5 6
Clifton—Kirkby Stephen line • 2 6 5
Clinkers, Hot • • .
124
18-58
Closing of signal boxes •
Coaching stock new coupling •
32
Coaching stock, Freight trains • 171–'2
Coldstream—Alnwick line • • 257-
-Commissioners'
Staiths, Percy Main • 1 8 9
Communication Automatic Brake • 120-131
-8
Company's Workmen, Trains for • 1 0 3
Compartments next engine • • 1 1 9
Compartments, Guards window s • 5 8
Compartments next engine, G.N. trains 1 1 9
Continuous brakes, General instructions 1 2 7
Consett East Junction—Hownes Gill
Junction line • • • 2 8 0
Conveyance of Private Owners'
Engines • • • • • 70-1
Cornforth Lane—Coxhoe Junction line 2 8 0
Cornforth Lane—Tursdale Coll, line. 2 8 0
Couplings, Automatic • • • 1 2 8
Couplings, Cowhead . 3 3
iDamage
to Rolling Stock
• 60-5-165'
dDansom
Lane—B•T.R. 5
225
i Darlington—Tebay line •
• 261-2 ,
Darras Hall Branch •
262'
n
55.
Dating of Fog Signals •
g Deaf Hill Colliery • • • •
280-
Dealers, etc., in charge of Live Stock
27
•
199-
Deepdale Viaduct •
25-
1Defective
Signals • • • •
8
Definition of Clear Weather, B.T.R. 5 211
85.
Delays to Passenger trains, Extracts re
9Delivery
of Goods trains at end of 179:
, journey • • • • • 112
Depots, engines allowed • • • 282'
Derwenthaugh—Swalwell Coll. Branch 168:!
Detaching vehicles—Advising stations
Detention at Home and Starting signals
40-54
Detonating Signala • • •
55
Diamond Hall Jct.—Southwick Jet.
Double-headed trains
198
,
Distant signals worked from rear box
35-39 ,
Diversion of East Coast trains •
77
Diversion of trains via High Level
Bridge • • • •

Diversion of Main Line Trains in
Accident
Doors, Closing of Carriage
Doors of wagons, fastening -
Double Bolster Timber wagons
Double-headed trains headlights
Double-headed trains, Southwick
Branch
Driffield—Engines requiring water
Driffield—Malton line
Driffield-I-Market Weighton line
Drovers, etc., in charge of live stock.
Dummy Vehicle—L. & N.W. trains.
Durham (Elvet)—Murton line
Durham Goods—Belmont Junct. line
Durham—Waterhouses line -
Dutiable Articles, Damage
E.
East Boldon Jet.-Hedworth Lane line
East Coast Trains, Diversion
East Coast Trains, Failure of Engines
Ebchester Sidings
Electric Bells and Block Indicators,
Lines worked by
Electrical Stock Cowhead Couplings
Electric Train Examiners, Newcastle
Electric Train Head and Tail lights.
Electric Stock between Walkergate
and York Shops
Electrified Area. Wagon brake pins
and chains, third rail
Elswick Works, Mineral Trains calling
Emergency Couplings -
Emigrant, Specials
Empty trains and engines from Heaton
Sheds
Empty trains from Elswick to Central
Empty Trains drawn from Station
Platform lines
Empty trains, Greensfield Junction
and Dunston
Empty trains, Scotswood & Newcastle
Empty Vehicles—Vacuum fitted.
Newcastle to York
Engineer's trains
Engine (Assistant) in Rear of Trains
Engine Headlights
Engine Headlights, Darlington yards
Engine Headlights—Hartlepool and
Seaton Carew Ironworks
Engine Headlights—Middlesbrough
District
Engine Headlights, Sheds to Sidings,
Newcastle
Engine Headlights between Shildon
Engine Shed and Coal Stage
Engine Headlights, Cramlington Coal
Co.'s Engines
Engine Headlights, Tyneside Control
Enginemen, Lighted waste on bridges,
etc.
Engine Pilotmen, Duties
INDEX .—Continued.
PAGES.
76
59-151
174
168
90
198
211
266
266
27
149
287
279
273
170
292
77
76
194
292-4
33
65
98
83
174
192
31
144
190
192
57
80
so
193
103
113-117
91-8
98
97
95-8
93
98
93
93-5
124
102
In-
Engine Keys, found on line, etc. .
PAGES.
102
Engines allowed on Depots . .
Engines and Engine and Van, Speed of
112
103
Engines between Central and Gateshead
Sheds . . . . 1 9 3
Engines, Coupling of, between Leeds
East and Waterloo . . . 2 1 7
Engines, Coupling of, Hesleden and
Kelloe Banks . . . . 1 0 3
Engines, Coupling of, between Gascoigne
Wood and Selby . . 215
Engines—Coupling ,
of wagons . - 3 3
Engines, Coupling and uncoupling . 1 2 4
Engines following trains out of platforms
. . . . . 5 7
Engines on East Coast Trains. Failure 7 6
Engines or Trains Coupled . - 122-3
Engines, Persons riding on . . 2 7
Engines, Private Owners . . 6 9
Engincs, Private Owners, Conveyance
Engines Propelling Trans 1 5 3 -
70-1
1 6 1
Engines, Restriction over certain sec-
- tions of line 1 1 1 - 1 2
Engines running round trains .25-26-100
Engines running round trains, Knaresborough
• 2 1 9
Engines Traction, Crossing Railway.
Engines unable to deal with trains
9 0
on gradient 1 7 9
Engines, Where not to be coupled 111-112
Engines with second tender attached,
Signalling of 1 7 8 .
Eppleby—Forcett Junction .278-9-286
Eston Branch 2 6 2
, Evenwood—Butterknowle line 2 7 0
Examination of Heavy or Bulky Articles 169
Examination of Trains • 6 0
Examiners, etc., Protection of • 65-7
Examiners, Carriage and Wagon • 6 2 - a
Examiners—Electric Trains 6 5 -
Exchanging of Tablets • . 2 3
Exceptions to R.C.H. Standard Rule 24-26
Book
Excursion Trains, Working of • 150-1
Excursion Trains. Position of Brake
Vans • • 1 5 1
Explosives on Freight Trains • 1 8 7
Extracts from Block
lations 1 7 - 2 3
-
Exemption from Rule 118 - 86-90
. Engines running round Goods train
Telegraph
on running lines _ .25-26-100
R e g u
-
F.
Failure of Continuous Brakes . . 1 2 3
Failure of Engines, East Coast trains
Fairburn's Occupation Crossing,
7 6 .
Coxlodge Colliery Siding 189
Farmers' Stock,
,
Special . _ . 1 4 4
Ferryhill—Bishop Auckland line . 2 6 0 .
Ferryhill No. I_ Thrislington Coke
Ovens line . 2 8 0

iv.
PAGES.
Fires - • • • • .184-5-187
Fire near Picric Acid •
188
'Maas Lane Jet.--Normanby Mines lines 281
Fog Signals • • •
55
Fog Signals, Period of use •
56
Fog Signals for Clayton's Machines. 56
Fog Signals • • • •
25
Fog Signals, Dating of
55
Forcett Branch • •
Foreign stock coupled to N.E. stock 3'2
Foreign Co.'s Slip Coaches •
100–'2
Forms, Wrong line order •
179
Foss Islands Branch, York • • 282-292
Foster's Siding—Frankland Junction 280-6
Freight Trains without Van in Rear 174-7
Freight Trains, Braked • • 172-4
Freight Trains, Coaching Stock by • 171-2
193
Freight Newcastle Trains' tNo. Forth 3 Junction • • and
FranIdand Jet.—Framwellgate line - 280-6
Frickley Colliery, Wagon Sidings • 215
G.
Ganger, etc., to walk his length • 2 6
Ganger, etc., to be provided with
Time Table, etc. •
Garden Lane Branch • •
Garden Lane Jet•—Whitburn Jct. •
Garesfield Sidings, Derwenthaugh •
Garforth—Castleford line •
Garforth Colliery, East Sidings •
Gateshead—Light Engines to Sheds
Gateshead—DE. & E.C.S. trains to
Newcastle • • • 1 9 3
Gascoigne Wood and Selby—Coupling
of Engines • • • 2 1 5
Gasmen, Protection of • • 6 5 - 7
Gateshead and Pelaw—Goods and
Mineral trains 196-7
Gateshead—Slow line. Working over 1 9 3
Gates, Level Crossing, Lamps burning 8 5
at • • •
Gates worked by Ground Frame 9 0
G.C. and G.E. trains—Side and Tail
Lamps • • • • - 9 9
G.C. trains—Working of four and sixwheeled
vehicles • - 1 4 9
G.C. Bogie Stock t o N.E. Line • 8 3
Geldard Junction and B. Box, G.N.
and G.C. Goods Trains • 2 1 8
Geldard Jct.—Vehicles for transfer. 2 1 8
Gilling—Pickering line • • • 2 6 3
Gipsy Lane—Chilton Junction line • 280-5-6
Girling's Siding between Rowley and
Burnhill • •
Glaisdale Station • • • • •
Glasshoughton Colliery Sidings,
Castleford
G.N. Empty Trains—Four and six.
wheeled vehicles • • •
G.N. Passenger trains, Compartments
next engine • •
Gongs, Code of signals • •
Gongs, Gates worked by ground frames
INDEX.—Continued.
26
287
292
194
262
218
193
200
276
213
149
149
40
90
PAGES.
Gongs, Working of Ground lames at
Sidings • • • • - 102-3
Goods Damaged, Accidents • • 1 0 5
Goods lines—Regulations where
B.T.R. not in operation 14-16
Goods Trains, Passengers by • - 2 7
Goods Trains. Running round to
remove from Running line ' • 25-6
Goods Trains, Delivery of, at end of 1 7 9
journey . • • • •
Goole, Dutch River Low Level and 2 2 4
Potter's Grange • • • * 223-4
Goole, L. & Y. Engine Shed, Dutch
River and Potter's Grange 2 7 2 - 3
Goole—Selby line • • •
Goole, Trains on Up Reception . 2 2 5
Goswick and Beal—Up Independent 1 8 8
Gratuities • . • • 2 4
Great A3rton—Wynns Quarry line 2 8 0
Greenfoot Quarry Siding. - 2 7 7
Grinkle Park Mines • • 2 0 5 - 6
Grosmont—Battersby line • 2 5 9
Grosmont, Beck Hole Branch 2 8 0
Ground Frames, Level Crossings • 9 0
Guards, Clearing luggage • . 1 5 2
• Guards joining or leaving trains on
journey • • • 1 5 2
Guards of Autocars • • 1 5 2
Guards keeping look out • • 1 5 3
Guards, Passenger Trains to Sunderland
• • • . . 1 9 7
Guards testing brakes . • • 1 2 7
Guards to attend to lavatory compartments
• . • • • 1 5 0
Guards working Excursion trains . 150-1
G.W. Passenger Stock out of Gauge. 79-80
H.
Haltwhistle, Plenmeller Colliery 1 9 1 - 2
Haltwhistle—Alston line . • 2 6 3
Harelaw Branch . • • • 2 9 3
Harmby Quarry Siding • • . 209-10
Harperley Colliery Siding . • 2 0 0
Harrogate Long Siding • . 2 2 0
Harrogate, Goods and Dragon Junct. 2 2 0
Harrogate Station Limits. (Special
instructions) 220-1
97
Hartlepool, Headlights • • •
Hartlepool—Central Marine and
Princess Street Crossing 2 9 3
Hartlepool Station-Harbour St. Crossing 293-4
Hartley—Monkseaton line .
Hawes—Northallerton line •
•
2 6 3
268-9
Head and Tail Lights, Electric Trains 9 8
Headlights for engines • . • 91-8
Headlights, Engines between Shildon
Engine Shed and Coal Stage • 9 8
Headlights, Engines, Sheds to Sidings,
Newcastle . • 9 3
Headlights of Autoear • 9 3
Headlights of Freight trains,
Darlington Yards 9 8
Headlights, Hartlepools and Seaton
Carew 9 7
Headlights, Middlesbrough District . 95-8

PAGES.
Headlights, special and exceptional . 9 2
Headlights, Trains coupled on second
engine in front . . . 9 0
Headlights—Cramlington Coal Co.'s. 9 3
Headlights, Tyneside Control . . 93-5
Hedley Hill Colliery-Waterhouses line 2.82
Hedworth Lane-Brockley Whins line 280-7
Hedworth Lane-East Boldon Jet. line 2 9 2
Hemsworth Colliery line . 2 7 9
Hepscott—Netherton line . . 2 8 7
Hesleden Bank—Coupling of Engines 1 9 8
Ilexharn—Allendale line . . . 264-277
Hickleton Maineolliery, Sidings . 2 1 4
High Level Bridge, Engines and
empty trains 1 9 3
High Hirst Westwood, Junction—Linton StoppinColliery
line 2 9 2
,b Ilolywell Goods Sidings—Burradon Colliery.
Sidings line . . 2 9 2
tHome r aSignals i n s . . . 2 4
1 9 4
Home Signals, Detention Placing Trains, at .. etc., 40-54
outside . . . . 1 6 7 - 8
Horns, Shunting, Code . . .
Horse Box Attendant's windows .
4
5
0
8
Horses, etc., Roadside Stations at night 178-9
Horse Specials . . . . 1 4 4
Hownes Gill Junction—Consett East
Junction line . 2 8 0
Hull, Paragon Station . 2 6 4
Hull, Riverside Quay line
Hull—Seamer line . .
.
.
2 0 4
. 2 6 4
Hull—Speed of trains on Dock lines. 1 1 0
Hull—Withernsea line . . . 2 6 4
Hull—Working trains to Riverside
Quay, etc . . . . 225
Hunslet, Working between Neville Hill
and . . . . . 216-7
Hutton Gate, Belmont Mines Siding. 207-280
Mutton Gate—Belmont line . . 2 0 7
Hylton, Southwick—Monkwearmouth
line . . . . . 280-7-8
Index to List of Single Lines
Ingleby Incline—Battersby line
Ingleby's Mill, Tadcaster
International Siding, Felling
Irregular Working Signals, extracts re
Isabella Colliery, Newsham
K.
Mines—Lingdale junction line
Kiltonthorpe •Jct.—Lingdale Branch
Junction line
•Kimblesworth Colliery
Kelloe Bank—Coupling of Engines
Kippax—Sidings at Bowers Merton
Colliery Junction
Iiippax Station Sidings
INDEx.—Contineted.
256
278
223
197
85
280
280
280
280
198
219
219
PAGES.
Kirkby Stephen—Clifton line . 2 6 5
Knaresborough—Engines running
round trains 2 1 9
Knaresborough—Pilmoor line . . 2 6 9
Knaresboro ugh—Branch Siding . 2 1 9
L.
Lads in Signal boxes . . . 5 4
Lambley Station-Lam bley Golly. line 2 8 0
Lampmen, Protection of . . 65-7
Lamps burning on Level Crossing Gates 8 5
Lamps, Lighting of, at Boxes switched
out . . . . . 5 8
Lanchester—Lintz' Green line . • 265-6
L. & N.W. stock coupled to N.E.
stock . . . . 3 2
L. & N.W. Passenger Trains, Dummy •
Vehicle . . . . . 1 4 9
L. & S.W. Stock Out of Gauge . 8 0
L. & Y. Bogie Stock Working to N.E.
Line . . . . . 7 8
L. & Y. Passenger Stock out of Gauge 78-9
Lavatory Compartments, Guard to see
Cleaned . . . . 1 5 0
Leasingthorne-Chilton Crossing line 278-9-285-6
Leeds and Neville Hill, Empty trains 2 1 6
Leeds East and Waterloo Junction—
Coupling of Engines • . . 2 1 7
Leeds' G.N., G.C., and L. & N.W.
Coal Trains . . . . 2 1 8
Leeds—Neville Sidings and Hunslet
Goods Yard . . . . 2 1 7
Leeds New Station Canal and West
Boxes . . . . . 2 1 6
Leeds—Wagons for Marsh Lane . 2 1 6 .
Leeds—Transfer of Vehicles . . 2 1 8
Leeds—Up Reception line, Castleton
Bridge . . . . 2 1 0
Leeds—East and West Boxes . 2 1 0
Lemington Point—Newburn Station
line. . . . . . 2 8 1
Level Crossing at Stations—Stopping
of Trains. . . 1 2 3
Level Crossing—Cyclists . . . 8 6
Level Crossing Gates, Ground Frames
where Gongs . . . . 9 0
Level Crossing Gates, Lamps burning 8 5
Level Crossing Gates—Rule 118 . 86-90
Lever Clips—Rule 55 . . . 4 1
Lighting of signal lamps at boxes
switched out . . . . 5 8
Limitations, Speed . . . 105-110
Limits—Station . . . . 163-5
Lines Blocked—Edinburgh and Newcastle
. . . . . 7 7
Lingdale Branch Junction—Kilton
Mines line . . . . 2 8 0
Lingdale Branch Junction—Lingdale
Mines line . . . . 2 8 1
Lingdale Branch Junct.L-Kiltonthorpe
Junction line . . . 2 8 0
Linton Colliery—Hirst Junction line 2 9 2
Lintz Green—Lanchester Station . 265-6
Lintz Green—Footpath Level Crossing
near South Garesfield Colliery . 1 9 4
V.

vi•
List of Single Lines •
Liverton Mines Branch • •
Live Stock by Goods Trains • •
Live Stock, Drovers, etc., in charge of
Live stock for roadside stations by
night • • • • •
Loading showman's vans and rounda-bout
traffic •
Locking of Carriage Doors • •
Locomotives, Articles falling from •
Locomotives, Private Owners •
Loftus—Liverton Mines lines •
Longacres Mines—Trains calling at
Look out kept by Guards • •
M
.
Mail Vans, NE and Foreign Co•'s • 81-2
Manors—Quayside Tunnel 6 9 - 1 8 8
Main Malton—Driffield Line Trains' line Diversion • of 2 . 6 76 6
Mal•on—Pilmoor line • 2 7 0
Marshall Green Siding .
Market Weighton—Driffield
• • 2 7 7
- Market line Weighton-Engines .
taking water 2 1 2
Marsh Lane, Wagons for • • 2 1 6
2Masham 6 and 6Ripon,
Excursion trains 2 1 9
Melmerby—Masharn line • 2 6 7
Merrybent Branch • • • • 2 8 1
Micklefield—Peckfield Colliery Sidings . 223
Middlesbrough District Headlights • 95-8
Middlesbrough Goods—Acklam Bank
, Head line • • • • 281-8
Middleton-in-Teesdale—Tees Valley Jet. 259
Midland Co.'s Stock to N.E. System 8 3
Mineral Trains, Passengers by. • 2 7
Modified Block Regulations, where in
operation. • • • • 237-240
Monkseaton—Hartley line • • 2 6 3
Monkwearmouth, Hylton—Southwick
line • , • • . • 280-7-8
Morpeth—Choppington line • , 2 6 7
Morpeth (Wansbeek Branch Platform
line . • • • •
Morrison's Sidings, St. Peters •
Movement of barrows at stations •
Murton—Durham (Elvet) line .
N.
Netherton Colliery Sidings—Choppington
Junction line •
Netherton—Hepscott line • •
Nevile Hilll and Leeds, Empty trains
Neville Hill, Wtrking between Hunslet
and • • • •
Newbiggin—Woodhorn line • •
Newborn Station—Lemington Point
line • • • • •
Newcastle and Gateshead Sheds,
Engines between • • •
Newcastle to York Vacuum Stock •
Newcastle Central—Empty trains from
Elswick • • •
INDEX.—COntinUed.
PAGES.
256-294
281
178
27
178-9
168
151
102
69
281
206
153
267
190
27
267
2,81
287
216
217
275
281
193
193
192
PAGES.
Newcastle, Engines and empty trains
from Heaton Sheds • • 1 9 1
Newcastle Goods lines, Coaching stock 8 1 :
Newcastle—G. & M. Trains between
Forth Junction and No. 3 • ' 1.93-
Newcastle Quayside • ' • 2 8 1
Newsham—Isabella Colliery • 2 8 0
,Newsham—Plessey Road Level
Crossing 1 8 8
Nidd Valley Light Rly•—N.E• Stock 9
2Nidd 1 Valley Light Railway, Vehicles
to N.E. Railway and vice versa 2 2 1
Nimmos' Branch, Wellfield Junction 2 8 1
Nomenclature of Signals • 4 0 0
Non-attention of Signal Boxes 5 9 '
Normanby Branch • •
N.B. Stock Out of Gauge
•
7
2 8
9
1
'
Northallerton—Hawes line • • 268-9
Northallerton, Shunting trains at Low
Junction • • ' • • 2 0 9
Nunthorpe Jet.—Battersby line 2 6 9 -
0.
Obstructions close to Lines •
Officers' Specials • • . .
One engine in steam, Regulations .
Outer Home Signals . • •
Out of Gauge, L. & Y. stock -. .
Out of Gauge Loads, Regulations •
Out of Gauge. G.W. stock •
Out of Gauge, N.B. Stock •
Out of Gauge, L. & S.W. Stock
P.
187
179-
9-10-
251-55
, 78-9
, 1,3
79-g0
, 79-
80.
Page Bank Colliery line • • • 281,-8-9'
Painters and Repairers, Vans and
Carriages • • • • • 172
Parkhead,
.
Waskerley and Burnhill
Junction line • 2 7 9 '
Park Pit—Skelton line . • • 2 8 1
Passengers by Goods, etc., trains • 2 7
Passenger Compartments' next engine 149
, Passenger trains on Goods lines , 1 0
Passenger trains stopping to pick up
or set down passengers • • 6 0 -
Pateley Bridge—Ripley Junction line 2 7 1
Pateley Bridge, Transfer of vehicles,
Nidd Valley Light Railway • 2 2 1
Peckfield Colliery Sidin
g
Pelaw and Gateshead, Goods and
Mineral trains • • 1 9 6 - 7
s, Pelton Colliery Branch • 2 8 1
MPercy i c Main—Mineral k l e f i e l d trains at Tyne
Commissioners' Staiths •• • 189
2
Persons
2
riding
3
on engines
,
-Pesspool
Branch • •
Pickering—Gilling line •
Pickering—Seamr line • .
Pickering—Whitby line • •
Pilmoor,—Knaresborough line
Pilmoor—Malton line .
Pilot engines drawing trains •
27
293-4
263
272
270
,269
,279'
117-20,,

Pilotman, Double Line working after
Single Line working • •
Pilotman, Working single lines •
Pilotmen, Duties of engine • •
Piped only Vehicles, Distinguishing of
Platelayers' Trolleys—Tunnels •
Plenmeller Colliery • •
Plessey Road Level Crossing, Newsham
Pocklington—West Green Crossing
Points, Catch • • •
•Ponteland—Coxiodge line •
Port Clarence Station • •
Pottery Street Crossing—Whitwood
Junction line
Priestman's Siding Wearmouth
Colliery line •
•Private Owner's Stock, Speed of •
Private Owners' Engines working on
N.E. line. • , • •
Private Owners' Engines, Conveyance
Propelling trains • • • •
Push buttons • •
Q
• •
Quayside Tunnel, Manors
R.
Races, etc., Advice of •
'Raisby Hill Quarries • •
Ravenscar, Station' Siding •
Ravenscar, Whittaker's Siding
, Recording Block Instruments • •
Redear Station, Excursion and Platform
lines - • • • •
Regulations for working Goods lines.
Relief Sidings • •
Reporting of Accidents • •
Reporting of Accidents to dutiable
g
Re-railing o of Bogie Vehicles • •
Restrictions of Joint and N.E. Corridor
oVestibule
Stock • • •
Restrictions d for Coaching Stock on
s
Goods Lines, Newcastle • •
Restriction of Engines • • •
Restrictions • for Midland Stock •
Restrictions • for Passenger Stock •
Resumption • of Double Line working.
Ripley Junet. & Pateley Bridge line.
Ripon • and Masham Branch • •
Riverside Quay line, Hull • •
Riverside Quay, Hull, Working trains
Rolling Stock, Damage • • •
Rolling Stock, Foreign Companies and
• Private Owners, Speed of.•
Rolling Stock, Speed of • •
INDEX.--COntinUed.
PAGES.
185-6
11-12
102
126
187
191-2
188
'213
180-3
261
271
28'2-292
'280-7
148
70-1
153-163
53-4
• 188-'281
57
198
'211
211
226-233
271
14-16
166
84-5
180
72.
77-8
• 81
111-12
83
80
18,5-6
271
219
264
2.25
60-65
148
• 145-8
• 7 1 - 2
207-8-9
Ropes, Standard, Shunting •
Roseberrv Mines Siding •
Rosedale Branch line • • • 278-9
Rosedale Branch Tail Signal • • 9 9
, Roundabout traffic and Showmen's
Vans, Loading of •
Running Lines, Trains on
•
.
1
.
6
9
8
9
Running round Goods train to remove
it from Running Line • 25-6
Ryhope—Passenger trains down
Seaton Bank • 1 9 8
69
S.
vii.
PAGES.
Saltburn Junction, Loop line . • 2 0 7
Scarborough Station, No. 1 Excursion
and Middle line • 2 7 1
Scarborough—Whitby line • 2 7 1 - 2
Scotch Isle Sidings • • • 2 0 1
Scotswood Bridge Junction, B.T.R. 5 1 9 5
Seamer—Hull line • • 2 6 4
Seamer—Pickering line . 2 7 2
Seaton Snook line • • • 2 8 1
Sections over 400 yards, B.T.R. 4 (c). 2 4 4
Sections under 400 yards, B•T•R• 4
(a) and (c) • • • • 241-2
Sections worked by Recording Instruments
• • • . • 226-233
Section Clear to Home Signal only. 2 4
Securing barrows when not in use . 5 8
Seghill Station Platform line • • 2 7 3
Selby—Cawood line • 2 7 2
Selby—Goole line • • • 272-3
Selby 'Up Goods Independent • 2 1 5
Selby and Gascoigne Wood—Coupling
Engines • • . • • 2 1 5
Servants not to place themselves in
danger • • • . 3 4
Sheet Strings, Tying of • • 1 2 8
Sheetmen, Collecting Sheets • • 7 1
Sherburn Colliery Junction—Broomside
Junction line . • • 293-4
Sherburn-in-Elmet Occupation Crosse. 2 2 3
Shildon Lodge Colliery Branch • 281-290
Shildon Tunnel . . • • 201-3
Shotton Colliery Jet.—Colliery Sdgs. 2 8 1
Showmen's Traffic and Round-a-bout
traffic, Loading of • • 1 6 8
Showmen's Vans, Trains for • • 1 4 4
Shows, etc., Station Masters to advise 5 7
Shunting, Code of signals • • 4 0
Shunting of Autocars at Stations • 1 0 6
Shunting of trains, Arthington • 2 2 1
Shunting of Trains • • . 152-1136
Shunting Poles • • • 3 4
Shunting Ropes, Standard • • 71-2
Side and Centre Chains on Wagons 1 7 1
Side lamps on Autocars • • • 1 0 2
Side Lamps on G.C. and G.E. Passenger
trains • • • • 9 9
Side Lights of Trains on Independents 9 9
Sidings, Relief • • • • 1 6 0
Sidings situate between Stations • 1 7 0
Sidings worked by Ground Frames • 102-3
Signal boxes, Boards outside • • 2 4
Signal Boxes switched out • . . 5 8
Signal boxes where lads are employed - 5 4
Signal Whistles Standard 'Code • 103-4
Signalling of Engineer's Trains • 1 0 3
Signalling of Engines with Tender
attached • • • • . •
Signalling of engines running round
trains • • • • .
Signalling of Stock Specials, etc. .
Signals not in use • •
Signals. Fog • •• •
Signal, Tram Following • . •
Signals, Backing • • .
178
100
128
25
2.5
100
40

viii. INDEX.--COntinUed.
Signals near to one box worked from
another . • • • •
Signals, Nomenclature of •
Signals, Defective • .
Silksworth Colliery line • •
PAGES.
35-40
40
25
281
Single lines • • • • • 256-294
. Single lines—Working by Pilotman • 11-12
" —Train Staff and Ticket 3-8-278-9
Pg —One Engine in steam • 9-10
, —Working during
obstruction 2 6
Skelton—Park Pit line • • • 2 8 1
Skinningrove—Carlin How line • 281-3-4
Slaggyford, Barhaugh Colliery • 1 9 0
Slip Carriages. Foreign Companies' • 100-2
Smoking in First Class Compartments
in Autoears • • • 1 7 0
Snowstorms, Autocars during • • 1 3 1
Snowstorms, Blockage of line • . 5 6
Snow storms, Working between Bowes
and Belah • • • • • 2 0 0
South Benwell—Mineral trains calling 1 9 2
South Blyth Staiths • • • 281-290
Sunderland, Guards working trains to
Sunderland, Trains assisted from •
Sunderland. Vehicles on Excursions.
Sunderland—Calling on Arms •
Sunniside—Tow Law line • •
Swalwell Colliery—Derwenthaugh line
Switch—Omission to turn •
T.
PAGES.
197
198
197
198
282
282'
59
Tablets—Exchanging of • 2 2 - 2 3
Tadcaster, Ingleby's Mill 2 2 a
Tail Lamps • • • 9 9
,Tail Lamps of G.C. and G.E. Passenger
trains • • • • 9 9 '
Tail Lamps on Trains, Independents 9 9
,
Tanfield Branch • • • 282-290
,Tanfield Lea—Bowes Bridge line • 282-290'
Tank Wagons for Gas Tar, etc. • 1 6 9 '
Tar Works Siding • • • • 1 9 0 '
South .
Gare
Level Crossing • . • 1 9 4
South Hetton Colliery—Pesspool Junc-
sfiel tion line • • • . • 293-4
d South Medomsley Colliery line • 2 8 1
Southwick, Monkwearmouth and
C o
Hylton line • • . . 280-7-8
lSouthwick l i Branch — Double - headed
e r
trains • • • • • 1 9 8
y
Special
,
trains, etc., Advices of • 5 7
Specials, Officers' • • • • 1 7 9
FSpecial
Stops to Passenger Trains • 6 0
oSpeed
of Engines or Engine and Van 1 0 3
Speed of Foreign Companies' and
o tPrivate
Owners' stock . • 1 4 8
pSpeed
of Freight Rolling stock • 145-8
aSpeed t Limitations • • • • 105-110
Speed of trains, Dock Lines Hull • 1 1 0
hSpeed
of Trains changing Staff, etc. 2 2
Spennymoor—Page Bank Branch • 281-8-9
Spennymoor Platform line • • 2 7 3
Starting or Advanced Starting 24
Signals • • • • •
St. Peters—Morrison's Sidings • 1 9 0
Staff and Ticket, Lines worked by 3-8-278-9
Staff Exchanging—Speed . • 2 2
Staithes Viaduct • • • • 204-5
Stanghow Junction—Mines • • 2 8 2
Starting Signals, Detention at. • 40-54
Station, etc., Fires at • • • 184-5-7
Station Limits • . • • 163-5
Stobswood Colliery—Widdrington
Station line 282
Stopping of Trains at Stations where
Level Crossings • • •
123
28'2
Stoneferry Junet. and Goods Station 293
Stooperdale and Charity Junction line 60
Stops, Special • • • •
Stores Vans, Conveyance by Freight
Trains • • • • • 17'2
Stores Vans, Propelling •
163
56
Storms, Snow • • •
1'28
Strings, Sheet, Tying of
Tebay—Darlington line • • • 261-2:
Tees Breakwater—Tod Point line • 282-90
Tees Valley Junction—MiddletorOn-
Teesdale line • • • • 2 5 0 '
Terminal Stations, Exceptions from
Block • • •
234-6;
Testinr Tlairsk South Junction—
,"
Thirsk Town Station 282-291
Thrislington Coke Ovens—Ferryhill
Bra
280
kThrockley e s Colliery line
28t:
bTimber
wagons • •
168,
Tod Point—Tees Breakwater line 28'2-291
y Tow Law—Sunniside line •
282:
GTow
Law-Crook. Freight trains 200
u
Towroping and Chaining.•
,
Track Circuits • • •
aTraction
Engines—Crossing railway •
rTrain
Following Signal • •
Trains, Main Line. Diversion of •
dTrains
diverted via H.L. Bridge •
s Trains, East Coast—Diversion of •
• Trains drawn by Pilot Engine •
Trains, Examination of • •
• Trains or engines coupled •
1Trains
on Ripon and Masham Branch
2
Trains, Placing outside Home Signal
Trains, Propelling of • • •
7
Trains, Shunting Special, Advices of • • of • • •
Trains, Vacuum fitted and loosely
coupled • • • • •
Trains, Vehicles in rear of • •
Trains, where not to be coupled •
Trains, where run without Van in rear
Trains, Working between two boxes
Trimdon Colliery line • • •
Tunnels, Trolleys, Passing through
Tursdale Colliery—Cornforth Laneline
Tweedmouth Dock Line • •
Tweedmouth Down Platform line •
Tynemouth Tunnel.• • •
71
43-52'
90.
100.
76.
764
77
117-1'20
, 60.
122-4
219
167-8.
153-163;
152-166
, 57
123:
131-141
120-122
174-7
179
,282
187
280.
282.
273
189.
U.
Upleatham Junction and Mines line 2 8 2
Usworth Colliery line • • 2 8 2 .

V.
Vacuum brake, Companies using
Vacuum fitted and loosely coupled
trains
Vacuum fitted vehicles on empty
trains, Newcastle to York
Vans, Breakdown
Vans clearing at Terminal Stations
Vans, Excursion trains
Vans, Mail
Vans on Braked Freight trains
Vans, Repairers, Painters, etc.
Vehicles, Four
, aG.C. n d Passenger trains
Vehicles in rear of Passenger train
Vehicles, s i x - Placing outside Home signal
Vehicles, w h e eMovement l of
Vehicles
e d
to detach, Stations to be
advised
Vestibule o Connection, British Standard
Vestibules, n Pullman
Vigo, Bank, Trains up
W.
Wagon and Carriage Examiners
Wagon Brake Pins, Third rail
Wagon Doors, Fastening of
Wagons, Buffers 1 ft. 81 ins. projection
Wagons—Coupling large to small
Wagons, Coupling to engines
Wagons, Covered on Goods trains.
Wagons, Crane Tail
Wagons, Damage to
Wagons. Double Bolster Timber
Wagons—Doul le coupling of
Wagons, Speed of
Washington Colliery line.
Waskerley—Burnhill Junction line
Waterhouses—Durham line
Waterhouses--Hedley Hill Cony. line
INDEX—Continued. i x .
PAGES.
120
123
193
72-5
152
151
81-2
174
172
149
131-144
167-8
71
168
.2,8-29
29-30
194
62-5
174
174
32
34
33
170
146
165-6
168
34
145-8
282
279
273
282
Waterloo and Leeds East—Coupling
of Engines . . . .
Wearmouth Colliery--Priestman's
PAGES.
217
Siding line 280-7-8-
Wearmouth Dock Incline . . 1 9 7
Wear Valley Junction—Wearhead line 273-4
Weatherhill—Burnhill Junction line. 2 7 9 .
Westgate—Coronation Siding . . 2 7 7
Westinghouse Brake—Companies using 126-
Westinghouse Pipe—Vehicles fitted
with . . . . . 1 2 9
Westinghouse Short Brake Pipes 5 7 - 8 -
West Sleekburn—Colliery Fne . 2 8 2
Wharram Quarry Siding . . 2 1 1
Wheatley Hill Colliery line . 2 8 2
Whistles, Signal, Standard Code . 1 0 3
Whitby Branches—Engines & Vehicles 212-3.
Whitby—Carlin How Junction line . 2 7 5
Whitby—Pickering line . . 2 7 0 ,
Whitby—Scarborough liin . . 271-2
Whitburn Jet.—Garden Lane Jet. line 2 9 2
Whittaker's Siding, Ravenscar 2 1 1
Whitwood Branch . . . 282-292
Widdrington Colliery line .
Widdrington Station—Stobswood
2 8 2
Colliery toe 2 8 2
Willington—Bowden Close Colliery . 2 0 1
Wilmington—Trains from Drypool . 2 2 5 .
Windows of Guards' Compartments, 5 8 -
Wingate Colliery line . • 2 9 3
Wingate Limestone Quarry—
Deaf Hill Colliery line 2 8 0
Withernsea—Hull line . . 2 6 4
Wolsingham, Scotch Isle. . -
2Woodhom—Newbiggin 0 1
line .
Wrong Line Order Forms .
2 7 5
. 1 7 9
Wynns Quarry—Great Ayton line . 280
,
Y.
York, Foss Islands Branch • 282-292
York Station, No. 14 Platform line 2 7 5